CENTUM - VP Function Blocks Reference Vol1 PDF

Function Blocks
Reference Vol.1
IM 33K03E22-50E
IM 33K03E22-50E
5th Edition
i
Introduction
The integrated production control system CENTUM VP is the products of distributed control
system (DCS) for large and medium-small scale process control.
This manual is written for use as a part of reference manual describing the functional details
of CENTUM VP. This manual focuses on the function block details. You can read the required
chapters when you need the details of function blocks.
In this manual, FFCS, FFCS-L and FFCS-V are all referred to as FFCS series. If the individual
types of FCS need to be particularly mentioned, the FCSs may be described respectively with
their particular types.
This manual consists of the following chapters:
Chapter 1 Regulatory Control
This chapter describes the detailed descriptions on all the regulatory control blocks ex-
cept the FOUNDATION fieldbus faceplate blocks.
Media No. IM 33K03E22-50E (DVD) 5th Edition : Aug. 2014 (YK) IM 33K03E22-50E 5th Edition : Aug.08,2014-00
All Rights Reserved Copyright 2011, Yokogawa Electric Corporation
ii
CENTUM VP Document Map

Installation
CENTUM VP License CENTUM VP
Installation Management Security Guide
IM 33K01C10-50E IM 33K01C20-50E IM 33K01C30-50E
Engineering
Field Control Stations Function Blocks Function Blocks Function Blocks

Reference Overview Reference Vol.1 Reference Vol.2
IM 33K03E10-50E IM 33K03E21-50E IM 33K03E22-50E IM 33K03E23-50E
Function Blocks Human Interface Human Interface Engineering

Reference Vol. 3 Stations Reference Vol. 1 Stations Reference Vol. 2 Reference Vol. 1
IM 33K03E24-50E IM 33K03F21-50E IM 33K03F22-50E IM 33K03G21-50E
Consolidated Alarm
Engineering Engineering Management Software Batch Management
Reference Vol. 2 Reference Vol. 3 Reference System Reference
IM 33K03G22-50E IM 33K03G23-50E IM 33K03H20-50E IM 33K03J10-50E
SEBOL Communication with Communication with Communication

Reference Subsystems Using RIO Subsystems Using FIO Devices Reference
IM 33K03K10-50E IM 33K03L10-50E IM 33K03L20-50E IM 33K03M10-50E
Optional Functions Communication with Compliance with Generic Subsystem

Reference PROFIBUS Systems FDA: 21CFR Part 11 Gateway Reference
IM 33K03N10-50E IM 33K03P10-50E IM 33K03Q10-50E IM 33K03R10-50E
System Integration Unified Gateway Engineering Test

OPC Station Reference Station Reference Vnet/IP Guide
IM 33K03R20-50E IM 33K03R30-50E IM 33K10A10-50E IM 33K10H20-50E
Engineering CENTUM FOUNDATION fieldbus

Tutorial APCS Data Access Library Reference
IM 33K02E10-50E IM 33K15U10-50E IM 33K15P10-50E IM 33K20T10-50E
FOUNDATION fieldbus
Engineering Guide
IM 33K20T20-50E
Operation and Monitoring
HIS Operation Operating Messages
IM 33K02D10-50E IM 33K02D20-50E
Hardware
Turbomachinery
Peripherals Field Control Stations Input & Output Modules I/O Modules
IM 33K50C10-50E IM 33K50E40-50E IM 33K50G10-50E IM 33K10U10-50E
Communication Devices Migrated-FCS(FIO)
IM 33K50D10-50E IM 33K55W10-50E
IM 33K03E22-50E 5th Edition : Aug.08,2014-00

iii
Safety Precautions for Use

n Safety, Protection, and Modification of the Product
To protect the system controlled by the Product and the Product itself and to ensure safe
operation, please observe the safety precautions described in this Manual. Yokogawa
Electric Corporation ("YOKOGAWA") assumes no liability for safety if users fail to observe
the safety precautions and instructions when operating the Product.
If the Product is used in a manner not specified in the User's Manuals, the protection pro-
vided by the Product may be impaired.
If any protection or safety circuit is required for the system controlled by the Product or for
the Product itself, please install it externally.
Use only spare parts that are approved by YOKOGAWA when replacing parts or consum-
ables of the Product.
Do not use the Product and its accessories such as power cords on devices that are not
approved by YOKOGAWA. Do not use the Product and its accessories for any purpose
other than as intended by YOKOGAWA.
Modification of the Product is strictly prohibited.
The following symbols are used in the Product and User's Manuals to indicate the accom-
panying safety precautions:
Indicates that caution is required for operation. This symbol is labeled on the Prod-
uct to refer the user to the User's Manuals for necessary actions or behaviors in
order to protect the operator and the equipment against dangers such as electrical
shocks. In the User's Manuals, you will find the precautions necessary to prevent
physical injury or death, which may be caused by accidents, such as electrical
shocks resulting from operational mistakes.
Identifies a protective conductor terminal. Before using the Product, you must
ground the protective conductor terminal to avoid electric shock.
Identifies a functional grounding terminal. A terminal marked "FG" also has the
same function. This terminal is used for grounding other than protective grounding.
Before using the Product, you must ground this terminal.
Indicates an AC supply.
Indicates a DC supply.
Indicates the ON position of a power on/off switch.
Indicates the OFF position of a power on/off switch.
n Notes on Handling User's Manuals

Hand over the User's Manuals to your end users so that they can keep the User's Man-
uals on hand for convenient reference.
Thoroughly read and understand the information in the User's Manuals before using the
Product.
For the avoidance of doubt, the purpose of the User's Manuals is not to warrant that the
Product is suitable for any particular purpose but to describe the functional details of the
Product.
Contents of the User's Manuals are subject to change without notice.
Every effort has been made in the preparation of the User's Manuals to ensure the accu-
racy of their contents. However, should you have any questions or find any errors, contact

iv
us or your local distributor. The User's Manuals with incorrectly ordered pages or missing
pages will be replaced.
n Warning and Disclaimer

Except as specified in the warranty terms, YOKOGAWA shall not provide any warranty for
the Product.
YOKOGAWA shall not be liable for any indirect or consequential loss incurred by either
using or not being able to use the Product.
n Notes on Software
YOKOGAWA makes no warranties, either expressed or implied, with respect to the Soft-
ware Product's merchantability or suitability for any particular purpose, except as speci-
fied in the warranty terms.
Please purchase the appropriate number of licenses of the Software Product according to
the number of computers to be used.
No copy of the Software Product may be made for any purpose other than backup; other-
wise, it is deemed as an infringement of YOKOGAWA's Intellectual Property rights.
Keep the software medium of the Software Product in a safe place.
No reverse engineering, reverse compiling, reverse assembling, or converting the Soft-
ware Product to human-readable format may be performed for the Software Product.
No part of the Software Product may be transferred, converted, or sublet for use by any
third-party, without prior written consent from YOKOGAWA.

v
Documentation Conventions
n Symbol Marks
The following symbols are used throughout the User's Manuals.
Identifies instructions that must be observed to avoid physical
injury, electric shock, or death.
Identifies instructions that must be observed to prevent dam-

ages to the software or hardware, or system failures of the
Product.
Identifies important information required to understand opera-
tions or functions.
Identifies additional information.
Identifies referenced content.

In the online manuals, clicking on the reference link shown in
green displays the referenced content. This action does not ap-
ply to the reference link shown in black.
n Typographical Conventions
The following typographical conventions are used throughout the User's Manuals.
l Commonly Used Conventions throughout the User's Manuals

Character string to be entered
The characters that must be entered are shown in monospace font as follows:
Example:
FIC100.SV=50.0
Mark
This symbol indicates the description for an item for which you should make a setting in
the product's engineering window.
While operating an engineering window, the help information for the selected item can be
accessed from "Builder Definition Items" in the Help menu. Listing more than one defini-
tion item after this symbol implies that the paragraph on the page describes more than
one definition items.
Example:
Tag Name, Station Name
Mark
Indicates that a space must be entered between character strings.
Example:
.ALPIC010-SC
Character string enclosed by braces { }
Indicates character strings that may be omitted.
Example:
.PRTAG{.sheet name}

vi
l Conventions Used to Show Key or Button Operations

Characters enclosed by brackets [ ]
When characters are enclosed by brackets in the description of a key or button operation,
it indicates a key on the keyboard, a key on the operation keyboard, a button name in a
window, or an item in a list box displayed in a window.
Example:
To alter the function, press the [ESC] key.
l Conventions Used in Command Syntax or Program Statements

The following conventions are used within a command syntax or program statement format:
Characters enclosed by angle brackets < >
Indicate character strings that user can specify freely according to certain guidelines.
Example:
#define <Identifier> <Character string>
"..." Mark
Indicates previous command or argument that may be repeated.
Example:
Imax (arg1, arg2, ...)
Characters enclosed by brackets [ ]
Indicate character strings that may be omitted.
Example:
sysalarm <format character string> [, <output value>]
Characters enclosed by separators | |
Indicates character strings that can be selected from more than one option.
Example:
opeguide <format character string> [, <output value>...]
OG, <element number>
n Drawing Conventions
Drawings used in the User's Manuals may be partially emphasized or simplified for conven-
ience of description, so that the unnecessary parts are omitted from the drawings.
Drawings of the window may be slightly different from the actual screen shots with different
settings or fonts; the difference is not extended to the range that may hamper the understand-
ing of basic functionalities and operation and monitoring tasks.

vii
Copyright and Trademark Notices

n All Rights Reserved
The copyright of the programs and online manuals contained in the software medium of the
Software Product shall remain in YOKOGAWA.
You are allowed to print the required pages of the online manuals for the purposes of using or
operating the Product; however, reprinting or reproducing the entire document is strictly pro-
hibited by the Copyright Law.
Except as stated above, no part of the online manuals may be reproduced, transferred, sold,
or distributed to a third party in any manner (either in electronic or written form including, with-
out limitation, in the forms of paper documents, electronic media, and transmission via the
network). Nor it may be registered or recorded in the media such as films without permission.
n Trademark Acknowledgements
CENTUM, ProSafe, Vnet/IP, PRM, Exaopc, and STARDOM are registered trademarks of
YOKOGAWA.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows Vista, Windows Server, Visual Basic, Visual C++, and Vis-
ual Studio are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and other countries.
Adobe, Acrobat, and Adobe Reader are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incor-
porated.
Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation.
EtherNet/IP is a trademark of the Open DeviceNet Vendor Association (ODVA).
in fieldbus is a registered trademark of Fieldbus Foundation.
HART is a registered trademark of the HART Communication Foundation.
Java is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation.
MELSEC is a registered trademark of Mitsubishi Electric Corporation.
Memocon-SC is a registered trademark of Yaskawa Electric Corporation.
Modicon and Modbus are registered trademarks of Schneider Electric SA.
PROFIBUS is a registered trademark of the PROFIBUS User Organization.
SIEMENS and SIMATIC are registered trademarks of Siemens Industrial Automation Ltd.
SmartPlant is a registered trademark of Intergraph Corporation.
SYSMAC is a registered trademark of OMRON Corporation.
All other company and product names mentioned in the User's Manuals are trademarks
or registered trademarks of their respective companies.
We do not use TM or mark to indicate those trademarks or registered trademarks in the
User's Manuals.
We do not use logos in the User's Manuals.

Blank Page
Toc-1
Function Blocks Reference Vol.1
IM 33K03E22-50E 5th Edition
CONTENTS
1. Regulatory Control............................................................................... 1-1
1.1 Regulatory Control Blocks.......................................................................... 1-2
1.1.1 Types of the Regulatory Control Blocks......................................... 1-4
1.1.2 I/O Data Handled by the Regulatory Control Blocks...................... 1-8
1.1.3 Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm Processing
Possible for Each Regulatory Control Block.................................1-12
1.1.4 Valid Block Modes for Each Regulatory Control Block................. 1-18
1.2 Input Indicator Block (PVI).........................................................................1-20
1.3 Input Indicator Block with Deviation Alarm (PVI-DV).............................. 1-23
1.4 Control Computation Processing Common to Controller Blocks......... 1-26
1.5 PID Controller Block (PID)......................................................................... 1-49
1.6 Sampling PI Controller Block (PI-HLD).....................................................1-59
1.7 PID Controller Block with Batch Switch (PID-BSW)................................ 1-68
1.8 Two-Position ON/OFF Controller Block (ONOFF), Enhanced Two-Position
ON/OFF Controller Block (ONOFF-E)........................................................1-76
1.9 Three-Position ON/OFF Controller Block (ONOFF-G), Enhanced Three-
Position ON/OFF Controller Block (ONOFF-GE)......................................1-83
1.10 Time-Proportioning ON/OFF Controller Block (PID-TP)..........................1-91
1.11 PD Controller Block with Manual Reset (PD-MR).................................... 1-99
1.12 Blending PI Controller Block (PI-BLEND)...............................................1-106
1.13 Self-Tuning PID Controller Block (PID-STC)...........................................1-116
1.13.1 Control Algorithm of Self-Tuning PID Controller Block (PID-STC)......
................................................................................................... 1-122
1.13.2 Self-Tuning Function (STC Function)......................................... 1-123
1.13.3 Self-Tuning Operating Modes and Block Status.........................1-125
1.13.4 Initializer Start.............................................................................1-130
1.13.5 Auto-Startup............................................................................... 1-131
1.13.6 On-Demand Tuning.................................................................... 1-135
1.13.7 Tuning Parameters of Self-Tuning PID Controller Block (PID-STC)....
................................................................................................... 1-137
1.13.8 Points of Using Self-Tuning PID Controller Block (PID-STC).....1-146
1.14 Manual Loader Block (MLD).................................................................... 1-154
1.15 Manual Loader Block with Input Indicator (MLD-PVI)........................... 1-156
1.16 Manual Loader Block with Auto/Man SW (MLD-SW)............................. 1-159
1.17 Motor Control Blocks (MC-2, MC-2E, MC-3, and MC-3E)...................... 1-169

Toc-2
1.17.1 Input Processing of Motor Control Block (MC-2, MC-2E, MC-3, and
MC-3E)....................................................................................... 1-177
1.17.2 Control Computation Processing of Motor Control Blocks (MC-2,
MC-2E, MC-3, and MC-3E)........................................................ 1-181
1.17.3 Output Processing of Motor Control Blocks (MC-2, MC-2E, MC-3,
and MC-3E)................................................................................ 1-191
1.17.4 Alarm Processing of Motor Control Blocks (MC-2, MC-2E, MC-3,
and MC-3E)................................................................................ 1-207
1.18 Ratio Set Block (RATIO)........................................................................... 1-210
1.19 13-Zone Program Set Block (PG-L13).....................................................1-224
1.20 Totalizing Batch Set Blocks (BSETU-2, BSETU-3).................................1-234
1.20.1 Input Processing of Totalizing Batch Set Blocks (BSETU-2,
BSETU-3)................................................................................... 1-235
1.20.2 Control Algorithm of Totalizing Batch Set Blocks (BSETU-2,
BSETU-3)................................................................................... 1-236
1.20.3 Output Processing of Totalizing Batch Set Blocks (BSETU-2,
BSETU-3)................................................................................... 1-253
1.20.4 Alarm Processing of Totalizing Batch Set Blocks (BSETU-2,
BSETU-3)................................................................................... 1-257
1.20.5 Compatibility between Totalizing Batch Set Block and CENTUM V,
CENTUM-XL Totalizing Batch Set Unit...................................... 1-260
1.21 Flow-Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSETU-2)...........................................1-265
1.22 Weight-Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSETU-3)....................................... 1-275
1.22.1 Input Signal Conversion of Weight-Totalizing Batch Set Block
(BSETU-3)..................................................................................1-281
1.22.2 Alarm Processing of Weight-Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSETU-3)...
................................................................................................... 1-284
1.23 Velocity Limiter Block (VELLIM)..............................................................1-287
1.24 Signal Selector Blocks (SS-H/M/L)..........................................................1-301
1.25 Auto-Selector Blocks (AS-H/M/L)............................................................ 1-307
1.26 Dual-Redundant Signal Selector Block (SS-DUAL)...............................1-316
1.27 Cascade Signal Distributor Block (FOUT)..............................................1-321
1.28 Feedforward Signal Summing Block (FFSUM)...................................... 1-327
1.29 Non-Interference Control Output Block (XCPL).....................................1-340
1.30 Control Signal Splitter Block (SPLIT)..................................................... 1-349
1.31 Representative Alarm Block (ALM-R)..................................................... 1-360
1.32 Pulse Count Input Block (PTC)................................................................1-367
1.33 Control Operations of YS Blocks............................................................ 1-373
1.33.1 Applying YS Blocks.................................................................... 1-374
1.33.2 Common Specification of YS Blocks.......................................... 1-375
1.34 YS Controller Block (SLCD).....................................................................1-385
1.35 YS Programmable Controller Block (SLPC)...........................................1-389
1.36 YS Programmable Controller Block with Pulse Width Output (SLMC).........
....................................................................................................................1-393
1.37 YS Manual Station Block with SV Output (SMST-111)...........................1-397
1.38 YS Manual Station Block with MV Output Lever (SMST-121)............... 1-400

Toc-3
1.39 YS Ratio Set Station Block (SMRT).........................................................1-403
1.40 YS Batch Set Station Block (SBSD)........................................................ 1-408
1.41 YS Batch Controller Block (SLBC).......................................................... 1-411
1.42 YS Blending Controller Block (SLCC).................................................... 1-414
1.43 YS Totalizer Block (STLD)........................................................................1-418

Blank Page
<1. Regulatory Control> 1-1
1. Regulatory Control
The regulatory control performs control computation processing using analog process values
for process monitor and process control. The function blocks that provide the regulatory con-
trol function are referred as regulatory control blocks.
This chapter presents a detailed description of the function of each of the regulatory control
blocks, excluding the FOUNDATION fieldbus faceplate block.
SEE
ALSO For more information about the FOUNDATION fieldbus faceplate blocks, refer to:
A2, Overview of FF Faceplate Blocks in the FOUNDATION Fieldbus Reference (IM 33K20T10-50E)
n Regulatory Control Positioning

The regulatory control is one of the basic controls in the FCS and performs control computa-
tion processing to monitor and control processes. The function blocks that perform the this
regulatory control are referred as regulatory control blocks.
The regulatory control blocks include Input indication blocks, controller blocks, manual loader
blocks, signal set blocks, signal limiter blocks, Signal selector blocks, signal distribution
blocks, pulse-count blocks, alarm blocks and YS blocks.
The figure below shows the position of the regulatory control function in the basic control ar-
chitecture:
FCS
Basic control Software I/O
Regulatory control blocks Internal switch
Calculation blocks Annunciator message
Sequence control blocks Sequence message
Faceplate blocks
SFC blocks
Unit instrument blocks
Options System (*2)
Valve pattern monitoring (*1) System function blocks
Off-site blocks (*1)
FCS I/O Interfaces
Process I/O Communication I/O / Expanded Communication I/O (*2) Fieldbus I/O
*1: The option can be used in FCSs except PFCS.

*2: The system function blocks and the expanded communication I/Os are available only in FFCS-V.
Figure 1-1 Regulatory Control Block in the Basic Control Function Architecture

<1.1 Regulatory Control Blocks> 1-2
1.1 Regulatory Control Blocks

The regulatory control blocks are the function blocks that perform control computation pro-
cessing mainly on the analog input as input signals. The calculated results are used for proc-
ess monitor and process control.
The regulatory control blocks support the following types of processing: input processing, con-
trol computation processing, output processing and alarm processing.
This section describes the structure and processing of regulatory control blocks.
The characteristics and control computation processing of each regulatory control block, as
well as any input processing, output processing, and alarm processing that are inherent to
particular regulatory control blocks are explained in the sections beginning with 1.2 for each
function block.
SEE
ALSO For more information about the input processing that are common to various types of regulatory control
blocks, refer to:
3, Input Processing in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
For more information about output processing that are common to various types of regulatory control blocks,
refer to:
4, Output Processing in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
For more information about alarm processing that are common to various types of regulatory control blocks,
refer to:
5, Alarm Processing - FCS in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
n Structure of Regulatory Control Blocks

The function blocks that provide the regulatory control function are called regulatory control
blocks.
The regulatory control blocks perform control computation processing mainly on analog sig-
nals (analog values) as input values. The results of control computation processing performed
by the regulatory control blocks are output as manipulated output values (MV).
The figure below shows a function block diagram of a general regulatory control block:
SET BIN RL1 RL2 TIN TSI INT
(VN) (RLV1) (RLV2) (TSW)
Alarm
processing
CAS
CSV
AUT
SV
MAN
RSV
RCAS
MAN
CAS
Control AUT
Input Output
IN RAW PV computation MV OUT
processing processing
processing
ROUT
(PV, PV, MV, MV) RMV
SUB
Figure 1.1-1 Function Block Diagram of the Regulatory Control Block
IN: Input terminal

SET: Setpoint value input terminal
BIN: Compensation input terminal
RLn: Reset signal input terminal
TIN: Tracking signal input terminal
TSI: Tracking switch input terminal
INT: Interlock switch input terminal
SUB: Auxiliary output terminal
OUT: Output terminal
RAW: Raw data input signal
PV: Process variable
SV: Setpoint value
CSV: Cascade setpoint value
RSV: Remote setpoint value
VN: Compensated value Input
RMV: Remote manipulated output value
RLVn: Reset signal
MV: Manipulated output value
TSW: Tracking switch
n Functions of the Regulatory Control Blocks

The regulatory control blocks have the following four processing functions:
l Input Processing
Receives a signal from the input terminal and outputs a process variable (PV).
l Control Computation Processing

Performs control computation processing by reading the process variable (PV) and outputs a
manipulated output value (MV).
l Output Processing
Reads the manipulated output value (MV) and outputs the result of control computation pro-
cessing to the output terminal as an output signal.
l Alarm Processing
Detects an abnormality in the process variable (PV) or manipulated output value (MV) and no-
tifies the operation and monitoring functions.
Control computation processing can be performed independently via data setting or data ref-
erence between the function blocks, without involving input processing or output processing.

1.1.1 Types of the Regulatory Control Blocks

The regulatory control blocks vary by the types of data handled and control computation pro-
cessing functions provided. The blocks are classified into these blocks below.
Input Indicator Blocks
Controller Blocks
Manual Loader Blocks
Signal Setter Blocks
Signal Limiter Blocks
Signal Selector Blocks
Signal Distributor Blocks
Pulse Count Input Block
Alarm Block
YS Blocks
n Input Indicator Blocks

The table below shows a list of input indicator blocks:
Table 1.1.1-1 Input Indicator Blocks

Block type Code Name
PVI Input Indicator Block
Input indicators Input Indicator Block with Devia-
PVI-DV
tion Alarm
n Controller Blocks
The table below shows a list of controller blocks:

Table 1.1.1-2 Controller Blocks
PID PID Controller Block
PI-HLD Sampling PI Controller Block
PID Controller Block with Batch
PID-BSW
Switch
2-Position ON/OFF Controller
ONOFF
Block
Enhanced 2-Position ON/OFF
ONOFF-E
Controller Block (*1)
3-Position ON/OFF Controller
Controllers ONOFF-G
Block
Enhanced 3-Position ON/OFF
ONOFF-GE
Controller Block (*1)
Time-Proportioning ON/OFF Con-
PID-TP
troller Block
PD Controller Block with Manual
PD-MR
Reset
PI-BLEND Blending PI Controller Block
PID-STC Self-Tuning PID Controller Block
*1: This type of function blocks can be applied to all field control stations except standard PFCS.
n Manual Loader Blocks

The table below shows a list of manual loader blocks:
Table 1.1.1-3 Manual Loader Blocks

MLD Manual Loader Block
Manual Loader Block with Input In-
MLD-PVI
dicator
Manual Loader Block with
MLD-SW
Auto/Man Switch
Manual Loader MC-2 2-Position Motor Control Block
Enhanced 2-Position Motor Con-
MC-2E
trol Block (*1)
MC-3 3-Position Motor Control Block
Enhanced 3-Position Motor Con-
MC-3E
trol Block (*1)
*1: This type of function blocks can be applied to all field control stations except standard PFCS.
n Signal Setter Blocks

The table below shows a list of signal setter blocks:

Table 1.1.1-4 Signal Setter Blocks
RATIO Ratio Set Block
PG-L13 13-Zone Program Set Block
Signal Setters
BSETU-2 Flow-Totalizing Batch Set Block
BSETU-3 Weight-Totalizing Batch Set Block
n Signal Limiter Block

The table below shows the signal limiter block:
Table 1.1.1-5 Signal Limiter Block

Signal Limiters VELLIM Velocity Limiter Block
n Signal Selector Blocks

The table below shows a list of Signal selector blocks:
Table 1.1.1-6 Signal Selector Blocks

AS-H/M/L Autoselector Block
SS-H/M/L Signal Selector Block
Signal selectors
Dual-Redundant Signal Selector
SS-DUAL
Block
n Signal Distributor Blocks

The table below shows a list of signal distributor blocks:
Table 1.1.1-7 Signal Distributor Blocks

FOUT Cascade Signal Distributor Block
Feedforward Signal Summing
FFSUM
Block
Signal Distributors
Non-Interference Control Output
XCPL
Block
SPLIT Control Signal Splitter Block
n Alarm Block
The table below shows the alarm block:
Table 1.1.1-8 Alarm Block

Alarm ALM-R Representative Alarm Block
n Pulse Count Input Block

The table below shows the pulse count input connection block:

Table 1.1.1-9 Pulse Count Input Connection Block
Pulse Count Input Connection
PTC Pulse Count Input Block
Block
n YS Blocks
The table below shows the YS blocks:
Table 1.1.1-10 YS Blocks

SLCD YS Controller Block
YS Programmable Controller
SLPC
Block
YS Programmable Controller
SLMC
Block with Pulse-Width Output
YS Manual Station Block with SV
SMST-111
Output
YS instrument YS Manual Station Block with MV
SMST-121
Output Lever
SMRT YS Ratio Set Station Block
SBSD YS Batch Set Station Block
SLCC YS Blending Controller Block
SLBC YS Batch Controller Block
STLD YS Totalizer Block

1.1.2 I/O Data Handled by the Regulatory Control Blocks

As a rule, the data transmitted via I/O terminals handled by the regulatory control blocks must
be the engineering unit data. Each data item consists of data value and data status.
n Data Value
The data value is a numeric data that is transmitted in or out of a function block. The data
values handled by the blocks include process variable (PV), cascade setpoint value (CSV)
and manipulated output value (MV).
The data values handled by the regulatory control blocks are numeric data in engineering
unit. However, the data received from the input modules (excluding the input modules for tem-
perature measurement as well as for pulse trains) and the setpoint data sent to analogue out-
put modules are given as percentage values in the range from 0 % to 100 %.
The data value read into a function block via an input terminal is called input data, while the
value written out of a function block via an output terminal is called output data.
n Data Status
The data status is a piece of status information that indicates the value and quality of I/O data.
The data status is conveyed as I/O data from one function block to another via I/O connection
along with a data value.
The data status is used to test the existence of exceptional events, such as process failures
and computation errors occurred in the control computation processing performed by the
function blocks.
SEE
ALSO For more information about the details of data status, refer to:
6.4, Data Status in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
n Input Data
The input data is numeric data that the function blocks read from input terminals.
The types of input data are shown below:
Process variable (PV)
Setpoint value (SV), cascade setpoint value (CSV), remote setpoint value (RSV)
Input signal values (RV1, RV2, RV3)
Reset limit values (RLV1, RLV2)
Input or Output Compensated value (VN)
Tracking switch (TSW)
l Process Variable (PV)

Process Variable Range
The engineering unit and scale range of raw input signals (RAW) input to an IN terminal agree
with the engineering unit and scale range of data at the connected destination of the IN termi-
nal. A raw input signal turns into a process variable (PV) after input processing.
Use the Function Block Detail Builder to set the engineering unit and scale range. However,
the process variable (PV) of Motor control blocks (MC-2, MC-3) must be an integer value be-
tween 0 and 2.
Engineering unit
Consists of six or less standard-width characters or three double-width characters.

The default is %.
Process variable range
High and low limits.
Numerical values of seven digits or less, where the sign or decimal point takes one digit
each.
The default is 100.0 for the upper limit and 0.0 for the lower limit.
l Setpoint Value (SV), Cascade Setpoint Value (CSV), Remote Setpoint Value
(RSV)
The engineering unit and scale range of the setpoint value (SV), cascade setpoint value
(CSV) and remote setpoint value (RSV) agree with the engineering unit and scale range of
the process variable (PV) except in the function blocks shown below:
Table 1.1.2-1 Engineering Unit Symbol and Scale Range of the Setpoint Value (SV), Cascade Setpoint
Value (CSV) and Remote Setpoint Value (RSV)
Function Blocks Engineering unit symbol and Scale Range
Ratio Set Block (RATIO)
Velocity Limiter Block (VELLIM) Use the Function Block Detail Builder to set the engi-
neering unit symbol and scale range of SV for the
Control Signal Splitter Block (SPLIT) function blocks shown to the left.
Cascade Signal Distributor Block (FOUT) The engineering unit and scale range of CSV and
RSV are same as those of SV. The FOUT and
Feedforward Signal Summing Block (FFSUM) FFSUM blocks have no RSV.
YS Ratio Set Station Block (SMRT)
Motor Control Blocks (MC-2, MC-2E, MC-3, and
MC-3E) The engineering unit symbol and scale range of the
function blocks shown to the left are fixed for each
13-Zone Program Set Block (PG-L13)
block.
Representative Alarm Block (ALM-R)
l Input Signal Values (RV1, RV2, RV3)

The input signal values (RV1, RV2, RV3) are input data handled by the Signal selector blocks.
Use the Function Block Detail Builder to set the engineering unit and scale range of input sig-
nal values. The input signal values (RV1, RV2, RV3) are regarded as having the same engi-
neering unit and scale range as those of the selected signal value (PV).
l Reset Limit Values (RLV1, RLV2)

The reset limit values (RLV1, RLV2) are input data that are handled by a controller block when
the reset limit function is used.
The reset limit values (RLV1, RLV2) are regarded as having the same engineering unit and
scale range as those of the manipulated output value (MV).
l Input or Output Compensated Value (VN)

The engineering unit and scale range are not defined for input compensated values (VN) re-
ceived from the BIN terminal, as the numeric data of input compensated values (VN) taken in
from outside are used directly for input or output compensation computation.
l Tracking Switch (TSW)

The data handled by the tracking switch (TSW) for the TSI terminal must be an integer value
of 0 or 1. 1 and 0 indicate ON and OFF, respectively.

n Output Data
The output data is a numeric data value that is written out of a function block via an output
terminal.
The types of output data are shown below:
Manipulated output value (MV)
Auxiliary output values (PV, PV, MV, MV)
Process variable (PV)
l Manipulated Output Value (MV)

MV Display Style
Use the Function Block Detail Builder to set the display form for the manipulated output value
(MV).
MV Display Style
Select Automatic Determination or User Define.
The default is Automatic Determination.
When Automatic Determination is selected, the engineering unit and scale range of the ma-
nipulated output value (MV) change according to the connected destination of the OUT termi-
nal.
If the connection destination is a process I/O, the scale range and engineering unit of the
manipulated output value (MV) is fixed to 0 to 100 and %, respectively. However, this
rule does not apply if the connection destination is a Fieldbus block.
When outputting to a cascade setpoint value (CSV) in a case where the connection des-
tines to a SET terminal of another function block (cascade connection), the engineering
unit and scale range of the manipulated output value (MV) agree with those of the cas-
cade setpoint value (CSV) of the output destination.
When the connection destination is an input terminal of another function block than SET
terminal, self determination must be selected.
When User Define is selected, set the engineering unit and scale range for the manipulated
output value (MV). The engineering unit and the range should be the same as the output des-
tination.
MV Engineering Unit Symbol
Consists of six or less standard-width characters or three double-width characters.
The default is %.
MV Range
High and low limits.
Numerical values of seven digits or less, where the sign and decimal point occupy one
digit each.
The default is 100.0 for the upper limit and 0.0 for the lower limit.
For MV displayed on an instrument faceplate, set whether to display the engineering unit data
as is or to convert the data into a percentage-unit value first. Use the Function Block Detail
Builder to set the instrument faceplate display.
MV Display on Faceplate
Select Indicate Actual Quantity or Indicate %.
The default is Indicate real amount.

IMPORTANT
Event when the user wants to display the MV in percentage on HIS faceplate, there is no
need to change the setting for [MV Display Style] - [User-Define] to 0 % - 100 %. The setting
in this field should be kept the same as the output destination; but to change the setting [MV
Display on Faceplate] from [Indicate Actual Quantity] to [Indicate %].
l Auxiliary Output Values (PV, PV, MV, MV)

The auxiliary output values include PV, PV, MV and MV, the types vary with the function
block. The engineering unit and scale range of the auxiliary output values change in accord-
ance with the connected destination of the SUB terminal.
If the connected destination is a process I/O, the scale range and engineering unit of the
auxiliary output values are fixed to 0 to 100 and %, respectively. However, this rule
does not apply if the connection destination is a Fieldbus block.
When the connected destination is a function block and auxiliary output is the process
variable (PV) or process variable change (PV), the engineering unit and scale range of
the output value agree with those of the process variable (PV).
When the connected destination is a function block and auxiliary output is the manipu-
lated output value (MV) or manipulated output change (MV), the output value is regar-
ded as having the same engineering unit and scale range as those of the manipulated
output value (MV).
l Process Variable (PV)

The process variable (PV) can be output directly from the input indicator blocks.
The engineering unit and scale information of the process variable (PV) vary with the connec-
ted destination of the OUT terminal.
If the connected destination is a process I/O, the scale range and engineering unit of the
output value are fixed to 0 to 100 and %, respectively. However, this rule does not ap-
ply if the connection destination is a Fieldbus block.
If the connected destination is another function block, the scale range and engineering
unit of the output value agree with those of the process variable.

1.1.3 Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm

Processing Possible for Each Regulatory Control
Block
A list of the types of input processing, output processing, and alarm processing that can be
performed in each regulatory control block is shown below.
n Input Processing Possible for Each Regulatory Control Block

Table 1.1.3-1 Input Processing Possible for Each Regulatory Control Block
Input signal PV overshoot
Model Digital filter (*1) Totalizer (*1) CAL (*1)
conversion (*1) (*1)
PVI
PVI-DV
PID
PI-HLD
PID-BSW
ONOFF
ONOFF-E B/A/R/Pb/Sb/L x x x x
ONOFF-G
ONOFF-GE
PID-TP
PD-MR
PI-BLEND
PID-STC
MLD
MLD-PVI B/A/R/Pb/Sb/L x x x x
MLD-SW
MC-2
MC-2E
S2/S3/L x
MC-3
MC-3E
RATIO (*2) B/A/R/Pb/Sb/L x x x x
PG-L13
BSETU-2 B/A/R/Pb/Sb/L x x x x
BSETU-3 B/A/C/Sb x x
VELLIM
SS-H/M/L
AS-H/M/L
SS-DUAL (*3) B/A/Sb/L x x x x
FOUT
FFSUM
XCPL
SPLIT
PTC (*4) (*4) x

Input signal PV overshoot
Model Digital filter (*1) Totalizer (*1) CAL (*1)
conversion (*1) (*1)
ALM-R
SLCD B/R x x
SLPC x x
SLMC x x
SMST-111 x x
SMST-121 x x
SMRT x x
SBSD (*5) x
SLBC (*5) x
SLCC (*5) x
STLD (*5) x
*1: B: No conversion (function block)
A: No conversion (analog input)
R: Square root conversion (analog input)
Pb: Pulse-train input conversion
S2: Two-position status input (for MC-2/3 and MC-2E/3E only)
S3: Three-position status input (for MC-2/3 and MC-2E/3E only)
C: Code input (for BSETU-3 only)
Sb: Subsystem input
L: PV limit
x: Exists
Blank: Not exist
*2: The input processing will not function when the data setting is performed to the PV by cascade connection.
*3: The input processing is performed against the input signal on the selected side.
*4: Performs a PTC block independent processing
*5: Display the sum of YS Instrument.
n Output Processing Possible for Each Regulatory Control Block

Table 1.1.3-2 Output Processing Possible for Each Regulatory Control Block
Output
Output Velocity Clamped Output Range Auxiliary signal
Model PMV
limit limit output track track output(*1) conver-
sion(*1)
PVI
P/Pd B/A/Sb
PVI-DV
PID P/Pd/M/M B/A/Pw/P
x x x x x x
PI-HLD d wf/Sb
P/Pd/M/M B/A/Pwf/S
PID-BSW x x x x x x
d b
ONOFF x P/Pd S2
ONOFF-E x (*2) P/Pd S2
ONOFF-G x P/Pd S3
ONOFF- S3
x (*2) P/Pd
GE
P/Pd/M/M
PID-TP x x (*3) x D
d
P/Pd/M/M B/A/Pwf/S
PD-MR x x x x x x
d b
PI-BLEND P/Pd/M/M B/A/Pw/P
x x x x x x
PID-STC d wf/Sb

Output
Output Velocity Clamped Output Range Auxiliary signal
Model PMV
limit limit output track track output(*1) conver-
sion(*1)
B/A/Pwf/S
MLD x x (*2) x M/Md
b
P/Pd/M/M B/A/Pwf/S
MLD-PVI x x (*2) x
d b
B/A/Pwf/S
MLD-SW x x x x (*2) x M/Md
b
MC-2 S2/P2
MC-2E x S2/P2
MC-3 S3/P3
MC-3E x S3/P3
P/Pd/M/M B/A/Pwf/S
RATIO x x x x x x
d b
PG-L13 (*4) x x x B/A/Sb
BSETU-2 x x B/A/S2b/
S3b/
BSETU-3 x x S2s/S3s/S
b
VELLIM x x x x x x M/Md B/A/Sb
SS-H/M/L B/A/Sb
AS-H/M/L x x x x x x B/A/Sb
SS-DUAL B/A/Sb
FOUT (*5) x x B
P/Pd/M/M B/A/Pwf/S
FFSUM x x x x x x
d b
B/A/Pwf/S
XCPL x x x x x x M/Md
b
SPLIT x x x x B/A
PTC (*6)
ALM-R
YS Blocks
(*7)
*1: P: PV
Pd: PV
M: MV
Md: MV
B: Unconverted output (function block)
A: Analog output
D: Time-proportioning ON/OFF output
Pw: Pulse width output (without FB)
Pwf: Pulse width output (with FB)
S2: 2-position status output
S3: 3-position status output
P2: 2-position pulsive output
P3: 3-position pulsive output
S2b: 2-position status output (BSETU-2/3 only)
S3b: 3-position status output (BSETU-2/3 only)
S2s: 2-position status output through switch instrument (BSETU-2/3 only)
S3s: 3-position status output through switch instrument (BSETU-2/3 only)
Sb: Subsystem output
*2: Selectable by builder setting.
*3: The velocity limiter functions when the block is in AUT mode, but not when the block is in MAN mode regardless the setting
for [MAN Mode Velocity Limiter Bypass].
*4: Always restricted by MSH/MSL
*5: Only tracking of the CLP status of the output destination is performed.

*6: Performs processing unique to PTC block.
*7: YS Blocks contain the following models:
SLCD, SLPC, SLMC, SMST-111, SMST-121, SMRT, SBSD, SLBC, SLCC, STLD.
n Alarm Processing Possible for Each Regulatory Control

Table 1.1.3-3 Alarm Processing Possible for Each Regulatory Control Block-1
Process alarms (*1)
Model
NR OOP IOP IOP- HH LL HI LO
PVI x x x x x x x
PVI-DV x x x x x x x
PID
x x x x x x x x
PI-HLD
PID-BSW
ONOFF
ONOFF-E x x x x x x x x
ONOFF-G
ONOFF-GE
PID-TP
x x x x x x x x
PD-MR
PI-BLEND x x x x x x x x
PID-STC x x x x x x x x
MLD x x
MLD-PVI x x x x x x x x
MLD-SW x x x x
MC-2
MC-2E
x x x x x x
MC-3
MC-3E
RATIO x x x x x x x x
PG-L13 x x x x
BSETU-2
x x x x x x x
BSETU-3
VELLIM x x x x
SS-H/M/L x x x
AS-H/M/L x x x x
SS-DUAL x x x x x x x
FOUT (*2)
FFSUM x x x x
XCPL x x x x
SPLIT x x
PTC x x x
ALM-R x
SLCD x x x x x x
SLPC x x x x x x

Process alarms (*1)
Model
NR OOP IOP IOP- HH LL HI LO
SLMC x x x x x x
SMST-111 x x x x x x
SMST-121 x x x x x x
SMRT x x x x x x
SBSD x x x x
SLBC x x x x
SLCC x x x x
STLD x x x x
*1: x: Available
Blank: Not available
*2: FOUT does not have an alarm status. Nevertheless, the output fail check and the bad connection status alarm check are
performed and the results are transmitted to the upstream function block. An output fail of FOUT is generated when output fail
is detected at all FOUT output destinations.
Table 1.1.3-4 Alarm Processing Possible for Each Regulatory Control Block-2
Process alarms (*1)
Model Other
DV+ DV- VEL+ VEL- MHI MLO CNF
alarms
PVI x x x
PVI-DV x x x x x
PID
x x x x x x x
PI-HLD
PID-BSW
ONOFF
ONOFF-E x x x x x
ONOFF-G
ONOFF-GE
PID-TP
x x x x x x x
PD-MR
HDV
PI-BLEND x x x x x
LDV
PID-STC x x x x x x x
MLD x
MLD-PVI x x x
MLD-SW x x x
MC-2 TRIP
MC-2E PERR
x ANS+
MC-3 ANS-
MC-3E INT
Not availa-
RATIO x x x x x
ble
Not availa-
PG-L13 x
ble

Process alarms (*1)
Model Other
DV+ DV- VEL+ VEL- MHI MLO CNF
alarms
BSETU-2 NPLS (*2)
BDV+
BDV-
x
BSETU-3 LEAK
BEND
BPRE
Not availa-
VELLIM x x x x x
ble
SS-H/M/L x
AS-H/M/L x x x
SS-DUAL x x x x x
FOUT (*3)
FFSUM x x x
XCPL x x x
SPLIT x
PTC x
HALM
MALM
ALM-R x
LALM
RALM
SLCD x x x
SLPC x x x
SLMC x x x
SMST-111 x
SMST-121 x
SMRT x
END
SBSD x PRE
LERK
END
SLBC x PRE
LERK
SLCC x x HDV
STLD x
*1: x: Available
Blank: Not available
*2: The NPLS alarm is only supported in the BSETU-2 but not in the BSETU-3.
*3: FOUT does not have an alarm status. Nevertheless, the output fail check and the bad connection status alarm check are
performed and the results are transmitted to the upstream function block. An output fail of FOUT is generated when output fail
is detected at all FOUT output destinations.

1.1.4 Valid Block Modes for Each Regulatory Control

Block
A list of valid block modes for each regulatory control block is shown below.
n Valid Block Modes for Each Regulatory Control Block

Table 1.1.4-1 Valid Basic Block Modes for Each Regulatory Control Blocks
Name of function Valid basic block modes (*1)
Model
block O/S IMAN TRK MAN AUT CAS PRD RCAS ROUT
PVI Input indicator block
Input indicator block x - - - x - - - -
PVI- DV
with deviation alarm
PID PID controller block
Sampling PI controller
PI-HLD
block x x x x x x x x x
PID controller block
PID-BSW
with batch switch
Two-position ON/OFF
ONOFF
controller block
Enhanced two-position
ONOFF-E ON/OFF controller
block
Three-position ON/OFF
ONOFF-G
controller block x x - x x x - x x
Enhanced three-posi-
ONOFF-
tion ON/OFF controller
GE
block
Time-proportioning
PID-TP ON/OFF controller
block
PD controller block with
PD-MR x x x x x x x x x
manual reset
Blending PI controller
PI-BLEND x x x x x x - x x
block
Self-tuning PID control-
PID-STC x x x x x x x x x
ler block
MLD Manual loader block
Manual loader block x x x x - - - - -
MLD-PVI
with input indicator
Manual loader block
MLD-SW x x x x x - - -
with Auto/Man SW
Two-position motor
MC-2
control block
Enhanced two-position
MC-2E
motor control block
x x x x x x - - x
Three-position motor
MC-3
control block
Enhanced three-posi-
MC-3E
tion motor control block
RATIO Ratio set block x x x x x x - x x

Name of function Valid basic block modes (*1)
Model
block O/S IMAN TRK MAN AUT CAS PRD RCAS ROUT
13-zone program set
PG-L13 x x - x x x - - -
block
Flow-totalizing batch
BSETU -2
set block
x x - x x - - - -
Weight-totalizing batch
BSETU -3
set block
VELLIM Velocity limiter block x x - x x x - x x
SS-H/M/L Signal selector block x - - - x - - - -
AS-H/M/L Autoselector block x x - x x - - - -
Dual-redundant signal
SS-DUAL x - - - x - - - -
selector block
Cascade signal distrib-
FOUT - - - - - - - - -
utor block
Feedforward signal
FFSUM x x x x x x - - -
summing block
Non-inteference control
XCPL x x x x x - - - -
output block
Control signal splitter
SPLIT x x - - x x - x -
block
PTC Pulse count input block x - - - x - - - -
Representative alarm
ALM-R x - - - x - - - -
block
SLCD YS controller block x x - x x x - x x
YS programmable con-
SLPC x x - x x x - x x
troller block
YS programmable con-
SLMC troller block with pulse- x x - x x x - x x
width output
YS manual station
SMST-111 x x - x - x - x -
block with SV output
YS manual station
SMST-121 block with MV output x x - x - x - - x
lever
YS ratio set station
SMRT x x - x x x - x x
block
YS batch set station
SBCD x x - - x - - x -
block
YS blending controller
SLCC x x - x x - - x x
block
YS batch controller
SLBC x x - x x - - x x
block
STLD YS totalizer block x x - - x - - x -
*1: x: Valid
-: Invalid
: For MLD-SW, CAS mode can be specified instead of AUT mode.

<1.2 Input Indicator Block (PVI)> 1-20
1.2 Input Indicator Block (PVI)

This function block displays an input signal from the I/O modules or from the other blocks as
process variable (PV). It can also output the process variable (PV) from the OUT terminal.
This block may be used only for indicating the process variable.
n Input Indicator Block (PVI)

Connection
The figure below shows a function block diagram of the Input Indicator Block (PVI):
Input
IN PV OUT
processing
(PV, PV)
SUB
Figure 1.2-1 Function Block Diagram of Input Indicator Block (PVI)
The table below shows the connection method and connected destination of the I/O terminals
of the Input Indicator Block (PVI):
Table 1.2-1 Connection Method and Connected Destination of I/O Terminals of Input Indicator Block
(PVI)
Connection method(*1) Connection destination(*1)
I/O terminal Data refer- Data set- Terminal Software Function
Process I/O
ence ting connection I/O block
Measure-
IN x x x
ment input
Process
OUT variable x x x
output
Auxiliary
SUB x x x
output
*1: x: Connection allowed
Blank: Connection not allowed
: Connection allowed only when connecting to a switch block (SW-33, SW-91) or inter-station data link block (ADL).
n Function of Input Indicator Block (PVI)

The PVI block performs input processing, output processing, and alarm processing.
The only processing timing available for the PVI block is a periodic startup. Selections avail-
able for the scan period used to execute a periodic startup include the basic scan period, the
medium-speed scan period (*1), and the high-speed scan period. Moreover, it is possible to
specify the scan coefficient and the scan phase.
*1: The medium-speed scan period can only be used for the FFCS series, KFCS2, KFCS, LFCS2, and LFCS.

SEE
ALSO For more information about the types of input processing, output processing, and alarm processing possible
for the PVI block, refer to:
1.1.3, Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm Processing Possible for Each Regulatory Con-
trol Block on page 1-12
For more information about the input processing, refer to:
For more information about the output processing, refer to:
For more information about the alarm processing, refer to:
5, Alarm Processing-FCS in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
n Data Items - PVI

Table 1.2-2 Data Items of Input Indicator Block (PVI)
Entry Permitted
Data Item Data Name Range Default
or Not (*1)
MODE Block mode x ----- O/S (AUT)
ALRM Alarm status ----- NR
AFLS Alarm flashing status ----- 0
Alarm detection specifica-
AF ----- 0
tion
Alarm masking specifica-
AOFS ----- 0
tion
PV Process variable (*2) PV engineering unit value SL
Value in the unit at the con-
RAW Raw input data -----
nection destination
SUM Totalizer value x Engineering unit value 0
High - high limit alarm set-
HH x SL to SH SH
point
Low - low limit alarm set-
LL x SL to SH SL
point
PH High - limit alarm setpoint x SL to SH SH
PL Low - limit alarm setpoint x SL to SH SL
VL Velocity alarm setpoint x (SH - SL) SH - SL
Value in the same engi-
PVP Velocity-Reference Sample -----
neering unit as PV
OPMK Operation mark x 0 to 64 0
UAID User application ID x ----- 0
SH PV scale high limit -----
neering unit as PV
SL PV scale low limit x -----
neering unit as PV
*1: x: Entry is permitted unconditionally
Blank: Entry is not permitted
: Entry is permitted conditionally
*2: Entry is permitted when the data status is CAL

SEE
ALSO For more information about valid block modes of the PVI block, refer to:
1.1.4, Valid Block Modes for Each Regulatory Control Block on page 1-18

<1.3 Input Indicator Block with Deviation Alarm (PVI-DV)> 1-23
1.3 Input Indicator Block with Deviation Alarm

(PVI-DV)
The Input Indicator Block with Deviation Alarm (PVI-DV) displays an input signal as a process
variable (PV), provides the deviation alarm function, and outputs a PV from the OUT terminal.
This block is used for PV display, and deviation alarm indicating the difference between a PV
and a setpoint value (SV).
n Input Indicator Block with Deviation Alarm (PVI-DV)

Connection
The Input Indicator Block with Deviation Alarm (PVI-DV) displays an input signal received
from an I/O module or other function block as a process variable (PV).
In addition to the function to display an input signal as a process variable (PV), Input Indicator
Block with Deviation Alarm (PVI-DV) provides two other functions: deviation alarm check
and setpoint value limiter.
By presetting a deviation alarm setpoint (DL), the deviation (DV) of the setpoint value (SV)
from process variable (PV) can be confirmed.
The figure below shows a function block diagram of Input Indicator Block with Deviation Alarm
(PVI-DV):
-
SV DV
+
Input
IN PV OUT
processing
(PV, PV)
SUB
Figure 1.3-1 Function Block Diagram of Input Indicator Block with Deviation Alarm (PVI-DV)
The table below shows the connection methods and connected destinations of the I/O termi-
nals of Input Indicator Block with Deviation Alarm (PVI-DV):
Table 1.3-1 Connection Methods and Connected Destinations of I/O Terminals of Input Indicator Block
with Deviation Alarm (PVI)
Process I/O
Measure-
IN x x x
ment input
Process
OUT variable x x x
output
Auxiliary
SUB x x x
output
n Function of Input Indicator Block with Deviation Alarm (PVI-DV)

The PVI-DV block performs input processing, output processing, and alarm processing.

The only processing timing available for the PVI-DV block is a periodic startup. Selections
available for the scan period used to execute a periodic startup include the basic scan peri-
od, the medium-speed scan period (*1), and the high-speed scan period. Moreover, it is pos-
sible to specify the scan coefficient and the scan phase.
This section describes the deviation alarm check function and the setpoint value limiter func-
tion, which constitute some of the processing performed by the PVI-DV block.
SEE
for the PVI-DV block, refer to:
n Deviation Alarm Check

The deviation alarm check function generates a deviation alarm when the absolute value of
deviation (DV) between the setpoint value (SV) and process variable (PV) exceeds the abso-
lute value of the preset deviation alarm setpoint (DL).
When the deviation (DV) exceeds the high limit of the deviation alarm setpoint (DL):
A positive deviation alarm (DV+) is generated.
When the deviation (DV) falls below the low limit of the deviation alarm setpoint (DL):
A negative deviation alarm (DV-) is generated.
The deviation (DV) of the process variable (PV) from the setpoint value (SV) is represented by
the following expression:
DV=PV-SV
SEE
ALSO For more information about the deviation alarm check, refer to:
5.6, Deviation Alarm Check in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
n Setpoint Value Limiter

The setpoint value limiter function limits the setpoint value (SV) within a range between the
setpoint high limit (SVH) and setpoint low limit (SVL).
SEE
ALSO For more information about the setpoint value limiter, refer to:
lActions in the Automatic or Manual Mode on page 1-39
lSet Parameters of the Setpoint Value Limiter on page 1-40

n Data Items PVI-DV

Table 1.3-2 Data Items of Input Indicator Block with Deviation Alarm (PVI-DV)
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
AF ----- 0
tion
AOFS ----- 0
tion
nection destination
SV Setpoint value x SL
neering unit as PV
DV Deviation 0
neering unit as PV
HH x SL to SH SH
point
LL x SL to SH SL
point
neering unit as PV
DL Deviation alarm setpoint x (SH - SL) SH - SL
SVH Setpoint high limit x SL to SH SH
SVL Setpoint low limit x SL to SH SL
neering unit as PV
SL PV scale low limit -----
neering unit as PV
SEE
ALSO For more information about valid block modes of the PVI-DV block, refer to:

<1.4 Control Computation Processing Common to Controller Blocks> 1-26
1.4 Control Computation Processing Common

to Controller Blocks
The various types of controller blocks, represented by PID controller, have some common
computation processing functions. This chapter explains the control computation processing
functions that are common to multiple controller blocks.
The control computation processing functions specific to each controller block are explained
in the section of the corresponding controller block.
n Control Computation Processing Common to Controller Blocks

The table below shows the control computation processing functions that are common to mul-
tiple controller blocks:
Table 1.4-1 Control Computation Processing Common to Controller Blocks

Control computation processing Description
Changes the proportional gain in accordance with the degree of devia-
Non-linear gain tion so that the relationship between the deviation and control output
change (MV) becomes non-linear.
Lowers the proportional gain to moderate control effects when the devi-
Gap action
ation is within the gap width (GW) range.
Non-linear gain
Squared devi- Changes the proportional gain according to the degree of deviation
ation action when the deviation is within the gap width (GW) range.
Converts the manipulated output change (MV) during each control pe-
Control output action riod to an actual manipulated output value (MV). The control output ac-
tions include positional type and velocity type.
Switches the direction of the output action (reverse action or direct ac-
Control action direction
tion) in accordance with the increase or decrease in deviation.
Performs correction computation using values read from the connection
Reset limit function destinations of input terminals RL1 and RL2 during PID control compu-
tation. This function prevents reset windup.
Adjusts the manipulated output change (MV) to 0 when the deviation
Deadband action is within the deadband range, in order to stop the manipulated output
value (MV) from changing.
Adds the I/O compensated value (VN) received from outside to the in-
I/O compensation put signal or control output signal of PID computation when the control-
ler block is operating automatically.
Input compen- Adds the I/O compensated value (VN) received from the outside to the
sation input signal of the PID control computation.
I/O compensation
Output com- Adds the I/O compensated value (VN) received from outside to the out-
pensation put signal of the PID control computation.
Process variable tracking Causes the setpoint value (SV) to agree with the process variable (PV).
Limits the setpoint value (SV) within the setpoint high/low limits (SVH,
Setpoint value limiter
SVL).
Causes two of the three setpoint values (SV, CSV, RSV) to agree with
Setpoint value pushback
the remaining one.
Switches the manipulated output value (MV) without causing it to
change abruptly when the block mode has been changed or when the
Bumpless switching
manipulated output value (MV) has been switched in a downstream
block in cascade.
Changes the block mode to IMAN to temporarily suspend the control
Initialization manual action. This action takes place when the initialization manual condition
becomes satisfied.

Temporarily suspends the control action while maintaining the current
Control hold block mode. During control hold, the output action is performed normal-
ly.
Changes the block mode to MAN to forcibly stop the control action.
MAN fallback This action takes place when the MAN fallback condition becomes sat-
isfied.
Changes the block mode to AUT when the function block is operating
in the CAS or PRD mode, so that the control action is continued using
AUT fallback
values set by the operator. This action takes place when the AUT fall-
back condition becomes satisfied.
Temporarily suspends the control action and switches to the computer
backup mode when an error has been detected at a supervisory com-
Computer failure puter while the function block is operating in the RCAS or ROUT mode.
This action takes place when the computer failure condition becomes
satisfied.
Stops the control action of function blocks currently operating automati-
Block mode change interlock cally, while disabling the stopped function blocks from changing to the
automatic operating mode.
Outputs the cascade setpoint value (CSV) after converting it to a ma-
PRD mode action nipulated output value (MV) when the block mode has been changed to
PRD.
SEE
ALSO For more information about the control computation processing functions specific to each controller block, re-
fer to:
1.5, PID Controller Block (PID) on page 1-49
1.6, Sampling PI Controller Block (PI-HLD) on page 1-59
1.7, PID Controller Block with Batch Switch (PID-BSW) on page 1-68
1.8, Two-Position ON/OFF Controller Block (ONOFF), Enhanced Two-Position ON/OFF Controller
Block (ONOFF-E) on page 1-76
1.9, Three-Position ON/OFF Controller Block (ONOFF-G), Enhanced Three-Position ON/OFF Con-
troller Block (ONOFF-GE) on page 1-83
1.10, Time-Proportioning ON/OFF Controller Block (PID-TP) on page 1-91
1.11, PD Controller Block with Manual Reset (PD-MR) on page 1-99
1.12, Blending PI Controller Block (PI-BLEND) on page 1-106
1.13, Self-Tuning PID Controller Block (PID-STC) on page 1-116
n Non-Linear Gain
Non-Linear Gain
The non-linear gain function changes the proportional gain in accordance with the deviation of
the process variable (PV) from the setpoint value (SV) in the control computation. As a result,
a non-linear relationship is formed between the manipulated output change (MV) and the
deviation of the process variable (PV) from setpoint value (SV).
The non-linear gain function is used for pH control, in which the process gain often becomes
too high near the target value, or for buffer tank level control, whose purpose is to stabilize the
discharge volume while maintaining the tank level within the limits.
The actions that realize the non-linear gain function include gap actions and squared devia-
tion actions.

l Processing Flow of Non-Linear Gain

The non-linear gain function calculates the control output change (MV), using the effective
proportional gain (Kpe) obtained through non-linear correction of proportional gain (Kp).
The figure below shows a flow of the non-linear gain.
PID
MV
computation
Kpe
Non-linear
En MV: Manipulated output change
gain computation
Kpe: Effective proportional gain
En: Deviation
GW: Gap width
GW Kp Kp: Proportional gain
Figure 1.4-1 Processing Flow of the Non-Linear Gain
l Setting Non-Linear Gain

Use the Function Block Detail Builder to set the non-linear gain.
Non-linear gain: Select No, Gap Action or Squared Deviation Action.
The default is No.
n Gap Action
The gap action moderates control effects by lowering the proportional gain when the deviation
is within the preset gap width (GW).
l Non-Linear Gain Characteristics of Gap Action

If a non-linear gain coefficient (Knl) has been set, the effective proportional gain (Kpe) is ob-
tained by the following expression when the deviation is within the gap width (GW):
Kpe = Kp Knl
Once the deviation exceeds the limits of the gap width (GW), the effective proportional gain
(Kpe) is obtained by the following expression:
GW
Kpe= 1-(1-Knl) Kp
| En |
The figure below shows the non-linear gain characteristics of the gap action:

Equivalent
deviation Knl=1.0
Effective proportional (En')
gain (Kpe) Knl=0.5
Knl=1.0 Knl=0.25
Kp
Knl=0.0
0
Knl=0.5 Deviation (En)

0.5
Knl=0.25
0.25
Knl=0.0 Equivalent deviation:
The deviation equivalent to a state
0 Gap width Gap width Gap width in which no non-linear gain is specified.
Deviation (En)
(GW) (GW) (GW)
Figure 1.4-2 Non-Linear Gain Characteristics of Gap Action
l Setting Gap Action

Use the Function Block Detail Builder to set the non-linear gain coefficient.
Gap Gain: Select 1.0, 0.5, 0.25 or 0.
The default is 1.0.
Gain coefficient (Knl) | En | GW | En |>GW
1.0 (linear) - -
1 Kp GW
0.5 (1- ) Kp
2 2 | En |
1 Kp 3GW
0.25 (1- ) Kp
4 4 | En |
GW
0 0 (1- ) Kp
| En |
Figure 1.4-3 Relationship between the Non-linear Gain Coefficient and Effective Proportional Gain
l Set Parameter of Gap Action

The parameter of the gap action:
Gap width (GW): Engineering unit data between 0 and the PV scale span range limit.
The default is 0.
n Squared Deviation Action

The squared deviation action changes the proportional gain in proportion to the degree of de-
viation when the deviation is within the preset gap width (GW).
l Non-Linear Gain Characteristics of Squared Deviation Action

If a gap width (GW) has been set, the effective proportional gain (Kpe) is obtained by the fol-
lowing expression when the deviation is within the gap width (GW):
| En |
Kpe= Kp
GW

Once the deviation exceeds the limits of the gap width (GW), the effective proportional gain
(Kpe) is represented by the following expression:
Kpe = Kp
The figure below shows the non-linear characteristics of the squared deviation action:
Effective proportional Equivalent
gain (Kpe) deviation
(En')
0
Kp
Deviation (En)
Equivalent deviation:
The deviation equivalent to
a statein which no non-linear
0 Gap width Gap width Gap width gain is specified.
Deviation (En)
(GW) (GW) (GW)
Figure 1.4-4 Non-Linear Characteristics of the Squared Deviation Action
l Set Parameter of Squared Deviation Action

The parameter of the squared deviation action:
Gap width (GW): Engineering unit data between 0 and the PV scale span range limit.
The default is 0.
n Control Output Action

The control output action converts the manipulated output change (MV) during each control
period to an actual manipulated output value (MV). There are two types of control output ac-
tions: velocity type and positional type.
l Velocity Type
Adds the current manipulated output change (MVn) to the value readback from the output
destination (MVrb) and determines the manipulated output value (MVn).
The computational expression of the velocity-type control output action is shown below:
MVn=MVrb+MVn
l Positional Type
Adds the current manipulated output change (MVn) to the previous output value (MVn-1) and
determines the manipulated output value (MVn).
The computational expression of the positional-type control output action is shown below:
MVn=MVn-1+MVn
l Setting Control Calculation Output Action

Use the Function Block Detail Builder to set the control calculation output action.
Control Calculation Output Type: Select Velocity Output Action or Positional Output Ac-
tion.
The default is Positional Output Action.

n Control Action Direction

Control Action
The control action direction function switches between direct action and reverse action that
reflect the increase or decrease of manipulated output value.
l Direct Action and Reverse Action

The direct action and reverse action indicate the increase and decrease directions of the ma-
nipulated output value (MV) corresponding to deviation changes.
When the setpoint value (SV) is fixed, the relationship between the process value (PV) and
the manipulated output value (MV) in direct action and the reversed action is shown as fol-
lows.
Direct action
The control action in which the manipulated output value (MV) increases as the process
variable (PV) increases, or decreases as the process variable decreases.
Reverse action
The control action in which the manipulated output value (MV) decreases as the process
variable (PV) increases, or increases as the process variable decreases.
l Setting Control Action Direction

Use the Function Block Detail Builder to set the control action direction:
Control Action: Select Direct or Reverse.
The default is Reverse.
n Reset Limit Function

The reset limit function prevents the occurrence of reset windup (integral saturation) by set-
ting limits to the integral term in PID control computation. The reset limit function is applied
only to the positional-type control output actions.
l Reset Windup
In PID control computation, the value obtained via the integral action represents an integrated
value of deviation by time. Therefore, when a batch control stops, if the deviation prolongs,
the integral term in PID control computation becomes saturated due to the integral action.
This condition is called reset windup (integral saturation).
For example, reset windup often occurs in the following situation:
The control computation value exceed the manipulated variable high-limit or low-limit set-
point (MH, ML) and the output is limited by the H/L limiter.
The output to the manipulation terminal is switched off by an Auto-selector blocks, etc.
Manipulated output is used as the additional signal from a PID controller block (PID) for
the purpose of fine-adjust of the base load feedforward control.
When reset windup occurs, the control result tends to overshoot, and as a result the process
becomes unstable. In a control loop that reset windup may happen, you should select posi-
tional-type control output action and use the reset limit function.
l Reset Limit Function

Reset Limit Coefficient
The reset limit function carries out the correction to the PID control computation with the val-
ues read from the connected destinations via the RL1 and RL2 terminals.

The values read from the connected destinations via RL1 and RL2 terminals are used as re-
set signals RLV1 and RLV2. The reset signals RLV1, RLV2 are used to perform the following
correction computation to the output value of PID computation (MVn0). Thus, when the out-
put MV is limited by the manipulated variable high-limit and low-limit setpoints (MH, ML), the
reset limit exerts directly on the integral term of the output value (MV'), the value before MV in
computation.
If the RL1 terminal is not connected, the value readback from the output destination is used
as the reset signal value RLV1. If the RL2 terminal is not connected, 0 is used in computa-
tion as reset signal RLV2.
T
MVn=MVn0+ x WU x (RLV1-RLV2-MV'n-1)
TI
MVn: Manipulated output change (after correction)

MVn0: PID computed value (manipulated output change before correction)
MV'n-1: Previously computed MV value (value before output limiting)
RLV1: Reset signal from the RL1 terminal
RLV2: Reset signal from the RL2 terminal
T: Control period
TI: Integral time
WU: Reset limit coefficient
Reset limit coefficient is a parameter for adjusting the reset limiter calculation. The bigger this
coefficient is, the faster the MV can pullback against the reset windup.
Reset limit coefficient can be defined on Output tab of the Function Block Detail Builder.
Reset Limit Coefficient: Select 1, 2, 5 or 10
Default: 1
The following phenomena occur during velocity-type Control Action:
Reset windup
Normally reset windup do not happen to the velocity-type control output actions, since the
cumulative value of manipulated output changes (MV) of each scan period is limited.
However, if the values readback from the output destination are not limited by the MV H/L
scale setpoints nor by the MV H/L limiter, the manipulated output change (MV) of each
scan period is accumulated, similar to the positional-type actions. Consequently, the reset
windup happens.
Output excess pullback phenomenon
When the manipulated output value (MV) is limited by the manipulated variable high-limit
or low-limit setpoint (MH, ML) as a result of changes caused by pulse-type disturbances,
an output excess pullback phenomenon happens if the control output action is velocity
type.
When the manipulated output value was limited by the manipulated variable high-limit or
low-limit setpoint (MH, ML), a significant change in the process variable (PV) caused by
disturbances can pullback the manipulated output value (MV) excessively from the origi-
nal value. When the disturbance disappears, the process variable returns to the original
level. This is called the output excess pullback phenomenon. This phenomenon hap-
pens because the manipulated output value (MV) are limited by the manipulated variable
high-limit or low-limit setpoint (MH, ML). The current MV limited by the limiter is added
with a delta MV caused by the disturbance negative to the current MV direction.
The output excess pullback phenomenon does not happen if the control output action is
positional type since the proportional term of the manipulated output value (MV) is not
limited by the manipulated variable high-limit or low-limit setpoint (MH, ML).

l Example for Positional-Type Control Output Action

The following section explains the example that how the reset limit acts when the control com-
putation value of the function block with positional-type output action exceed the manipulated
variable high-limit or low-limit setpoint (MH, ML).
With a positional-type control output action, the control computation value in the current con-
trol period (MV'n) is the sum of the manipulated output change (MVn) obtained from the cur-
rent PID computation, and the control computation value in the previous control period
(MV'n-1).
MV'n=MVn+MV'n-1
The control computation value (MV'n) in the current control period limited by the manipulated
variable high-limit and low-limit setpoints (MH, ML) is output as the manipulated output value
(MVn).
The figure below shows an example of the reset limit function for the positional-type control
output action:
Control computation
Output
DMVn destination data
PID +
MV'n Output limiter MVn OUT
computation
+
RLV1 RLV2
RL1 RL2
Figure 1.4-5 Reset Limit Function for a Positional-Type Control Output Action
When the reset limit function is not used, positive or negative values is continuously added to
the integral term of the manipulated output change (MVn) so long the positive or negative
deviation exists. If the situation sustains, the manipulated output change (MV) is added to
the control computation value (MV') continuously and make it reach the MV scale high limit
(MSH) or the MV scale low limit (MSL) or the manipulated variable high-limit or low-limit set-
point (MH, ML) and continue to windup. As a result, saturation (reset windup) happens to the
integral term of the control computation value (MV'). Because the integral term is saturated,
the manipulated output value (MV) limited by the limiter does not move back even when the
sign of deviation changes to the pullback direction. The MV starts to pullback only when the
control computation value (MV') returns to the range between the manipulated output high-
limit and low-limit setpoints (MH, ML).
In the same situation, if the reset limit function is used, the integral term of the manipulated
output value (MV') will be limited to the value RLV1 - RLV2 as a result of correction computa-
tion. Even if the deviation sustains, the reset windup does not happens.
Example on the Figure Reset Limit Function for a Positional-Type Control Output Action, nei-
ther the RL1 or RL2 terminal is connected. Therefore, the reset signal RLV1 is the readback
value from the output destination, while the value of reset signal RLV2 is 0. For example,
suppose a loop is in cascade (CAS) mode, if the manipulated output (MV) is limited by the
manipulated variable high-limit setpoint (MH), the reset signal RLV1 becomes the manipulated
variable high-limit setpoint (MH). In this situation, the integral term of the control computation
value (MV') is adjusted gradually to the value obtained by subtracting RLV2 from RLV1 (i.e.,
MH), even when the deviation sustains, it does not exceed the manipulated variable high-limit
setpoint (MH).
The manipulated output value (MV) will quickly move away from the limit when the sign of the
manipulated output change (MV) reverses and agrees to the pullback direction of the value

from output limiting. This is because the control computation value (MV') is limited within the
manipulated variable high-limit and low-limit setpoints (MH, ML).
l Example for a Simple Cascade Control loop

The figure below shows an application example of using the reset limit function to a simple
cascade control loop. The RL1 and RL2 terminals are not connected.
Since the RL1 or RL2 terminals are not connected the reset signal RLV1 becomes the read-
back value from the output destination and the value of the reset signal RLV2 becomes 0.
If use the readback value of the manipulated output value (MV) output destination to compute
the difference of the two reset signals (RLV1 - RLV2), there is no need to have terminal RL1
or RL2 connected.
RLV1
IN OUT SET OUT

PID PID
Figure 1.4-6 Reset Limit Function for a Simple Cascade Control loop
l Application Example to Auto-Selection via Auto-Selector Blocks (AS-H)

The figure below shows an example of the reset limit function when automatically selecting
the signals from two function blocks using an Auto-selector blocks (AS-H).
Suppose the two PID Controller Blocks (PID) on the left side of the figure are velocity-type,
even when the deviation is within the switching point, the disturbance of the process variable
may trigger the output excess pullback to the manipulated output value (MV). Thus make the
Auto-selector blocks (AS-H) switch temporarily to the other controller. To define the positional-
type output action using the reset limit function can avoid this happening.
RL1
IN OUT
PID
IN1
OUT SET OUT

AS-H PID
IN2 IN
IN OUT
PID
RL1
Figure 1.4-7 Reset Limit Function Used for Auto-Selection via Auto-Selector Blocks (AS-H)
l Application Example in Feedforward Control

The figure below shows an example of the reset limit function used in feedforward control.
This example assumes base load control that uses the feedforward signals from the OUT ter-
minal of the General-Purpose Calculation Block (CALCU) as the base load values. To prevent
reset windup of the upstream PID Controller Block (PID), the RL2 terminal references the
feedforward signals, while the RL1 terminal references the process variable of the down-
stream PID Controller Block (PID).

IN
CALCU
OUT
RL2 SET
IN OUT IN OUT SET OUT

PID FFSUM PID
RL1 IN
Figure 1.4-8 Reset Limit Function Used in Feedforward Control (Base Load Control)
n Deadband Action
Deadband Action
The deadband action stops the manipulated output value (MV) from changing while the devia-
tion (DV) is within the preset deadband (DB) range, by causing the manipulated output
change (MV) to be 0.
l Characteristics of Deadband Action

The deadband action causes the manipulated output change (MVn) to be 0 when the abso-
lute value of the deviation (DV) minus the hysteresis value becomes smaller than the dead-
band width (DB). When the absolute value of deviation (DV) increases greater than the dead-
band width (DB), the manipulated output change after the deadband action (MVn) will be
brought back to the manipulated output change before the deadband action (MVn0).
The figure below shows the characteristics of the deadband action:
Output (MVn)
HYS HYS
MVn0
En
DB DB
MVn: Manipulated output change after the deadband action

MVn0: Manipulated output change before the deadband action
DB: Deadband width
En : Deviation (data of the same unit as PV)
HYS: Hysteresis (data of the same unit as PV)
Figure 1.4-9 Characteristics of Deadband Action
l Setting Deadband Action

Use the Function Block Detail Builder to set the deadband action.
Deadband action: Select Yes or No.
The default is No.
When the deadband action is set as Yes, the hysteresis (HYS) must be set. Use the Func-
tion Block Detail Builder to set the hysteresis (HYS).
Hysteresis: Engineering unit data between 0 and the PV scale span range limit.

The default is the value equivalent to 1.0 % of the PV scale span.
l Set Parameter of Deadband Action

The parameter of the deadband action:
Deadband width (DB): Engineering unit data between 0 and the PV scale span range limit.
The default is 0.
n Input or Output Compensation

I/O Compensation
The Input or Output Compensation function adds the compensation value (VN) received from
outside to the input signal or output signal of PID control computation, while the controller
block is operating automatically in the automatic (AUT), cascade (CAS), or remote cascade
(RCAS) mode.
The Control Action of Input or Output Compensation include the following two types:
Input compensation
Output compensation
The compensation value (VN) is reset to 0 automatically at the beginning of each control pe-
riod. This prevents the previous external compensation value is added to (VN) when the ex-
ternal compensation data not exist.
Normally, the external data is set directly to the compensation value (VN) from other function
block. However, the external data from other function block can be connected to the compen-
sation input terminal (BIN), then set to the compensation value (VN).
For manual operation, the manually set manipulated output value (MV) is not affected by the
Input or Output Compensation.
l Define Input or Output Compensation

Use the Function Block Detail Builder to define the Input or Output compensation.
I/O Compensation: Select No, Input Compensation or Output Compensation.
The default is No.
For the 2-Position ON/OFF Controller Block (ONOFF), 3-Position ON/OFF Controller Block
(ONOFF-G), PD Controller Block with Manual Reset (PD-MR) and Feedforward Signal Sum-
ming Block (FFSUM), only the input compensation can be defined.
Input Compensation: Select No or Input Compensation.
The default is No.
l Set Parameters of I/O Compensation

The parameters of the I/O compensation:
I/O compensation gain (CK): -10.000 to +10.000.
The default is 1.000.
I/O compensation bias (CB): Arbitrary engineering unit data.
The default is 0.0.
n Input Compensation
Input Compensation

The input compensation is a control action that adds the compensation value (VN) received
from outside to the input signal of PID control computation.
l Characteristics of Input Compensation

The computational expression of the input compensation:
CVn=PVn+CK(VN+CB)
CVn : Control variable (PV after input compensation)

PVn : Process variable
CK : I/O compensation gain
CB : I/O compensation bias (internal bias)
VN : I/O compensated value (bias signal)
The figure below shows a processing flow of the input compensation:
VN
+
+
CB
CK
+
PVn CVn MV
PV PID control computation
+
Figure 1.4-10 Processing Flow of the Input Compensation
l Example Using Input Compensation

The input compensation is used to improve the controllability of a process with a long dead
time, by subtracting from the input signal the signal from the Dead-Time Compensation Block
(DLAY-C) to perform PID control computation (Smith Dead Time Compensation).
The figure below shows an example of dead time compensation:
PID
IN OUT
VN
DLAY-C
Figure 1.4-11 Example of Dead Time Compensation
n Output Compensation
The output compensation is a control action that adds the I/O compensated value (VN) re-
ceived from the outside to the output signal of PID control computation.
l Characteristics of the Output Compensation

The computational expression of the output compensation:

MVn=MVn0+CK(VN+CB)
MVn : Manipulated output after output compensation

MVno : manipulated output before output compensation
The figure below shows a processing flow of the output compensation:
VN
+
+
CB
CK
+
PVn PID control MVn0 MVn
PV
computation +
Figure 1.4-12 Processing Flow of the Output Compensation
l Example of Using the Output Compensation

The output compensation is used for feedforward control that adds the feedforward signal to
the control output signal, or for non-interacting control that adds the output signal from the in-
teracting loop to the control output signal.
The figure below shows an example of feedforward control:
IN OUT
CALCU
PID
IN OUT
VN
Figure 1.4-13 Example of Feedforward Control
n Process Variable Tracking (Measurement Tracking)

Measurement Tracking
The process variable tracking function prevent the abrupt changes in the manipulated output
value (MV) when change from the manual (MAN) mode to automatic (AUT) mode, by forcing
the setpoint value (SV) to agree with the process variable (PV).
l Characteristics of Process Variable Tracking

When switching from the manual (MAN) mode to automatic (AUT) mode, the existence of a
large deviation is harmful, since it makes the manipulated output change (MV) very large.

If force the setpoint value (SV) to agree with the process variable (PV) in manual mode opera-
tion via process variable tracking, abrupt Control Action can be avoided when the mode
switches to automatic (AUT).
Suppose a primary loop is in cascade connection and controls in the automatic (AUT) or cas-
cade (CAS) mode. If the mode of the secondary loop in the cascade connection switches
from cascade (CAS) to automatic (AUT), the cascade connection becomes open and the con-
trol action of the primary side loop can stop. In this situation, the setpoint value (SV) of the
primary loop can be forced to agree with the process variable (PV) by the process variable
tracking function.
l Define Process Variable Tracking

Use the Function Block Detail Builder to define the process variable tracking.
Measurement tracking
MAN mode
Select Yes or No. The default is No.
AUT and CND mode
Select Yes or No. The default is No.
CAS and CND mode
Select Yes or No. The default is Yes.
The statuses referred to as MAN, AUT and CAS include remote backup modes such as
AUT (ROUT) and AUT (RCAS).
For a 2-Position ON/OFF Controller Block (ONOFF), 3-Position ON/OFF Controller Block
(ONOFF-G) or Time - Proportioning ON/OFF Controller Block (PID-TP), the definition is al-
lowed for MAN mode only.

The setpoint value limiter function limits the setpoint value (SV) within a range between the
setpoint high limit (SVH) and setpoint low limit (SVL).
The action of the setpoint value limiter varies with the block mode of the function block.
l Actions in the Automatic or Manual Mode

The action of the setpoint value limiter in automatic (AUT) or manual (MAN) mode varies de-
pending on whether the setpoint value (SV) can be set to a value beyond the range between
SVH and SVL or not. This setting can be changed from the option of [Prohibit setting SV to a
value beyond the range of SVL and SVH] on the properties sheet of the project.
When the option of [Prohibit setting SV to a value beyond the range of SVL and SVH] is
checked, the setpoint value limiter performs the following actions:
When try to set a setpoint value (SV) greater than the setpoint high limit (SVH):
An error message will be displayed and the value beyond the setpoint high limit becomes
invalid, the previous setpoint value will be held.
When try to set a setpoint value (SV) smaller than the setpoint low limit (SVL):
An error message will be displayed and the value beyond the setpoint low limit becomes
invalid, the previous setpoint value will be held.
When the option of [Prohibit setting SV to a value beyond the range of SVL and SVH] is not
checked, the setpoint value limiter performs the following actions:
When try to set a setpoint value (SV) greater than the setpoint high limit (SVH):
An acknowledgment dialog box appears to prompt for the operator's confirmation. When
confirms, the operator can set a value greater than the setpoint high limit (SVH) as the
setpoint value.

When try to set a setpoint value (SV) smaller than the setpoint low limit (SVL):
confirms, the operator can set a value smaller than the setpoint low limit (SVL) as the set-
point value.
However, when try to set a setpoint value (SV) to a value beyond the range between the proc-
ess high alarm setpoint (PH) and the process low alarm setpoint (PL), the setpoint value limit-
er performs the following actions regardless if the option of [Prohibit setting SV to a value be-
yond the range of SVL and SVH] is checked or unchecked:
When try to set a setpoint value (SV) greater than the process high alarm setpoint (PH):
confirms, the operator can set a value greater than the process high alarm setpoint (PH)
as the setpoint value.
When try to set a setpoint value (SV) smaller than the process low alarm setpoint (PL):
confirms, the operator can set a value smaller than the process low alarm setpoint (PL)
as the setpoint value.
l Actions in the Remote Cascade Mode

When the function block is in remote cascade (RCAS) mode and the setpoint value (SV) is
defined to automatically follow the remote setpoint value (RSV) received from the supervisory
system computer, the setpoint value limiter performs the following actions:
The value exceeds the setpoint high limit (SVH) is forced to be equal to the setpoint high
limit (SVH).
The value smaller than the setpoint low limit (SVL) is forced to be equal to the setpoint
low limit (SVL).
l Set Parameters of the Setpoint Value Limiter

The parameters of the setpoint value limiter:
Setpoint high limit (SVH): Engineering unit data within the PV scale range.
The default is the scale high limit.
Setpoint low limit (SVL): Engineering unit data within the PV scale range.
The default is the scale low limit.
n Setpoint Value Pushback

The setpoint value pushback function sets the same value for the three types of setpoint val-
ues (SV, CSV, RSV). The figure below explains the relationship among the setpoint value
(SV), cascade setpoint value (CSV) and remote setpoint value (RSV):

Set from the supervisory computer Input from the SET terminal
RSV CSV
AUT/MAN
RCAS CAS
SV
Setpoint value
Control
computation
Figure 1.4-14 Relationship among Setpoint Values (SV, CSV and RSV)
The action of the setpoint value pushback varies in accordance with the block mode of the
function block.
l Action in the Automatic (AUT) or Manual (MAN) Mode

Causes the cascade setpoint value (CSV) and remote setpoint value (RSV) to agree with the
setpoint value (SV). Even when a data value is set to the setpoint value (SV) from outside the
function block, the same value is automatically set to the cascade setpoint value (CSV) and
remote setpoint value (RSV).
l Action in the Cascade (CAS) Mode

Force the setpoint value (SV) and remote setpoint value (RSV) to be equal to the cascade
setpoint value (CSV).
l Action in the Remote Cascade (RCAS) Mode

Force the setpoint value (SV) and cascade setpoint value (CSV) to be equal to the remote
setpoint value (RSV).
n Bumpless Switching
The bumpless switching function switches the block mode of the function block or manipu-
lated output value downstream in cascade without causing the manipulated output value (MV)
to change abruptly (i.e., bumpless change).
The action during bumpless switching varies with the control output action and block mode
status.
l Action for Velocity-Type Control Output Action

For a velocity-type control output action, the manipulated output change (MVn) obtained by
control computation is added to the present value readback from the connected destination.
Therefore, the block mode or cascade switch can be changed without causing an abrupt
change in the manipulated output value (MV).
l Action for Positional-Type Control Output Action

For a positional-type control action, when the function block mode changes to tracking (TRK)
mode, or when the cascade connection to the downstream is open then close again, or for the
similar reason the cascade control loop regain the control, the manipulated output value (MV)
may change abruptly. To prevent this, the output value is forced to be equal (or to track) to the
value of the output destination while the control action stops. This enables the block mode
switch causes no abrupt change in the manipulated output value (MV).

l Action when a Cascade Connected Downstream Loop Changes from

Automatic (AUT) to Cascade
When a cascade connected downstream loop changes its mode from automatic (AUT) to cas-
cade (CAS), the tracking process described above is performed in the upstream loop if the
downstream is only connected to one loop. Therefore, the block mode switches without caus-
ing an abrupt change in the manipulated output value (MV).
l Action when Manipulated Output of an Upstream Loop is Connected to

Multiple Downstream Loops as Setpoint Value
When multiple downstream loops are receiving the manipulated output signals of an upstream
loop as setpoint value signals via a Cascade Signal Distributor Block (FOUT), Control Signal
Splitter Block (SPLIT) or switch block (SW-33, SW-91), the setpoint value downstream may
change abruptly. In this case, control computation is not performed in downstream loops in
the first control period following the switching of modes from automatic (AUT) to cascade
(CAS). In other words, the block mode can be changed without causing an abrupt change in
the output as a result of a proportional or derivative action, by resuming the control computa-
tion from the next control period in which the change in the setpoint value caused by the block
mode change will not be reflected by the change in the deviation (En).
The figure below shows an example of a multiple downstream loop configuration:
J01 SET
PID
OUT SET
PID FOUT
J08
SET
PID
Figure 1.4-15 Example of a Multiple Downstream Loop Configuration (when a Cascade Signal Distrib-
utor Block is Used)
SET
PID
OUT1
OUT SET
PID SPLIT OUT2
SET
PID
Figure 1.4-16 Example of a Multiple Downstream Loop Configuration (when a Control Signal Splitter
Block is Used)
SET
PID
S11
OUT S10 S12 SET
DSET SW-33 PID
S13
SET
PID
Figure 1.4-17 Example of a Multiple Downstream Loop Configuration (when a Switch Block is Used)
n Initialization Manual
The initialization manual is an error processing function that suspends the control action tem-
porarily by changing the block mode to initialization manual (IMAN). This action takes place
when the initialization manual condition is established.

l Characteristics of the Initialization Manual

The initialization manual function suspends the control action and control output action tem-
porarily during the automatic (AUT) mode or other automatic control operation mode when the
initialization manual condition is established, and changes the function block to initialization
manual (IMAN) mode.
Since the initialization manual action causes the manipulated output value (MV) to track the
value of the connected destination, even when the mode changes from initialization manual
(IMAN) mode to manual (MAN) mode, the initialization manual (IMAN) mode will precede the
manual (MAN) mode. Therefore, the manual (MAN) mode does not take effect.
The block returns to the original mode as soon as the initialization manual condition vanishes.
However, if the mode change operation is performed in the initialization manual (IMAN) mode,
the block will switch to the mode of this operation after the initialization manual condition van-
ishes.
l Initialization Manual Condition

The initialization manual condition is a block mode transition condition. It suspends the control
action and control output action temporarily by changing the block mode to initialization man-
ual (IMAN) mode.
The initialization manual (IMAN) block mode becomes active only when the initialization man-
ual condition is established.
The initialization manual condition is depicted as follows:
AUT
Initialization manual condition is established
IMAN (AUT)
Initialization manual condition vanishes
AUT
The initialization manual condition is established in the following situation:
When the manipulated output value (MV) connected destinations data status is condition-
al (CND) (i.e., the cascade loop open).
When the manipulated output value (MV) connected destinations data status is commu-
nication error (NCOM) or output failure (PTPF).
When the manipulated output value (MV) connected destination is a switch block (SW-33,
SW-91) and the cascade connection is switched off (i.e., the cascade loop open).
When the manipulated output value (MV) connected destination is a process output, and
a failure or output open alarm has occurred in the process output.
When the data status of the input signal at the TIN or TSI terminals become invalid (BAD)
in the tracking (TRK) mode while the output signal is not a pulse-width type.
n Control Hold
The control hold is an error processing function that suspends the control action temporarily
while maintaining the current block mode. Unlike initialization manual, the control output ac-
tion is performed normally during control hold.
The control hold action takes place when the following conditions are established during auto-
matic operation (AUT, CAS, RCAS):
The connected destination of the IN terminal is open (i.e., not selected via a selector
switch, etc.) and,

The connected destination of the IN terminal or the connected destination of the data at
the first connected destination is a process input, and the process input is temporarily in a
non-response state (momentary power failure).
The control is resumed when the conditions vanish.
n MAN Fallback
The MAN fallback is an error processing function that stops the control forcibly by changing
the block mode to manual (MAN). This action takes place when the MAN fallback condition is
established.
l Characteristics of the Man Fallback

The MAN fallback stops the control by changing the function block to manual (MAN) mode
regardless of the current operation status, and forces the function block to manual operation
state.
Once the MAN fallback condition is established, the block mode remain manual (MAN) even
after the condition vanishes.
l MAN Fallback Condition

The MAN fallback condition is used to stop the control by changing the function block to man-
ual (MAN) mode regardless of the current operation status, and forces the function block to
enter manual operation state. When the MAN fallback condition is established, it indicates
that a fatal error has occurred and requests operator interruption.
An example of the MAN fallback condition is shown as follows:
AUTMAN
IMAN (CAS)IMAN (MAN)
The MAN fallback condition is established in the following situation:
When the data status of the process variable (PV) is invalid (BAD) or calibration (CAL).
However, the MAN fallback condition will not be established when the block mode is pri-
mary direct (PRD), or remote output (ROUT) excluding any compound mode during com-
puter backup.
When the data status of the manipulated output value (MV) is output failure (PTPF).
When the data status of the setpoint value (SV) is invalid (BAD).
When the manipulated output value (MV) is connected to a process I/O and the FCS is
having an initial cold start.
When the block mode change interlock condition is established.
When the manipulated output value (MV) is connected to a process I/O, and one of the
I/O points connected to the module has been changed via maintenance.
n AUT Fallback
AUT Fallback
The AUT fallback is an error processing function that switches the block mode from cascade
(CAS) or primary direct (PRD) to automatic (AUT) when the AUT fallback condition is estab-
lished. Thus the set value of the control loop can be set by the operator.
l Characteristics of the AUT Fallback

Changes the block mode from cascade (CAS) or primary direct (PRD) to automatic (AUT) to
continue control using values set by the operator.

Once the AUT fallback condition is established, the block mode remain automatic (AUT) even
after the condition vanishes.
l AUT Fallback Condition

The AUT fallback condition is used to change the block mode of the function block from cas-
cade (CAS) or primary direct (PRD) to automatic (AUT) so that control can be continued using
the values set by the operator. When this condition is established, it indicates that abnormality
has been detected in the cascade setpoint value (CSV) for some reason.
An example of when the AUT fallback condition establishment is as follows:
CASAUT
IMAN (CAS)IMAN (AUT)
l Setting AUT Fallback Condition

Use the Function Block Detail Builder to enable/disable the AUT fallback function.
AUT Fallback: Select Yes or No.
The default is No.
If the AUT fallback is defined as Yes via the Function Block Detail Builder, the AUT fallback
condition is established when the data status of the cascade setpoint value (CSV) become in-
valid (BAD) or communication error (NCOM).
n Computer Fail
Computer Backup Mode
When the computer fail is detected, the function block suspends the action in the remote cas-
cade (RCAS) mode or remote output (ROUT) mode temporarily and switches to the computer
backup mode.
l Characteristics of Computer Fail

When the function block mode is remote cascade (RCAS) or remote output (ROUT), the func-
tion block receives the setpoint value (SV) or manipulated output value (MV) from a supervi-
sory system computer via Control bus communication.
When the computer fails, the block changes mode to the preset computer backup mode
(MAN, AUT or CAS) which indicates that an abnormality has been detected in the supervisory
computer. When the computer recovers, the block returns to the mode before the change.
The following actions will take place when a block mode change command from MAN, AUT,
CAS or PRD to RCAS or ROUT is sent while the computer fails:
1. When a block mode change command from MAN, AUT, CAS or PRD to RCAS or PRD is
sent while the computer fails (BSW=ON), the function block does not switch to the com-
puter backup mode directly but switches to the transient state mode first.
The transient state mode is a compound block mode consisting of the block mode before
the execution of the block mode change command (MAN, AUT, CAS, PRD) and a remote
mode (RCAS, ROUT).
2. Then the function block tests the computer condition in the first scan after the block mode
change command and switches to the computer backup mode.
The computer backup mode is a compound block mode consisting of the backup mode
set via the Function Block Detail Builder (MAN, AUT, CAS) and a remote mode (RCAS,
ROUT).
3. If the computer recovers while the function block is in the computer backup mode, the
block mode changes to remote cascade (RCAS) or remote output (ROUT).

l Computer Fail Condition

The computer fail condition is a block-mode transition condition used to suspend actions in
the remote cascade (RCAS) or remote output (ROUT) mode and switches the mode to the
computer backup mode.
A backup switch (BSW) is provided in function block to define the remote cascade (RCAS) or
remote output (ROUT) mode. The status of this switch determines whether the computer has
failed or recovered. The value of the backup switch (BSW) can be set from a sequence table
or other function blocks.
Switching to a computer backup mode does not take effect if the backup switch (BSW) is on a
block mode other than remote cascade (RCAS) or remote output (ROUT).
When BSW=ON, computer has failed
When BSW=OFF, computer has recovered
An example when the automatic (AUT) mode has been specified for the computer backup
mode is shown as follows:
RCAS
Computer fails
AUT (RCAS)
Computer recovers
RCAS
An example when the manual (MAN) mode has been specified for the computer backup
AUT
ROUT command
AUT (ROUT) Transient state mode
After one scan period
MAN (ROUT) Computer backup mode (When BSW=ON)
l Define Computer Backup Mode

Use the Function Block Detail Builder to define the computer backup mode for each function
block.
Select MAN, AUT or CAS as the mode to be switched to when the computer be-
comes down. The default is MAN.
For a Control Signal Splitter Block (SPLIT), select AUT or CAS. The default is AUT.
n Block Mode Change Interlock

When the block mode change interlock condition is established, the block mode change inter-
lock function stops the control computation processing of the function block running in auto
mode, and prohibit the function block changing to automatic operation mode.
l Characteristics of the Block Mode Change Interlock

Stops the control computation processing of the function blocks that are operating automati-
cally, and disables the currently stopped function blocks from changing to an automatic opera-
tion state. The following actions will take place:
The block mode changes to manual (MAN).

Any block mode change command to make the function block into automatic operation
state (AUT, CAS, PRD, RCAS or ROUT mode) becomes invalid.
l Block Mode Change Interlock Condition

The Block mode change interlock condition is established when the switch at the connected
destination of the interlock switch input terminal (INT) is turned ON. This switch is manipu-
lated in the process control sequence and the switch is turned on when the sequence judge
that the loop can not run in Auto mode, or etc.,.
n Primary Direct (PRD) Mode Action

The primary direct (PRD) mode action enables the downstream block to output the setpoint
value received from the cascade connected upstream block (CSV) after converting it into ma-
nipulated output value (MV).
The conversion action from the cascade setpoint value (CSV) to the manipulated output value
(MV) varies with the control action direction, i.e., direct or reverse.
When an error such as process input signal error is detected in the cascade connected down-
stream block, the block changes to primary direct (PRD) mode, to allow the upstream block
temporarily takes over control.
The output tracking function for the cascade connected upstream block is used so that an
abrupt change in the manipulated output does not occur when the block mode for the cas-
cade connected downstream block is changing to the primary direct (PRD) mode. The cas-
cade connected downstream block returns the manipulated output value (MV) to the setpoint
value (SV, CSV, RSV) in order to make the downstream block manipulated output value (MV)
track the upstream block manipulated output value (MV) when the block mode for the down-
stream block changes to the primary direct (PRD) mode.
IMPORTANT
Normally, when changing the block mode to primary direct (PRD), the set parameter (P, I,
D) of the upstream block in cascade need to be adjusted.
When change a block to primary direct (PRD) mode, it is necessary to change the upper
stream block in the same cascade loop to manual (MAN) mode.
When change a block from primary direct (PRD) mode to automatic (AUT) mode, it is bet-
ter to change the block into manual (MAN) mode first. However, it is possible to change
the block from primary direct (PRD) mode to automatic (AUT) mode directly. In this case,
the block runs measurement tracking to force the set point value (SV) to track the proc-
ess variable value (PV) so as to avoid the radical change to the control output.
SEE
ALSO For more information about primary direct (PRD) mode, refer to:
6.1.1, Basic Block Mode in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
l When the Control is Direct Action

The computational expression of the primary direct (PRD) mode action when the control ac-
tion is direct:
MSH-MSL
MV=MSH- (CSV-SL)
SH-SL
RMV=MV

SH : PV scale high limit
SL : PV scale low limit
MSH : MV scale high limit
MSL : MV scale low limit
When the block mode changes to primary direct (PRD), the downstream block sets its the ma-
nipulated output value (MV) to the setpoint value (SV, CSV, RSV), using the computational ex-
pression shown below:
SH-SL
SV=SH- (MV-MSL)
MSH-MSL
CSV=RSV=SV
l When the Control is Reverse Action

The following computational expression is used as a basis of the primary direct (PRD) mode
action when the control action is reverse:
MSH-MSL
MV= (CSV-SL)+MSL
SH-SL
RMV=MV
When the block mode changes to primary direct (PRD), the downstream block sets its the ma-
nipulated output value (MV) to the setpoint value (SV, CSV, RSV), using the computational ex-
pression shown below:
SH-SL
SV= (MV-MSL)+SL
MSH-MSL
CSV=RSV=SV
l Output Limiter in PRD Mode: FFCS Series/KFCS2/LFCS2

Enable output limiter in PRD mode (XL compatible)
The output limiter can also be applied when the block mode is PRD.
To limit the direct output value of primary loop, check the option of [Enable output limiter in
PRD mode (XL compatible)] on [Constant 3] tab of FCS properties sheet.
SEE
ALSO For more information about the output limiter actions when the function block is in Primary Direct mode, refer
to:
Pulse Width Output in PRD Mode in 4.8.2, Pulse Width Output Conversion in the Function Blocks
Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)

<1.5 PID Controller Block (PID)> 1-49
1.5 PID Controller Block (PID)

The PID Controller Block (PID) provides the most general control function to perform propor-
tional-integral-derivative control based on the deviation of the process variable (PV) from the
setpoint value (SV).
n PID Controller Block (PID)

Connection
The figure below shows a function block diagram of PID Controller Block (PID):
CAS (VN) (RLV1) (RLV2) (TSW)

CSV
AUT
SV
MAN
RSV
RCAS
MAN
Control CAS/AUT
Input Output
IN PV computation MV OUT
processing
ROUT
SUB
Figure 1.5-1 Function Block Diagram of PID Controller Block (PID)
nals of PID Controller Block (PID):
Table 1.5-1 Connection Methods and Connected destinations of the I/O Terminals of PID Controller
Block (PID)
Process I/O
Measure-
IN x x x
ment input
Setting in-
SET x x
put
Manipu-
OUT x x x x
lated output
Auxiliary
SUB x x x
output
Reset sig-
RL1 x x x
nal 1 input
Reset sig-
RL2 x x x
nal 2 input
Compensa-
BIN x x x
tion input
Tracking
TIN x x x
signal input
Tracking
TSI x x x x
SW input

Process I/O
Interlock
INT x x x x
SW input
n Function of PID Controller Block (PID)

The PID block performs input processing, control computation processing, output process-
ing, and alarm processing.
The only processing timing available for the PID block is a periodic startup. Selections avail-
medium-speed scan period (*1), and the high-speed scan period.
SEE
for the PID block, refer to:
l Control Computation Processing of the PID Controller Block (PID)

The table below shows the control computation processing functions of the PID Controller
Block (PID):
Table 1.5-2 Control Computation Processing Functions of the PID Controller Block (PID)
Calculates the manipulated output value (MV) and manipulated
PID control
output change (MV) using the PID control algorithms.
Performs the PID control actions by bypassing derivative control
Control action bypass actions (D), proportional control actions (P) or both proportional
and derivative control actions (P+D).
Changes the proportional gain in accordance with the degree of de-
Non-linear gain viation so that the relationship between the deviation and manipu-
lated output change (MV) becomes nonlinear.
Lowers the proportional gain to moderate control effects when the
Gap action
deviation is within the gap width (GW) range.
Non-linear gain
Squared devia- Changes the proportional gain according to the degree of deviation
tion action when the deviation is within the gap width (GW) range.
Converts the manipulated output change (MV) during each con-
Control output action trol period to an actual manipulated output value (MV). The control
output actions include positional type and velocity type.
Switches the direction of the output action (reverse action or direct
action) in accordance with the increase or decrease in deviation.

Performs correction computation using values read from the con-
Reset limit function nection destinations of input terminals RL1 and RL2 during PID
control computation. This function prevents reset windup.
Adjusts the manipulated output change (MV) to 0 when the devi-
Deadband action ation is within the deadband range, in order to stop the manipulated
output value (MV) from changing.
Adds the I/O compensated value (VN) received from outside to the
I/O compensation input signal or control output signal of PID computation when the
controller block is operating automatically.
Input compensa- Adds the I/O compensated value (VN) received from the outside to
tion the input signal of the PID control computation.
I/O compensation
Output compen- Adds the I/O compensated value (VN) received from outside to the
sation output signal of the PID control computation.
Causes the setpoint value (SV) to agree with the process variable
Process variable tracking
(PV).
Limits the setpoint value (SV) within the setpoint high/low limits
(SVH, SVL).
Causes two of the three setpoint values (SV, CSV, RSV) to agree
with the remaining one.
change abruptly when the block mode has been changed or when
Bumpless switching
the manipulated output value (MV) has been switched in a down-
stream block in cascade.
Changes the block mode to IMAN to temporarily suspend the con-
Initialization manual trol action. This action takes place when the initialization manual
condition becomes satisfied.
Temporarily suspends the control action while maintaining the cur-
Control hold rent block mode. During control hold, the output action is performed
normally.
MAN fallback This action takes place when the MAN fallback condition becomes
satisfied.
Changes the block mode to AUT when the function block is operat-
ing in the CAS or PRD mode, so that the control action is continued
AUT fallback
using values set by the operator. This action takes place when the
AUT fallback condition becomes satisfied.
Temporarily suspends the control action and switches to the com-
puter backup mode when an error has been detected at a supervi-
Computer failure sory computer while the function block is operating in the RCAS or
ROUT mode. This action takes place when the computer failure
Stops the control action of function blocks currently operating auto-
Block mode change interlock matically, while disabling the stopped function blocks from changing
to the automatic operating mode.
Outputs the cascade setpoint value (CSV) after converting it to a
PRD mode action manipulated output value (MV) when the block mode has been
changed to PRD.
SEE
ALSO For more information about control computation processing functions applied in the PID Controller Block, re-
fer to:
1.4, Control Computation Processing Common to Controller Blocks on page 1-26
n PID Control Computation

PID Control Algorithm

The PID control computation is the core of the PID control computation processing, calculat-
ing a manipulated output change (MV) by using the PID control algorithms. The PID control
is the most widely used, it combines three types of actions: proportional, integral and deriva-
tive.
The figure below shows a block diagram of PID control computation:
P0
I-PD Proportional term
computation (P)
PI-D/PID
SV
- +
PV + Integral term + Range
MV
(Note) computation (I) conversion
PID +
D0
Derivative term
I-PD/PI-D computation (D)
Note: Compensated PV, if input compensation is performed.
Figure 1.5-2 Block Diagram of PID Control Computation
l PID Control Computation Expression

The PID control computation expression used in a regulatory control system (analog control
system):
100 1 dE(t)
MV(t)= E(t)+ E(t)dt+TD
PB TI dt
MV(t): Manipulated output

E(t): Deviation E(t) = PV(t) - SV(t)
PV(t): Process variable
SV(t): Setpoint value
PB: Proportional band (%)
TI: Integral time
TD: Derivative time
If we use the sampling value derived at each interval of the control period for the above ex-
pression, the differential expression of the PID control computation is transformed as follows:
100 T TD
MVn= En+ En+ (En)
PB TI T
MVn: Manipulated output change

En: Deviation En=PVn-SVn
PVn: Process variable
SVn: Setpoint value
En: Change in deviation En=En-En-1
T: Control period
The subscripts n and n-1 represent the sample against the control period, it stands for the
nth sample or n-1th sample.

The above differential expression calculates a change in manipulated output (difference). A
new output value is obtained by adding the current change in manipulated output (MVn) to
the previous manipulated output value (MVn-1).
l Types of PID Control Computation

The PID Controller Block uses the following five PID control algorithms to perform PID control
computation. The actions vary with the characteristics of a controlled system and the purpose
of control.
Basic type PID control (PID)
PV proportional and derivative type PID control (I-PD)
PV derivative type PID control (PI-D)
Automatic determination type
Automatic determination type 2
l Define PID Control Computation

For PID control computation, the input variables of the proportional, integral and derivative
terms are different for each PID control algorithm.
The table below shows the PID control algorithms and the input variable of each term:
Table 1.5-3 PID Control Algorithms and the Input Variables

Trinomial input variables
PID control algorithm
Proportional term Derivative term Integral term
PID En En En
I-PD PV PV En
PI-D En PV En
Same as I-PD in the AUT mode.
Automatic determination
Same as PI-D in the CAS or RCAS mode.
Same as I-PD in the AUT or RCAS mode.
Automatic determination 2
Same as PI-D in the CAS mode.
Use the Function Block Detail Builder to define the PID control algorithm.
PID Control Algorithm:
Select one of the following algorithms
Basic Type
Proportional PV Derivative Type PID Control (I-PID)
PV Derivative Type PID Control (PI-D)
Automatic Determination
Automatic Determination 2
The default is Automatic Determination 2.
When the block mode of the PID Controller Block is remote cascade (RCAS), the PID control
algorithm Automatic Determination and Automatic Determination 2 act as follows:
Automatic determination type: Same actions as in the cascade (CAS) mode.
Automatic determination type 2: Same actions as in the automatic (AUT) mode.

l Basic Type PID Control Algorithm (PID)

The basic type PID control algorithm performs proportional, integral and derivative Control Ac-
tion following the changes in the setpoint value.
This algorithm is used when the process time constant is long and the control is oriented on
the prompt response to the change in the setpoint value. For example, when use a 13-Zone
Program Set Block (PG-L13) to change the setpoint value of a controller block, this algorithm
is used for the PID block.
The computational expression of the basic type PID control algorithm (PID):
T TD
MVn=Kp Ks En+ En+ (En)
TI T
En=PVn-SVn
100
Kp=
PB
MSH-MSL
Ks=
SH-SL
T: Control period
En: Change in deviation En=En-En-1
Kp: Proportional gain
TI: Integral time
TD: Derivative time
Ks: Scale conversion coefficient
PVn: Process variable (engineering unit)
SVn: Setpoint value (engineering unit)
SH: PV scale high limit
SL: PV scale low limit
MSH: MV scale high limit
MSL: MV scale low limit
The process variable (PV) and setpoint value (SV) used in the computation are both engi-
neering unit data. The manipulated output change (MV) obtained in an engineering unit by
the range conversion performed via the scale conversion coefficient (Ks).
l PV Proportional and Derivative Type PID Control Algorithm (I-PD)

The PV proportional and derivative type PID control algorithm (I-PI) differs from the basic type
that it performs only integral actions when the setpoint value changes.
This algorithm ensures stable control characteristics even when the setpoint value changes
abruptly when the SV is set via numerical value entry. At the same time, the algorithm en-
sures proper control in response to the characteristic changes occurring in controlled process-
es, load variations and disturbances by performing proportional, derivative and integral Con-
trol Action accordingly.
The computational expression of the PV proportional and derivative type PID control algo-
rithm (I-PD):

T TD
MVn=Kp Ks PVn+ En+ (PVn)
TI T
PVn : Process variable change PVn=PVn-PVn-1
l PV Derivative Type PID Control Algorithm (PI-D)

Compared to the basic type, the PV derivative type PID control algorithm (PI-D) only performs
proportional and integral Control Action when setpoint value changes, but not derivative Con-
trol Action. This algorithm is used in the situations where the better follow up to the setpoint
value change is required, such a downstream control block in a cascade control loop.
The computational expression of the PV derivative type PID control algorithm:
T TD
MVn=Kp Ks En+ En+ (PVn)
TI T
l Automatic Determination Type

When a PID Controller Block is in cascade (CAS) or remote cascade (RCAS) mode, it uses
the PV derivative type PID control algorithm (PI-D) to perform computation so that the follow-
up the setpoint value change can be improved.
When the block is in automatic (AUT) mode, it uses the PV proportional and derivative type
PID control algorithm (I-PD) to perform computation so that stable control characteristics can
be ensured in the event that an abrupt change occurs in the setpoint value due to a numeric
value setting.
l Automatic Determination Type 2

When a PID Controller Block is in cascade (CAS) mode, it uses the PV derivative type PID
control algorithm (PI-D) to perform computation. When the block is in remote cascade (RCAS)
mode or automatic (AUT) mode, it uses the PV proportional and derivative type PID control
algorithm (I-PD) to perform computation.
In the cascade (CAS) mode, the automatic determination type 2 orients to the follow-up capa-
bility to setpoint value (CSV) change. In the remote cascade (RCAS) mode, it orients to pre-
vent the abrupt change in the output due to an abrupt change in the remote setpoint value
(RSV).
l Set Parameters of the PID Control Algorithms

The set parameters of the PID control algorithms:
Proportional band (P): 0 to 1000 % (*1)
Integral time (I): 0.1 to 10000 seconds
Derivative time (D): 0 to 10000 seconds (*1)
*1: The control action bypass function is enabled when 0 is set.
IMPORTANT
If the integral time of control block is set to zero or to a value beyond the range, the control
algorithm stops functioning. No process alarm or system alarm message is initiated for this
trouble. So that when using a general purpose calculation block or sequence table block to
set the value of integral time, it is necessary to enforce the value within the proper range and
to avoid it to be set to zero.

n Control Action Bypass

The PID Controller Block can perform the following two types of control action by bypassing
proportional and/or derivative actions among the proportional, integral and derivative actions:
Table 1.5-4 Control Action Bypass

Control actions bypassed Control actions after bypassing Set parameter setpoint
Derivative (D) Proportional (P)+integral (I) P0, D=0
Proportional (P), derivative (D) Integral (I) P=0
To set the control action bypass, specify 0 to the set parameter P or D, as shown in the table
above. The proportional gain (Kp) is fixed to 1 when only integral action is required.
n Data Items - PID

Table 1.5-5 Data Items of PID Controller Block (PID) (1/2)
Entry Permitted
Data Item Data Name Range (*2) Default (*2)
or Not (*1)
MODE Block mode x ----- O/S (MAN)
AF ----- 0
tion
AOFS ----- 0
tion
nection destination
SV Setpoint value (*4) SL
neering unit as PV
CSV Cascade setpoint value x SL
neering unit as PV
RSV Remote setpoint value (*5) SL
neering unit as PV
DV Control deviation value 0
neering unit as PV
VN I/O compensation value x ----- 0
MV Manipulated output value (*6) MV engineering unit value MSL
Remote manipulated output Value in the same engi-
RMV (*7) MSL
value neering unit as MV
RLV1 Reset limit value 1 MSL
neering unit as MV
neering unit as MV
HH x SL to SH SH
point
LL x SL to SH SL
point

Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
neering unit as PV
*2: SH: PV scale high limit
*4: Entry is permitted when the data mode is CAS or RCAS
*5: Entry is permitted when the block mode is RCAS
*6: Entry is permitted when the block mode is MAN
*7: Entry is permitted when the block mode is ROUT
Table 1.5-6 Data Items of PID Controller Block (PID) (2/2)

Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
Manipulated variable high-
MH x MSL to MSH MSH
limit setpoint
Manipulated variable low-
ML x MSL to MSH MSL
limit setpoint
P Proportional band x 0 to 1000 % 100 %
I Integral time x 0.1 to 10,000 seconds 20 seconds
D Derivative time x 0 to 10,000 seconds 0 second
GW Gap width x 0 to (SH - SL) 0.0
DB Deadband x 0 to (SH - SL) 0.0
CK Compensation gain x -10.000 to 10.000 1.000
CB Compensation bias x ----- 0.000
Preset manipulated output
PMV x MSL to MSH MSL
value
TSW Tracking switch x 0, 1 0
CSW Control switch x 0, 1 0
PSW Preset MV switch x 0, 1, 2, 3 0
RSW Pulse width reset switch x 0, 1 0
BSW Backup switch x 0, 1 0
OPHI Output high-limit index x MSL to MSH MSH
OPLO Output low-limit index x MSL to MSH MSL
neering unit as PV
neering unit as PV
MSH MV scale high limit -----
neering unit as MV

Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
MSL MV scale low limit -----
neering unit as MV
SEE
ALSO For more information about valid block modes of the PID block, refer to:

<1.6 Sampling PI Controller Block (PI-HLD)> 1-59
1.6 Sampling PI Controller Block (PI-HLD)

Sampling PI Controller Block (PI-HLD) stops after performing each control action and waits for
the result to come out. This block may be used to control processes with a long dead time or
for the control that relies on the data from sampling unit of analyzers.
n Sampling PI Controller Block (PI-HLD)

Connection
The figure below shows a function block diagram of Sampling PI Controller Block (PI-HLD):

CSV
AUT
SV
MAN
RSV
RCAS
MAN
Control CAS/AUT
Input Output
processing
ROUT
SUB
Figure 1.6-1 Function Block Diagram of Sampling PI Controller Block (PI-HLD)
nals of the Sampling PI Controller Block (PI-HLD):
Table 1.6-1 Connection Methods and Connected destinations of the I/O Terminals of Sampling PI Con-
troller Block (PI-HLD)
Process I/O
Measure-
IN x x x
ment input
Setting in-
SET x x
put
Manipu-
OUT x x x x
lated output
Auxiliary
SUB x x x
output
Reset sig-
RL1 x x x
nal 1 input
Reset sig-
RL2 x x x
nal 2 input
Compensa-
BIN x x x
tion input
Tracking
TIN x x x
signal input
Tracking
TSI x x x x
SW input

Process I/O
Interlock
INT x x x x
SW input
Blank: Connectio not allowed
n Function of Sampling PI Controller Block (PI-HLD)

The PI-HLD block performs input processing, control computation processing, output pro-
cessing, and alarm processing.
The only processing timing available for the PI-HLD block is a periodic startup. Selections
od, the medium-speed scan period (*1), and the high-speed scan period.
SEE
for the PI-HLD block, refer to:
l Control Computation Processing of Sampling PI Controller Block (PI-HLD)

The table below shows the control computation processing functions of the Sampling PI Con-
troller Block (PI-HLD):
Table 1.6-2 Control Computation Processing Functions of Sampling PI Controller Block (PI-HLD)
Performs PI control computation for each sampling period only dur-
PI control computation with hold ing the specified control time, and holds the manipulated output val-
ue (MV) for the remainder of the period.
Changes the proportional gain in accordance with the degree of de-
Non-linear gain viation so that the relationship between the deviation and manipu-
lated output change (MV) becomes nonlinear.
Gap action
Non-linear gain
Squared devia- Changes the proportional gain according to the degree of deviation
tion action when the deviation is within the gap width (GW) range.
Converts the manipulated output change (MV) during each control
Control output action period to an actual manipulated output value (MV). The control out-
put actions include positional type and velocity type.

Reset limit function nection destinations of input terminals RL1 and RL2 during PID con-
trol computation. This function prevents reset windup.
Adjusts the manipulated output change (MV) to 0 when the devi-
Deadband action ation is within the deadband range, in order to stop the manipulated
output value (MV) from changing.
I/O compensation
Output compen- Adds the I/O compensated value (VN) received from outside to the
sation output signal of the PID control computation.
(PV).
(SVH, SVL) .
Bumpless switching
Control hold rent block mode. During control hold, the output action is performed
normally.
satisfied.
ing in the CAS or PRD mode, so that the control action is continued
AUT fallback
using values set by the operator. This action takes place when the
AUT fallback condition becomes satisfied.
Block mode change interlock matically, while disabling the stopped function blocks from changing
to the automatic operating mode.
changed to PRD.
SEE
ALSO For more information about control computation processing functions of Sampling PI Controller Block (PI-
HLD), refer to:

n PI Control Computation with Hold

The PI control computation with hold is a control algorithm of the Sampling PI Controller
Block. It is a control computation function that performs PI control computation to obtain a ma-
nipulated output value (MV) and manipulated output change (MV).
l Characteristics of the PI Control Computation with Hold

The PI control computation with hold action performs PI control for each sampling period (TC)
only during the control time (TC) in an automatic operating mode (AUT, CAS or RCAS), and
holds manipulated output for the remainder of the period (TS - TC).
The figure below shows the sampling PI control action:
MV T (control period)
Output hold
PI computation
output
Time
TC TC
(control time)
TS (sampling period) TS
Figure 1.6-2 Sampling PI Control Action
Set the sampling period and control time in advance, in accordance with the following princi-
ple:
Sampling period
TS = L+T (2 to 3)
L : Dead time of the process (second)

T : Lag constant of the process (second)
Control time
TS
TC=
10
The value of sampling period represents the time required for the process variable (PV) to be
stabilized after the manipulated output is actually output to the process and its effects are
transmitted throughout the process. When the shortest period of a major disturbance affecting
the process is Tn, if Tn is shorter than the sampling period, the control may become impossi-
ble. Therefore, refer the following expression to adjust the sampling period shorter than Tn:
Tn
TS
5
The sampling period and control time are considered as set parameters, and their setting can
be changed during operation.

l Computational Expressions of the PI Control Algorithm with Hold

The computational expressions of the PI control algorithm:
T
MVn=Kp Ks PVn+ En
TI
En=PVn-SVn
100
Kp=
PB
MSH-MSL
Ks=
SH-SL
MVn : Manipulated output change

Kp : Proportional gain
Ks : Scale conversion coefficient
PVn : Process variable change PVn=PVn-PVn-1 (engineering unit)
PVn : Process variable (engineering unit)
SVn : Setpoint value (engineering unit)
En : Deviation
T : Control period
PB : Proportional band (% unit)
TI : Integral time
SH PV scale high limit
The above PI control algorithm is the same as the PV proportional and derivative type PID
control algorithm (I-PD) of the PID Controller Block (PID) except that the former does not have
a derivative term.
l Set Parameters of the PI Control Algorithm with Hold

The following are set parameters for control computation processing of the PI control algo-
rithm with hold:
Sampling period (TS)
0 to 10000 seconds.
The default is 1 second.
Control time (TC)
0 to 10000 seconds.
Proportional band (P)
0 to 1000 %.
When P=0, the proportional action does not function but only the integral action is per-
formed.

The proportional gain Kp is 1 when only the integral action is performed.
Integral time (I)
0.1 to 10000 seconds.
IMPORTANT
l PI-HLD Action after Hold

PI-HLD Action after Hold
When PI-HLD starts the control calculation after its Hold period elapsed, the previous process
variable is used as the PVn-1 in proportional term computation, the following two methods can
be selected:
Use the PV right before the Hold status as the PVn-1
Use the current PV as the PVn-1 (Same as the PI-HLD in CENTUM-XL)
The two calculation methods can be selected on FCS properties sheet. Check the check box
of [CENTUM-XL compatible] in the column of [PI-HLD Control Action after Hold]. When this
option is checked, the PVn-1 in the control algorithm uses the current process variable PVn.
Otherwise, the PVn-1 in the control algorithm uses the process variable right before the Hold
started. By default, [CENTUM-XL compatible] is not checked.
l Externally Started Sampling PI Control Action

When 0 is set for the sampling period (TS), the externally started sampling PI control action
will take place, as shown in the figure below.
The externally started sampling PI control action starts control when a switch signal is re-
ceived from outside the Sampling PI Controller Block.
The externally started sampling PI control action starts PI control when the control switch
(CSW) is turned ON from outside the block during automatic operation. Once started, PI con-
trol will continue throughout the control time (TC). When the TC time has elapsed, output is
held and the control switch (CSW) is turned OFF until the next action is started.

CSW set set set
ON
OFF
T
(control period)
MV
Output hold
PI computation output
Time
TC TC TC
(control time)
Figure 1.6-3 Externally Started Sampling PI Control Action
The control switch (CSW) is turned ON by other function block, such as a sequence control
block.
When the control switch (CSW) is turned OFF forcibly from outside the block during the con-
trol time, output is held immediately.
n Data Items - PI-HLD

Table 1.6-3 Data Items of Sampling PI Controller Block (PI-HLD) (1/2)
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
AF ----- 0
tion
AOFS ----- 0
tion
nection destination
neering unit as PV
neering unit as PV
neering unit as PV
neering unit as PV

Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
RMV (*7) MSL
neering unit as MV
neering unit as MV
HH x SL to SH SH
point
LL x SL to SH SL
point
neering unit as PV
Table 1.6-4 Data Items of Sampling PI Controller Block (PI-HLD) (2/2)

Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
MH x MSL to MSH MSH
limit setpoint
ML x MSL to MSH MSL
limit setpoint
TS Sampling period x 0 to 10,000 seconds 1 second
TC Control time x 1 to 10,000 seconds 1 second
CK Compesation gain x -10.000 to 10.000 1.000
CB Compesation bias x ----- 0.000
value

Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
neering unit as PV
neering unit as PV
neering unit as MV
neering unit as MV
SEE
ALSO For more information about valid block modes of the PI-HLD block, refer to:

<1.7 PID Controller Block with Batch Switch (PID-BSW)> 1-68
1.7 PID Controller Block with Batch Switch

(PID-BSW)
PID Controller Block with Batch Switch (PID-BSW) outputs a high limit or low limit manipu-
lated output signal unconditionally when control deviation becomes large. This block may be
applied to batch reactor temperature control process.
n PID Controller Block with Batch Switch (PID-BSW)

Connection
The PID Controller Block with Batch Switch (PID-BSW) prevent overshooting so that the proc-
ess variable (PV) may be brought closer to the target value sooner.
The figure below shows a function block diagram of the PID Controller Block with Batch
Switch (PID-BSW):
SET RL1 RL2 TIN TSI INT
CAS (RLV1) (RLV2) (TSW)

CSV
AUT
SV
MAN
RSV
RCAS
MAN
Control CAS/AUT
Input Output
processing
ROUT
SUB
Figure 1.7-1 Function Block Diagram of PID Controller Block with Batch Switch (PID-BSW)
nals of the PID Controller Block with Batch Switch (PID-BSW):
Table 1.7-1 Connection Methods and Connected destinations of the I/O Terminals of PID Controller
Block with Batch Switch (PID-BSW)
Process I/O
Measure-
IN x x x
ment input
Setting in-
SET x x
put
Manipu-
OUT x x x x
lated output
Auxiliary
SUB x x x
output
Reset sig-
RL1 x x x
nal 1 input
Reset sig-
RL2 x x x
nal 2 input
Tracking
TIN x x x
signal input

Process I/O
Tracking
TSI x x x x
SW input
Interlock
INT x x x x
SW input
n Function of PID Controller Block with Batch Switch (PID-BSW)

The PID-BSW block performs input processing, control computation processing, output pro-
The only processing timing available for the PID-BSW block is a periodic startup. Selections
SEE
for the PID-BSW block, refer to:
l Control Computation Processing of PID Controller Block with Batch

Switch (PID-BSW)
The table below shows the control computation processing functions of PID Controller Block
with Batch Switch (PID-BSW).
Table 1.7-2 Control Computation Processing Functions of PID Controller Block with Batch Switch
(PID-BSW)
Control computation pro-
Description
cessing
Changes the manipulated output computational expression in accordance
PID with two-level output
with the value of control deviation. PID control computation is performed in a
switching
steady state.
Converts the manipulated output change (MV) during each control period
Control output action to an actual manipulated output value (MV). The control output actions in-
clude positional type and velocity type.
Switches the direction of the output action (reverse action or direct action) in
accordance with the increase or decrease in deviation.
Performs correction computation using values read from the connection des-
Reset limit function tinations of input terminals RL1 and RL2 during PID control computation.
This function prevents reset windup.
Process variable tracking Causes the setpoint value (SV) to agree with the process variable (PV).

Control computation pro-
Description
cessing
Setpoint value limiter Limits the setpoint value (SV) within the setpoint high/low limits (SVH, SVL).
Causes two of the three setpoint values (SV, CSV, RSV) to agree with the
remaining one.
Switches the manipulated output value (MV) without causing it to change
Bumpless switching abruptly when the block mode has been changed or when the manipulated
output value (MV) has been switched in a downstream block in cascade.
Changes the block mode to IMAN to temporarily suspend the control action.
Initialization manual This action takes place when the initialization manual condition becomes
satisfied.
Temporarily suspends the control action while maintaining the current block
Control hold mode.
During control hold, the output action is performed normally.
Changes the block mode to MAN to forcibly stop the control action. This ac-
MAN fallback
tion takes place when the MAN fallback condition becomes satisfied.
Changes the block mode to AUT when the function block is operating in the
CAS or PRD mode, so that the control action is continued using values set
AUT fallback
by the operator. This action takes place when the AUT fallback condition be-
comes satisfied.
Temporarily suspends the control action and switches to the computer back-
up mode when an error has been detected at a supervisory computer while
Computer failure
the function block is operating in the RCAS or ROUT mode. This action
takes place when the computer failure condition becomes satisfied.
Stops the control action of function blocks currently operating automatically,
Block mode change interlock while disabling the stopped function blocks from changing to the automatic
operating mode.
Outputs the cascade setpoint value (CSV) after converting it to a manipu-
PRD mode action
lated output value (MV) when the block mode has been changed to PRD.
SEE
ALSO For more information about control computation processing functions applied in PID Controller Block with
Batch Switch (PID-BSW), refer to:
n PID Control Computation with Two-Level Output Switching

In PID control computation with two-level output switching, the computational expression for a
manipulated output value (MV) is switched in accordance with the state of control deviation,
as shown below:
When the control deviation is negative and excessive.
When the control deviation is positive, or negative and extremely small.
The figure below shows an example of control action performed by the PID Controller Block
with Batch Switch (PID-BSW) when the control action direction is reverse:

DL (deviation alarm setpoint)
LK (lockup setpoint)
SV
PV
BIAS (bias setpoint)

MH
MV
Time
(1) (2) (1) (2)
(1) When the control deviation is negative and excessive

(2) When the control deviation is positive, or negative and extremely small
Figure 1.7-2 Example of Control Action (Reverse Action) Performed by PID Controller Block with
Batch Switch (PID-BSW)
l Control Algorithms when the Deviation is Negative and Excessive

The following expressions represent the algorithms of calculating the manipulated output val-
ue when the process variable (PV) is smaller than the setpoint value minus deviation alarm
setpoint (SV-| DL |) value:
When the control action direction is reverse
Manipulated output value (MV)=Manipulated variable high-limit setpoint (MH)
When the control action direction is direct
Manipulated output value (MV)=Manipulated variable low-limit setpoint (ML)
When the deviation immediately after the start of batch operation exceeds the deviation alarm
setpoint, the PID Controller Block with Batch Switch (PID-BSW) outputs a manipulated output
value (MV) that is the same as the manipulated variable high-limit setpoint (MH) or manipu-
lated variable low-limit setpoint (ML). As a result, the process variable quickly approaches the
setpoint value.
l Control Algorithms when the Control Deviation is Positive, or Negative but

Small
The following expressions represent the algorithms of calculating the control output value
when the process variable (PV) is larger than the setpoint value minus deviation alarm set-
point (SV-| DL |) value:
When the control action direction is Reverse
Manipulated output value (MV)=Manipulated variable high-limit setpoint (MH)Bias set-
point (BIAS). PID control computation is performed by using the result obtained from the
above calculation as an initial value.
When the control action direction is Direct
Manipulated output value (MV)=Manipulated variable low-limit setpoint (ML)+Bias set-
point (BIAS)
PID control computation is performed by using the result obtained from the above calculation
as an initial value. When the deviation becomes smaller than the deviation limit range, the
PID Controller Block with Batch Switch (PID-BSW) assumes that the process is stabilized and
switches the control algorithm to PID control. At this time, output resumes to the manipulated
variable high-limit setpoint (MH) or manipulated variable low-limit setpoint (ML) by vanishing

the bias setpoint (BIAS) value to prevent the manipulated output value (MV) from overshoot-
ing.
Use the Function Block Detail Builder to define the PID control algorithm.
Select one of the following algorithms:
Basic Type
Proportional PV Derivation Type PID Control (I-PID)
PV Derivative Type PID Control (PI-D)
Automatic Determination
Automatic Determination 2
The default is Automatic Determination 2.
SEE
ALSO For more information about PID control algorithm, refer to:
nPID Control Computation on page 1-51
l Lockup Function
Once the PID control action resumes, even when the deviation exceeds the deviation alarm
setpoint (DL), the manipulated output value (MV) does not immediately ramp to the manipu-
lated variable high-limit setpoint (MH) or manipulated output low-limit setpoint (ML). This is
because of the lockup function.
When the following condition exists, the manipulated output value (MV) does not change to
the manipulated variable high-limit setpoint (MH) if the control action direction is Reverse, nor
to the manipulated variable low-limit setpoint (ML) if the control action direction is Direct:
Condition
PV<SV-| DL |-LK
LK: Lockup setpoint
l Set Parameters of the PID Control Computation with Two-Level Output

Switching
The set parameters of the PID control computation with two-level output switching:
0 to 1000 %.
When P = 0, the proportional action does not function but only the integral action is per-
formed.
Integral time (I)
Derivative time (D)
0 to 10000 seconds.
When D=0, the derivative action does not function.
Deviation alarm setpoint (DL)
Engineering unit data between 0 and the PV scale span range limit.
The default is the scale span.
Bias setpoint (BIAS)
Engineering unit data within the MV scale span range.
The default is 0.

Lockup setpoint (LK)
Engineering unit data within the PV scale span range.
The default is 0.
Manipulated variable high-limit setpoint (MH)
Engineering unit data within the MV scale range.
The default is the MV scales high limit.
Manipulated variable low-limit setpoint (ML)
Engineering unit data within the MV scale range.
The default is the MV scales low limit.
IMPORTANT
n Data Items - PID-BSW

Table 1.7-3 Data Items of PID Controller Block with Batch Switch (PID-BSW) (1/2)
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
AF ----- 0
tion
AOFS ----- 0
tion
nection destination
neering unit as PV
neering unit as PV
neering unit as PV
neering unit as PV
RMV (*7) MSL
neering unit as MV
neering unit as MV

Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
HH x SL to SH SH
point
LL x SL to SH SL
point
neering unit as PV
Table 1.7-4 Data Items of PID Controller Block with Batch Switch (PID-BSW) (2/2)
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
MH x MSL to MSH MSH
limit setpoint
ML x MSL to MSH MSL
limit setpoint
LK Lockup setpoint x 0 to (SH - SL) 0.0
value
BIAS Bias setpoint value x 0 to (MSH - MSL) 0.0
neering unit as PV

Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
neering unit as PV
neering unit as MV
neering unit as MV
SEE
ALSO For more information about valid block modes of the PI-BSW block, refer to:

<1.8 Two-Position ON/OFF Controller Block (ONOFF), Enhanced Two-Position ON/OFF Controller Block
(ONOFF-E)> 1-76
1.8 Two-Position ON/OFF Controller Block

(ONOFF), Enhanced Two-Position ON/OFF
Controller Block (ONOFF-E)
The Two-Position ON/OFF Controller Block (ONOFF) performs control by ON/OFF action via
a single contact output. The Enhanced Two-Position ONOFF Controller Block (ONOFF-E)
functions the same but have the additional capability to connect to FF faceplate blocks and
fieldbus function blocks.
n Two-Position ON/OFF Controller Block (ONOFF), Enhanced Two-

Position ON/OFF Controller Block (ONOFF-E)
Connection
The ONOFF and ONOFF-E (*1) blocks turn On or Off the contact output according to the
result in comparing the process variable (PV) and setpoint value (SV).
*1: ONOFF-E block can be applied to all field control stations except standard PFCS. When using ONOFF-E block, it is necessa-
ry to add the option [DIOENH] on the [Constant] tab of the FCS properties sheet.
The figure below shows a function block diagram of the Two-Position ON/OFF Controller
Block (ONOFF or ONOFF-E) :
SET BIN INT
CAS (VN)
CSV
AUT
SV
MAN
RSV
RCAS
MAN
Control CAS/AUT
Input Output
processing
ROUT
(PV, PV) RMV
SUB
Figure 1.8-1 Function Block Diagram of ONOFF, ONOFF-E Block
nals of the Two-Position ON/OFF Controller Block (ONOFF):
Table 1.8-1 Connection Methods and Connected destinations of the I/O Terminals of Two-Position
ON/OFF Controller Block (ONOFF):
Connection method (*1) Connection destination (*1)
Process I/O
Measure-
IN x x x
ment input
Setting in-
SET x x
put
Manipu-
OUT x x x
lated output
Auxiliary
SUB x x x
output

(ONOFF-E)> 1-77
Process I/O
Compensa-
BIN x x x
tion input
Interlock
INT x x x x
SW input
nals of the Enhanced Two-Position ON/OFF Controller Block (ONOFF-E):
Table 1.8-2 Connection Methods and Connected destinations of the I/O Terminals of Enhanced Two-
Position ON/OFF Controller Block (ONOFF-E):
Process I/O
Measure-
IN x x x
ment input
Setting in-
SET x x
put
Manipu-
OUT x x x x
lated output
Auxiliary
SUB x x x
output
Compensa-
BIN x x x
tion input
Interlock
INT x x x x
SW input
n Function of Two-Position ON/OFF Controller Block (ONOFF) and

Enhanced Two-Position ON/OFF Controller Block (ONOFF-E)
The ONOFF and ONOFF-E blocks perform input processing, control computation process-
ing, output processing, and alarm processing.
The only processing timing available for the ONOFF and ONOFF-E blocks are a periodic
startup. Selections available for the scan period used to execute a periodic startup include
the basic scan period, the medium-speed scan period (*1), and the high-speed scan period.

(ONOFF-E)> 1-78
SEE
for the ONOFF, ONOFF-E block, refer to:
l Control Computation Processing of Two-Position ON/OFF Controller Block

(ONOFF) and Enhanced Two-Position ON/OFF Controller Block (ONOFF-E)
The table below shows the control computation processing functions of Two-Position ON/OFF
Controller Block (ONOFF or ONOFF-E):
Table 1.8-3 Control Computation Processing Functions of Two-Position ON/OFF Controller Block (ON-
OFF) and Enhanced Two-Position ON/OFF Controller Block (ONOFF-E)
Compares the deviation with ON/OFF hysteresis and obtains a manip-
ON/OFF two-position control
ulated output value (MV).
Control output action period to an actual manipulated output value (MV). The available con-
trol output actions are of positional type only.
put signal or control output signal of PID computation when the con-
I/O compensation
troller block is operating automatically. Only input compensation can
be used.
I/O compensa- Input compensa- Adds the I/O compensated value (VN) received from the outside to the
tion tion input signal of the PID control computation.
(PV).
SVL).
the remaining one.
becomes satisfied.
Control hold block mode.
isfied.
AUT fallback

(ONOFF-E)> 1-79
Computer failure puter while the function block is operating in the RCAS or ROUT
mode. This action takes place when the computer failure condition be-
comes satisfied.
Stops the control action of function blocks currently operating automat-
Block mode change interlock ically, while disabling the stopped function blocks from changing to the
SEE
ALSO For more information about the control computation processing functions applied in Two-Position ON/OFF
Controller Block (ONOFF and ONOFF-E), refer to:
l Output Processing Specific to Two-Position ON/OFF Controller Block

(ONOFF), Enhanced Two-Position ON/OFF Controller Block (ONOFF-E)
The ONOFF and ONOFF-E blocks perform two-position status output as output signal con-
version.
TIP The output tracking of ONOFF-E block can be set on the function block detail builder in related to the settings
of output processing. The ONOFF block does not have the capability of output tracking.
SEE
ALSO For more information about the output tracking, refer to:
4.5, Output Tracking in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
n ON/OFF Two-Position Control Computation

ON/OFF Hysteresis
The ON/OFF two-position control computation is a control algorithm of the Two-Position
ON/OFF Controller Block (ONOFF and ONOFF-E). This algorithm compares the deviation
(En=PVn-SVn) with positive or negative ON/OFF hysteresis and outputs the manipulated out-
put value (MV) by 0 % or 100 % based on the comparison result.
The action of the control algorithm varies with the control action directions.
l Control Algorithm in Direct Action

Performs computation that outputs the manipulated output value (MVn) by 100 % (ON) when
the deviation (En) exceeds the positive ON/OFF hysteresis value, and by 0 % (OFF) when the
deviation falls below the negative ON/OFF hysteresis value.
l Control Algorithm in Reverse Action

Performs computation that outputs the manipulated output value (MVn) by 0 % (OFF) when
the deviation (En) exceeds the positive ON/OFF hysteresis value, and by 100 % (ON) when
the deviation falls below the negative ON/OFF hysteresis value.
The figure below shows an example of the two-position ON/OFF control action:

(ONOFF-E)> 1-80
+
Deviation (En)
ON/OFF hysteresis
0
Time
Direct action Contact output status OFF ON OFF
Manipulated output value 0% 100 % 0%
Reverse action Contact output status ON OFF ON
Manipulated output value 100 % 0% 100 %
Figure 1.8-2 Example of the Two-Position ON/OFF Control Action
Use the Function Block Detail Builder to define the ON/OFF hysteresis value.
ON/OFF Hysteresis: Engineering unit data within the PV scale span range.
The default is a value equivalent to 1.0 % of the PV scale span.
n Two-Position Status Output

The ONOFF and ONOFF-E blocks perform two-position status output as output signal conver-
sion.
For the 2-position status output, a contact output (1 point) or a internal switch (1 point) desig-
nated to the OUT terminal is turned ON and OFF according to the manipulated output value
(MV).
The following table shows the relationship between the manipulated output value (MV) and
contact output status. Note that the manipulated output value (MV) is always expressed in
percentage (%).
Table 1.8-4 Relationship between Manipulated Output Value (MV) and Contact Output
Manipulated output value 0% 0.1 to 49.9 % 50 to 99.9 % 100 %
Contact output status OFF OFF ON ON
n Data Items - ONOFF, ONOFF-E

Table 1.8-5 Data Items of Two-Position ON/OFF Controller Block (ONOFF or ONOFF-E) (1/2)
Entry Permitted
Data Item Data Name Range Default (*2)
or Not (*1)

(ONOFF-E)> 1-81
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
AF ----- 0
tion
AOFS ----- 0
tion
nection destination
SV Set value (*4) SL
neering unit as PV
neering unit as PV
neering unit as PV
neering unit as PV
VN Input compensation value x ----- 0
MV Manipulated output value (*6) 0 to 100 % 0%
Remote manipulated output
RMV (*7) 0 to 100 % 0%
value
*2: SL: PV scale low limit
Table 1.8-6 Data Items of Two-Position ON/OFF Controller Block (ONOFF or ONOFF-E) (2/2)
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
HH x SL to SH SH
point
LL x SL to SH SL
point
neering unit as PV
PMV x 0 to 100 % 0%
value
PSW Preset MV switch x 0, 1, 2, x 0

(ONOFF-E)> 1-82
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
neering unit as PV
neering unit as PV
SEE
ALSO For more information about valid block modes of the ONOFF and ONOFF-E blocks, refer to:

<1.9 Three-Position ON/OFF Controller Block (ONOFF-G), Enhanced Three-Position ON/OFF Controller Block
(ONOFF-GE)> 1-83
1.9 Three-Position ON/OFF Controller Block

(ONOFF-G), Enhanced Three-Position
ON/OFF Controller Block (ONOFF-GE)
The Three-Position ON/OFF Controller Block (ONOFF-G) performs control by ON and OFF
actions via two contact outputs. The Enhanced Three-Position ONOFF Controller Block (ON-
OFF-GE) functions the same but have the additional capability to connect to FF faceplate
blocks and fieldbus function blocks. Moreover, the output terminals for the two contacts can
be defined separately so that the two irrelevant channels can be used.
n Three-Position ON/OFF Controller Block (ONOFF-G), Enhanced

Three-Position ON/OFF Controller Block (ONOFF-GE)
Connection
The ONOFF-G and ONOFF-GE (*1) Blocks change the ON/OFF status of two contact out-
puts depending on whether a process variable (PV) is in the Low/Middle/High position com-
pared to a setpoint value (SV).
*1: ONOFF-GE block can be applied to all field control stations except standard PFCS. When using ONOFF-GE block, it is nec-
essary to add the option [DIOENH] on the [Constant] tab of the FCS properties sheet.
The figure below shows the ONOFF-G Block diagram.

SET BIN INT
CAS (VN)
CSV
AUT
SV
MAN
RSV
RCAS
MAN
Control CAS/AUT
Input Output
processing
ROUT
(PV, PV) RMV
SUB
Figure 1.9-1 Function Block Diagram of Three-Position ON/OFF Controller Block (ONOFF-G)
nals of the Three-Position ON/OFF Controller Block (ONOFF-G):
Table 1.9-1 Connection Methods and Connected destinations of the I/O Terminals of Three-Position
ON/OFF Controller Block (ONOFF-G):
Process I/O
Measure-
IN x x x
ment input
Setting in-
SET x x
put
Manipu-
OUT x x x
lated output

(ONOFF-GE)> 1-84
Process I/O
Auxiliary
SUB x x x
output
Compensa-
BIN x x x
tion input
Interlock
INT x x x x
SW input
The figure below shows the ONOFF-GE Block diagram.

SET BIN INT
CAS (VN)
CSV
AUT
SV
MAN
RSV
RCAS
MAN
Control CAS/AUT
Input Output
IN PV computation MV OUT1
processing
ROUT
OUT2
(PV, PV) RMV
SUB
Figure 1.9-2 Function Block Diagram of Three-Position ON/OFF Controller Block (ONOFF-GE)
nals of the Enhanced Three-Position ON/OFF Controller Block (ONOFF-GE):
Table 1.9-2 Connection Methods and Connected destinations of the I/O Terminals of Enhanced Three-
Position ON/OFF Controller Block (ONOFF-GE):
Process I/O
Measure-
IN x x x
ment input
Setting in-
SET x x
put
Manipu-
OUT1 x x x x x
lated output
Manipu-
OUT2 x x x x x
lated output
Auxiliary
SUB x x x
output
Compensa-
BIN x x x
tion input
Interlock
INT x x x x
SW input

(ONOFF-GE)> 1-85
IMPORTANT
If the OUT1 terminal and the OUT2 terminal are connected to different output modules or if
OUT1 terminal and the OUT2 terminal are connected to FF faceplate blocks or fieldbus func-
tion blocks, the simultaneity of the two outputs are not guaranteed.
n Function of Three-Position ON/OFF Controller Block (ONOFF-G),

Enhanced Three-Position ON/OFF Controller Block (ONOFF-GE)
The ONOFF-G and ONOFF-GE blocks perform input processing, control computation pro-
cessing, output processing, and alarm processing.
The only processing timing available for the ONOFF-G and ONOFF-GE blocks are a period-
ic startup. Selections available for the scan period used to execute a periodic startup include
the basic scan period, the medium-speed scan period (*1), and the high-speed scan period.
SEE
for the ONOFF-G and ONOFF-GE blocks, refer to:
l Control Computation Processing of Three-Position ON/OFF Controller

Block (ONOFF-G), Enhanced Three-Position ON/OFF Controller Block
(ONOFF-GE)
The table below shows the control computation processing functions of the Three-Position
ON/OFF Controller Block (ONOFF-G, ONOFF-GE):
Table 1.9-3 Control Computation Processing Functions of Three-Position ON/OFF Controller Block
(ONOFF-G, ONOFF-GE)
Compares the deviation with ON/OFF hysteresis and obtains a manip-
ON/OFF three-position control
ulated output value (MV).
Control output action period to an actual manipulated output value (MV). The available con-
trol output actions are of positional type only.
Switches the direction of the output action (reverse action or direct ac-
tion) in accordance with the increase or decrease in deviation.
put signal or control output signal of PID computation when the con-
I/O compensation
troller block is operating automatically. Only input compensation can
be used.
I/O compensa- Input compensa- Adds the I/O compensated value (VN) received from the outside to the
tion tion input signal of the PID control computation.

(ONOFF-GE)> 1-86
(PV).
SVL).
the remaining one.
becomes satisfied.
Control hold block mode. During control hold, the output action is performed nor-
mally.
isfied.
AUT fallback
mode. This action takes place when the computer failure condition be-
comes satisfied.
Stops the control action of function blocks currently operating automat-
Block mode change interlock ically, while disabling the stopped function blocks from changing to the
SEE
ALSO For more information about the control computation processing functions applied in Three-Position ON/OFF
Controller Block (ONOFF, ONOFF-GE) , refer to:
l Output Processing Specific to Three-Position ON/OFF Controller Block

(ONOFF-G), Enhanced Three-Position ON/OFF Controller Block (ONOFF-
GE)
The ONOFF-G and ONOFF-GE blocks perform three-position status output as output signal
conversion.
TIP The output tracking of ONOFF-GE block can be set on the function block detail builder in related to the set-
tings of output processing. The ONOFF-G block does not have the capability of output tracking.
SEE
ALSO For more information about the output tracking, refer to:
4.5, Output Tracking in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
n ON/OFF Three-Position Control Computation

ON/OFF Hysteresis
The ON/OFF three-position control computation is a control algorithm of the 3-Position
ON/OFF Controller Block (ONOFF-G, ONOFF-GE). This algorithm compares the deviation
(En=PVn-SVn) with neutral status range (DB) that includes an ON/OFF hysteresis and outputs
the manipulated output value (MV) by 0 %, 50 % or 100 % based on the comparison result.

(ONOFF-GE)> 1-87
The action of the control algorithm varies with the control action directions.
Use the Function Block Detail Builder to define the ON/OFF hysteresis.
ON/OFF Hysteresis: Engineering unit data within the PV scale span range.
The default is the value equivalent to 2.0 % of the PV scale span.
l Control Algorithm in Direct Action

The figure below shows the ON/OFF hysteresis when the control action direction is direct:
Neutral status range (DB) ON/OFF hysteresis (HYS)
(3)
+ (4)
(2) (5)
0
Time
Deviation (En)
- (1)
(6)
Direct action Contact 1 output status OFF ON OFF
Contact 2 output status ON OFF ON
Manipulated output value 0% 50 % 100 % 50 % 0%
Manipulated output value (MV) when the deviation (En) is increasing

(1) MV=0 %: En<-(| DB |-HYS)
(2) MV=50 %: -(| DB |-HYS)En<| DB |
(3) MV=100 %: | DB |En
Manipulated output value (MV) when the deviation (En) is decreasing

(1) MV=100 %: | DB |-HYS<En
(2) MV=50 %: -| DB |<En| DB |-HYS
(3) MV=0 %: En-| DB |
Figure 1.9-3 ON/OFF Hysteresis in Direct Action
l Control Algorithm in Reverse Action

The figure below shows the ON/OFF hysteresis when the control action direction is reverse:

(ONOFF-GE)> 1-88
Neutral status range (DB) ON/OFF hysteresis (HYS)
(3)
+ (4)
(2) (5)
0
Time
Deviation (En)
- (1)
(6)
Reverse action Contact 1 output status ON OFF ON
Contact 2 output status OFF ON OFF
Manipulated output value 100 % 50 % 0% 50 % 100 %
Manipulated output value (MV) when the deviation (En) is increasing

(1) MV=100 %: En<-(| DB |-HYS)
(2) MV=50 %: -(| DB |-HYS)En<| DB |
(3) MV=0 %: | DB |En
Manipulated output value (MV) when the deviation (En) is decreasing

(1) MV=0 %: | DB |-HYS<En
(2) MV=50 %: -| DB |<En| DB |-HYS
(3) MV=100 %: En-| DB |
Figure 1.9-4 ON/OFF Hysteresis in Reverse Action
l Set Parameter of ON/OFF Three-Position Control Computation

The parameter of the Three-Position ON/OFF Controller Block (ONOFF-G, ONOFF-GE):
Neutral status range (DB): Engineering unit data within the PV scale range.
The default is 0.
n Three-Position Status Output

The ONOFF-G and ONOFF-GE blocks perform three-position status output as output signal
conversion.
In the 3-position status output, the contact output (2 points) are turned ON or OFF according
to the manipulated output value (MV).
The following table shows the contact output status in relationship to the manipulated output
value (MV) at 0 %, 50 %, 100 % and other instances. Note that the manipulated output value
(MV) is always expressed in percentage (%).
Table 1.9-4 Relationship of the Manipulated Output Value (MV) and Contact Output Status (At 0 %, 50
% and 100 %)
Manipulated output val-
0% 50 % 100 %
ue
Contact 1 output status OFF OFF ON
Contact 2 output status ON OFF OFF

(ONOFF-GE)> 1-89
Table 1.9-5 Relationship of the Manipulated Output Value (MV) and Contact Output Status (Not at the 0
%, 50 % and 100 %)
Manipulated output val-
0 to 24.9 % 25 to 74.9 % 75 to 100 %
ue
Contact 1 output status OFF OFF ON
Contact 2 output status ON OFF OFF
When connect process I/O contacts to the three-position output, only one contact number
need to be defined to the OUT terminal of the ONOFF-G block. This number will become the
first contact output of the ONOFF-G block. Its succeeding number contact will be automatical-
ly assigned to be the second contact output of the ONOFF-G block. When define the first con-
tact point, make sure that the succeeding contact is not assigned for other contact output
module.
When the ONOFF-GE block is configured for tree-position status outputs, the OUT1 terminal
of the ONOFF-GE block can be designated with a contact channel number as the first output
and the OUT2 terminal can be designated with a different contact channel number as the sec-
ond output.
n Data Items - ONOFF-G, ONOFF-GE

Table 1.9-6 Data Items of Three-Position ON/OFF Controller Block (ONOFF-G, ONOFF-GE) (1/2)
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
AF ----- 0
tion
AOFS ----- 0
tion
nection destination
neering unit as PV
neering unit as PV
neering unit as PV
neering unit as PV
RMV (*7) 0 to 100 % 0%
value

(ONOFF-GE)> 1-90
Table 1.9-7 Data Items of Three-Position ON/OFF Controller Block (ONOFF-G, ONOFF-GE) (2/2)
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
HH x SL to SH SH
point
LL x SL to SH SL
point
neering unit as PV
SVH Setpoint high-limit x SL to SH SH
SVL Setpoint low-limit x SL to SH SL
DB Neutral status range x 0 to (SH - SL) 0.0
PMV x 0 to 100 % 0%
value
neering unit as PV
neering unit as PV
SEE
ALSO For more information about valid block modes of the ONOFF-G, ONOFF-GE blocks, refer to:

<1.10 Time-Proportioning ON/OFF Controller Block (PID-TP)> 1-91
1.10 Time-Proportioning ON/OFF Controller

Block (PID-TP)
The Time-Proportioning ON/OFF Controller Block (PID-TP) changes ON time of contact out-
put proportional to the result of the PID control computation. This block is used for tempera-
ture control of an electric furnace.
n Time-Proportioning ON/OFF Controller Block (PID-TP)

Connection
Time-Proportioning ON/OFF Controller Block (PID-TP) changes ON/OFF time ratio in propor-
tion to the manipulated output value (MV) obtained by PID control computation to the overall
ON/OFF period. Only the basic scan-cycle can be applied to PID-TP.
The figure below shows the function block diagram of Time-Proportioning ON/OFF Controller
Block (PID-TP):
SET BIN RL1 RL2 INT
CAS (VN) (RLV1) (RLV2)

CSV
AUT
SV
MAN
RSV
RCAS
MAN
Control CAS/AUT
Input Output
processing
ROUT
SUB
Figure 1.10-1 Function Block Diagram of Time-Proportioning ON/OFF Controller Block (PID-TP)
nals of the Time-Proportioning ON/OFF Controller Block (PID-TP):
Table 1.10-1 Connection Methods and Connected destinations of the I/O Terminals of Time-Propor-
tioning ON/OFF Controller Block (PID-TP):
Process I/O
Measure-
IN x x x
ment input
Setting in-
SET x x
put
Manipu-
OUT x x
lated output
Auxiliary
SUB x x x
output
Reset sig-
RL1 x x x
nal 1 input
Reset sig-
RL2 x x x
nal 2 input

Process I/O
Compensa-
BIN x x x
tion input
Interlock
INT x x x x
SW input
n Function of Time-Proportioning ON/OFF Controller Block (PID-TP)

The PID-TP block performs input processing, control computation processing, output process-
The only processing timing available for the PID-TP block is a periodic startup. Moreover, only
the basic scan period can be selected as the scan period to execute the periodic startup.
SEE
for the PID-TP block, refer to:
l Control Computation Processing of Time-Proportioning ON/OFF Controller

Block (PID-TP)
The table below shows the control computation processing functions of the Time-Proportion-
ing ON/OFF Controller Block (PID-TP):
Table 1.10-2 Control Computation Processing Functions of Time-Proportioning ON/OFF Controller

Block (PID-TP)
Performs integral actions in accordance with changes in the set-
PV proportional and derivative PID con-
point value (SV). This ensures stable control characteristics even
trol
when the setpoint value changes abruptly. (*1)
Changes the proportional gain in accordance with the degree of
Non-linear gain deviation so that the relationship between the deviation and ma-
nipulated output change (MV) becomes nonlinear.
Gap action
Non-linear gain
Squared deviation Changes the proportional gain according to the degree of devia-
action tion when the deviation is within the gap width (GW) range.
Control output action trol period to an actual manipulated output value (MV). The control
output actions are of positional type only. (*2)

Reset limit function nection destinations of input terminals RL1 and RL2 during PID
control computation. This function prevents reset windup.
Adjusts the manipulated output change (MV) to 0 when the de-
Deadband action viation is within the deadband range, in order to stop the manipu-
lated output value (MV) from changing.
I/O compensation
Output compensa- Adds the I/O compensated value (VN) received from outside to the
tion output signal of the PID control computation.
(PV).
(SVH, SVL).
condition is established.
Control hold rent block mode.
Changes the block mode to MAN to forcibly stop the control ac-
MAN fallback tion. This action takes place when the MAN fallback condition is
established.
Changes the block mode to AUT when the function block is oper-
ating in the CAS or PRD mode, so that the control action is contin-
AUT fallback
ued using values set by the operator. This action takes place when
the AUT fallback condition is established.
puter backup mode when an error is detected by supervisory com-
mode. This action takes place when the computer failure condition
is established.
Stops the automatic control action of function blocks. And prevents
Interlock on block mode change the function blocks currently operating in manual mode from
changing to automatic mode.
*1: On FFCS series, KFCS2, KFCS, LFCS2, and LFCS, the PID control algorithm can be selected on the Function Block Detail
Builder. The default is PV proportional and derivative type PID control (I-PD).
*2: On FFCS series, KFCS2, KFCS, LFCS2, and LFCS, the PID output action can be selected as Velocity Type on the Function
Block Detail Builder. However, the default is Positional Type.
SEE
ALSO For more information about control computation processing functions applied in the Time-Proportioning
ON/OFF Controller Block (PID-TP), refer to:
l Output Processing Specific to Time-Proportioning ON/OFF Controller

Block (PID-TP)
The PID-TP block performs time-proportioning ON/OFF output as output signal conversion.

n PV Proportional and Derivative Type PID Control (I-PD)

The PV proportional and derivative type PID control algorithm (I-PI) is a control algorithm of
the Time-Proportioning ON/OFF Controller Block (PID-TP).
This algorithm performs only integral actions when the setpoint value changes, and ensures
stable control characteristics even when the setpoint value changes abruptly by a numerical
value entry.
At the same time, the algorithm ensures proper control in response to the characteristic
changes occurring in the controlled process, load variations and disturbances by performing
proportional, derivative and integral Control Action accordingly.
l Computational Expression of the PV Proportional and Derivative Type of

PID Control
The computational expression of the PV proportional and derivative type of PID control:
T TD
MVn=Kp Ks PVn+ En+ (PVn)
TI T
PVn : Process variable change PVn=PVn-PVn-1
l Set Parameters of the PV Proportional and Derivative Type of PID Control

The parameters the PV proportional and derivative type of PID control (I-PID):
0 to 1000 %
When P=0, only the integral action is performed.
When P=0, the proportional gain Kp=1.
Integral time (I)
0.1 to 10000 seconds
Derivative time (D)
0 to 10000 seconds
No derivative action is performed when D=0.
IMPORTANT
n Control Algorithms Other Than PV Proportional and Derivative (I-

PD) : FFCS Series/KFCS2/KFCS/LFCS2/LFCS
For control computation, the PID-TP block holds the same control algorithms as a PID control-
ler block. The algorithms are:

The control algorithm can be specified on the Function Block Detail Builder:
Choose one from the followings.
The default is "PV proportional and derivative type PID control (I-PD)."
When the block mode of the PID Controller Block is remote cascade (RCAS), the PID control
algorithm [Automatic determination] and [Automatic determination 2] will act as follows:
Automatic determination type: Same actions as in the cascade (CAS) mode.
Automatic determination type 2: Same actions as in the automatic (AUT) mode.
SEE
ALSO For more information about PV proportional and derivative type PID control (I-PD) algorithm, refer to:
nPV Proportional and Derivative Type PID Control (I-PD) on page 1-94
For more information about the control algorithms other than PV proportional and derivative type PID control
(I-PD), refer to:
n Time-Proportioning ON/OFF Output

Time-Proportioning ON/OFF Period
The PID-TP block performs time-proportioning ON/OFF output as output signal conversion.
In the time-proportioning ON/OFF output, a contact output (1 point) defined to the OUT termi-
nal is turned ON for the period of time proportioning to the manipulated output value (MV)
within the ON/OFF period.
Proportional to manipulated output value (MV)
ON
OFF
Time
ON/OFF period (constant)
Output value (MV value) (%)

On time (sec.) = ON/OFF period (sec.)
100 (%)
Figure 1.10-2 Operation of Time-Proportioning ON/OFF Output
The time-proportioning ON/OFF output is always off against 0 % and on against 100 % of the
manipulated output value (MV) respectively. For instance, if the ON/OFF period is 10 seconds
and manipulated output value (MV) is 80 %, the ON time will be 8 seconds.
The time-proportioning ON/OFF period is set through the Function Block Detail Builder.
Time-proportioning ON/OFF Period: 1.00 to 256.00 seconds

Default is 1.00 second.
If there are multiple PID-TP blocks, their simultaneous turning on at the beginning of the
ON/OFF period will cause a large fluctuation in the load of power supply for the final control
element (such as heaters). To reduce such load fluctuation, the phases of PID-TP blocks
ON/OFF outputs are automatically shifted.
Phasing the ON/OFF period of the function blocks. The phasing is performed according
to the internal block numbers so as to prevent the multiple blocks ON/OFF in the same
phase (*1).
Phasing the ON/OFF period of the I/O modules. For the time-proportioning ON/OFF
pulse period in the Details Setting dialogue box of IOM Builder, set the same value as
the time-proportioning ON/OFF period specified with Function Block Detail Builder. In
addition, specify Operation start offset in the Details Setting dialogue box of IOM Build-
er so as to prevent a heavy load caused by multiple outputs ON/OFF in the same period
(*2).
*1: The function is supported in SFCS and PFCS
*2: The function is supported in FFCS series, KFCS2, KFCS, LFCS2, and LFCS
IMPORTANT
After FCS initial start, the PID-TP MV will be forced to 0 (MSL). The MV saved by [Save tun-
ing parameter] command will be ignored.
n Data Items - PID-TP

Table 1.10-3 Data Items of Time-Proportioning ON/OFF Controller Block (PID-TP) (1/2)
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
AF ----- 0
tion
AOFS ----- 0
tion
nection destination
neering unit as PV
neering unit as PV
neering unit as PV
neering unit as PV
RMV (*7) 0 to 100 % 0%
value

Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
RLV1 Reset limit value1 0 to 100 % 0%
RLV2 Reset limit value 2 0 to 100 % 0%
HH x SL to SH SH
point
LL x SL to SH SL
point
neering unit as PV
Table 1.10-4 Data Items of Time-Proportioning ON/OFF Controller Block (PID-TP) (2/2)
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
MH x 0 to 100 % 100 %
limit setpoint
ML x 0 to 100 % 0%
limit setpoint
PMV x 0 to 100 % 0%
value
OPHI Output high-limit index x 0 to 100 % 100 %
OPLO Output low-limit index x 0 to 100 % 0%

Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
neering unit as PV
neering unit as PV
SEE
ALSO For more information about valid block modes of the PID-TP block, refer to:

<1.11 PD Controller Block with Manual Reset (PD-MR)> 1-99
1.11 PD Controller Block with Manual Reset

(PD-MR)
PD Controller Block with Manual Reset (PD-MR) performs proportional-derivative (PD) control
function. This block may be applied to programmed temperature control process.
n PD Controller Block with Manual Reset (PD-MR)

Connection
The PD Controller Block with Manual Reset (PD-MR) performs proportional (P) and derivative
(D) control, while the integral (I) may be manually set to be applied to the control function.
In programmed temperature control process, operating conditions do not remain the same
throughout the process time. For example, a chemical process is accompanied by momentary
generations of intense heat. In this case, among all PID actions of the controller block the in-
tegral (I) actions may be weakened for a specific period of time during operation so that con-
trol is performed only by proportional and derivative (PD) actions. In this type of process, it is
necessary to set a wide proportional band, as a long dead time or large process time constant
tends to cause hunting if an integral (I) action is performed.
By performing only proportional-derivative (PD) actions, the proportional band (P) can be nar-
rowed. In addition, overshooting can be inhibited by shift the control phase by derivative (D)
actions to achieve the better control result.
The figure below shows the function block diagram of PD Controller Block with Manual Reset
(PD-MR):
SET BIN TIN TSI INT
CAS (VN) (TSW)

CSV
AUT
SV
MAN
RSV
RCAS
MAN
Control CAS/AUT
Input Output
processing
ROUT
SUB
Figure 1.11-1 Function Block Diagram of PD Controller Block with Manual Reset (PD-MR)
nals of the PD Controller Block with Manual Reset (PD-MR):
Table 1.11-1 Connection Methods and Connected destinations of the I/O Terminals of PD Controller
Block with Manual Reset (PD-MR)
Process I/O
Measure-
IN x x x
ment input
Setting in-
SET x x
put
Manipu-
OUT x x x x
lated output

Process I/O
Auxiliary
SUB x x x
output
Compensa-
BIN x x x
tion input
Tracking
TIN x x x
signal input
Tracking
TSI x x x x
SW input
Interlock
INT x x x x
SW input
n Function of PD Controller Block with Manual Reset (PD-MR)

The PD-MR block performs input processing, control computation processing, output pro-
The only processing timing available for the PD-MR block is a periodic startup. Selections
SEE
for the PD-MR block, refer to:
l Control Computation Processing of PD Controller Block with Manual Reset

(PD-MR)
The table below shows the control computation processing functions of the PD Controller
Block with Manual Reset (PD-MR):
Table 1.11-2 Control Computation Processing Functions of PD Controller Block with Manual Reset
(PD-MR)
PD control with manual reset Performs PD actions. The reset value (MR) is set manually.
Control output action trol period to an actual manipulated output value (MV). The availa-
ble control output actions are of positional type only.

input signal or control output signal of PID computation when the
I/O compensation
controller block is operating automatically. Only input compensa-
tion can be used.
I/O compensation
(PV).
(SVH, SVL).
Bumpless switching
Prevents abrupt changes in the manipulated output value (MV) by
Bumpless switching Balance action initializing the balance term in the manipulated output computation-
al expression.
Control hold rent block mode.
satisfied.
ing in the CAS or PRD mode, so that the control action is contin-
AUT fallback
ued using values set by the operator. This action takes place when
the AUT fallback condition becomes satisfied.
Block mode change interlock matically, while disabling the stopped function blocks from chang-
ing to the automatic operating mode.
changed to PRD.
SEE
ALSO For more information about the control computation processing available with the PD Controller Block with
Manual Reset (PD-MR), refer to:
n PD Control with Manual Reset

The PD control with manual reset performs proportional and derivative (PD) actions. The re-
set value (MR) must be set manually.

l Computational Expression of the PD Control with Manual Reset

The computational expression of the PD control with manual reset:
TD
CALCn=Kp Ks En+ PVn +MR+BLn
T
En=PVn-SVn
100
Kp=
PB
MSH-MSL
Ks=
SH-SL
T
BLn= 1- BLn-1
Tbl
CALCn: Calculated output value

Kp: Proportional gain
Ks: Scale conversion coefficient
En: Deviation
PVn: Process variable (engineering unit)
SVn: Setpoint value (engineering unit)
PVn: Process variable change PVn=PVn-PVn-1
MR: Manual reset value
BLn: Balance term. A correction variable used for bumpless switching from MAN to AUT.
TD: Derivative time
T: Control period
Tbl: Balance rate time
In an automatic mode (AUT, CAS or RCAS), the calculated output value (CALCn) is converted
into a manipulated output value (MV) through output processing.
l Set Parameters of the PD Control with Manual Reset

The parameters of the PD control with manual reset:
1 to 1000 %
Derivative (D)
0 to 1000 seconds
When D=0, the proportional action does not function.

Manual reset value (MR)
Engineering unit data within the MV scale range
Balance rate time (I)
0.1 to 10000 seconds
The balance rate time (Tbl) is set to the parameter I on operation and monitoring func-
tions.
IMPORTANT
If the balance rate time of control block is set to zero or to a value beyond the range, the con-
trol algorithm stops functioning. No process alarm or system alarm message is initiated for
this trouble. So that when using a general purpose calculation block or sequence table block
to set the value of balance rate time, it is necessary to enforce the value within the proper
range and to avoid it to be set to zero.
The bumpless switching function switches the function block mode or switches the cascade
connected downstream blocks manipulated output value (MV) without causing its own manip-
ulated output value (MV) to change abruptly (i.e., bumpless switch).
The PD Controller Block with Manual Reset performs bumpless switching based on balance
action.
The PD Controller Block with Manual Reset performs bumpless switching of the block mode
from manual (MAN) to automatic (AUT), by using a value obtained by the following expression
as the initial value of the balance term (BLn0):
TD
BLn0=MV-Kp Ks En+ PVn -MR
T
MV : Output in the manual mode

The figure below shows the balance action of the PD Controller Block with Manual Reset:
MV
BLn0
MR
Time
MAN AUT
Figure 1.11-2 Bumpless Switching by PD Controller Block with Manual Reset (Balance Action)
When the block mode is not remote output (ROUT) or out of service (O/S), the remote manip-
ulated output value (RMV) tracks the manipulated output value (MV).

n Data Items - PD-MR

Table 1.11-3 Data Items of PD Controller Block with Manual Reset (PD-MR) (1/2)
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
AF ----- 0
tion
AOFS ----- 0
tion
nection destination
neering unit as PV
neering unit as PV
neering unit as PV
neering unit as PV
RMV (*7) MSL
CALC Calculated output value MSL
neering unit as MV
HH x SL to SH SH
point
LL x SL to SH SL
point
neering unit as PV

Table 1.11-4 Data Items of PD Controller Block with Manual Reset (PD-MR) (2/2)
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
MH x MSL to MSH MSH
limit setpoint
ML x MSL to MSH MSL
limit setpoint
I Balancing rate time x 0.1 to 10,000 seconds 10 seconds
MR Manual reset value x MSL to MSH MSL
value
neering unit as PV
neering unit as PV
neering unit as MV
neering unit as MV
SEE
ALSO For more information about valid block modes of the PD-MR block, refer to:

<1.12 Blending PI Controller Block (PI-BLEND)> 1-106
1.12 Blending PI Controller Block (PI-BLEND)

Blending PI Controller Block (PI-BLEND) may be applied to the multiple elements flow control
(blending control) to maintain the totalized flow value of each blending component at a con-
stant ratio (blending ratio).
n Blending PI Controller Block (PI-BLEND)

Connection
The figure below shows a function block diagram of Blending PI Controller Block (PI-BLEND):
SET TIN TSI INT
CAS (TSW)
CSV
AUT
SV
MAN
RSV
RCAS
MAN
Control CAS/AUT
Input Output
processing
ROUT
SUB
Figure 1.12-1 Function Block Diagram of Blending PI controller Block (PI-BLEND)
nals of Blending PI Controller Block (PI-BLEND):
Table 1.12-1 Connection Methods and Connected Destinations of the I/O Terminals of Blending PI
Controller Block (PI-BLEND)
I/O terminal Data refer- Data refer- Terminal Software Function
Process I/O
ence ence connection I/O block
Measure-
IN x x x
ment input
Setting in-
SET x x
put
Manipu-
OUT x x x x
lated output
Auxiliary
SUB x x x
output
Tracking
TIN x x x
signal input
Tracking
TSI x x x x
SW input
Interlock
INT x x x x
SW input

n Function of Blending PI Controller Block (PI-BLEND)

The PI-BLEND block performs input processing, control computation processing, output pro-
The only processing timing available for the PI-BLEND block is a periodic startup. Selections
SEE
for the PI-BLEND block, refer to:
l Control Computation Processing of Blending PI Controller Block (PI-

BLEND)
The table below shows the control computation processing functions of Blending PI Controller
Block (PI-BLEND):
Table 1.12-2 Control Computation Processing Functions of Blending PI controller Block (PI-BLEND)
Performs proportional (P) control and integral (I) actions
PI control based on cumulative deviation based on cumulative deviation, and obtains a manipulated
output value (MV) and manipulated output change (MV).
Converts the manipulated output change (MV) during each
control period to an actual manipulated output value (MV).
Control output action
The control output actions include positional type and ve-
locity type.
Switches the direction of the output action (reverse action or
Control action direction direct action) in accordance with the increase or decrease in
deviation.
Causes the setpoint value (SV) to agree with the process
variable (PV).
Limits the setpoint value (SV) within the setpoint high/low
limits (SVH, SVL).
Causes two of the three setpoint values (SV, CSV, RSV) to
agree with the remaining one.
Switches the manipulated output value (MV) without causing
it to change abruptly when the block mode has been
Bumpless switching
changed or when the manipulated output value (MV) has
been switched in a downstream block in cascade.
Prevents abrupt changes in the manipulated output value
Bumpless switching Balance action (MV) by initializing the balance term in the manipulated out-
put computational expression.

Changes the block mode to IMAN to temporarily suspend
Initialization manual the control action. This action takes place when the initializa-
tion manual condition becomes satisfied.
Temporarily suspends the control action while maintaining
Control hold the current block mode.
Changes the block mode to MAN to forcibly stop the control
MAN fallback action. This action takes place when the MAN fallback condi-
tion becomes satisfied.
Changes the block mode to AUT when the function block is
operating in the CAS or PRD mode, so that the control ac-
AUT fallback tion is continued using values set by the operator. This ac-
tion takes place when the AUT fallback condition becomes
satisfied.
Temporarily suspends the control action and switches to the
computer backup mode when an error has been detected at
Computer failure a supervisory computer while the function block is operating
in the RCAS or ROUT mode. This action takes place when
the computer failure condition becomes satisfied.
Stops the control action of function blocks currently operat-
Block mode change interlock ing automatically, while disabling the stopped function blocks
from changing to the automatic operating mode.
SEE
ALSO For more information about the control computation processing functions applied in Blending PI Controller
Block (PI-BLEND), refer to:
l Alarm Processing Specific to Blending PI Controller Block (PI-BLEND)

The cumulative deviation alarm check and control error alarm check, which are two of the
alarm checks performed by the PI-BLEND block, are specific to this function block.
n PI Control Based on Cumulative Deviation

The Blending PI Controller Block (PI-BLEND) performs proportional and integral actions
based on cumulative deviation. The cumulative deviation value (DVn) is obtained by totalizing
deviations of the process variable (PVn) from setpoint value (SVn) for each scan period and
performing time scale-conversion on the totalized deviation.
l Computational Expression of the PI Control Algorithm Based on

Cumulative Deviation
DVRn=DVRn-1+(PVn-SVn)
DVRn
DVn= TS
TK
DVRn : Raw cumulative deviation value

DVRn-1 : Previous raw cumulative deviation value
DVn : Cumulative deviation value
TS : Scan period
TK : Time scale conversion coefficient

The time scale conversion is to convert the raw cumulative deviation value that represents a
totalized deviation value, from a value of flowrate unit (e.g., m3/h) to that in a weight or vol-
ume unit (e.g., m3). The time scale conversion coefficient (TK) used in the above computa-
tional expression is a value in seconds representing the unit time of the flowrate unit. For ex-
ample, if the unit of the process variable (PV) is m3/h, set 3600 as a time scale conversion
coefficient (TK).
The computational expression of the control algorithm used by the Blending PI Controller
Block.
Kp Ks T
MVn = T En + ESn +BLn
8 TI
En= PVn-SVn
100
Kp=
PB
MSH-MSL
Ks=
SH-SL
Kp : Proportional gain
Ks : Scale conversion coefficient
PVn : Process variable (engineering unit)
SVn : Setpoint value (engineering unit)
ESn : Control cumulative deviation (A DV value limited by DL)
BLn : Balance term. A correction variable used for bumpless switching from MAN to AUT.
T : Control period
TI : Integral time
PB : Proportional band (%)
l Control Cumulative Deviation Value (ESn) Used in the PI Control Algorithm

Based on Cumulative Deviation
The control cumulative deviation value (ESn) used for PI control computation is equivalent to
the cumulative deviation value (DVn) limited by the deviation alarm setpoint (DL).
When DVn| DL |
ESn= +| DL | TK
When-| DL |<DVn<| DL |
ESn=DVRn TS
When DVn-| DL |
ESn=-| DL | TK
The cumulative deviation value (DVn) is reset to 0 in the following cases:
When the cumulative deviation reset switch (RST) is set to 1.

When Yes is specified for process variable tracking and the block mode changes from
manual (MAN) to automatic (AUT).
When the cumulative deviation reset switch (RST) is set to 1, it returns to 0 automatically
when resetting is complete.
l Set Parameters of the PI Control Algorithm Based on Cumulative Deviation

The parameters of the PI control algorithm based on cumulative deviation:
Time scale conversion coefficient (TK)
1 to 100,000
1 to 1000 %
When P = 0, only the integral action is performed.
Integral time (I)
Ramp constant (RP)
Set engineering unit data within the scale span range of the manipulated output value
(MV).
The default is the MV scale span.
IMPORTANT
The bumpless switching function switches the function block mode or switches the down-
stream blocks manipulated output value (MV) without causing its own manipulated output val-
ue (MV) to change abruptly (i.e., bumpless change).
The Blending PI Controller Block performs bumpless switching based on balance action.
The Blending PI Controller Block performs bumpless switching of the block mode from man-
ual (MAN) to automatic (AUT), by using a value obtained by the following expression as the
initial value of the balance term (BLn0):
Kp Ks T
BLn0=- T En + ESn
8 TI
MV : Output in the manual mode

When the mode switches to automatic (AUT), the balance term (BLn) approaches 0 with
each control period for the increment of ramp constant, until it finally reaches 0.
The figure below shows the balance action of Blending PI Controller Block:

BLn Control period

BLn0
Ramp constant (RP)
Time
0
MAN AUT
Figure 1.12-2 Bumpless Switching by Blending PI Controller Block (PI-BLEND) (Balance Action)
n Cumulative Deviation Alarm Check

Accumulated Deviation Alarm
The cumulative deviation alarm check is a function that determines whether the absolute val-
ue of the cumulative deviation (DV) exceeds the absolute value of the cumulative deviation
alarm setpoint value (DL).
When it is determined that the absolute value of the cumulative deviation (DV) exceeds the
absolute value of the cumulative deviation alarm setpoint value (DL) in the positive direction,
a positive direction cumulative deviation alarm (DV+) is activated. Similarly, when it exceeds
the setpoint in the negative direction, a negative direction cumulative deviation alarm (DV-) is
activated.
When an alarm has occurred, if the cumulative deviation (DV) absolute value drops lower
than the cumulative deviation alarm setpoint (DL) absolute value minus the alarm hysteresis
value (HYS), the alarm is returned to normal state.
DV
| DL |
HYS
Conditions causing an alarm
DV> | DL |
Time DV< | DL |
0 Conditions causing recovery from an alarm
DV | DL | HYS
DV | DL | +HYS
HYS
| DL |
DV
Figure 1.12-3 Actions of Cumulative Deviation Alarm Check
The cumulative deviation alarm check type, cumulative deviation alarm setpoint (DL), cumula-
tive deviation range (DV) and the alarm hysteresis value can be set.
l Cumulative Deviation Alarm Check Types

The cumulative deviation alarm check type is set with the Function Block Detail Builder. The
default is detection of both directions.
Detection of both directions
Monitors the deviation of both the positive and negative directions.

Detection of single direction
Monitors the deviation of either the positive or negative direction only.
No alarm
Detection is not performed.
When single direction is selected for the cumulative deviation alarm check type, only the devi-
ation in the positive direction is monitored when the cumulative deviation alarm setpoint (DL)
has a plus sign, and only the deviation in the negative direction is monitored when the cumu-
lative deviation alarm setpoint has a minus sign.
l Cumulative Deviation Alarm Setpoint (DL)

The cumulative deviation alarm setpoint is set by the operation and monitoring function.
Cumulative deviation alarm setpoint: Engineering unit data within the DV scale span
range
Default is DV scale span
l Cumulative Deviation Range

DV Range
The cumulative deviation range can be set with the Function Block Detail Builder.
Cumulative deviation range: Set engineering unit data (absolute value)
5 significant figures
l Alarm Hysteresis Value

The alarm hysteresis value can be set with the Function Block Detail Builder.
Hysteresis: Engineering unit data within the range of 0 to DV scale span, or percent-
age data for the DV scale span
When specifying percentage data, add % after the numeric value.
Default is 1.0 %.
n Control Error Alarm Check

Alarm for Control Error
In the control error alarm check it is determined whether or not the absolute value of the cu-
mulative deviation (DV), which may continue to increase even after the activation of the cu-
mulative deviation alarm, exceeds the absolute value of the control error alarm setpoint value
(VL).
If it is determined that the absolute value of the cumulative deviation (DV) exceeds the abso-
lute value of the control error alarm setpoint value (VL), a positive direction control error alarm
(HDV) is activated if the deviation is in the positive direction. And, when the deviation is in the
negative direction, a negative direction control error alarm (LDV) occurs.
When an alarm has occurred, if the cumulative deviation (DV) absolute value drops lower
than the control error alarm setpoint (VL) absolute value minus the hysteresis value, the alarm
is returned to normal state.

Cumulative deviation (DV)
Control error alarm setpoint
| VL |
| DL |
Cumulative deviation alarm
setpoint
SV
0
Deviation PV
| DL |
| VL |
Figure 1.12-4 Actions of Control Error Alarm Check
The control error alarm check type, control error alarm setpoint (VL) and the alarm hysteresis
value can be set.
l Control Error Alarm Check Types

The control error alarm check type is set with the Function Block Detail Builder. The default is
detection of both directions.
Monitors the deviation of both the positive and negative directions.
Monitors the deviation of either the positive or negative direction only.
No alarm
Detection is not performed.
When single direction is selected for the control error alarm check type, only the deviation in
the positive direction is monitored when the control error alarm setpoint (DL) has a plus sign,
and only the deviation in the negative direction is monitored when the control error alarm set-
point has a minus sign.
l Control Error Alarm Setpoint (VL)

The control error alarm setpoint is set by the operation and monitoring function.
Control error alarm setpoint: Engineering unit data within the DV scale span range
Default is DV scale span.
l Alarm Hysteresis Value

The alarm hysteresis value can be set with the Function Block Detail Builder.
Hysteresis: Engineering unit data within the range of 0 to DV scale span, or percent-
age data for the DV scale span.
Default is 1.0 %.

n Data Items - PI-BLEND

Table 1.12-3 Data Items of Blending PI Controller Block (PI-BLEND) (1/2)
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
AF ----- 0
tion
AOFS ----- 0
tion
nection destination
neering unit as PV
neering unit as PV
neering unit as PV
DV Cumulative deviation value DV engineering unit value 0
RMV (*7) MSL
HH x SL to SH SH
point
LL x SL to SH SL
point
VL Control error alarm setpoint x (DSH - DSL) DSH - DSL
Cumulative deviation alarm
DL x (DSH - DSL) DSH - DSL
setpoint
DSH: DV scale high limit
DSL: DV scale low limit
Table 1.12-4 Data Items of Blending PI Controller Block (PI-BLEND) (2/2)

Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
MH x MSL to MSH MSH
limit setpoint

Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
ML x MSL to MSH MSL
limit setpoint
Time scale conversion co-
TK x 1 to 100,000 1
efficient
MSH to
RP Ramp constant x 0 to (MSH - MSL)
MSL
value
Cumulative deviation reset
RST x 0, 1 0
switch
SH PV scale high limit O/S (MAN)
neering unit as PV
neering unit as PV
neering unit as MV
neering unit as MV
DSH DV scale high limit -----
neering unit as DV
DSL DV scale low limit -----
neering unit as DV
SEE
ALSO For more information about valid block modes of the PI-BLEND block, refer to:

<1.13 Self-Tuning PID Controller Block (PID-STC)> 1-116
1.13 Self-Tuning PID Controller Block (PID-STC)

The Self-Tuning PID Controller Block (PID-STC) has both the PID control function and self-
tuning function (STC function). This function block is used to automatically adjust PID param-
eters (P, I, D).
n Self-Tuning PID Controller Block - (PID-STC)

Connection
The Self-Tuning PID Controller Block (PID-STC) has both the PID control function and self-
tuning function (STC function). The STC function automatically sets PID parameters (P, I, D).
The STC function provides the following two merits:
Maintains optimum controllability in spite of the static and dynamic process characteristics
variation.
Reduces the work load of tuning operation at process startup.
The figure below shows a function block diagram of Self-Tuning PID Controller Block (PID-
STC):

CSV
AUT
SV
MAN
RSV
RCAS
MAN
Self-tuning control CAS/AUT
Input Output
processing
ROUT
SUB
Figure 1.13-1 Function Block Diagram of Self-Tuning PID Controller Block (PID-STC)
The figure below shows a block diagram of the self-tuning control computation processing
area of the Self-Tuning PID Controller Block (PID-STC):

Estimated
process
model
PID Process
parameter characteristic
calculation estimation
P I D Response
monitoring
SV - PID PV
Process
controller MV
Figure 1.13-2 Block Diagram of the Self-Tuning Control Computation Processing Area
The Self-Tuning PID Controller Block (PID-STC) estimates process characteristics while mon-
itoring process variables (PV) and manipulated output values (MV) to create an estimated
process model. Optimum PID parameters (P, I, D) are calculated based on the estimated
process model.
nals of the Self-Tuning PID Controller Block (PID-STC):
Table 1.13-1 Connection Methods and Connected Destinations of the I/O Terminals of Self-Tuning PID
Controller Block (PID-STC)
Process I/O
Measure-
IN x x x
ment input
Setting in-
SET x x
put
Manipu-
OUT x x x x
lated output
Auxiliary
SUB x x x
output
Reset sig-
RL1 x x x
nal 1 input
Reset sig-
RL2 x x x
nal 2 input
Compensa-
BIN x x x
tion input
Tracking
TIN x x x
signal input
Tracking
TSI x x x x
SW input
Interlock
INT x x x x
SW input

n Function of Self-Tuning PID Controller Block (PID-STC)

The PID-STC block performs input processing, control computation processing, output pro-
The only processing timing available for the PID-STC block is a periodic startup. Selections
SEE
for the PID-STC block, refer to:
l Control Computation Processing of Self-Tuning PID Controller Block (PID-

STC)
The function of the PID-STC block related to control computation processing includes the
PID control function and the self-tuning function (STC function).
SEE
ALSO For more information about the PID control function, refer to:
1.13.1, Control Algorithm of Self-Tuning PID Controller Block (PID-STC) on page 1-122
For more information about the self-tuning function (STC function), refer to:
1.13.2, Self-Tuning Function (STC Function) on page 1-123
1.13.3, Self-Tuning Operating Modes and Block Status on page 1-125
1.13.4, Initializer Start on page 1-130
1.13.5, Auto-Startup on page 1-131
1.13.6, On-Demand Tuning on page 1-135
1.13.7, Tuning Parameters of Self-Tuning PID Controller Block (PID-STC) on page 1-137
1.13.8, Points of Using Self-Tuning PID Controller Block (PID-STC) on page 1-146
n Data Items - PID-STC

Table 1.13-2 Data Items of Self-Tuning PID Controller Block (PID-STC) (1/3)
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
BSTS Block status ----- RUN, OFF

Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
AF ----- 0
tion
AOFS ----- 0
tion
nection destination
neering unit as PV
neering unit as PV
neering unit as PV
neering unit as PV
RMV (*7) MSL
RLV1 Reset limit value 1 x MSL
neering unit as MV
RLV2 Reset limit value 2 x MSL
neering unit as MV
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
HH x SL to SH SH
point
LL x SL to SH SL
point
neering unit as PV
Manipulated variable high -
MH x MSL to MSH MSH
limit setpoint
Manipulated variable low -
ML x MSL to MSH MSL
limit setpoint

Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
P Proportional band x 0.0 to 1000.0 % 100.0 %
20.0 sec-
I Integral time x 1.0 to 10,000.0 seconds
onds
D Derivative time 0.0 to 10,000.0 seconds 0.0 seconds
value
neering unit as PV
neering unit as PV
neering unit as MV
neering unit as MV
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
STC operation mode selec-
STC x (*2) -1, 0, 1, 2, 3 0 (*2)
tion switch
Process 95 % response
TR x 1 to 10,000 seconds 40 seconds
time
NB Noise band x 1.0 % to 20.0 % of PV 1.0 % of PV
OS Control target type x 0, 1, 2, 3 2
MI MV impulse amplitude x 0.0 % to 20.0 % of MV 5.0 % of MV
PMAX Proportional band high limit x 0.0 to 1000.0 % 1000.0 %
PMIN Proportional band low limit x 0.1 to 1000.0 % 0.1 %

Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
10000.0
IMAX Integral time high limit x 0.1 to 1000.0 seconds
seconds
IMIN Integral time low limit x 0.1 to 1000.0 seconds 0.1 seconds
2000.0 sec-
DMAX Derivative time high limit x 0.0 to 1000.0 seconds
onds
PIDC PID update ratio coefficient x 0.00 to 1.00 1.00
CR Estimation accuracy error 0.000 to 100.000 -----
Estimated equivalent dead
LM 0.0 to 10,000.0 seconds -----
time
Estimated equivalent first-
TM 0.0 to 10,000.0 seconds -----
order lag constant
Estimated equivalent proc-
GM 0.000 to 100.000 -----
ess gain
Proportional band calcula-
PA 0.0 to 1000.0 % -----
tion value
Integral time calculation
IA 0.1 to 10000.0 seconds -----
value
Derivative time calculation
DA 0.0 to 10000.0 seconds -----
value
*2: For PFCS, if there are more than 5 PID-STC in one FCS, the default value will be -1 for the blocks from the 6th PID-STC.
For FCSs except PFCS, if there are more than 10 PID-STC in one FCS, the default value will be -1 for the blocks from the
11th PID-STC.
SEE
ALSO For more information about valid block modes of the PID-STC block, refer to:

1.13.1 Control Algorithm of Self-Tuning PID Controller

Block (PID-STC)
Self-Tuning PID Controller Block (PID-STC) obtains manipulated output value (MV) and ma-
nipulated output change (MV) based on PID algorithm.
n PID Control Algorithm

The Self-Tuning PID Controller Block (PID-STC) uses the same PID control algorithm as the
PID controller block (PID).
SEE
ALSO For more information about PID control algorithm, refer to:
n Control Action Bypass

When 0 is set for the PID parameter (P) or (D) of the Self-Tuning PID Controller Block (PID-
STC), parts of the control action can be bypassed.
The figure below shows the partially bypassed control action and setpoint values of PID pa-
rameters (P, I, D):
Table 1.13.1-1 Partially Bypassed Control Action and Setpoint Values of PID Parameters (P, I, D)
Control action PID parameter setpoint value
Proportional (P) +integral (I) P0, D=0
Integral (I) P=0
If you want to run the PID controller in proportional-integral (PI) action, you may set a value
other than 0 to parameter (P) and set to parameter (D). If run the controller in integral (I) ac-
tions only, you may set 0 for parameter (P). In this case, even set a value for parameter (D),
the derivative (D) action does not work. When execute integral (I) action only, the proportional
gain (Kp) becomes 1.
IMPORTANT
The Self - Tuning PID Controller Block (PID-STC) is unable to control astatic processes by
using integral (I) actions only. If the process type is set as astatic system (integral system)
and only integral (I) action defined, the block changes to STC function invalid (INVL) status,
and stops the STC function.

1.13.2 Self-Tuning Function (STC Function)

The self-tuning function (STC function) determines a tuning index based on the estimated
process model, PID control algorithm, process type and control target type, to calculate opti-
mum PID parameters (P, I, D) in accordance with the obtained tuning index.
n Self-Tuning Function (STC Function)

The self-tuning function (STC function) estimates process characteristics while monitoring
process variables (PV) and manipulated output values (MV) to create an estimated process
model. It then determines a tuning index based on the estimated process model, PID control
algorithm, process type and control target type, and calculates optimum PID parameters (P, I,
D) in accordance with the obtained tuning index.
The STC function can be started by the following three methods:
Initialize start
Auto-startup
On-demand tuning
SEE
ALSO For more information about initialize start, refer to:
1.13.4, Initializer Start on page 1-130
For more information about auto-startup, refer to:
For more information about on-demand tuning, refer to:
n Tuning Index
Generally, in a normal PID controller block (PID), optimum PID parameters (P, I, D) vary with
the purpose of control: to follow up the setpoint value or to prevent from disturbances. There-
fore, it is difficult to tune parameters in a single set of PID parameters (P, I, D) to obtain the
optimum responses for the prompt follow-up of set point value change as well as to restrain
from external disturbances. The Self-Tuning PID Controller Block (PID-STC) changes the in-
dex (tuning index) according to the control target and the PID control function algorithm and
block mode, so that optimum responses can be obtained based on each tuning index.
The table below shows the tuning indexes of the Self-tuning function (STC function):
Table 1.13.2-1 Tuning Indexes

Tuning index
Control algorithm
Block mode AUT Block mode CAS Block mode RCAS
Setpoint value follow-up Setpoint value follow-up Setpoint value follow-up
PID
response response response
Disturbance suppression Disturbance suppression Disturbance suppression
I-PD
Setpoint value follow-up Setpoint value follow-up Setpoint value follow-up
PI-D
Automatic determination /
Disturbance suppression Setpoint value follow-up Setpoint value follow-up
Automatic determination
2
The Self-Tuning PID Controller Block (PID-STC) calculates PID parameters (P, I, D) of the
setpoint value follow-up type when the PV derivative type (PI-D) control algorithm is used,

and calculates those of the disturbance suppression type when the PV proportional and deriv-
ative type (I-PD) control algorithm is used.
When the STC function calculates PID parameters based on the result of process estimation,
the following processing are performed:
When the block detects that response is tending to hunt, the tuning stops when such
hunting occurs only for one cycle to ensure safety.
When the gain of the controller block is increased, the change is limited to ensure safety.
When the deviation remains large for a prolonged period of time, the gain of the controller
block increases.
n Number of Simultaneously Executable Blocks

There is no limit to the number of Self-tuning PID controller blocks (PID-STC) that can be
used in one FCS. However, the number of Self-tuning PID controller blocks (PID-STC) exe-
cuting self-tuning function (STC function) at the same time is limited to 5 (*1) or 10 (*2)
blocks per FCS.
If more than 5(*1) or 10 (*2) Self-tuning PID controller blocks (PID-STC) are defined by the
Function Block Detail Builder, the first 5 blocks (*1) or 10 blocks (*2) with the smaller block
numbers are set in the PID parameter display mode (STC=0), while the remaining Self-tun-
ing PID controller blocks (PID-STC) are set in the STC operation stop mode (STC=-1).
If 5 (*1) or 10 (*2) Self-tuning PID controller blocks (PID-STC) are currently executing the
STC function, the STC function of a new Self-Tuning PID Controller Block cannot be started.
Only after one of the currently executing Self-Tuning PID Controller Blocks (PID-STC) stops
the STC function i.e., changes its STC operation mode (STC=-1), the new Self-Tuning PID
Controller Block can start the STC function.
*1: For PFCS.
*2: For FCSs except PFCS.

1.13.3 Self-Tuning Operating Modes and Block Status

The self-tuning operating mode (STC operating mode) determines the action of the Self-tun-
ing function (STC function). The Self-Tuning PID Controller Block (PID-STC) uses five types
of STC operating modes.
The block status of PID-STC indicates the running function of the STC block.
n Self-Tuning Operating Mode (STC Operating Mode)

Switching between the STC operating modes is done via an STC operating mode selection
switch (STC).
l STC Stop Mode (STC=-1)

The STC function is not executed in this mode.
Neither process characteristic estimation nor PID parameter (P, I, D) calculation are per-
formed.
The block acts in the same way as a PID Controller Block (PID).
l PID Parameter Display Mode (STC=0)

In this mode, process characteristic estimation and PID parameter (P, I, D) calculation are
performed, but the calculated PID parameters (P, I, D) are only displayed and not used for
control.
In the PID parameter display mode, process characteristic estimation is performed when the
process variable (PV) moves out of the noise band (NB), and PID parameter (P, I, D) calcula-
tion is performed if the estimation accuracy is high. The calculated PID parameters (P, I, D)
are only displayed and not used for control.
l PID Parameter Automatic Updating Mode (STC=1)

In this mode, process characteristic estimation and PID parameter (P, I, D) calculation are
performed, and the calculated PID parameters (P, I, D) are used for control. In the PID param-
eter automatic updating mode, process characteristic estimation is performed when the proc-
ess variable (PV) moves out of the noise band (NB), and PID parameter (P, I, D) calculation is
performed if the estimation accuracy is high. The calculated PID parameters (P, I, D) are used
for control.
l Auto-Startup Mode (STC=2)

Auto-startup is executed in this mode.
The process 95 % response time, noise band and PID parameters (P, I, D) are calculated au-
tomatically. This mode is used when initial setpoint values are not known, such as during plant
startup.
l On-Demand Mode (STC=3)

On-demand tuning is executed in this mode.
Step test signals are added to the manipulated output value (MV), and PID parameters (P, I,
D) are calculated based on the response waveform of the corresponding process variable
(PV).
SEE
ALSO For more information about auto-startup, refer to:
For more information about on-demand tuning, refer to:

n Flow of Self-Tuning Actions

During each control period, the Self-Tuning PID Controller Block (PID-STC) performs actions
in accordance with the Self-tuning operating mode (STC operating mode).
STC function
STC operating
STC=-1 mode
STC=2 STC=3
STC=0, 1
PV and MV data
Manual mode Manual mode Manual mode

Block mode
Block mode Block mode
(*1)
Automatic mode Automatic Automatic
mode mode
No
Change in PV
Yes
Estimation of
Auto-startup On-demand
process
characteristics
No High estimation
accuracy
Yes
Operating mode
Calculation of recovery
PID parameters
STC=0
Operating mode
STC=1
Setting of PID
parameters
(*1) Go to the step below if disable is set for the STC

Return function bypass specification during the MAN mode.
Figure 1.13.3-1 Flow of Self-Tuning Actions

n Actions in Self-Tuning Operating Modes (STC Operating Modes)

Table 1.13.3-1 Table of Actions in Self-Tuning Operating Modes (STC Operating Modes)
STC operating
mode selection
switch Block mode (*1) Action
Previous Current
MAN Remains in the initialization processing state (*2).
0
AUT Starts normal processing after initialization processing (*2).
MAN Remains in the initialization processing state (*2).
1
AUT Starts normal processing after initialization processing (*2).
-1
Remains in the initialization processing state.
MAN
2 Startup mode waiting state (*2).
AUT Operation disabled. Returns to STC=-1.
3 All Operation disabled. Returns to STC=-1.
-1 All Stops STC actions. The block mode remains the same.
1 All No special processing. The block mode remains the same.
MAN Remains in the startup mode waiting state.
2
0 AUT Operation disabled. Returns to STC=0.
MAN Operation disabled. Returns to STC=0.
3 On-demand mode. Returns to STC=0 after applying signals to
AUT
MV.
-1 All Stops STC actions. The block mode remains the same.
0 All No special processing. The block mode remains the same.
MAN Remains in the startup mode waiting state.
2
1 AUT Operation disabled. Returns to STC=1.
MAN Operation disabled. Returns to STC=1.
3 On-demand mode. Returns to STC=1 after applying signals to
AUT
MV.
MAN Stops STC actions. The block mode remains the same.
-1 Suspends the startup action. Stops STC actions. The block mode
AUT
changes to MAN.
Stops the startup action. The block mode and block status
2 0 All
change to MAN and PVER, respectively.
Stops the startup action and returns to STC=0. The block mode
1 All
and block status change to MAN and PVER, respectively.
3 All Operation disabled. Returns to STC=2.
The operating mode of STC=3 returns to the original operating
mode in the next control period. In the previous operating mode
3 All All
transition, actions will continue assuming that the STC=3 mode
has never existed.
*1: All normal modes (MAN, PRD, ROUT, AUT, CAS, RCAS)
MAN:All manual modes (MAN, PRD, ROUT)
AUT:All automatic modes (AUT, CAS, RCAS)
All normal modes, if No is selected for the STC bypass specification during the MAN mode.
*2: For PFCS, only up to 5 PID-STC blocks are allowed to run self-tuning at the same time per one FCS. The STC setting will be
forced to -1 for the blocks from the 6th PID-STC.
For FCSs except PFCS, only up to 10 PID-STC blocks are allowed to run self-tuning at the same time per one FCS. The STC
setting will be forced to -1 for the blocks from the 11th PID-STC.

SEE
ALSO For more information about self-tuning operating mode selection switch (STC), refer to:
nSTC Operating Mode Selection Switch (STC) on page 1-139
n Block Statuses
The block status of the PID-STC block shows the current operating status of the STC func-
tions. PID-STC has 7 block statuses, the basic statuses and the combined statuses (combina-
tion of multiple statuses) are all indicating the STC running functions.
l Basic Block Status

The following shows basic STC Block Status.
Table 1.13.3-2 Basic STC Block Status

Symbol Name Explanation
The block is periodically acquiring inputs and output-
ting outputs.
RUN RUN
Self-tuning operation; STC operation mode setting is
zero or positive.
Shows that STC functions are stopped (*1).
OFF OFF
This means that STC operation mode is set to 1.
Performing initialization - gathering necessary I/O da-
WMUP WarM UP ta to start STC functions. While this is occurring, the
STC functions are disabled (*1).
Optimum PID parameters calculated by the STC
PLMT PID Parameters LiMiTed functions cant be set because they are outside
builder-set limits.
Shows that auto startup processing is being per-
STUP Auto STart UP
formed.
Shows that because PV is abnormal, new PID pa-
PVER PV ERror Auto start up aborted rameters couldnt be computed, and auto startup
processing was aborted.
Shows that because some setting is invalid, STC
functions cant be executed. Either some tuning pa-
INVL INVaLid rameter is invalid, or an attempt was made to simul-
taneously execute a larger number of STC control
blocks than the limit.
*1: Self tuning functions are stopped, but the equivalent PID block functions are operating normally.
SEE
ALSO For more information about WMUP (Warm up), refer to:
lSTC Warmup (Initialization) on page 1-129
l Composite Block Status

The following describes valid STC block status combinations, and shows the corresponding
status codes displayed on the HIS.
Table 1.13.3-3 Composite Block Statuses

Code shown on
Status Explanation
HIS
Shows that STC functions are stopped. This means that STC
OFF OFF operation mode is set to 1. However the PID block functions
are operating normally.

Code shown on
Status Explanation
HIS
STC operation mode was set to STC execution status (STC0),
but the maximum permitted number of PID-STC blocks that can
INVL(OFF) INVL
operate simultaneously are already operating, so shows that no
more STC functions can be operated.
RUN RUN STC functions are running.
Performing initialization - gathering necessary I/O data to start
STC functions. While this is occurring, the STC functions are
WMUP(RUN) WMUP
disabled, However the PID block functions are operating nor-
mally.
Optimum PID parameters calculated by the STC functions cant
PLMT(RUN) PLMT
be set because they are outside builder-set limits.
STUP(RUN) STUP Shows that auto startup processing is being performed.
Shows that because PV is abnormal, new PID constants
PVER(RUN) PVER
couldnt be computed, and auto startup processing was aborted.
Shows that STC operation mode is set to STC function execu-
tion status (STC0), but because some parameter is invalid,
INVL(RUN) INVL STC functions cannot be executed. However, the PID block
functions are operating normally.
If you correct the problem, STC functions will operate again.
Shows that although an attempt was made to acquire I/O data,
INVL(WMUP(RUN)) INVL
some data is missing.
Shows that because some parameter is invalid, STC auto start-
up functions cant be run. However, the PID block functions are
INVL(STUP(RUN)) INVL
operating normally.
If you correct the problem, STC functions will start to operate.
l STC Warmup (Initialization)

Except when block status of the STC functions is OFF, I/O data is continuously sampled. The
process model depends not only on current data but also on data over a preset period into the
past.
While the STC functions are acquiring necessary data for estimating the process model, the
STC functions operate in standby - in WMUP status. STC initialization is performed in the fol-
lowing cases:
When STC mode is switched from STC= 1 to STC=0 or from STC= 1 to STC=1.
When the 95 % process response time value TR changes.
When the scan period is changed.
When the block mode recovers from O/S or IMAN.
When on-line maintenance is performed on the current block.
When an alarm such as IOP, which indicates that I/O data is affected, occurs.
When the corresponding control area is started up.
The length of the initialization period is related to the PID-STC controller block mode at the
time that initialization is started, as follows:
For auto mode (AUT, CAS, RCAS) : 4 TR
Otherwise: 2 TR

1.13.4 Initializer Start

Initializer start can be executed in the situation that allows to use the estimated initial values
of PID parameters (P, I, D).
The initializer start function uses estimated PID parameters (P, I, D) to start control.
n Execution of Initializer Start

The methods used to start initialization are shown below. To execute initializer start, the fol-
lowing conditions must be satisfied:
The self-tuning operating mode (STC operating mode) is STC stop.
The block mode is manual (MAN).
The following parameters are set:
PID parameters (P, I, D)
Process 95 % response time (TR)
Noise band (NB)
Control target type (OS)
PID data set high/low limits (PMAX, PMIN, IMAX, IMIN, DMAX)
PID update ratio coefficient (PIDC)
IMPORTANT
Before changing the block mode to any of the automatic modes (AUT/CAS/RCAS), confirm
that measured signals are within the safety range where step changes (MI) can be added to
manipulated output signals, and the measured process signals are sufficiently stable.
When the following operations are performed with the above parameters set, initializer start
will be executed after the time set as the process 95 % response time (TR) has elapsed:
1. Change the STC operating mode to the PID parameter display or PID automatic updating
mode.
2. Change the block mode to any of the automatic modes (AUT/CAS/RCAS).
Upon executing initializer start, PID control and self-tuning starts using the values set for PID
parameters (P, I, D) as initial values.

1.13.5 Auto-Startup
In the process where step response can be obtained, use auto-startup if initial setpoint values
of PID parameters (P, I, D) cannot be estimated, such as when the plant is first started.
The auto-startup function starts control by automatically calculating the process 95 % re-
sponse time (TR), noise band (NB) and PID parameters (P, I, D) based on data obtained via
step responses.
n Execution of Auto-Startup
The methods of auto-startup are shown below. To execute auto-startup, the following condi-
tions must be satisfied:
The self-tuning operating mode (STC operating mode) is STC stop.
The block mode is manual (MAN).
The following parameters are set:
MV Impulse amplitude (MI)
PID parameter (P)
PID parameter (D)
When the following operations are performed after the above conditions established, auto-
startup can be executed.
1. Change the STC operating mode to auto-startup.
2. Change the block mode to any of the automatic modes (AUT/CAS/RCAS).
Upon auto-startup, the following actions take place:
1. The block status changes to STUP (during auto-startup), and the current manipulated
output value (MV) is held for 30 seconds.
2. Step signal set as the MV Impulse amplitude (MI) is added to the manipulated output val-
ue (MV) in the direction of increasing deviation.
3. Observation of the response waveform of measured signals relative to the step change is
started.
If, during the observation, the measured signal change (PV) becomes equivalent to or
larger than 1.5 times of the MV Impulse amplitude (MI), the manipulated output value
(MV) returns to the original value to ensure safety.
4. If the target process is a static system (IP=0), the manipulated output value (MV) returns
to the original value after the response waveform is observed for a specified period of
time. If the process is an astatic system (IP=1), the step changes equivalent to the MV
Impulse amplitude (MI) is added to the manipulated variable in the reverse direction, then
the manipulated output (MV) returns to the original value.
5. Process characteristics is estimated based on the data obtained by the step response ob-
servation.
6. The process 95 % response time (TR) and PID parameters (P, I, D) are calculated based
on the estimated model.
7. The following computations on the PID parameters (P, I, D) of the estimated model are
performed, and the computed results are set as PID parameters high/low limits (PMAX,
PMIN, IMAX, IMIN, DMAX).

PMAX=4 PB
PMIN= PB
4
IMAX=4 TI
IMIN= TI
4
DMAX=4 TD
Figure 1.13.5-1 Computational expressions
Some of these values may be fixed to 0 depending upon the control method.
8. Measured noise is observed for a specified period of time (2xTR; minimum 2 minutes,
maximum 5 minutes), and the noise band (NB) is calculated based on the peak value.
9. The STC operating mode automatically changes to the PID parameter automatic updat-
ing mode (STC=1), then PID control and self-tuning start to run.
l Example of the Auto-Startup Action in Static Process

Auto-startup begin
(STC=2,MANAUT) Auto-startup end
MI signal
application Tuning end
MI
MV
PV
Time
Waiting for settling Waveform Noise
(30 seconds) observation observation Operation after switching to
Block status "STUP" the PID automatic
updating mode (STC=1)
Figure 1.13.5-2 Example of the Auto-Startup Action in Static (Non-Integral) System

l Example of the Auto-Startup Action in Astatic Process

Auto-startup begin
(STC=2,MANAUT) Auto-startup end
MI signal
application Tuning end
MI
MV
MI
PV
Time
Waiting for settling Waveform Noise
(30 seconds) observation observation Operation after switching to
Block status STUP the PID automatic
updating mode (STC=1)
Figure 1.13.5-3 Example of the Auto-Startup Action in Astatic (Integral) System
n Abnormal Termination of Auto-Startup

The following section explains the abnormal termination of auto-startup.
l Causes of the Abnormal Termination of Auto-Startup

The auto-startup action is terminated abnormally if the following events occur:
Power failure
Change in the self-tuning operating mode (STC operating mode)
Change to a block mode other than automatic modes (AUT, CAS, RCAS).
Failure to create an estimated process model
The measured signal change (PV) remains under 0.5 % of the MV Impulse amplitude
(MI) after the maximum observation time (90 minutes) elapsed.
Insufficient information from step response.
The data status of the manipulated output value (MV) changes to CLP or CND.
The alarm status changes to IOP+, IOP-, OOP or CNF.
l Self-Tuning PID Controller Block (PID-STC) upon Abnormal Termination of

Auto-Startup
When the auto-startup action is stopped, the following changes take place inside the Self-tun-
ing PID controller block (PID-STC):
The block changes to automatic (AUT) mode.
The STC operating mode changes to PID parameter display (STC=0).
The block status changes to auto-startup abnormal termination (PVER).
The block status changes or set the STC operating mode operation stop (STC=-1) cancels
the auto-startup abnormal termination status.

IMPORTANT
Do not use auto-startup for systems whose process dead-time is short. This is because an
abnormal termination processing of the auto-startup may not be carried out if the process
dead-time is 4 seconds or less. If an abnormal termination processing could not be carried
out, the block status remains as STUP.
If an auto-startup has been used by mistake, change the block mode to MAN mode and inter-
rupt the auto-startup.
n Setup Items for Auto-Startup

The following items must be set in the auto-startup mode:
Specify the type of response waveform to be targeted by the self-tuning function (STC
function)
Select a target suitable for the controlled plant
MV Impulse amplitude (MI)
Set a value that may trigger the process variable (PV)s impulse response around 5 %.
Control method (P, I, D)
Specify a desired control method
Specify one of the following three types of control methods:
I control : P=0
PI control : P0, D=0
PID control : P0, D0
Within the range allowed by the process, the bigger the impulse response from the process
variable (PV) the more accurate estimation can be provided by the model.
When a control algorithm that uses derivative (D) action is selected, it may change to the con-
trol method that does not use derivative (D) action if it is judged appropriate by the STC func-
tion.

1.13.6 On-Demand Tuning

On-demand tuning is applied to tune PID parameters (P, I, D) when tuning request is given
from the operator. On-demand tuning may be applied to the loops where the change of set-
point values need to be avoided.
n Execution of On-Demand Tuning

For on-demand tuning, when a tuning demand is given from the operator, a step test signal is
added to the manipulated output value (MV) in a closed loop. Then the self-tuning is per-
formed based on the response waveform of the corresponding process variable (PV).
The method of on-demand tuning is shown below. To execute on-demand tuning, the follow-
ing conditions must be satisfied:
The self-tuning operating mode (STC operating mode) is the PID parameter display or
PID automatic updating mode
The block mode is one of the automatic modes
IMPORTANT
Before changing to the on-demand tuning mode, confirm that the value of the MV Impulse
amplitude (MI) is well within the safe range.
When the STC operating mode is changed to on-demand tuning in the above state, on-de-
mand tuning may be executed.
During on-demand tuning, the following actions take place:
1. Step signal equivalent to the MV Impulse amplitude (MI) is added to the manipulated out-
put (MV) in the direction of decreasing deviation.
If the process type is astatic system (IP=1), the pulse of TR/5 in time span will be add-
ed.
2. After the step signals is added, the STC operating mode returns to 0 or 1 in the next
control period.
3. The response waveform of a measured signal that corresponds to the step change is
monitored.
4. PID control and self-tuning are started.
MV
PV
Time
Tuning
Set as STC=3
(on-demand command)
Figure 1.13.6-1 Responses in the On-Demand Mode
If responses from the process are extremely monotonous, an estimated model may not be
created. In this case, increase the MV Impulse amplitude (MI) and retry the self-tuning.
n Setup Item for On-Demand Tuning

The following item must be set in order to execute on-demand tuning:

MV Impulse amplitude (MI): Set a value that may trigger the process variable (PV)s im-
pulse response around 5 %.
Within the range allowed by the process, the bigger the impulse response from the process
variable (PV) the more accurate estimation can be provided by the model.

1.13.7 Tuning Parameters of Self-Tuning PID Controller

Block (PID-STC)
This tuning parameters of PID-STC block consist of three types; Setting parameters that may
be set on the tuning view; Parameters for indication and the parameters defined on the Func-
tion Block Detail Builder.
n Tuning Parameters
The tuning parameters of the Self-Tuning PID Controller Block (PID-STC) include the follow-
ing types:
Parameters may be set on tuning view
These tuning parameters can be set on the tuning view during operation.
Parameters for indication
These parameters are displayed in the tuning view to indicate the operating status of the
STC function. The values of the parameters are calculated automatically by the Self-tun-
ing PID Controller Block (PID-STC).
Parameters defined on the Function Block Detail Builder
These parameters are defined on the Function Block Detail Builder.
l Parameters Set from the Tuning View

The table below shows the parameters that are set from the tuning view:
Table 1.13.7-1 Parameters Set from the Tuning View

Entry en- Setup items in each operating
able/ mode(*2)
Symbol Name Range Default
disa-
ble(*1) -1 0 1 2 3
STC operating
STC mode selection x -1, 0, 1, 2, 3 0 (*3) (*4)
switch
Process 95 % 1 to 10000 sec- 40 sec-
TR x - xx
response time onds onds
1.0 to 20.0 % of 1.0 %
NB Noise band x - xx
the PV value (*5) (*5)
Control target
OS x 0, 1, 2, 3 2 -
type
MV Impulse 0.0 to 20.0 % of 5.0 %
MI x - - -
amplitude the MV value (*6) (*6)
Proportional
P x 0.0 to 1000.0 % 100.0 % xx xx xx
band
0.1 to 10000.0 20.0 sec-
I Integral time x xx xx xx
seconds onds
0.0 to 10000.0 0.0 sec-
D Derivative time x xx xx xx
seconds ond
Proportional 1000.0
PMAX x 0.0 to 1000.0 % - xx
band high limit %
Proportional
PMIN x 0.1 to 1000.0 % 0.1 % - xx
band low limit
Integral time 0.1 to 10000.0 10000.0
IMAX x - xx
high limit seconds seconds
Integral time 0.1 to 10000.0 0.1 sec-
IMIN x - xx
low limit seconds onds

Entry en- Setup items in each operating
able/ mode(*2)
disa-
ble(*1) -1 0 1 2 3
Derivative time 0.0 to 10000.0 2000.0

DMAX x - xx
high limit seconds seconds
PID update ra-
PIDC x 0.00 to 1.00 1.00 - - - -
tio coefficient
*1: x: Can be entered from the tuning view at any time.
*2: : Setting required.
-: Setting not required.
xx: Setting is done automatically, but can be entered from the tuning view, as well.
*3: The default values of the 11th and subsequent PID-STC controller blocks within the same control station will be -1.
*4: A determining factor of the operating mode.
*5: A percentage value converted from the PV engineering unit data.
*6: A percentage value converted from the MV engineering unit data.
l Display Parameters
The table below shows display parameters. These parameters are displayed in the tuning
view to indicate the operating status of the STC function.
Table 1.13.7-2 Display Parameters

Entry Setup items in each operating mode
enable/ (*1)
Symbol Name Range
disable
(*1) -1 0 1 2 3
CR Estimation accuracy error x 0.000 to 100.000 x

Estimated equivalent dead 0.0 to 10000.00
LM x x
time seconds
Estimated equivalent first-or- 0.1 to 10000.0
TM x x
der lag constant seconds
Estimated equivalent proc-
GM x 0.000 to 100.000 x
ess gain
Proportional band calcula-
PA x 0.0 to 1000.0 % x
tion value
Integral time calculation val- 1.0 to 10000.0
IA x x
ue seconds
Derivative time calculation 0.0 to 10000.0
DA x x
value seconds
*1: x: Cannot be entered from the tuning view.
: Items for automatic calculation and display only.
l Items Defined in the Function Block Detail Builder

The table below shows the tuning parameters of the Self-Tuning PID Controller Block (PID-
STC) defined in the Function Block Detail Builder:
Table 1.13.7-3 Items defined in the Function Block Detail Builder

Entry Setup items in each operating
enable/ mode(*1)
disa-
ble(*1) -1 0 1 2 3
0 (non-inte-
IP Process type 0, 1
gral)
Manual mode STC
- ON, OFF ON
function bypass
*1: : Item defined in the Function Block Detail Builder.

n STC Operating Mode Selection Switch (STC)

Set the operating mode of the Self-Tuning PID Controller Block (PID-STC) to the STC operat-
ing mode selection switch.
STC: Specify the operating mode using a numeric value.
The following operating modes can be selected:
-1 : STC operation stop mode
0 : STC parameter display mode
1 : STC parameter automatic updating mode
2 : Auto-startup mode
3: : On-demand mode
n Process 95 % Response Time (TR)

Set the rise time for 95 % of process step response in an open-loop.
l Process 95 % Response Time Setting Methods

The Self-Tuning PID Controller Block (PID-STC) calculates the time for measured signal
waveform observation as well as sampling time for process characteristic estimation, based
on the process 95 % response time (TR). To operate the STC function in a good condition, an
optimum value for the process 95 % response time (TR) is required.
Process 95 % response time
Set the rising time for 95 % of process step response in an open-loop.
The procedure to set an optimum TR value is shown below:
When step responses from the process are known
Set the time required for the process variable change (PV) to reach 95 % of the settling
value.
When the process can be approximated based on the first-order lag system
Obtain TR that satisfied TR=L+3T, from the dead time (L) and first-order lag constant (T)
of the process, and set the obtained value as the process 95 % response time (TR).
When the process is an astatic system (integral system)
The time required for the process variable change (PV) reach 95 % peak can be set as
the response rising time (TR) after an impulse is applied to the process.
When the past operating process behavior is known
Obtain the specific oscillation cycle (Tp) of the process from the past operation data, and
set this value as the process 95 % response time.
When the response time is expected to change
Set a value in accordance with the particular response waveform to be controlled. As in
the case of furnace temperature, if the response rising time of the process variable (PV)
is different from the falling time, use the longer response time. In this way, estimated
process characteristic values will have less error than that the shorter response time is
used.
l Examples of Process 95 % Response Time (TR) Estimation

The figures below are examples of process response estimation when step responses from
the process are known (estimated from the step response waveform) and when the past oper-
ation conditions are known (estimated from damped oscillatory waveform):

Estimation from the step response waveform
MV
PV
settling value
PV
95 %
Time
TR
Estimation from the damped oscillatory waveform
TR=TP
PV
TP
Specific
oscillation cycle
Time
Figure 1.13.7-1 TR Estimation Methods
n Noise Band (NB)

Set the noise band (NB) to prevent process characteristic estimation from being disturbed by
noise. For the noise band, set a value that is twice of the peak value of random noise being
superimposed over measured signals (maximum width of noise).
When a noise band (NB) is set, process characteristic estimation will be started when the
process variable (PV) changes beyond the limits of noise band (NB) during a single sampling
period.
NB
Time
Figure 1.13.7-2 Noise Band
Noise Band (NB): Set a value that is twice of the peak value of random noise being su-
perimposed over measured signals (maximum width of noise).
n Control Target Type (OS)

The desirable control target response waveform varies depending upon the process type and
operating method. Set a control target type (OS) from the tuning view according to the con-
trolled system.
Control target type (OS): Select a control target type and specify a numeric value indi-
cating the type.
The table below shows the control target types (OS) that can be set for the Self-Tuning PID
Controller Block (PID-STC):

OS Target overshoot Characteristics Evaluation expression
0 0% Overshoot: zero Overshoot zero
Minimum time-load control area
Overshoot: small
1 5%
Settling time: short Min | e | tdt
0
Minimum control area

Overshoot: medium
2 10 %
Rise time: slightly quick Min | e | dt
0
Minimum squared control area

Overshoot: large
3 15 % Rise time: quick Min e 2 tdt
0
Figure 1.13.7-3 Control Target Types
0
No overshoot exists.
1
Minimizes the product of the evaluation expression that multiplies the deviation area by
elapsed time. The overshoot is smaller and setting time is shorter.
2
Minimizes the control area (deviation). This is the default setting.
3
Minimizes the squared area of deviation. The overshoot is larger and rise time is quicker.
Control area
SV
PV response
Time
Figure 1.13.7-4 Control Areas and PV Responses
n MV Impulse Amplitude (MI)

The MV Impulse amplitude (MI) is the size of the test signal that is applied to the manipulated
output value (MV) during the auto-startup or on-demand mode. The value is set from the tun-
ing view.
MV Impulse amplitude (MI): Set a value that may trigger the process variable (PV)s im-
pulse response around 5 %.
As the auto-startup mode is a MAN state, the current control deviation is assumed to be on
the safe side and the test signal is added in the direction of increasing control deviation. In the
on-demand mode, which is an AUT state, the test signal is added in the direction of decreas-
ing control deviation.
The table below shows the directions of MV step changes:

Table 1.13.7-4 Directions of MV Step Changes
Action mode
Operating mode Deviation
Direct action Reverse action
SVPV +MI % -MI %
Auto-startup
SV<PV -MI % +MI %
SVPV -MI % +MI %
On-demand
SV<PV +MI % -MI %
n PID Parameters (P, I, D)

The PID parameters (P, I, D) are used in control computation.
The values of respective parameters are shown below:
P: Proportional band
I: Integral time
D: Derivative time
During operation in the PID parameter automatic updating mode, the values set for PID pa-
rameters (P, I, D) are used as initial values and updated automatically when the self-tuning
function (STC function) is activated.
Set initial values for PID parameters (P, I, D) using the following methods:
l New Process
When estimation or calculation is possible based on the statistical data of other process-
es
Use values estimated or calculated based on the statistical data of other processes.
When using estimated or calculated values is difficult
Use auto-startup. If auto-startup cannot be used, perform self-tuning in the PID parameter
display mode, and use the values displayed as new calculated values of PID parameter
(PA, IA, DA).
l Existing Control System Replacement

Use the PID values before the replacement.
n PID Data Set High/Low Limits (PMAX, PMIN, IMAX, IMIN, DMAX)
If the process is likely to receive negative impacts when PID parameters (P, I, D) exceed their
specified limit, set PID data set high/low limits in advance.
The PID data set high/low limits indicate control ranges that are used to limit PID parameters
(P, I, D) when they are changed by the STC function.
PMAX: Proportional band high limit
PMIN: Proportional band low limit
IMAX: Integral time high limit
IMIN: Integral time low limit
DMAX: Derivative time high limit
The PID parameters (P, I, D) are limited within the range of the corresponding high/low limits:
PMIN P PMAX (Same for PA when the STC value is 1)
IMIN I IMAX (Same for IA when the STC value is 1)

0 D PMAX (Same for DA when the STC value is 1)
If the set high limit is smaller than low limit, the corresponding PID parameter (P, I or D) will be
fixed to the high limit value. If the DMAX value is 0, the value of the PID parameter (D) be-
comes 0. If the PMAX value is 0, the value of the PID parameter (P or D) becomes 0.
If, due to the STC function any PID parameter (P, I, or D) exceeds the control range during
operation in the PID parameter automatic updating mode, the block status changes to PID pa-
rameter limiting (PLMT) and the PID parameter (P, I or D) obtained by the STC function will be
limited within the range of the corresponding PID data set high/low limits (PMAX, PMIN, IM-
AX, IMIN or DMAX).
The PID parameter limiting (PLMT) status is canceled when the applicable PID parameter (P,
I or D) has changed to a value inside the control range or when the STC actions have stop-
ped (STC=-1).
n PID Update Ratio Coefficient (PIDC)

The PID update ratio coefficient (PIDC) represents a ratio at which the current PID parame-
ters (P, I, D) are updated by the corresponding PID parameter values calculated by the STC
function (PA, IA, DA).
PID update ratio coefficient (PIDC): A value between 0.00 and 1.00.
The parameters are not updated if PIDC is 0.00. If PIDC is 1.00, the PID parameter values
calculated by the STC function (PA, IA, DA) will be set directly as PID parameters (P, I, D).
If the estimated model remains unstable due to disturbances and the PID parameters (P, I, D)
tend to change although slightly with every tuning, set a smaller PIDC value to stabilize the
PID parameters (P, I, D).
This coefficient is effective only in the PID parameter automatic updating mode.
PBnew = (1.0-PIDC) PB +PIDC PA
TInew = (1.0-PIDC) TI +PIDC IA
TDnew = (1.0-PIDC) TD +PIDC DA
PBnew : New effective proportional band value

PB : Current effective proportional band value
PA : PB calculated value
TInew : New effective integral time value
TI : Current effective integral time value
IA : TI calculated value
TDnew : New effective derivative time value
TD : Current effective derivative time value
DA : TD calculated value
PIDC : Update ratio coefficient (0.00 to 1.00)
IMPORTANT
When exceptional tuning is performed at slow response or hunting response processing, the
PID update ratio coefficient (PIDC) is ignored and the PID parameter values (PA, IA, DA) cal-
culated by the STC function will be set directly as PID parameters (P, I, D).

n Estimation Error (CR)

Whenever an estimated process model is created, the STC function simulates the output of
the model and calculates a squared error based on the actual process response. The estima-
tion error is a value obtained from the best parameter set which has the smallest estimation
error.
If the estimated model matches perfectly with the actual process, the estimation error (CR)
becomes 0.000. However, as the actual process is affected by measurement noise and vari-
ous disturbances, deviations exist between the estimated model and actual process and the
value of the estimation error (CR) varies accordingly.
When the value of the estimation error (CR) exceeds 5.000, the Self-Tuning PID Controller
Block (PID-STC) assumes that the current estimated model is not effective and starts creating
a new estimated model using new data without updating the PID parameters (P, I, D).
n Estimated Models (LM, TM, GM)

The Self-Tuning PID Controller Block (PID-STC) creates estimated models by approximating
the target process based on the dead time and first-order lag system. The estimated models,
LM, TM and GM, represent the equivalent dead time, equivalent first-order lag constant and
equivalent process gain, respectively.
The estimated models (LM, TM, GM) hold the latest values as long as the estimation error
(CR) is under 5.000.
The estimation error (CR) is updated every time a process characteristic estimation is per-
formed, but the estimated models (LM, TM, GM) are updated if the estimation error (CR) is
5.000 or greater.
n New Calculated Values of PID Parameters (PA, IA, DA)

The new calculated values of PID parameters obtained by the self-tuning function (STC func-
tion). If the value of the Self-tuning operating mode (STC) is 1, the new calculated values of
PID parameters (PA, IA, DA) are set as the corresponding PID parameters (P, I, D) after re-
ceiving computation processing based on the PID update ratio coefficient (PIDC).
n Process Type (IP)

Process Type
The process type indicates whether the target process is a static system (non-integral system)
or astatic system (integral system). The process type is specified in the Function Block Detail
Builder.
Process Type: Select Static system or Astatic.
The default is Static system.
The static system is a process whose process variable (PV) changes gradually toward a set-
tling value when step change is added to the manipulated output value (MV), until an equilibri-
um state is finally reached. The astatic system is a process whose process variable (PV) rises
or falls infinitely with time when step change is added to the manipulated output value (MV).
An example of astatic system is a constant-flow pump whose flowrate is maintained at con-
stant levels via level control.
The figures below show examples of step responses from static system and astatic system
processes:

Static system (non-integral system) process
MV
PV settling value
PV
Time
Astatic system (integral system) process
MV
PV
Time
Figure 1.13.7-5 Examples of Step Responses from Static System and Astatic System Processes
n MAN Mode STC Function Bypass

STC Function Bypass Designation for MAN Mode
Specify whether to use or bypass the self-tuning function (STC function) when the block is in
a manual operating mode (MAN, PRD or ROUT).
Use the Function Block Detail Builder to set the MAN mode STC function bypass specifica-
tion.
STC function bypass designation for MAN mode: Select Yes or No.
The default is Yes.
In general, it is not desirable that PID parameters (P, I, D) change when PID computation is
not performed. Therefore, set Yes as the default bypass specification.
In the bypass mode, the STC function does become active. However, as I/O data is constant-
ly observed, the STC function becomes active as soon as the block changes to an automatic
operating mode (AUT, CAS or RCAS).
If No is set as the bypass specification, the STC function becomes active even in a manual
operating mode (MAN, PRD or ROUT). Setting No as the bypass specification is effective in
the PID parameter display mode or PID parameter automatic updating mode.

1.13.8 Points of Using Self-Tuning PID Controller Block

(PID-STC)
This section explains the points to be noted when using the self-tuning function (STC func-
tion) in various controlled systems and loops as well as applicability of the function.
n Applicable Conditions of Self-Tuning PID Controller Block (PID-STC)

The self-tuning function can be used only when the process satisfies the following conditions:
PID control is allowed.
The cycle of factors that can cause changes in the control deviation (changes in process
characteristics and setpoint values, etc.) is longer than the specific oscillation cycle of the
control loop.
Responses between the manipulated variable (MV) and process variable (PV) can be ap-
proximated by the dead time and first-order lag system or integral system.
In general, many processes can be approximated with a combination of higher-order lag ele-
ment, dead time, and process gain, by the following expression:
Ke-LS
Gp(s)=
(1+T1S) (1+T2S) ....... (1+TnS)
In estimated models created by the STC function, even the higher-order system used in the
above expression is approximated by the dead time and first-order lag system. The Self-Tun-
ing PID Controller Block (PID-STC) performs appropriate tuning after changes have occurred
in the process variable (PV) as a result of changes in the setpoint value or manipulated varia-
ble. Appropriate control is ensured if the ratio of dead time to lag time (L/T) is 3 or smaller.
n Stable Control Loops (Regulatory Control)

When using a Self-Tuning PID Controller Block (PID-STC) in a stable control loop in which the
setpoint value does not change frequently and process characteristics undergo little fluctua-
tion, it is recommended that the control be performed with the self-tuning function (STC func-
tion) turned OFF once optimum PID parameters (P, I, D) are calculated. The procedure is
shown below:
1. First, obtain optimum PID parameters (P, I, D) using the STC function.
2. Change the PID data set high/low limits to reduce the range of PID parameters (P, I, D) or
turn the STC function OFF (STC=-1).
n Controlling a Process with a Longer Dead Time

The following section shows the points to be noted when using a Self-Tuning PID Controller
Block (PID-STC) in a process with a longer dead time:
When a Self-Tuning PID Controller Block (PID-STC) is used to control a process in which the
dead time element is dominant, determine whether or not appropriate control is feasible using
the Self-Tuning PID Controller Block (PID-STC), based on the value of the dead time/lag time
ratio (L/T).
When the dead time/lag time ratio (L/T) of the process is smaller than 3
Appropriate actions can be obtained by combining basic PID functions and the STC func-
tion.
When the dead time/lag time ratio (L/T) of the process is larger than 3
It is difficult to perform control by combining basic PID functions and the STC function. In
this case, consider using the Smiths Dead Time Compensation Control or sampled value

PI control. Note that the STC function cannot be used with either of these control meth-
ods.
n Cascade Control with Quicker Downstream Responses

The following section shows the points to be noted when using Self-Tuning PID Controller
Blocks (PID-STC) in a process with quick responses coming from downstream, by using an
example of a cascade loop consisting of temperature control and flowrate control as the up-
stream and downstream processes, respectively.
Distillation
column Temperature TIC
FIC
Flowrate
Steam
Figure 1.13.8-1 Cascade Control loop with Quicker Downstream Responses
Unless frequent changes occur in the process of the downstream Self-Tuning PID Controller
Block (PID-STC), it is recommended to use the Self-tuning function (STC function) of the up-
stream Self-Tuning PID Controller Block (PID-STC) only. The procedure is shown below:
1. Change the downstream block to AUT mode to open the cascade connection.
2. Set an optimal PID value using the STC function of the downstream Self-Tuning PID Con-
troller Block (PID-STC).
3. Turn off the STC function of the downstream Self-Tuning PID Controller Block (PID-STC).
4. Establish the cascade connection.
5. Turn on the STC function of the upstream Self-Tuning PID Controller Block (PID-STC).
n Cascade Control with Slower Downstream Responses

Block (PID-STC) in a process with slower responses coming from downstream, by using an
example of a cascade loop consisting of two temperature control processes in upstream and
downstream.

TC 1
Raw material
TC 2
Cooling
jacket
Water
Reactor
Steam
Split range control valve
Figure 1.13.8-2 Cascade Control with Slower Downstream Responses
The procedure to control this cascade loop is shown below:

1. Change the downstream block to AUT mode to open the cascade connection.
2. Set an optimal PID value using the STC function of the downstream Self-Tuning PID Con-
troller Block (PID-STC).
3. Turn off the STC function of the downstream Self-Tuning PID Controller Block (PID-STC).
4. Establish the cascade connection.
5. Turn on the STC function of the upstream Self-Tuning PID Controller Block (PID-STC).
In this type of cascade loop, it is generally recommended that the Self-tuning function (STC
function) be executed only in the upstream controller, which is the main target of control, in
order to avoid interaction between the two STC functions in upstream and downstream.
n Controlling a Process with Changing Target Control Characteristics

Block (PID-STC) in a process where target control characteristics, such as gain, lag time and
dead time, fluctuate.
Intermediate
outflow volume
Inflow volume Pump F0
F1 Outflow volume
F
LIC FIC
Level
Tank
Re-circulated
Figure 1.13.8-3 Process with Changing Gain
The above example shows a process where the flowrate F is control target. Since the flowrate
F1, inflow of the tank, fluctuate periodically, the level control is activated to change the inter-
mediate outflow volume F0. The changes in F0 correspond to those in gain that occur in the
target control process of FIC.
If the change cycle of the target control characteristic is longer than the specific oscillation cy-
cle of the control loop, the self-tuning function (STC function) is activated to follow up the
change. If changes in the process variable response are detected as a result of the changes
in the target control characteristic, the STC function will be activated.

n Neutralization Control
Block (PID-STC) for neutralization control.
14
Neutralizing
agent 12
pHC
10
Controlled fluid
pH 8
7
6
pH transmitter
4
0
MV (neutralizing agent)
Figure 1.13.8-4 Neutralization Control
In the neutralization control shown above, the pH process shows non-linear characteristics;
i.e., the gain increases significantly near the neutralizing point (pH=7) and becomes small on
both sides.
The pH controller is controlled by calculating optimum PID parameter values (P, I, D) near the
neutralizing point. Therefore, the proportional band converges by several hundred percent,
making it impossible to obtain appropriate control away from the neutralizing point. In this
case, specify non-linear gain processing for the controller and use the STC function after ob-
taining linear characteristics.
n Tank Level Control with Integral Characteristics

Block (PID-STC) in a process with integral characteristics, by using a level control process as
an example:
LIC
Q1
Q1 inflow volume
Level Fluid level H

gauge
Constant flowrate
Constant-flow pump t
Figure 1.13.8-5 Control with Integral Characteristics
The level control shown above is a process that maintains a constant outflow volume via a
constant-flow pump, regardless of the fluid level. In this process, the fluid level (H) continues
to rise linearly as the inflow volume (Q1) increases. In other words, this is an integral process
that does not have a self-regulation function. When controlling an integral process, use pro-

portional and derivative (PD) control by setting a longer integral time, as the process becomes
unstable if the integral time is short.
In this type of integral process, use the self-tuning function (STC function) by setting 1 for
the process type (IP). When the process type (IP) is 1, proportional and derivative (PD) con-
trol is executed by setting a longer integral time.
n Controlling a Process with Phases of Varying Response Speeds

Block (PID-STC) in a process where the response speed varies depending on the phase, by
using an example of temperature control.
MV Step input
Time
PV
Temperature
Time
Heating phase Cooling

phase
Figure 1.13.8-6 Example of Step Responses in a Process with Phases of Varying Response Speeds
In a heating furnace or heat exchanger process that requires temperature control, the process
response time may vary with the heating phase and cooling phase. When using a Self-Tuning
PID Controller Block (PID-STC) to control these processes, set the process 95 % response
time (TR) based on the phase with a longer response time.
PID parameters changes between the optimum PID parameters (P, I, D) of the two phases in
accordance with the direction of process variable response actions.
n Controlling a Process with Slower Actions at the Final Control

Element
Block (PID-STC) in a process whose final control element exhibits slower actions, by using an
example of flowrate control with a motor-operated valve.
Flow gauge FIC
Motor-operated
M
valve
Figure 1.13.8-7 Motor-Operated Valve Flowrate Control

SV + + MV
PID
- -
PV
aTds
1+Tds
a: First-order lead computation gain
Td: First-order lead constant
Figure 1.13.8-8 Controlling a Process with Slower Actions at the Final Control Element
When performing flowrate control using a motor-operated valve, the speed of response time
control for the motor-operated valve may be affected, as the response time of the motor-oper-
ated value is slower than that of the flow gauge. As the self-tuning function (STC function) es-
timates process characteristics by taking into account delays at the final control element, set a
larger proportional band than when there is no delay at the final control element.
If controllability needs to be further improved, consider using phase compensation by first-or-
der lead computation, in order to compensate for the derivative actions.
n Program Pattern Control

The following shows points to be noted when applying a Self-Tuning PID Controller Block
(PID-STC) to program control, by using an example of a program controlling process where
the setpoint value of the temperature controller is changed in accordance with a specific tem-
perature rise and fall pattern:
Temperature
Temperature pattern
Time
TPG Temperature pattern generator
TIC
Heat treatment
furnace
Fuel
Figure 1.13.8-9 Program Control
When applying a Self-Tuning PID Controller Block (PID-STC) to a program controlling proc-
ess where the setpoint value of the temperature controller is changed in accordance with a
specific temperature rise and fall pattern, note the following points:
Select the PI-D type (PV derivative type) control algorithm. The I-PD type (PV proportion-
al and derivative type) algorithm provides poor follow-up capability relative to changes in
SV.
If it requires that overshoot of the rising temperature must be minimized, set 0 for the
control target type (OS) of the Self-Tuning PID Controller Block (PID-STC).
In general, when the setpoint value changes along a ramp pattern, as in the case of rising or
falling temperature, the Self-Tuning PID Controller Block (PID-STC) generates an offset. If on-
demand tuning is executed at this time, the MV Impulse amplitude (MI) is applied to the ma-
nipulated output value (MV) in the direction of decreasing control deviation, then PID parame-

ters (P, I, D) are calculated and set automatically based on the response obtained. As a result,
the offset is reduced.
n Batch Control Combining a Self-Tuning PID Controller Block (PID-

STC)
Block (PID-STC) for batch control:
Additional
Temperature raw material
input Batch end
SV
PV
Time
STC stop STC stop
Figure 1.13.8-10 Batch Control
During PID control, simple batch processes are subject to large disturbances beyond the cor-
rectable range through feedback control, as a result of additional charging of raw materials or
discharging of products in large quantities. In such cases, use the STC start and stop func-
tions to build a sequence control process where STC actions stop temporarily when distur-
bances occur.
If the process is left unattended after batch end, with the setpoint value (SV) maintained at a
constant level in the automatic (AUT) mode, stop the STC function to prevent any unnecessa-
ry action of the self-tuning function (STC function).
n Controlling Interacting Loops Whose Interaction cannot be

Eliminated
The following section shows the points to be noted when using Self-tuning PID controller
blocks (PID-STC) to control interacting loops whose interaction cannot be eliminated, by us-
ing an example of pressure control and flowrate control interacting with each other:
PC FC
Pressure Flowrate
Figure 1.13.8-11 Controlling Interacting Loops Whose Interaction cannot be Eliminated
If interaction exists between pressure control and flowrate control, as shown in the figure
above, using the self-tuning function (STC function) in both control loops causes interacting
oscillation when their PID parameters (P, I, D) approach optimum values. In this case, turn off
the STC function of one Self-Tuning PID Controller Block (PID-STC) whose process variable
(PV) is allowed to change, and set larger values for the current effective proportional band
(PB) and current effective integral time (TI). (e.g.: PB=100 to 200 %, TI=30 to 80 seconds)
After this, use the STC function of the other Self-Tuning PID Controller Block (PID-STC) only.

n Controlling Interacting Loops whose Interaction can be Eliminated

Blocks (PID-STC) to control interacting loops whose interaction can be eliminated, by using
an example of temperature control in a distillation column:
T1
Distillation
column +
m1
TC
LL - 1
1
g21
-
g22
g12
-
g11
TC m2 LL - 2
2
+
T2
TC 1
PID controller
TC 2
Figure 1.13.8-12 Controlling Interacting Loops whose Interaction Can Be Eliminated
If interaction exists between the column top temperature and column bottom temperature con-
trol segments of a distillation column process, first execute non-interacting control.
The method of non-interacting control is shown below:
In the figure, when the transmission function between the output mi and temperature Tj of the
controller TCi is gij. T1 and T2 will be represented as follows after non-interacting elements
LL-1 and LL-2 are applied:
T1 = (g11-g12 g21/g22) m1
T2 = (g22-g12 g21/g11) m2
As a result, the process is divided into two control loops that are regulated based on T1 and
T2, respectively.
Configure STC after confirming the result of this non-interacting control.
n Controlling a Loop Subject to Impulse Noise

When a Self-Tuning PID Controller Block (PID-STC) is used to control a loop subject to im-
pulse noise, the Self-Tuning PID Controller Block (PID-STC) estimates process characteris-
tics after removing the impulse noise. When noise generates frequently, set a noise band
(NB).
If impulse noise is generated frequently at intervals of TR/10 or shorter, consider using filters
to remove the noise.

<1.14 Manual Loader Block (MLD)> 1-154
1.14 Manual Loader Block (MLD)

Manual Loader Block (MLD) may be applied to output manipulated output value (MV) to man-
ually operate final control elements, such as control valves.
n Manual Loader Block (MLD)

Connection
Manual Loader Block (MLD) outputs manipulated output value (MV) set from operation and
monitoring function. When in tracking (TRK) mode, the tracking input signal received from the
TIN terminal is output as manipulated output value (MV).
The figure below shows a function block diagram of the Manual Loader Block (MLD):
TIN TSI
(TSW)
Output
MV OUT
processing
(MV, MV)
SUB
Figure 1.14-1 Function Block Diagram of Manual Loader Block (MLD)
nals of the Manual Loader Block (MLD):
Table 1.14-1 Connection Methods and Connected destinations of the I/O Terminals of Manual Loader
Block (MLD)
Process I/O
Manipu-
OUT x x x x
lated output
Auxiliary
SUB x x x
output
Tracking
TIN x x x
signal input
Tracking
TSI x x x x
SW input
n Function of Manual Loader Block (MLD)

The MLD block performs output processing and alarm processing.
The only processing timing available for the MLD block is a periodic startup. Selections avail-

<1.14 Manual Loader Block (MLD)> 1-155
SEE
ALSO For more information about the types of output processing and alarm processing possible for the MLD block,
refer to:
n Data Items - MLD

Table 1.14-2 Data Items of Manual Loader Block (MLD)
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
AF ----- 0
tion
AOFS ----- 0
tion
MH x MSL to MSH MSH
limit setpoint
ML x MSL to MSH MSL
limit setpoint
*2: MSH: MV scale high limit
SEE
ALSO For more information about valid block modes of the MLD block, refer to:

<1.15 Manual Loader Block with Input Indicator (MLD-PVI)> 1-156
1.15 Manual Loader Block with Input Indicator

(MLD-PVI)
Manual Loader Block with Input Indicator (MLD-PVI) may output manipulated output value
while displaying the process variable (PV). It may be applied to manually operate final control
elements and observing the process variable (PV) at the same time.
n Manual Loader Block with Input Indicator (MLD-PVI)

Connection
Manual Loader Block with Input Indicator (MLD-PVI) displays the value input from the IN ter-
minal as process variable (PV). It also outputs the value set from operation and monitoring
function as manipulated output value (MV). In tracking (TRK) mode, the block outputs the
tracking input signal received from the TIN terminal as manipulated output value (MV).
The figure below shows a function block diagram of the Manual Loader Block with Input Indi-
cator (MLD-PVI):
TIN TSI
(TSW)
Input Output
IN PV MV OUT
(PV, PV, MV, MV)
SUB
Figure 1.15-1 Function Block Diagram of Manual Loader Block with Input Indicator (MLD-PVI)
nals of the Manual Loader Block with Input Indicator (MLD-PVI):
Block with Input Indicator (MLD-PVI)
Process I/O
Measure-
IN x x x
ment input
Manipu-
OUT x x x x
lated output
Auxiliary
SUB x x x
output
Tracking
TIN x x x
signal input
Tracking
TSI x x x x
SW input

n Function of Manual Loader Block with Input Indicator (MLD-PVI)

The MLD-PVI block performs input processing, output processing, and alarm processing.
The only processing timing available for the MLD-PVI block is a periodic startup. Selections
SEE
for the MLD-PVI block, refer to:
n Data Items - MLD-PVI

Table 1.15-2 Data Items of Manual Loader Block with Input Indicator (MLD-PVI)
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
MODE Block mode x ----- O/S(MAN)
AF ----- 0
tion
AOFS ----- 0
tion
nection destination
HH x SL to SH SH
point
LL x SL to SH SL
point
neering unit as PV
MH x MSL to MSH MSH
limit setpoint

Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
ML x MSL to MSH MSL
limit setpoint
neering unit as PV
neering unit as PV
SEE
ALSO For more information about valid block modes of the MLD block, refer to:

<1.16 Manual Loader Block with Auto/Man SW (MLD-SW)> 1-159
1.16 Manual Loader Block with Auto/Man SW

(MLD-SW)
Manual Loader Block with Auto/Man SW (MLD-SW) may be applied as the lowest down-
stream block in the control loops that consist of multiple function blocks.
n Manual Loader Block with Auto/Man SW (MLD-SW)

MLD-SW AUT/CAS, Connection
The Manual Loader Block with Auto/Man SW (MLD-SW) selects the manipulated output sig-
nals to be sent to final control elements, by switching between the output signal received from
a controller and its own manually manipulated output signal.
In the manual (MAN) mode, the Manual Loader Block with Auto/Man SW (MLD-SW) outputs
the value set from operation and monitoring function as manipulated output value (MV) to op-
erate the final control element. In the automatic (AUT) mode or cascade (CAS) mode, it per-
forms control computation processing to the value input from other function block (CSV), and
outputs the result as a manipulated output value (MV) while in the manual mode (MAN) it out-
puts the MV set from the operation and monitoring function.
Whether to set the cascade (CAS) mode or automatic (AUT) block mode for outputting the
result obtained by control computation processing of the value input from other function block,
may be selected for each control station on the property sheet of the FCS:
MLD-SW AUT/CAS: Check CAS or AUT.
The default is AUT.
The figure below shows the function block diagram of Manual Loader Block with Auto/Man
SW (MLD-SW)
SET TIN TSI INT
(TSW)
CSV
GAI CSV+BIAS
SV
Range AUT (CAS) Output

MV OUT
adjustment processing
Control computation
MAN
processing
(MV, MV)
SUB
Figure 1.16-1 Function Block Diagram of Manual Loader Block with Auto/Man SW (MLD-SW)
nals of the Manual Loader Block with Auto/Man SW (MLD-SW):
Block with Auto/Man SW (MLD-SW)
Process I/O
Setting in-
SET x x
put

Process I/O
Manipu-
OUT x x x x
lated output
Auxiliary
SUB x x x
output
Tracking
TIN x x x
signal input
Tracking
TSI x x x x
SW input
Interlock
INT x x x x
SW input
n Function of Manual Loader Block with Auto/Man SW (MLD-SW)

The MLD-SW block performs control computation processing, output processing, and alarm
processing.
The only processing timing available for the MLD-SW block is a periodic startup. Selections
SEE
ALSO For more information about the types of output processing and alarm processing possible for the MLD-SW
block, refer to:
l Control Computation Processing of Manual Loader Block with Auto/Man

SW (MLD-SW)
The table below shows the control computation processing functions of the Manual Loader
Block with Auto/Man SW (MLD-SW):
Table 1.16-2 Control Computation Processing Functions of Manual Loader Block with Auto/Man SW
(MLD-SW)
Performs computation processing to the cascade setpoint
value (CSV) and obtains a setpoint value (SV). Then, per-
Automatic control output computation
forms range conversion to this SV and obtains a manipu-
lated output value.
Converts the manipulated output change (MV) during
each control period to an actual manipulated output value
(MV). The control output actions available with this function
block are of positional type only.
Set the setpoint value (SV) which was converted to the
cascade setpoint value (CSV) to the CSU.

Switches the manipulated output value (MV) without caus-
ing it to change abruptly when the block mode has been
Bumpless switching
changed or when the manipulated output value (MV) has
been switched in a downstream block in cascade.
Performs inverse operation on the manipulated output val-
ue to obtain SV and CSV and uses them as a setpoint val-
ue (SV) and cascade setpoint value (CSV), respectively.
Output pushback
Combining this function with output tracking prevents the
manipulated output value (MV) from changing abruptly
when the mode is changed to automatic.
Obtains a BIAS value to balance the manipulated output
value and cascade setpoint value, and resets the bias
Bumpless switching
Bias tracking term. Combining this function with output tracking prevents
the manipulated output value (MV) from changing abruptly
when the mode is changed to automatic.
Causes the current manipulated output value (MV) to grad-
ually approach the MV value converted from the setpoint
Setpoint value ramp
value. This prevents the manipulated output value (MV)
action
from changing abruptly when the mode is changed to auto-
matic.
Changes the block mode to IMAN to temporarily suspend
Initialization manual the control action. This action takes place when the initiali-
zation manual condition becomes satisfied.
Changes the block mode to MAN to forcibly stop the con-
MAN fallback trol action. This action takes place when the MAN fallback
Stops the control action of function blocks currently operat-
Block mode change interlock ing automatically, while disabling the stopped function
blocks from changing to the automatic operating mode.
n Automatic Control Output Computation

The automatic control output computation function converts the value set from other function
blocks as a cascade setpoint value (CSV) to a manipulated output value (MV).
l Characteristics of Automatic Control Output Computation

The following computational expression is used in automatic control output:
The computation processing shown below is performed to the cascade setpoint value (CSV)
to obtain a setpoint value (SV):
SV=GAIN CSV+BIAS
When the block mode is automatic (AUT) or cascade (CAS), a manipulated output value (MV)
is obtained by performing range conversion to the setpoint value (SV).
The following computational expression is used in range conversion:
MSH-MSL
MV= (SV-SSL)+MSL
SSH-SSL

SSH : SV scale high limit
SSL : SV scale low limit

l Set Parameters of Automatic Control Output Computation

The parameters of automatic control output computation:
Gain (GAIN)
Arbitrary data.
Bias value (BIAS)
Engineering unit data within the SV scale span range.
The default is 0.0.
l Setpoint range (SV)

SV Range
Referencing the output range of the connected function block, set the setpoint value (SV)
range:
SV range high limit
Numerical values of seven digits or less, where the sign and decimal point occupy one
digit each.
SV range low limit
Specify a numeric value of 7 digits or less, where the sign and decimal point occupy one
digit each.
The default is 0.0.

The control output action converts the manipulated output change (MV) of each control period
to an actual manipulated output value (MV).
The control output actions applied in Manual loader with Aut/Man SW (MLD-SW) is positional
type. The manipulated output value (MV) is the value obtained from automatic control output
computation.

When output is clamped, the setpoint value (SV) is converted to and set as a cascade set-
point value (CSV), using the following computational expression:
SV-BIAS
CSV=
GAIN
The setpoint value pushback action does not take place if GAIN is 0.
status.
The bumpless switching performed by the Manual Loader Block with Auto/Man SW (MLD-
SW) include the following types:
Output pushback

Bias tracking
Setpoint value ramp action
l Output Pushback
The output pushback function calculates a setpoint value (SV) and cascade setpoint value
(CSV) from the manipulated output value (MV) when the block is in the manual (MAN) or initi-
alization manual (IMAN) mode, and put it to the setpoint value (SV) and cascade setpoint val-
ue (CSV), respectively. Output pushback is used when an upstream block is cascade connec-
ted to the Manual Loader Block with Auto/Man SW (MLD-SW), and the upstream block is
tracking to the MLD-SW. With the combination of the output pushback and the output tracking
function of the cascade connected upstream control block, the manipulated output value (MV)
of the cascade connected upstream block changes in accordance with the manipulated output
value (MV) of the Manual Loader Block with Auto/Man SW (MLD-SW) when the cascade con-
nection is open. This action allows to change the block mode for the Manual Loader Block
with Auto/Man SW (MLD-SW) from manual (MAN) to automatic (AUT) bumplessly and without
balancing.
The computational expressions of output pushback:
SSH-SSL
SV= (MV-MSL)+SSL
MSH-MSL
SV-BIAS
CSV=
GAIN
The output pushback action takes place when the following settings are performed:
No is set for bias tracking.
A value other than 0 is set for GAIN.
The following figure shows an action example of output pushback:
A Manual Loader Block with output switch is cascade connected in the middle of this loop,
when the cascade connection is open the manipulated output value (MV) of the upstream
block is forced to be equal to the setpoint value (SV) of the downstream block in the same
cascade loop:
PV MV
CAS
PID (AUT) MAN
Output pushback
Output value tracking SV

MV
CAS
MLD-SW AUT/MAN
Output value tracking

SV
PV MV
PID
Figure 1.16-2 Output Pushback and Output Value Tracking when Cascade is Open
In the above action example, bumpless switching is realized by the following three functions:
Output value tracked by the upstream block in the cascade loop
Output pushback by the Manual Loader Block with Auto/Man SW (MLD-SW)

Output value tracks the downstream by the Manual Loader Block with Auto/Man SW
(MLD-SW)
l Bias Tracking
Bias Tracking
The bias tracking function calculates a bias value (BIAS) that allows the manipulated output
value (MV) to agree with the MV value converted from the cascade setpoint value (CSV), and
replaces the current bias value (BIAS) with the calculated value. Bias tracking is used when
an upstream block cascade connected to the Manual Loader Block with Auto/Man SW (MLD-
SW) performances the output value tracking function. By using the bias tracking function,
switching of the block mode from manual (MAN) to automatic (AUT) can be performed bump-
lessly. When cascade connection is open, the upstream blocks MV does not only follow the
changes of MV of the Manual Loader Block with Auto/Man SW (MLD-SW) but also adds the
bias of the Manual Loader Block with Auto/Man SW (MLD-SW), so that the bump can be avoi-
ded when connection switches back to cascade.
The computational expressions of bias tracking:
SSH-SSL
SV= (MV-MSL)+SSL
MSH-MSL
BIAS=SV-GAIN CSV
Use the Function Block Detail Builder to define bias tracking.
Bias Tracking: Select Yes or No.
The default is No.
If Yes is defined for bias tracking, the output pushback and setpoint value ramp actions will
not be performed. If No is defined for bias tracking, these two actions will take place. Howev-
er, the setpoint value ramp action is not performed if the ramp constant (RP) set parameter
remains at its default value.
When the upstream function block in cascade connection is a Cascade Signal Distributor
Block (FOUT), define Yes for bias tracking. This activates the bias tracking action even
when the Cascade Signal Distributor Block (FOUT) has multiple output connected destina-
tions and the Manual Loader Block with Auto/Man SW (MLD-SW) in cascade is closed when
connected to the second output destination or thereafter.
l Setpoint Value Ramp Action

The setpoint value ramp action causes the current manipulated output value (MV) to gradually
approach the manipulated output value (MV) converted from the setpoint value (SV). This
function is used when a upstream block cascade connected to the Manual Loader Block with
Auto/Man SW (MLD-SW) is not defined the output tracking function.
The setpoint value ramp action takes place when the following two block mode changes are
performed:
The block mode changes from manual (MAN) to an automatic (AUT or CAS) mode.
The initialization manual (IMAN) mode is canceled while the block is still in an automatic
(AUT or CAS) mode.
The setpoint value ramp action causes the current manipulated output value (MV) to ap-
proach the manipulated output value (MV) converted from the setpoint value (SV), by limiting
the change per-scan period in the setpoint value (SV) that is used to calculate a manipulated
output value (MV) (effective setpoint value) to equivalent to or less than the ramp constant
(RP), when the setpoint value (SV) changes as a result of the above two block mode
changes.
The following example shows the action of the setpoint value ramp:

Ramp constant (RP)

SV
Effective setpoint value
Scan period
Time
Figure 1.16-3 Action Example of the Setpoint Value Ramp
The setpoint value ramp action takes place only when No is defined for the bias tracking.
The parameter of the setpoint value ramp action:
Ramp constant (RP): Engineering unit data between 0 and the SV scale span range limit.
The default is the SV scale span.
The setpoint value ramp action enables bumpless switching of the cascade status from open
to close, even when the upstream block in cascade connection does not have the output
tracking function and the bias tracking action of the Manual Loader Block with output switch is
disabled.

initialization manual condition is established, and changes the block mode of the function
block to initialization manual (IMAN).
When output value tracking is set to Yes with the Function Block Detail Builder, the manipu-
lated output value (MV) is tracked to the value of the connection destination when initialization
manual goes into effect. Because of this, even if the mode is changed to the manual (MAN)
mode during initialization manual (IMAN) mode, the initialization manual (IMAN) mode takes
priority and the operation to change to the manual (MAN) mode becomes invalid.
The block returns to the original mode when the initialization manual condition vanishes. How-
ever, if try to change block mode in the initialization manual (IMAN) mode, the block only
change to that mode when the initialization condition vanishes.

The initialization manual condition is a block mode transition condition that suspends the con-
trol action and control output action temporarily by changing the block mode to initialization
manual (IMAN). The initialization manual (IMAN) block mode becomes active only when the
initialization manual condition is established.
The following example shows when the initialization manual condition establishes and vanish-
es:
AUT
Initialization manual condition established
IMAN (AUT)

AUT
When the manipulated output value (MV) connected destinations data status is condition-
al (CND) (i.e., the cascade loop open).
SW-91) and the cascade connection is switched off (i.e., the cascade loop open).
a failure or output open alarm has occurred in the module.
When the data status of the input signal at the TIN or TSI terminals becomes invalid
(BAD) in the tracking (TRK) mode while the output signal is not a pulse-width type.
n MAN Fallback
The MAN fallback is an error processing function that stops the control and forces the function
block to enter manual operation state. This action takes place when the MAN fallback condi-
tion is established.
l Characteristics of the MAN Fallback

regardless of the current operation status, and forces the function block to enter manual oper-
ation state.
Once the MAN fallback condition is established, the block mode remains manual (MAN) even
when the condition later vanishes.

The following example shows when the MAN fallback condition is established:
AUTMAN
IMAN (AUT) IMAN (MAN)
When the manipulated output value (MV) is connected to a process I/O module and the
FCS is having an initial cold start.
When the manipulated output value (MV) is connected to a process I/O module, and one
of the I/O points connected to the module is undergoing maintenance load.



Any block mode change command to make the function block into automatic operation
state (AUT or CAS mode) become invalid.

n Data Items - MLD-SW

Table 1.16-3 Data Items of Manual Loader Block with Auto/Man SW (MLD-SW)
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
AF ----- 0
ton
AOFS ----- 0
tion
SV Setpoint value SV engineering unit value SSL
CSV Cascade setpoint value x SSL
neering unit as SV
MH x MSL to MSH MSH
limit setpoint
Mnipulated variable low -
ML x MSL to MSH MSL
limit setpoint
GAIN Gain x ----- 1.000
BIAS Bias x (SSH - SSL) 0.0
RP Ramp consistant x 0 to (SSH - SSL) SSH to SSL
value
PSW Preset MV swich x 0, 1, 2, 3 0

*2: SSH: SV scale high limit
SSL: SV scale low limit
SEE
ALSO For more information about valid block modes of the MLD-SW block, refer to:

<1.17 Motor Control Blocks (MC-2, MC-2E, MC-3, and MC-3E)> 1-169
1.17 Motor Control Blocks (MC-2, MC-2E, MC-3,

and MC-3E)
The Motor Control Blocks MC-2, MC-2E, MC-3, and MC-3E are applied to operate motor-driv-
en pumps and motor-operated valves. These blocks may be used to start or stop motors from
operation and monitoring functions or to control them automatically.
There are four models of Motor Control Block (MC-2, MC-2E, MC-3, and MC-3E), which be-
haves in different output manner.
Two-Position Motor Control Block (MC-2)
Enhanced Two-Position Motor Control Block (MC-2E)
Three-Position Motor Control Block (MC-3)
Enhanced Three-Position Motor Control Block (MC-3E)
n Motor Control Blocks (MC-2, MC-2E, MC-3, and MC-3E)

Connection
The motor control blocks are provided with function to operate motor-driven pumps and mo-
tor-operated valves.
The motor control blocks enable starting and stopping of motors from operation and monitor-
ing functions. Also, combining the motor control blocks with the sequence control function to
realize the automatic control on motors.
The MC-2E (*1) and MC-3E (*1) blocks function the same as MC-2 and MC-3 blocks but
have the additional capability to connect to FF faceplate blocks and fieldbus function blocks.
Moreover, the input terminals for the two contacts and the output terminals for the two or
three contacts can be defined separately so that the two or three irrelevant channels can be
used.
*1: MC-2E and MC-3E blocks can be applied to all field control stations except standard PFCS. When using MC-2E or MC-3E
block, it is necessary to add the option [DIOENH] on the [Constant] tab of the FCS properties sheet.
The figure below shows the function block diagram of the motor control blocks (MC-2, MC-3):
SV CSV RMV
TT FV
Input Answerback Output

IN PV MV OUT
processing check function processing
FB
(BPSW)
SWI INT IL TSI
Figure 1.17-1 Function Block Diagram of the Motor Control Blocks (MC-2, MC-3)
nals of the Motor Control Blocks (MC-2, MC-3):

Table 1.17-1 Connection Methods and Connected destinations of the I/O Terminals of Motor Control
Blocks (MC-2, MC-3)
Process I/O
Answer-
IN x x x
back input
Manipu-
OUT x x x
lated output
Feedback
FB x x x
signal input
Thermal trip
TT x x x x
signal input
Operation
IL interlock in- x x x x
put
Bypass
SWI command x x
SW input
Tracking
TSI x x x x
SW input
Interlock
INT x x x x
SW input
The figure below shows the function block diagram of the motor control blocks (MC-2E):
SV CSV RMV
TT FV

IN1 PV MV OUT1
IN2 OUT2
FB
(BPSW)
SWI INT IL TSI
Figure 1.17-2 Function Block Diagram of the Enhanced Two-position Motor Control Blocks (MC-2E)
nals of the Motor Control Blocks (MC-2E):
Table 1.17-2 Connection Methods and Connected destinations of the I/O Terminals of Enhanced Two-
position Motor Control Blocks (MC-2E)
Process I/O
Answer-
IN1 x x x x
back input1
Answer-
IN2 x x x x
back input2

Process I/O
Manipu-
OUT1 lated out- x x x x x
put1
Manipu-
put2
Feedback
FB x x x
signal input
Thermal trip
TT x x x x
signal input
Operation
put
Bypass
SWI command x x
SW input
Tracking
TSI x x x x
SW input
Interlock
INT x x x x
SW input
The figure below shows the function block diagram of the motor control blocks (MC-3E):
SV CSV RMV
TT FV

IN1 PV MV OUT1
IN2 OUT2
FB OUT3
(BPSW)
SWI INT IL TSI
Figure 1.17-3 Function Block Diagram of the Enhanced Three-position Motor Control Blocks (MC-3E)
nals of the Motor Control Blocks (MC-3E):
Table 1.17-3 Connection Methods and Connected destinations of the I/O Terminals of Enhanced
Three-position Motor Control Blocks (MC-3E)
Process I/O
Answer-
IN1 x x x x
back input1
Answer-
IN2 x x x x
back input2

Process I/O
Manipu-
put1
Manipu-
put2
Manipu-
put3
Feedback
FB x x x
signal input
Thermal trip
TT x x x x
signal input
Operation
put
Bypass
SWI command x x
SW input
Tracking
TSI x x x x
SW input
Interlock
INT x x x x
SW input
IMPORTANT
If the OUTn terminals of MC-2E or MC-3E are connected to different output modules or if the
terminals are connected to FF faceplate blocks or fieldbus function blocks, the simultaneity of
the two or three outputs are not guaranteed. The same phenomenon happens to IN1 and IN2
terminals under the same circumstances.
n Functions of Motor Control Blocks (MC-2, MC-2E, MC-3, and MC-3E)

The motor control blocks perform input processing, control computation processing, output
processing, and alarm processing.
The only processing timing available for the motor control blocks is a periodic startup. More-
over, only the basic scan period can be selected as the scan period to execute the periodic
startup.

SEE
ALSO For more information about the types of output processing and alarm processing possible for the motor con-
trol blocks, refer to:
l Input Processing Specific to Motor Control Blocks (MC-2, MC-2E, MC-3,

and MC-3E)
The motor control blocks perform special input signal conversions.
l Control Computation Processing of the Motor Control Blocks (MC-2,

MC-2E, MC-3, and MC-3E)
The table below shows the control computation processing functions of the Motor Control
Blocks:
Table 1.17-4 Control Computation Processing Functions of the Motor Control Blocks (MC-2, MC-2E,
MC-3, and MC-3E)
Control computation process-
Description
ing
Compares the answerback input value (PV) with manipulated output val-
Answerback check ue (MV) and checks if the final control element is operating in accord-
ance with the output signals from the motor control block.
Changes the block mode to IMAN to temporarily suspend the control ac-
Initialization manual tion. This action takes place when the initialization manual condition be-
comes satisfied.
Changes the block mode to MAN to forcibly stop the control action. This
MAN fallback
action takes place when the MAN fallback condition becomes satisfied.
backup mode when an error has been detected at a supervisory comput-
Computer failure
er while the function block is operating in the ROUT mode. This action
takes place when the computer failure condition becomes satisfied.
Block mode change interlock cally, while disabling the stopped function blocks from changing to the au-
tomatic operating mode.
Starts sequentially and at specific intervals the multiple motor control
Serial start blocks belonging to the same group within the same control station ,
when start requests are issued to these blocks simultaneously.
Counts the number of times the manipulated output value (MV) has
Start count changed from 0 to 2 or from 1 to 2, and uses the obtained value as
the number of starts (OCNT).
Totalizes the periods of time during which the manipulated output value
Operating time (MV) remains at 1 or 2, and uses the obtained value as the operating
time (ONTM).
Outputs a status change message when block mode is changed or when
Status change message
a specific block status is changed.
Simulation function Simulates the internal processing actions of the motor control blocks.

Description
ing
Bypasses actions in accordance with the condition specified by the by-
Bypass command switch
pass command switch.
l Output Processing Specific to Motor Control Blocks (MC-2, MC-2E, MC-3,

and MC-3E)
The motor control blocks perform output processing that is different from the output process-
ing performed by other function blocks. The following lists the output processing items specific
to the motor control blocks.
Setting method of manipulated output value (MV)
Output signal conversion
Inching output
Remote/local input function
Answerback tracking function
Interlock check function
Off-service function
l Alarm Processing Specific to Motor Control Blocks (MC-2, MC-2E, MC-3,

and MC-3E)
The following lists the alarm checks performed by the motor control blocks.
Feedback input high and low limit alarm check
Thermal trip alarm check
Interlock alarm check
Answerback unset alarm check
Answerback error alarm check
n Data Items - MC-2, MC-2E, MC-3, and MC-3E

Table 1.17-5 Data Items of Motor Control Blocks (MC-2, MC-2E, MC-3, and MC-3E) (1/2)
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
BSTS Block status ----- NR
AF ----- 0
tion
AOFS ----- 0
tion
PV Answerback input value (*3) 0 to 2 0
FV Feedback input value FV engineering unit value SL
Inching output setpoint val-
SV x 0 to 100 % 0%
ue
CSV Sequence setpoint value x 0, 1, 2 0
MV Manipulated output value (*4) 0, 1, 2 0

Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
RMV (*5) 0, 1, 2 0
value
RAW Answerback raw signal 0, 1, 2 0
ONCT Number of starts x 0 to 99999999 0
ONTM Operating time count x 0 to 99999999 seconds 0 second
ONTH Operating time hour unit 0 to 99999999 hours 0 hour
ONTS Operating time second unit 0 to 3599 seconds 0 second
Table 1.17-6 Data Items of Motor Control Blocks (MC-2, MC-2E, MC-3, and MC-3E) (2/2)
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
Feedback input high - limit
PH x SL to SH SH
alarm setpoint
Feedback input low - limit
PL x SL to SH SL
alarm setpoint
ANSP Answerback setpoint x SL to SH SL
Answerback check mask-
MTM x 0 to 10,000 seconds 0 seconds
ing time
SVH Setpoint high limit x 0 to 100 % 100 %
SVL Setpoint low limit x 0 to 100 % 0%
BPSW Bypass command switch x 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 0
SIMM Simulation switch x 0, 1 0
SH FV scale high limit -----
neering unit as FV
SL FV scale low limit -----
neering unit as FV
*2: FV: Feedback input value
SEE
ALSO For more information about valid block modes of the motor control blocks, refer to:

n Block Status of Motor Control Blocks (MC-2, MC-2E, MC-3, and

MC-3E)
Table 1.17-7 Block Status of Motor Control Blocks (MC-2, MC-2E, MC-3, and MC-3E)
Block Status
Level Description
Symbol Name
3 ANCK Answer - Back Check Inhibition Answer - Back Check is inhibited
OFF Off Service Output is stopped
2
LOCK Interlock Forced to output a preset value.
Stops output but simulates the output
SIM Simulation
1 actions.
NR Normal Normal status

1.17.1 Input Processing of Motor Control Block (MC-2,

Input signals specific to the Motor Control Blocks include feedback input signal and answer-
back input signal. Input Signal Conversion of Feedback Input, Input Signal Conversion of
Answerback Input and Input Signal Conversion of Feedback Input Value into Answerback In-
put Value are provided for conversion of these signals. FV Overshoot is an input processing
of motor control blocks.
SEE
ALSO For more information about the FV overshoot, refer to:
3.4, PV/FV/CPV Overshoot in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
n Input Signal of Motor Control Block (MC-2, MC-2E, MC-3, and

MC-3E)
Input signals specific to the Motor Control Blocks are shown as follows.
l Feedback Input Signal

Feedback input signal is used when the feedback terminal (FB) in the motor control block is
connected to analog input modules or other function blocks. The feedback signal often indi-
cates the connected filed equipment status such as the openness of a motor-operated valve.
l Answerback Input Signal

Answerback input signal is used when the IN terminal in the motor control block is connected
to a contact input or other internal status switch. For M2-CE and M3-CE blocks, the answer-
back signals are the signals from the FF faceplate blocks, fieldbus function blocks, internal
switches or contact Inputs that connected to IN1 and IN2 terminals. The answerback signal
often indicate the state of onsite equipment such as the open/close status of motor-operated
valve or the start/stop status of pump operation.
l Input Signal Conversion Specific to Motor Control Block (MC-2, MC-3)

The motor control block uses a special input signal conversion corresponding to the feedback
input signal and answerback input signal.
Input Signal Conversion of Feedback Input
Input Signal Conversion of Answerback Input
Input Signal Conversion of Feedback Input Value into Answerback Input Value
n Input Signal Conversion of Feedback Input

Feedback Low-Input Cutoff
Feedback value (FV) is the signal that the feedback terminal FB received from its connection
destination without conversion. However, if the value from FB is equal to or less than the low-
input cutoff value, the feedback value (FV) is set to 0.
Input signal conversion setting parameters for the feedback input signal are given below.
FV scale high limit (SH) : Set FV engineering unit data.
FV scale low limit (SL) : Set FV engineering unit data.
Also, the setup for feedback low-input cutoff can be executed on the Function Block Detail
Builder.
Feedback Low-input Cutoff: Set FV engineering unit data.

The default setting is 0.0.
n Input Signal Conversion of Answerback Input

Input Signal Conversion
The answerback input value (PV) is the answerback input signal read from IN or IN1 and IN2
terminals connection destinations, such as connected contact inputs or other internal status
switches then converted into the code values.
l Number of Answerback Input Points

There are two kinds of answerback input signal conversion methods. The number of answer-
back input points is determined depending on the type of conversion.
2-Status Input (answerback=1 point)
3-Status Input (answerback=2 points)
The selection of input signal conversion type may be performed on the Function Block Detail
Builder.
Input signal conversion type: Set 2-Status Input or 3-Status Input.
The default setting is 2-Status Input.
l Direction of Answerback
Direction of answerback specify the meaning of ON/OFF, status of answerback input signal,
which reflect the final control element status if it operates properly according to the manipu-
lated output value (MV) from the motor control block.
The setup for direction of answerback may be performed on the Function Block Detail Builder.
Direction of Answerback
For MC-2, MC-3 blocks: Select Direct, Reverse, Inverted connect direct action or In-
verted connect reverse action.
For MC-2E, MC-3E blocks: Select Direct or Reverse.
The default setting is Direct.
l Conversion of Answerback Input Signal into Answerback Input Value (PV)

Either 0, 1 or 2 is set for the answerback input value in the function block depending on the
direction and contact status of answerback input signal. Connect the input n to the answer-
back input signal indicating open and the input n+1 to the answerback input signal indicat-
ing close, and vice versa for inverted connection. (*1)
*1: Inverted connection is not available for MC-2E and MC-3E blocks.
The table below shows the correlation between the answerback input value (PV) and contact
status.
Table 1.17.1-1 Determination of Answerback Input Signal

Number of an- Contact status
Action of an-
swerback PV Alarm
swerback n (*1) n+1 (*2)
points
ON - 2 -
Direct
OFF - 0 -
1
ON - 0 -
Reverse
OFF - 2 -

Number of an- Contact status
Action of an-
swerback PV Alarm
swerback n (*1) n+1 (*2)
points
ON OFF 2 -
OFF OFF 1 -
Direct OFF ON 0 -
Hold previous
ON ON PERR
value (*3)
ON OFF 0 -
Hold previous
OFF OFF PERR
Reverse value (*3)
OFF ON 2 -
ON ON 1 -
2
OFF ON 2 -
Inverted con- OFF OFF 1 -

nection direct ON OFF 0 -
action (*4)
Hold previous
ON ON PERR
value (*3)
OFF ON 0 -
Inverted con- Hold previous

OFF OFF PERR
nection reversed value (*3)
action (*4) ON OFF 2 -
ON ON 1 -
*1: n in the table indicates the element number specified to connect to IN terminal of MC-2 and MC-3 blocks, or the IN1 terminal
of MC-2E and MC-3E blocks. The answerback input signal read from the element n represents the status of open; vise ver-
sa, when the connection is inverted, the answerback input signal read from the element n represents the status of close.
*2: n+1 in the table indicates the element number succeeding the element number n that is specified to connect to IN terminal
of MC-2 and MC-3 blocks, or the element number specified to connect to IN2 terminal of MC-2E and MC-3E blocks. The
answerback input signal read from the element n+1 represents the status of close; vise versa, when the connection is inver-
ted, the answerback input signal read from the element n+1 represents the status of open.
*3: When both open and close answerback signals are true, an error will be initiated.
*4: Inverted connection direct action and Inverted connection reversed action are not available for MC-2E and MC-3E blocks.
The data status of answerback input value (PV) becomes invalid (BAD) if both open and
close answerback input signals are true at the same time, or one of the connection destina-
tions to read answerback input signal is abnormal.
The input open alarm is activated if the status of answerback input value (PV) is invalid (BAD)
due to abnormal status at the connection destination. If the data value is invalid (BAD) be-
cause both open and close answerback input signals are true at the same time, the an-
swerback inconsistency alarm (PERR) is activated.
n Input Signal Conversion of Feedback Input Value into Answerback

Input Value
If the answerback input terminal has no connection while the feedback input terminal is in
connection, the answerback input value (PV) is set to one of the following values after com-
paring the feedback input value (FV) with the answerback setpoint (ANSP).
If FVANSP, PV=2
If FV<ANSP, PV=0
The answerback setpoint (ANSP) is a data in the engineering unit that indicates the scale
range between feedback input value (FV), and can be updated as a setting parameter while
the system is running.

If the data status of feedback input value (FV) is invalid (BAD), the status of answerback input
value (PV) is set invalid (BAD) with the previous answerback input value (PV) latched.
If both the answerback input terminal and the feedback input terminal are in connection, the
answerback input precedes. The answerback input is converted into the answerback input
value (PV) through input signal conversion.
If neither the answerback input terminal nor the feedback input terminal are in connection, the
previous answerback input value (PV) is latched.
IMPORTANT
The answerback input signal conversion is not executed in the following states:
When the block status is simulation (SIM).
When the data status of answerback input value (PV) is calibration (CAL).
When the answerback check bypass is activated.
(answerback check bypass command switch BPSW=1 or 3)
Even if the answerback input signal at the IN terminal connection destination is not properly
converted due to one of the above conditions, the data converted through the same answer-
back input signal conversion (2- or 3-status conversion) as the answerback input value (PV)
are stored in the answerback raw signal input value.

1.17.2 Control Computation Processing of Motor Control

Blocks (MC-2, MC-2E, MC-3, and MC-3E)
This section describes the control computation processing functions of the motor control
blocks, which are listed below.
Answerback check
Initialization manual
MAN fallback
Computer fail
Block mode change interlock
Serial start
Start count
Operating time
Status change message
Simulation function
Bypass command switch (BPSW)
n Answerback Check
The answerback check function checks if the final control elements are operating normally in
accordance with the output signals from the Motor control blocks. Unless the manipulated out-
put value (MV) is changed, the answerback input value (PV) and manipulated output values
(MV) are constantly compared. If the two do not agree with each other, an alarm is generated.
The following types of alarms are generated:
Positive answerback error alarm (ANS+)
Generated when the manipulated output value (MV) is 2 and the answerback input val-
ue (PV) is not 2.
Negative answerback error alarm (ANS-)
Generated when the manipulated output value (MV) is 0 and the answerback input val-
ue (PV) is not 0.
While the answerback error alarm exists, if the answerback input value (PV) and manipulated
output value (MV) becomes equal or the manipulated output value (MV) changes back, the
answerback error alarm (ANS+ or ANS-) vanishes.
After the manipulated output value (MV) changes, it takes some time for the final control ele-
ments to complete action. Therefore, the answerback check masking time (MTM) is intro-
duced after the manipulated output value (MV) changes. During this mask time, even when
the answerback input value (PV) and manipulated output value (MV) do not agree, the an-
swerback check does not initiate alarm.
When the manipulated output value (MV) changes, the block status changes to ANCK status,
indicating that the answerback check is in progress. The answerback check masking (ANCK)
status will be canceled when the answerback input value (PV) comes to meet the manipu-
lated output value (MV). When the answerback masking time is elapsed, the answerback
check masking (ANCK) status is also canceled even the answerback input value (PV) does
not meet the manipulated output value (MV).
The answerback check function stops in the following conditions:
When the block status is simulation (SIM).
When the block mode is tracking (TRK).

When answerback bypass is specified (BPSW=1 or 3).
When the manipulated output value (MV) is 1.
When the data status of the answerback input value (PV) is calibration (CAL).
When out of service (BPSW=4) is specified.
In the initialization manual (IMAN) mode, the answerback check masking timer behaves as if
the masking time has already elapsed, and the Motor control blocks maintain their alarm sta-
tus.
SEE
ALSO For more information about answerback check masking status, conformity between answerback input value
(PV) manipulate output value (MV), refer to:
lConditions to Release Answerback Check Mask on page 1-182
l Define the Answerback Check

Answerback Check
Select the answerback check monitoring action from the following three types:
Positive monitoring
Starts the answerback check masking timer at the start of output (OFFON). If the an-
swerback input value (PV) still disagrees with manipulated output value (MV) after the an-
swerback check masking time has elapsed, an alarm is generated. If output is OFF, no
alarm will be generated even when the answerback input value (PV) does not agree with
Negative monitoring
Starts the answerback check masking timer at the end of output (ONOFF). If the an-
swerback input value (PV) still disagrees with manipulated output value (MV) after the an-
swerback check masking time has elapsed, an alarm is generated. If output is ON, no
alarm will be generated even when the answerback input value (PV) does not agree with
Both-side monitoring
Starts the answerback check masking timer at the start and end of output. If the answer-
back input value (PV) still disagrees with manipulated output value (MV) after the answer-
back check masking time elapsed, an alarm is generated.
Use the Function Block Detail Builder to define the answerback check.
Answerback Check: Choose [No], [Both Sides], [Open] or [Close].
The default is [No].
l Conditions to Release Answerback Check Mask

Release Answerback Check Mask
When the block is in the status that the answerback check is masked (ANCK), if the answer-
back input value (PV) changes to meet the manipulate output (MV), the answerback check
mask (ANCK) will be released. However, user can change the condition for releasing the an-
swerback check mask; thus, the answerback check mask will not be released until the an-
swerback check masking time elapsed.
Moreover, when the block is in the status that the answerback check is masked (ANCK), the
input high-limit alarm (HI) and input low-limit alarm (LO) are also masked. However, if check-
ing input open (IOP) is specified, the input open alarm (IOP) will not be masked.
Conditions to release answerback check mask can be set on the Function Block Detail Build-
er.
Release Answerback Check Mask
Choose [PV=MV or MTM Timeout] or [MTM Timeout Only].

The default is [PV=MV or MTM Timeout].
The Release Answerback Check Mask option can be set to the following motor control
blocks:
MC-2 and MC-3 blocks in FFCS series, KFCS2, and LFCS2.
MC-2E and MC-3E blocks in FCSs except PFCS.
If [PV=MV or MTM Timeout] is chosen as the condition to release the answerback check
mask, when answerback input value (PV) changes to agree the manipulated output value
(MV), the answerback check mask (ANCK) will be released.
If [MTM Timeout Only] is chosen as the condition to release the answerback check mask,
when answerback input value (PV) changes to agree the manipulated output value (MV), the
answerback check mask (ANCK) will not be released until the answerback check masking
timer (MTM) becomes timeout. When the answerback input value (PV) changed to agree the
manipulated output value (MV) but the block is still in answerback check masking (ANCK) sta-
tus, if the manipulated output value (MV) is changed again, the answerback check masking
timer (MTM) will be re-initiated.
l Answerback Bypass
The answerback bypass function forces the answerback input value (PV) to be equal to the
manipulated output value (MV) and stops the answerback check. The answerback bypass
function is activated when the bypass command switch (BPSW) is 1 or 3.
l Set Parameters of the Answerback Check

The parameters of the answerback check:
Answerback checks masking time (MTM)
0 to 10000 seconds.
The default is 4 seconds.
Bypass command switch (BPSW)
Select 0, 1, 3 or 4.
The default is 0.
TIP Even when the serial start is specified, changing the manipulated output value (MV) triggers a transition to the
answerback check inhibition (ANCK) status.
SEE
ALSO For more information about the bypass command switch (BPSW), refer to:
nBypass Command Switch (BPSW) on page 1-189

The initialization manual function suspends the control output action temporarily during opera-
tion when the initialization manual condition is established, and changes the block mode of
the function block to initialization manual (IMAN).


manual (IMAN).
The following example shows when the initialization manual condition establishes or vanish-
es:
AUT
Initialization manual condition established
IMAN (AUT)
AUT
The initialization manual condition establishes in the following situation:
SW-91) and the connection is switched off.
When the manipulated output value (MV) connected destination is a process output mod-
ule, and a failure or output open alarm has occurred in the module.
n MAN Fallback

ation state.

AUTMAN
IMAN (CAS) IMAN (MAN)
When the data status of the answerback input value (PV) is calibration (CAL).

When the answerback abnormality designated on the builder item [Fallback operation on
the abnormal answerback] occurs.
When the manipulated output data status becomes PTPF.
When the switch connected to INT terminal is turned ON (i.e., the interlock condition is
established for changing the block into interlock mode).
n Computer Fail
When the computer fail is detected, the function block suspends the action in the remote out-
put (ROUT) mode temporarily and switches to the computer backup mode.

When the function block mode is remote output (ROUT), the function block receives the ma-
nipulated output value (MV) from a supervisory system computer via control bus communica-
tion.
The following section is an action flow of the function block from the time the computer fail
condition establishes till it vanishes.
1. When a block mode change command from MAN, AUT or CAS to ROUT is sent while the
computer fails (BSW=ON), the function block does not switch to the computer backup
mode directly but switches to the transient state mode first.
the execution of the block mode change command (MAN, AUT, CAS) and a remote mode
(ROUT).
set via the Function Block Detail Builder (MAN, AUT, CAS) and a remote mode (ROUT).
block mode changes to remote output (ROUT).

the remote output (ROUT) mode and switches the mode to the computer backup mode.
A backup switch (BSW) is provided in function block to define the remote output (ROUT)
mode. The status of this switch determines whether the computer has failed or recovered.
The value of the backup switch (BSW) can be set from a sequence table or other function
blocks.
block mode other than remote output (ROUT).
When the backup switch BSW=ON, computer has failed
When the backup switch BSW=OFF, computer has recovered

An example when the automatic (AUT) mode has been specified for the computer backup
ROUT
Computer fails
AUT (ROUT)
Computer recovers
ROUT
AUT
ROUT command
l Define Computer Backup Mode

Use the Function Block Detail Builder to set the computer backup mode for each function
block.
comes down.
The default is MAN.


Any block mode change command to obtain an automatic operation state (AUT, CAS, or
ROUT mode) becomes invalid.

The block mode change interlock condition is established when the switch at the connected
destination of the interlock switch input terminal (INT) is turned ON as a result of continued
automatic operation becoming impossible due to an abnormality in the plant, etc.
n Serial Start
Serial Startup Group, MC Block Serial Startup Interval
The serial start function put the Motor control blocks in the same control station into groups
and starts multiple Motor control blocks in the same group sequentially at a specified interval
when start requests are issued to these blocks simultaneously.

Serial start is executed when the manipulated output value (MV) changes to execute the posi-
tive action. For example, serial start takes place if the manipulated output value (MV) changes
from 0 to 2 but not when it changes from 2 to 0.
After start requests have been issued, the Motor control blocks that are waiting for serial start
will remain in the state of not performing output although the manipulated output value is
changing. When this occurs, the answerback check masking time is extended by the time for
which the blocks waiting for serial start.
Define serial start on Function Block Detail Builder and System View.
Serial Startup Group: Specify a value between 0 and 7.
The default is 0.
Set the value in the Function Block Detail Builder.
Serial start is not executed to the group whose group number is 0.
Serial start interval: Specify a value between 0 and 9999 seconds.
The default is 0.
Specification defined in System View valid for whole control station.
n Start Count
Counts the number of times the manipulated output value (MV) has changed from 0 or 1 to 2,
and uses the obtained value as the number of starts (ONCT).
The ONCT count increases from 0 to 99999999 and upon reaching 99999999, returns to 0
with the next count. The number of starts (ONCT) will not be initialized automatically, even
during initial cold start. However, the number of starts (ONCT) is initialized when an arbitrary
ONCT value is set. The number of starts (ONCT) can be initialized at any time as necessary.
The number of starts (ONCT) is not counted in the simulation mode (SIM) or during inching
output operation.
n Operating Time
Totalizes the periods of time during which the manipulated output value remained at 1 or 2,
and stores the obtained value in the operating time (ONTM). The operating time (ONTM) is
indicated in seconds.
The operating time (ONTM) value is totalized from 0 to 99999999, and upon reaching
99999999, returns to 0 with the next count.
The values representing the hour and second digits of the operating time are stored in the op-
erating time hour unit (ONTH) and operating time second unit (ONTS), respectively. The oper-
ating time hour unit (ONTH) and operating time second unit (ONTS) are constantly updated in
accordance with changes in the operating time (ONTM).
The operating time (ONTM) will not be initialized automatically, even during initial cold start.
However, if an arbitrary value is set for the operating time (ONTM), the operating time
(ONTM) is initialized by that value. The operating time (ONTM) can be initialized at any time
as necessary.
The operating time (ONTM) is not updated in the simulation mode (SIM) or during inching out-
put operation.
n Status Change Message

The Motor control blocks issue a status change message when changes occur in the block
mode or status. The statuses for which a status change message is issued are OFF and
LOCK.
When the block status changes from OFF or LOCK, a status change message is issued.

n Simulation Function
The simulation function simulates the internal processing actions of the Motor control blocks.
This function is used when testing the operation of devices using Motor control blocks.
l Setting and Canceling the Simulation Mode

The following section explains how to set and cancel the simulation mode:
Setting the simulation mode
When the simulation switch (SIMM) is set to ON (=1), the simulation mode becomes ac-
tive. The simulation mode is indicated by the block status, SIM.
Canceling the simulation mode
When the simulation switch (SIMM) is set to OFF (=0), the simulation mode is canceled
and the block returns to a normal state.
The table below shows actions of the motor control blocks in the simulation mode:
Table 1.17.2-1 Actions of Motor Control Block (MC-2, MC-3) Functions in the Simulation Mode
Function Action
Block mode Same as in a normal state, except IMAN.
Block status SIM
Alarm status No alarm is generated.
Answerback input Only takes in values for RAW.
Feedback input Only takes in values.
Thermal trip check No action.
The check and alarm actions do not stop.
When the answerback check specification is set to
enable, the MV value is set as the PV value after
Answerback check the answerback check masking time elapses (*1).
When the answerback check specification is dis-
abled, the MV value is set as the PV value imme-
diately.
Calibration function
Same as in a normal state.
Remote/local input
Answerback tracking
No action.
Interlock check
The output action stops, but the MV action contin-
ues as normal.
In the status type output, the current status of the
Output signal conversion
output destinations is retained.
In the pulsive type output, the status of all output
destinations changes to OFF.
The output action stops, but the MV and SV actions
Inching output
continue as normal.
Serial start
Start count No action.
Operating time
Status change message Same as in a normal state.
*1: If turns ON the simulation mode when the answerback alarm is present, the manipulated output value (MV) is set to be equal
to the answerback input value (PV) immediately.

SEE
ALSO For more information about the thermal trip check, refer to:
nThermal Trip Alarm Check on page 1-208
l Actions after Cancellation of the Simulation Mode

The following actions take place in the first scan period after the simulation mode is canceled:
Status output type
The contact status of the output destination is read back and set as the manipulated out-
put value (MV).
Pulsive output type
When Yes is set for the answerback tracking function, the answerback input value (PV)
is set as the manipulated output value (MV). This processing is not performed while the
answerback bypass function is active.
The above actions take place commonly when the output status changes from stop to start,
regardless the cancellation of simulation mode.
n Bypass Command Switch (BPSW)

The bypass command switch is used to stop the answerback check function, interlock check
functions, or output actions.
The table below shows the commands and actions of the bypass command switch (BPSW)
corresponding to different switch positions (0 to 4):
Table 1.17.2-2 Commands and Actions of the Bypass Command Switch (BPSW) Corresponding to Dif-
ferent Switch Positions (0 to 4)
BPSW Command Action
0 No bypass Normal actions.
1 Answerback bypass The answerback bypass action is executed.
2 Interlock bypass The interlock action is stopped.
The answerback bypass action is executed.
3 Answerback + interlock bypasses
The interlock action is stopped.
Block mode=MAN
4 Out of service Block status=OFF
The answerback tracking action is executed.
The out of service corresponding the switch position 4 instructs the Motor control block to
stop the output action.
The value of the bypass command switch (BPSW) is set by the input signal from the bypass
command switch input terminal (SWI). If the SWI terminal is not connected, the value is set
directly from operation and monitoring functions or other function block.
The table below summarizes various types of bypasses that are explained in the sections of
corresponding functions:
Table 1.17.2-3 Table of Function Bypasses

Mode Block status
Function(*1) BPSW =1.3 PV.CAL
TRK IMAN OFF LOCK SIM
Feedback input x x x x x x x
Answerback input x x x x
Thermal trip check x x x x x x x
Answerback check x x

Mode Block status
Function(*1) BPSW =1.3 PV.CAL
TRK IMAN OFF LOCK SIM
Answerback bypass action
- - - x x -
(MVPV)
Answerback tracking action
(*2) x - x - - x -
(PVMV)
Interlock check x x (*3) x
Signal output (*4) (*5) x x x
*1: x: Bypass unless other condition denoted by x exist
Blank: Not Bypass
-: Irrelevant
*2: The answerback tracking is not active when the answerback tracking specification is No.
*3: If BPSW=3, the interlock check is not active.
*4: If the signal output status changes from enable to disable while pulsive output is in progress, the output action will not stop
after specified pulse-width signals are outputted. If the change occurs during inching processing, the output action does not
continue to finish the inching processing. However, no further inching operation request is accepted.
*5: Same as x during status output while the answerback tracking action is active.

1.17.3 Output Processing of Motor Control Blocks (MC-2,

The Motor Control Blocks, execute special output processing different from other function
blocks.
This section describes the output processing specific to Motor Control Blocks.
Set manipulated output value MV
Output Signal Conversion
Inching Output
MV Action on Setting CSV (*1)
Remote/Local Input
Answerback Tracking
Interlock Check
Off-service
Output Tracking
*1: This MV action can be set only in the FFCS series, KFCS2, and LFCS2.
n Set the Manipulated Output Value (MV) of Motor Control Blocks

(MC-2, MC-2E, MC-3, and MC-3E)
The setting method of the manipulated output value (MV), which is the target of the output
processing, varies depending on the block mode in the Motor Control Blocks.
l In the Manual Mode (CRT Manual)

When the block mode is manual (MAN) mode (CRT manual), the manipulated output value
(MV) is set by the following method.
The manipulated output value (MV) is set by the operators operation on the operation
and monitoring function.
For the inching output, the manipulated output value (MV) is automatically set based on
the setpoint value (SV) set by the operator on the operation and monitoring function.
l In the Automatic Mode (Sequence Automatic 1) or Cascade Mode

(Sequence Automatic 2)
When the block mode is in the automatic (AUT) mode (sequence automatic 1) or cascade
(CAS) mode (sequence automatic 2), the sequence setpoint value (CSV) set by another func-
tion block such as a Sequence Control Block or Calculation Block is set as the manipulated
output value (MV).
l In the Remote Output Mode (Computer Remote)

When the block mode is in the remote output (ROUT) mode (computer remote), a remote ma-
nipulated output value (RSV) set by an upper-level computer is set as the manipulated output
value (MV).
When the block mode is neither remote output (ROUT) or out of service (O/S) , a tracking is
executed so that the remote setpoint value (RSV) becomes the manipulated output value
(MV).

l In the Tracking Mode (On-Site Manual)

When the block mode is in the tracking (TRK) mode (on-site manual), the manipulated output
value (MV) is set by the following method:
When the answer back tracking is set to YES
The answer back input value (PV) is set as the manipulated output value (MV).
When the answer back tracking is NO
If the output signal conversion is 2-position status output or 3-position status output,
the status of the output destination (contact output or internal switch) is read back and the
value after the reverse-conversion of the output signal is set as the manipulated output
value (MV).
If the output signal conversion is 2-position pulsive output or 3-position pulsive output,
the previous value is retained as the manipulated output value (MV).
n Output Signal Conversion of Motor Control Blocks (MC-2, MC-2E,

MC-3, and MC-3E)
The motor control blocks execute the following output processing.
Table 1.17.3-1 Output Processing of the Motor Control Block (MC-2, MC-2E, MC-3, and MC-3E)
Output signal conversion speci- Output action direction specifi-
Number of output contacts
fication cation
2-position status output 1 Yes
3-position status output 2 Yes
2-position pulsive output 2 No
3-position pulsive output 3 No
The output signal conversion types and output action directions are described.
l Output Signal Conversion Types

The type of output signal conversion can be set with the Function Block Detail Builder.
For a two-position motor control block (MC-2) and an enhanced two-position motor con-
trol block (MC-2E), select from 2-position Status Output and 2-position Pulsive Output.
Default is 2-position Status Output.
For a three-position motor control block (MC-3) and an enhanced three-position motor
control block (MC-3E), select from 3-position Status Output and 3-position Pulsive Out-
put.
Default is 3-position Status Output.
l Output Action Direction

When 2-position Status Output or 3-position Status Output is specified, the Output Action
Direction can be defined too.
The output action direction can be set with the Function Block Detail Builder.
Output Action Direction
For a MC-2 block and a MC-3 block, select from Direct, Reverse Inverted connect di-
rect action and Inverted connect reversed action.
For a MC-2E block and a MC-3E block, select from Direct, Reverse.

Default is Direct.
SEE
ALSO For more information about the output action direction for the motor control blocks, refer to:
nOutput Signal Conversion of 2-Position Status Output on page 1-193
nOutput Signal Conversion of 3-Position Status Output on page 1-194
l Pulse Width Time

MC Block - Pulse Width
The time of ON for contact output for the converted signal of 2-position Pulsive Output or 3-
position Pulsive Output may be defined in each FCS.
Pulse width may be defined on the property sheet of the FCS.
Pulse Width: 1 to 100 Sec.
Default is 1 Sec.
SEE
ALSO For more information about pulsive width of motor control blocks, refer to:
nOutput Signal Conversion of the 2-Position Pulsive Output on page 1-195
nOutput Signal Conversion of the 3-Position Pulsive Output on page 1-195
n Output Signal Conversion of 2-Position Status Output

The relationship between the manipulated output value (MV) and the ON/OFF status in the 2-
position status output is as follows:
Table 1.17.3-2 The Manipulated Output Value and the Contact Output Status of the 2-Position Status
Output
Output signal Contact output status
Output action
conversion MV
direction n (*1) n+1 (*1) n+2 (*1)
specification
2 ON
Direct action
2-position status 0 OFF
output 0 ON
Reverse action
2 OFF
*1: n in the table indicates the element number specified to connect to OUT terminal of MC-2 and MC-3 blocks, or the OUT1
terminal of MC-2E and MC-3E blocks. n+1 and n+2 indicates the element number succeeding the element number n that
is specified to connect to OUT terminal or the element number specified to connect to OUT2 and OUT3 terminal of MC-2E
and MC-3E blocks.
The action of 2-position status output is shown as follows:

0 2 0
MV
ON
Direct action Contact output status OFF OFF
(n)
ON ON
Reverse action Contact output status OFF
(n)
Figure 1.17.3-1 Action of the 2-Position Status Output
In the 2-position status output, the state of MV=1 is the same as the state of MV=2.

n Output Signal Conversion of 3-Position Status Output

position status output is as follows:
Table 1.17.3-3 The Manipulated Output Value and the Contact Output Status of the 3-Position Status
Output
conversion Output action MV
specification n (*1) n+1 (*1) n+2 (*1)
2 ON OFF
Direct action 1 OFF OFF
0 OFF ON
2 OFF ON
Reverse action 1 ON ON
3-position status 0 ON OFF

output 2 OFF ON
Inverted con-
nection Direct 1 OFF OFF
action (*2)
0 ON OFF
Inverted con- 2 ON OFF
nection Re-
1 ON ON
versed action
(*2) 0 OFF ON
and MC-3E blocks.
*2: Inverted connection is not available for MC-2E and MC-3E blocks.
The action of 3-position status output is shown as follows:

0 1 2
MV
ON
Output status of contact 1 OFF
(n)
Direct ON
action
(n+1)
ON
(n)
Reversed ON
action
(n+1)
ON
Inverted
(n)
connection ON
Direct Action
(n+1)
ON
Inverted
(n)
connection ON
Reversed Action
(n+1)
Figure 1.17.3-2 Action of the 3-Position Status Output

n Output Signal Conversion of the 2-Position Pulsive Output

position pulsive output is as follows:
Table 1.17.3-4 The Manipulated Output Value and the Contact Output Status of the 2-Position Pulsive
Output
Output action
conversion MV
direction n (*1) n+1 (*1) n+2 (*1)
specification
2-position pul- 2 ON OFF

------
sive output 0 OFF ON
and MC-3E blocks.
The action of an 2-position pulsive output is shown as follows:

0 2
MV
ON
Output status of contact 1 OFF OFF
(n)
ON
(n+1)
Figure 1.17.3-3 Action of the 2-Position Pulsive Output
For pulsive output signal, the time of ON is set in the column of MC block pulse width on
FCS folder. The default is 1 sec.
n Output Signal Conversion of the 3-Position Pulsive Output

position pulsive output is as follows:
Table 1.17.3-5 The Manipulated Output Value and the Contact Output Status of the 3-Position Pulsive
Output
Output action
conversion MV
direction n (*1) n+1 (*1) n+2 (*1)
specification
2 ON OFF OFF
3-position pul-
------ 1 OFF OFF ON
sive output
0 OFF ON OFF
and MC-3E blocks.
The action of an 3-position pulsive output is shown as follows:

0 1 2
MV
ON
(n)
ON
(n+1)
ON
(n+2)
Figure 1.17.3-4 Action of the 3-Position Pulsive Output
For pulsive output signal, the time of ON is set in the column of MC block pulse width on
FCS folder. The default is 1 sec.
n Inching Output
Inching/Full-Stroke Time Width
Inching output is a function which drives or stops the motor for a specified duration according
to the manual operation of the operator using the operation and monitoring function.
The inching output is initiated when change the inching output setpoint value (SV). The final
control element is manipulated for a duration (Tout) proportional to the change in SV (SV)
from 0, 50 or 100 % shown below.
After Tout has elapsed, the inching output setpoint value (SV) follows the manipulated output
value (MV) prior to the modification. The inching operation is available only in manual (MAN)
mode.
When the inching operation is not executed, the inching output setpoint value (SV) follows the
Table 1.17.3-6 The Relationship Between the Manipulated Output Value (MV) and the Inching Output
Setpoint Value (SV)
MV 0 1 2
SV 0% 50 % 100 %
Tout can be obtained by the following expression:

| SV |
Tout=Tf
100
Tout : Inching output action time (second)

Tf : Inching full stroke time width (second)
SV : Change in SV (%) = SV value after change - SV value before change
The Inching/Full-stroke Time Width indicates the time span for the operation of the final con-
trol element when the inching output setpoint value (SV) is changed by 100 %.
The inching/full-stroke time width is set by the Function Block Detail Builder.
Inching/Full-stroke Time Width
0 to 10000.0 seconds. For the pulsive output, however, the output within one second is
invalid.
Default is 0 second.

n Action of the Inching Output

The action of the inching output is explained for each type of the output signal conversion. In
the explanation, the full stroke time width is assumed to be 100 seconds.
In each output signal conversion, the inching operation is aborted when the setting of the ma-
nipulated output value (MV) is modified during the operation.
l Inching Output of a 2-Position Status Output

The output reverses from ON to OFF, or from OFF to ON only during Tout time.
The inching output only reverses the contact output to the OUT terminal connection destina-
tion; the manipulated output value (MV) remains unchanged.
0 2
MV
0 10 0 100 90 100
SV %
ON 10 seconds
Contact 1 (direct action) Tout
OFF Tout
10 seconds
ON
Contact 1 (reverse action)
OFF
Figure 1.17.3-5 Inching Output of a 2-Position Status Output (When the Full Stroke Time Width is 100
Seconds)
l Inching Output of a 3-Position Status Output

When MV=2, the output of the contact 1 is reversed for duration of Tout.
When MV=0, the output of the contact 2 is reversed for duration of Tout.
When MV=1, the output of the contact 1 is reversed for duration of Tout if the change in
inching output setpoint value (SV) is positive. The output of the contact 2 is reversed for
duration of Tout if the inching output setpoint value (SV) is negative.
The inching output only reverses the contact output, the manipulated output value (MV) re-
mains unchanged.

0 1 2
MV
0 10 0 50 40 50 60 50 100 90 100
SV %
ON
Contact 1
OFF
Direct 10 seconds 10 seconds
action ON (Tout) (Tout)
Contact 2
OFF
10 seconds 10 seconds
(Tout) (Tout)
ON
Contact 1
OFF
Reverse
action ON
Contact 2
OFF
ON
Contact 1
Reversed OFF
Connection
Direct action ON
Contact 2
OFF
ON
Contact 1
Reversed? OFF
Connection
Reversed action ON
Contact 2
OFF
Figure 1.17.3-6 Inching Output of a 3-Position Status Output (When the Full Stroke Time Width is 100
Seconds)
l Inching Output of a 2-Position Pulsive Output

When MV=2, performs pulsive output from the contact 2, then performs again from con-
tact 1 after Tout has elapsed.
The inching output only executes the pulsive output from the contact and the manipulated out-
put value (MV) is not changed.
0 2
MV
0 10 0 100 90 100
SV %
ON
Contact 1 10 seconds 10 seconds
OFF
ON (Tout) (Tout)
Contact 2
OFF
Figure 1.17.3-7 Inching Output of a 2-Position Pulsive Output (When the Full Stroke Time Width is 100
Seconds)
l Inching Output of a 3-Position Pulsive Output


When MV=1, if the sign for the change in inching output setpoint (SV) is positive, pulsive
output is performed from contact 1, then again from contact 3 after Tout has elapsed. If
the sign for the change in inching output setpoint (SV) is negative, pulsive output is per-
formed from contact 2, then again from contact 3 after Tout has elapsed.
The inching output only executes the pulsive output from the contact and the manipulated out-
put value (MV) is not changed.
0 1 2
MV
0 10 0 50 40 50 60 50 100 90 100
SV %
Contact 1
10 10
seconds seconds
Contact 2
10
10 seconds
seconds
Contact 3
Figure 1.17.3-8 Inching Output of a 3-Position Pulsive Output (When the Full Stroke Time Width is 100
Seconds)
n MV Action on Setting CSV: FFCS Series/KFCS2/LFCS2

MV of Switch Instrument/MC Instrument follows its CSV change
When CSV is changed by a sequence table or by a function block, whether the MV of motor
controller block to instantaneously follow the CSV change or to follow the change at the next
execution time can be specified.
On the Constant tab of FCS Properties sheet, if the option of [MV of Switch Instrument/MC
Instrument follows its CSV change] is checked, the MV will follow the CSV right after the CSV
is changed. Otherwise, the MV will follow the CSV at the next execution time of the motor
controller block. By default, this option is not checked.
Moreover, the option is valid not only for changing the CSV by sequence table blocks, but al-
so valid for changing the CSV by the logic chart blocks, calculation blocks as well as manipu-
lating the CSV on an HIS.
When the Option is Checked
When the CSV is set from a sequence table, the MV of the motor controller block will in-
stantaneously follow the CSV change.
For example, if the CSV of an MC-2 motor controller block with two-position status out-
puts is set to CSV=2, the direct MV action may be illustrated as follows:

Control period of motor
controller block
CSV=2
Sequence Set Value
CSV=0
MV=2
Manipulated Output Value
MV=0
ON
Actual Output
OFF
CSV=2 is set in the When other block access Motor controller block
sequence table. the MV, the MV=CSV and sends output MV=2.
MV=2.
Figure 1.17.3-9 CSV, MV and Actual Output when the Option is Checked: FFCS Series/KFCS2/LFCS2
When the Option is Unchecked

When the CSV is set from a sequence table, the MV of the motor controller block will fol-
low the CSV change at the next execution time of the motor controller block.
For example, if the CSV of an MC-2 motor controller block with two-position status out-
puts is set to CSV=2, the direct MV action may be illustrated as follows:
Control period of motor
controller block
CSV=2
Sequence Set Value
CSV=0
MV=2
Manipulated Output Value
MV=0
ON
Actual Output
OFF
CSV=2 is set in the When other block access The MV=CSV and MV=2.
sequence table. the MV, the MV=0. Motor controller block
sends output MV=2.
Figure 1.17.3-10 CSV, MV and Actual Output when the Option is Unchecked: FFCS Series/KFCS2/
LFCS2
n Remote/Local Input
The remote/local input function reads the status of on-site push button switches installed near
the equipment such as valves and pumps, and to prevent the output from the motor control
block since the on-site operation is given higher priority when the system is in the local mode.
The remote/local input signal is fed through the TSI terminal of the motor control block. In ad-
dition to the contact input, internal switches can be used as signal input too. The remote/local
input signal is stored in the tracking switch (TSW).
Table 1.17.3-7 Relationship Between the Remote/Local Input Signal and the Tracking Switch
Input signal (*1) Remote/Local TSW Mode
OFF (0) Remote 0 Mode except for TRK
ON (1) Local 1 TRK

*1: Input signal in () indicates the signal from an internal switch.
When the TSI terminal is not connected, the data can be set directly to the tracking switch
(TSW) from other function blocks. When TSW is 1, the block mode is set to the on-site man-
ual mode (TRK). When TSW becomes 0, the mode returns to the normal mode (MAN, AUT,
CAS or ROUT) from the on-site manual (TRK) mode.
l Remote/Local Input Function in On-Site Manual (TRK) Mode

The action of the remote/local input function in the on-site manual (TRK) mode is as follows:
The output action (output signal conversion) is not executed. But the output action is car-
ried out when the answer back tracking is defined in the status output.
The interlock check is not performed.
The answer back check is not performed because the answer back error alarm (ANS+,
ANS-) is reset.
n Answerback Tracking
Answerback Tracking
The answerback tracking is to force the manipulated output value (MV) to match the answer-
back input value (PV), when the block is in Filed-Manual (TRK) mode or when the bypass
command switch (BPSW) is 4 (out-of-service command).
The answerback tracking is defined in the Function Block Detail Builder.
Answerback Tracking: Select either Yes or No.
Default is Yes.
n Answerback Error Triggered Fallback

Fallback Operation on the Abnormal Answerback
Answerback Error Triggered Fallback is a function that forces the block into MAN mode and
forces the blocks manipulated output (MV) into a designated value whenever answerback
signals indicate an error.
Triggers of Fallback may be selected from one of the three errors shown as below.
Answerback error occurred due to abnormality of ON (ANS+) signal
Answerback error occurred due to abnormality of OFF (ANS-) signal
Answerback error occurred due to abnormality of either ON (ANS+) or OFF (ANS-) sig-
nal.
When fallback is activated, the manipulated output (MV) will be forced to the output position
designated in the builder item [Output when interlock status is true]. At the same time, the in-
terlock alarm (INT) will be initiated right after the output (MV) changed to the designated posi-
tion.
Once the manipulated output (MV) is manually changed, the interlock alarm (INT) will be de-
activated.
If answerback check is not activated, the fallback will not be triggered by answerback error.
The interlock alarm (INT) subsequent to the fallback can be dissolved when any of the follow-
ing conditions establishes.
When block mode changes to Tracking (TRK) mode.
When answerback bypass is activated (BPSW=1 or 3).
When the answerback input signal (PV) is switched to calibration (CAL) mode.
When off service is activated (BPSW=4).

If the block is in simulation (SIM) status, the fallback will not be triggered by answerback error.
The interlock alarm (INT) subsequent to the fallback will be dissolved right after the block
changes simulation (SIM) status.
When a 2-position status output encounters the answerback error triggered fallback, its be-
havior is shown in the following illustrate.
MAN fallback starts according to the setting for fallback
triggered by the answerback error.
ANS+ initiated when MV is forced to the designated value for interlock and
answerback detects the interlock alarm (INT) occurs.
an error.
When MV is manipulated,
the INT alarm will be dissolved.
2
MV
0
2
PV
0
Block
AUT MAN
mode
A
Block N
NR ANCK NR C NR
status
K
Alarm
NR INT NR
status
ANS+ When PV answers the corresponding MV,

the ANS+ alarm will be dissolved.
Figure 1.17.3-11 Answerback Error Triggered Fallback (2-Position Status Output)
When a 3-position status output encounters the answerback error triggered fallback, its be-
havior is shown in the following illustrate.
MAN fallback starts according to the setting for fallback
triggered by the answerback error.
ANS+ initiated when MV is forced to the designated value for interlock and
answerback detects the interlock alarm (INT) occurs.
an error. When MV is manipulated,
the INT alarm will be dissolved.
2
MV 1
0
MV=0, answerback becomes
2
normal, INT alarm continues.
PV 1
0
Block
AUT MAN
mode
A A
Block N N N N
ANCK C NR C NR
status R R K K
Alarm
NR INT NR
status
ANS+ Since MV is manipulated,

the ANS+ alarm will be dissolved.
Figure 1.17.3-12 Answerback Error Triggered Fallback (3-Position Status Output)

SEE
ALSO For more information about interlock check functions, refer to:
nInterlock Check on page 1-203
For more information about interlock alarm (INT), refer to:
nInterlock Alarm Check on page 1-208
l Settings Answerback Triggers for Fallback

Setting the answerback triggers for fallback may be performed on the Function Block Detail
Builder.
Fallback operation on the abnormal answerback:
Select from NONE, ANS+, ANS- and BOTH.
The default setting is NONE.
n Interlock Check
The interlock check is used to place the motor control blocks in the interlock state according
to the operation interlock input signal that is input to the IL terminal of the motor control
blocks.
IMPORTANT
The interlock check function does not operate under the following conditions:
Simulation status (SIM)
On-site manual mode (TRK)
When the interlock check bypass command is issued (when BPSW=2 or 3)
When the off-service command is issued. (when BPSW=4)
l Interlock Input Signal

Interlock Input Signal Direction
The Interlock Input Signal Direction determines whether the interlock state is activated by
ON or OFF of the operation interlock input signal. An internal switch or contact output can be
used as the operation interlock input signal in addition to the contact input.
The Interlock Input Signal Direction may be defined on the Function Block Detail Builder.
Interlock Input Signal Direction: Choose [Direct] or [Reverse]
The default is [Direct].
If [Direct] is selected, the interlock status is activated when the interlock signal is ON.
If [Reverse] is selected, the interlock status is activated when the interlock signal is OFF.
IMPORTANT
When the signal connected to IL terminal becomes abnormal (i.e., data status becomes
BAD), the block will be released from interlocked status regardless if the action is Direct or
Reverse.

l Output when Interlock Status is True

Output when interlock status is true, Modify pulsive output when interlock status true, Hold output
when interlocked
In the interlock state, the predefined output action can be executed.
The Output when Interlock Status is True may be defined on the Function Block Detail Build-
er.
For a two-position motor control block (MC-2) and an enhanced twoposition motor control
block (MC-2E):
Output when Interlock Status is True: Choose [Open] or [Close]
The default is [Open].
For a three-position motor control block (MC-3) and an enhanced three-position motor control
block (MC-3E):
Output when Interlock Status is True: Choose [Open], [Close] or [Stop]
The default is [Close].
When the interlock state is activated, the change of the output is monitored and the interlock
alarm (INT) will be activated at the occurrence of output change by the output action of prede-
fined interlock state. When the interlock is released, the interlock alarm is deactivated at the
same time.
The action and interlock alarm (INT) initiated by establishment of interlock conditions will be
activated when answerback error triggered fallback takes place.
In the interlock state, the output is switched to the status output even if it is pulsive output.
However, when Direct Output is specified in Modify Pulsive Output when Interlock Status
True in the Function Block Detail Builder, the pulsive output is retained. This option can be
set on the Function Block Detail Builder.
Modify Pulsive Output when Interlock Status True: Choose [Direct Output] or [Status
Output]
The default is [Status Output].
When the motor control block is interlocked, the previous manipulated output value (MV) can
be held. This option can be set on the Function Block Detail Builder.
Hold Output when Interlocked : Choose [Valid] or [Invalid]
The default is [Invalid].
If [Valid] is selected, the block will hold the previous output when interlocked.
If [Invalid] is selected, the block will change the output according to the failsafe output speci-
fied in the setting of [Output when interlock status is true].
The Hold Output When Interlocked option can be set to the following motor control blocks:
MC-2 and MC-3 blocks in FFCS series, KFCS2, and LFCS2.
MC-2E and MC-3E blocks in FCSs except PFCS.

IMPORTANT
If the Hold Output When Interlocked option is selected, note the followings:
When the motor control block falls back due to answerback error or thermo-trip alarm oc-
currence, the block cannot hold the previous output changes to the failsafe output speci-
fied in the setting item of [Output when interlock status is true].
When the block is interlocked, inching action will result in an error and triggers an error
message.
When the block is holding the previous manipulated output value (MV), if the operator
changes the MV, the MV will revert to the held value at the next scan.
When the block is holding the previous manipulated output value (MV), if the block is
changed to local mode, the held MV will no longer valid since the local operation takes
higher preference.
When the block is interlocked and holds the previous manipulated output value (MV), the
occurred alarm for indicating the interlocked (INT) status will be kept alive.
SEE
ALSO For more information about the behavior of the fallback triggered by answerback errors, refer to:
nAnswerback Error Triggered Fallback on page 1-201
n Off-Service Function
The off-service is used to stop the output from the MC-2 or MC-3 block via a command from
the bypass command switch (BPSW).
Off-service supports the following processes.
The off-service is activated by putting the bypass command switch (BPSW) to 4. When
the off-service command is issued, the block mode is changed to the manual (MAN)
mode and the block status becomes OFF.
No output action (output signal conversion) is executed in the off-service state.
The answerback tracking operates in the off-service state.
n Output Tracking MC-2E, MC-3E

Output tracking is an output processing of MC-2E and MC-3E blocks.
The output tracking forces the manipulated output value (MV) to match value of the connec-
ted destination.
If a MC-2E or MC-3E block is connected in a cascade loop with FF faceplate block or fieldbus
function block, the MC-2E or MC-3E block starts output tracking when the cascade loop is dis-
connected and its block changes to IMAN mode.
Output tracking starts under the following circumstances:
When the block becomes IMAN mode.
When the block changes from service off (O/S) mode to MAN, AUT or CAS mode.
When the I/O module connected to the output terminals recovered from failure.
When the cascade loop is disconnected.

TIP The output tracking of MC-2 or MC-3 block starts under the following circumstances:
When the block becomes IMAN mode.
When the block changes from service off (O/S) mode to MAN, AUT or CAS mode.
When the I/O module connected to the output terminals recovers from failure.

1.17.4 Alarm Processing of Motor Control Blocks (MC-2,

The following lists the alarm checks performed by the motor control blocks which are specific
to these four function blocks.
Feedback input high and low limit alarm check
Thermal trip alarm check
Interlock alarm check
Answerback unset alarm check
Answerback error alarm check
n Feedback Input High Limit/Low Limit Alarm Check

High/Low Limit Alarm
The input high limit and low limit alarm check in the motor control blocks is used for checking
the feedback input.
By means of this feedback input high limit and low limit alarm check, when the feedback input
value (FV) exceeds the feedback input high limit alarm setpoint (PH), a feedback input high
limit alarm (HI) is generated. Also, when the feedback input value (FV) drops below the feed-
back input low limit alarm setpoint (PL), a feedback input low limit alarm (LO) is generated.
When an alarm has occurred, if the feedback input value (FV) drops lower than the value of
the feedback input high limit alarm setpoint (PH) minus the input high and low limit alarm hys-
teresis (HYS), the feedback input high limit alarm (HI) is returned to normal state. Also, if the
feedback input value (FV) exceeds the feedback input low limit alarm setpoint (PL) plus the
input high and low limit alarm hysteresis (HYS), the feedback input low limit alarm (LO) is re-
turned to normal state.
FV
PH
HYS
Conditions generating an alarm
FV>PH
FV<PL
Conditions for recovery from alarm

FVPHHYS
FVPL+HYS
HYS
PL
Time
HI
LO
Figure 1.17.4-1 Actions of the Feedback Input High and Low Limit Alarm Check
Moreover, when the block is in the status that the answerback check is masked (ANCK), the
feedback input high-limit alarm (HI) and the feedback input low-limit alarm (LO) are also
masked.
l Feedback Input High Limit/Low Limit Alarm Settings

Setting of the feedback input high limit/low limit alarm setpoint (PH, PL) is done using the fol-
lowing setting parameters:

Feedback input high limit alarm setpoint (PH)
Engineering unit data within the FV scale range
The default is the FV scale high limit value.
Feedback input low limit alarm setpoint (PL)
Engineering unit data within the FV scale range
The default is the FV scale low limit value.
The hysteresis is set with the Function Block Detail Builder.
Hysteresis : Engineering unit data within the range of 0 to FV scale span, or percent-
age data for the FV scale span
The default is 2.0 %.
n Thermal Trip Alarm Check

The thermal trip alarm check is a function that determines whether a thermal trip signal indi-
cating a motor overload condition was input to the motor control block.
If it is determined that when the signal for the thermal trip signal input terminal (TT) turns on in
the motor control block, a thermal trip alarm is generated. If the signal from the thermal trip
signal input terminal (TT) turns off while the alarm is being generated, the alarm is returned to
normal state.
The output action of the motor control blocks when there is a thermal trip alarm is the same
as when the block is showing an interlock (LOCK) state.
IMPORTANT
When the signal connected to TT terminal becomes abnormal (i.e., data status becomes
BAD), if the block is in alarm status, the alarm status of the block will be released.
SEE
ALSO For more information about the interlock status of the motor control blocks, refer to:
nInterlock Check on page 1-203
n Interlock Alarm Check

For MC-2 or MC-3 Motor Controller blocks, when the Interlock Alarm Check function detects
the establishment of interlock condition, or fallback action is activated by answerback errors,
the manipulated output (MV) will be forced to the designated value predefined in the builder
item [Output when interlock status is true]. At the same time the Interlock Alarm (INT) will be
initiated.
The interlock check triggered interlock alarm (INT) will be deactivated whenever the interlock
condition is dissolved.
The interlock alarm (INT) initiated by Answerback Error Triggered Fallback will become deac-
tivated once the manipulated output value (MV) is manually changed.
SEE
ALSO For more information about the answerback error triggered fallback, refer to:
nAnswerback Error Triggered Fallback on page 1-201

n Answer-Back Inconsistency Alarm Check

The answerback inconsistency alarm check is a function that determines whether two answer-
back input signals indicate full-open and full-close simultaneously.
If it is determined that two answerback input signals indicated full-open and full-close simulta-
neously, an answerback inconsistency alarm (PERR) occurs.
If the two answer-back input signals stop indicating full-open and full-close simultaneously
while the alarm is being generated, the alarm is returned to normal state.
l Answer-Back Inconsistency Alarm Mask MC-2E, MC-3E

Inhibit Answerback Error Alarm
When IN1 terminal and the IN2 terminal of M2-CE or M3-CE block are connected to FF face-
plate blocks or fieldbus function blocks, the simultaneity of the two inputs is not guaranteed. If
the both the ON and OFF answerbacks exist at the same time even for a very short time, the
Answer-Back Inconsistency Alarm (PERR) may occur. To prevent the alarm occurring under
this circumstance, the alarm can be masked by stop the alarm check for a certain time period
(Mask Time) after the manipulated output (MV) changes. The data item MTM can be used for
setting this answer-back inconsistency alarm mask time.
For MC-2E and MC-3E block, the answer-back inconsistency alarm mask can be set on the
function block detail builder.
Inhibit Answerback Error Alarm: Choose [No] or [Yes].
The default setting is [Yes].
TIP Regarding to answer-backs of MC-2 and MC-3 blocks, since the simultaneity of the two inputs are guaran-
teed, the Answer-Back Inconsistency Alarm Mask becomes unnecessary.
n Answer Back Error Alarm Check

The answerback error alarm check is a function that determines if the manipulated output val-
ue and the answerback input value do not match.
If it is determined that the manipulated output value and the answerback input value do not
match when the manipulated output value (MV) is 2, the ON side answerback error alarm
(ANS+) occurs. If the manipulated output value and the answerback input value do not match
when the manipulated output value (MV) is 0, the OFF side answerback error alarm (ANS-)
occurs.
If the manipulated output value and the answer-back input value match while the alarm is be-
ing generated, the alarm is returned to normal state.

<1.18 Ratio Set Block (RATIO)> 1-210
1.18 Ratio Set Block (RATIO)

The Ratio Set Block (RATIO) outputs its manipulated output value (MV) follows the change of
process variable (PV) times the ratio set value. This block is used to set a specific ratio at
which two controlled variables are maintained.
n Ratio Set Block (RATIO)

Connection
The RATIO Block defines a ratio for control of two control amounts. The figure below shows
the RATIO Block diagram.
The figure below shows the function block diagram of Ratio Set Block (RATIO):
SET TIN TSI INT
CAS (TSW)
CSV
AUT
SV
MAN
RSV
RCAS
Input Control computation CAS/AUT Output

IN PV MV OUT
processing (ratio computation) processing
ROUT
SUB
Figure 1.18-1 Function Block Diagram of Ratio Set Block (RATIO)
The figure below shows the internal control computation processing of the Ratio Set Block
(RATIO):
Control computation
Setpoint value Setpoint

CSV RSV
pushback value limiter
Ratio
SV
tracking
Setpoint value
ramp action
MAN
Ratio computation Output

PV CALC MV
KR SVe PV+BIAS AUT processing
CAS
RCAS ROUT
Figure 1.18-2 Control Computation Processing of Ratio Set Block (RATIO)
The figure below shows an example of using the Ratio Set Block (RATIO):

IN OUT rF1
RATIO
SET
F1
IN OUT
PID
F2
Figure 1.18-3 Example of Using Ratio Set Block (RATIO)
In this control loop, the flowrates F1 and F2 are maintained in a specific ratio r, by setting the
value of F1 multiplied by r, or rF1, as the setpoint value of F2.
nals of the Ratio Set Block (RATIO):
Table 1.18-1 Connection Methods and Connected destinations of the I/O Terminals of Ratio Set Block
(RATIO)
Process I/O
Measure-
IN x x x x
ment input
Setting in-
SET x x
put
Manipu-
OUT x x x x
lated output
Auxiliary
SUB x x x
output
Tracking
TIN x x x
signal input
Tracking
TSI x x x x
SW input
Interlock
INT x x x x
SW input
n Function of Ratio Set Block (RATIO)

The RATIO block performs input processing, control computation processing, output pro-
The only processing timing available for the RATIO block is a periodic startup. Selections

SEE
for the RATIO block, refer to:
l Control Computation Processing of Ratio Set Block (RATIO)

The table below shows the control computation processing functions of the Ratio Set Block
(RATIO):
Table 1.18-2 Control Computation Processing Functions of Ratio Set Block (RATIO)
Obtains a calculated output value (CALCn) by multiplying
Ratio computation the process variable (PV) by the effective ratio setpoint
value (SVe).
Converts the manipulated output change (MV) during
each control period to an actual manipulated output val-
ue (MV). The available control output actions are of po-
sitional type only.
Limits the setpoint value (SV) within the setpoint high/low
limits (SVH, SVL).
Causes two of the three setpoint values (SV, CSV, RSV)
to agree with the remaining one.
Switches the manipulated output value (MV) without
causing it to change abruptly when the block mode has
Bumpless switching been changed or when the manipulated output value
(MV) has been switched in a downstream block in cas-
cade.
Constantly updates the ratio setpoint value (SV) with a
value calculated backwards from the current manipulated
Ratio tracking output value (MV), when ratio computation is stopped.
This prevents the manipulated output value from chang-
ing abruptly.
Bumpless switching
Causes the change in the effective ratio setpoint value
(SVe) to gradually approach the newratio setpoint value,
Ratio setpoint value
when the ratio setpoint value (SV) has changed abruptly.
ramp action
This prevents the manipulated output value from chang-
ing abruptly.
Changes the block mode to IMAN to temporarily sus-
Initialization manual pend the control action. This action takes place when the
initialization manual condition becomes satisfied.
Temporarily suspends the control action while maintain-
Control hold ing the current block mode. During control hold, the out-
put action is performed normally.
Changes the block mode to MAN to forcibly stop the con-
MAN fallback trol action. This action takes place when the MAN fall-

Changes the block mode to AUT when the function block
is operating in the CAS mode, so that the control action
AUT fallback is continued using values set by the operator. This action
takes place when the AUT fallback condition becomes
satisfied.
Temporarily suspends actions in the RCAS or ROUT
Computer failure
mode and switches to the computer backup mode.
Stops the control action of function blocks currently oper-
Block mode change interlock ating automatically, while disabling the stopped function
blocks from changing to the automatic operating mode.
n Ratio Computation
In ratio computation, the following computation processing is performed to obtain a calculated
output value (CALC) by multiplying the process variable (PV) by the effective ratio setpoint
value (SVe):
CALCn=KR SVe PVn+BIAS (1)
CALCn : Current calculated output value

PVn : Current process variable
SVe : Effective ratio setpoint value
KR : Ratio gain
BIAS : Bias value
The effective ratio setpoint value (SVe) is a ratio setpoint value (SV) that has been processed
via the setpoint value ramp action to be used for bumpless switching of block modes.
In any automatic operating mode (AUT, CAS or RCAS), the calculated output value (CALC)
receives output signal processing and is set as the manipulated output value (MV).
l Setpoint Value (SV) Range

SV Range
Use the Function Block Detail Builder to set the ratio setpoint value (SV) range:
SV range high limit
digit each.
The default is 4.0.
SV range low limit
digit each.
The default is 0.0.
l Ratio Gain
Ratio Gain
Use the Function Block Detail Builder to set the ratio gain:
Ratio Gain: Specify a numeric value of 7 digits or less, where the sign and decimal point oc-
cupy one digit each.
The default is 1.0.
The expressions to obtain the ratio gain are shown below:

Example 1
The figure below shows an example of operating a flow ratio control system where the
flowrates F1 and F2 range from 0 to 100 m3/h and from 0 to 30 m3/h, respectively, by
maintaining the ratio r between 0.0 and 0.3:
r=0 to 0.3
F1=0 to 100 m3/h

RATIO
F2=0 to 30 m3/h
PID
Figure 1.18-4 Example of Flow Ratio Control
When the above conditions are applied to the computational expression (1), the flowrate
F1, target flowrate value of F2, and ratio r are represented by the process variable (PV),
calculated output value (CALC) and ratio setpoint value (SV), respectively.
When F1 is 0, the target of F2 is also 0. Thus, set the bias setpoint value (BIAS) of the
computational expression to 0. As a result, the following computational expressions are
satisfied:
CALCn= KRSVePV (2)
CALCn
KR= (3)
SVe PV
When r is 0.1 and F1 is 100 m3/h, the target value of F2 is the product of 100 and 0.1, or
10 m3/h. If this condition is applied to the computational expression (3), the following
computational expression is obtained:
CALCn=10, PV=100, SVe=0.1 (SVe=SV)
10
KR=
0.1 100
=1.0
As values of the process variable (PV), calculated output value (CALCn) and effective ra-
tio setpoint value (SVe) are all engineering unit data, this computational expression indi-
cates that the ratio gain (KR) becomes 1.0, if the process variable (PV) and calculated
output value (CALCn) are in the same unit and the effective ratio setpoint value (SVe) has
no unit.
Example 2
In the figure Example of Flow Ratio Control, assume that the flow ratio control system
provides the flowrates F1 and F2 that range from 0 to 300 m3/h and from 0 to 100 /min.,
respectively, and is operated at the ratio r of between 0.0 and 2.0 %.
When F1 is 0, the target value of F2 is 0. Thus, set the bias setpoint value (BIAS) to 0
and apply the expression (3) in Example 1.

When the assumed setting of r is 1.0 % and F1 is 300 m3/h, the target value of F2 is the
product of 300 and 1.0/100, or 3 m3/h, which is then converted to 50 /min. When this is
applied to the expression (3), the following computational expression is obtained:
CALCn=50, PV=300, SVe=1.0 (SVe=SV)
50
KR=
1.0 300
=0.1667
As values of the process variable (PV) and calculated output value (CALCn) are engineering
unit data, the ratio gain (KR) does change even when the scale high/low limits of the process
variable (PV) and calculated output value (CALCn) are changed. However, the ratio gain (KR)
must be changed when the engineering unit of the process variable (PV) and calculated out-
put value (CALCn) or that of ratio setpoint value (SV) is changed, as the ratio gain (KR) is cal-
culated based on the unit conversion coefficients of these values. The engineering unit of the
calculated output value (CALCn) is the same as that of the manipulated output value (MV).
l Bias Value
Set the bias value.
Set a data value in the same engineering unit as the manipulated output value (MV) and with-
in the range of - (MSH - MSL) to (MSH - MSL). The bias value can be set or changed from
operation and monitoring functions during operation. The default is the MV scale low limit
(MSL).

period to an actual manipulated output value (MV).
The control output actions available with the Ratio Set Block (RATIO) are of positional type
only.
The calculated output value (CAL) is set as the manipulated output value (MV).

The setpoint value limiter function limits the setpoint value (SV) within the range between the
setpoint high limit (SVH) and setpoint low limit (SVL), recognizing values only inside this
range as valid.
SEE
nSetpoint Value Limiter on page 1-39

ues (SV, CSV, RSV). The figure below explains the relationships among the setpoint value

RSV CSV
AUT/MAN
RCAS CAS
SV
Setpoint value
Control
computation
function block.


Causes the setpoint value (SV) and remote setpoint value (RSV) to agree with the cascade

Causes the setpoint value (SV) and cascade setpoint value (CSV) to agree with the remote
lated output value (MV) downstream in cascade without causing the manipulated output value
(MV) to change abruptly (i.e., bumpless change).
status.
The functions of bumpless switching available with the Ratio Set Block (RATIO) include the
following:
Ratio tracking
Ratio setpoint value ramp action
l Ratio Tracking
Ratio Tracking
The ratio tracking function sets as a ratio setpoint value (SV) the value calculated backwards
from the manipulated output value (MV), when ratio computation is stopped.
Ratio tracking enables bumpless switching of block modes from manual (MAN) to automatic
(AUT).

1
SV=(MV-BIAS)
PV KR
Ratio tracking is executed in the following conditions:

In the manual (MAN) mode
In the initialization manual (IMAN) mode (e.g., when cascade connection to a down-
stream loop becomes open)
Use the Function Block Detail Builder to set ratio tracking.
Ratio tracking:
Set Yes or No for each condition of MAN, AUT plus CND or CAS plus CND.
The table below shows the default settings of ratio tracking:
Table 1.18-3 Default Settings of Ratio Tracking

Specification condition (status) (*1) Default
MAN Ratio tracking disable.
AUT plus CND Ratio tracking disable.
CAS plus CND Ratio tracking disable.
*1: The statuses of MAN, AUT and CAS include remote backup modes, such as AUT (ROUT) and AUT (RCAS).
l Ratio Setpoint Value Ramp Action

The ratio setpoint value tracking action executes bumpless switching in place of ratio tracking,
when No is specified for ratio tracking.
The ratio setpoint value ramp action limits the change in the effective ratio setpoint value
(SVe) during each scan period to be equal to or less than the ramp constant (RP), when
changes occur in the ratio setpoint value (SV).
When the block mode changes from manual (MAN) to automatic (AUT), an effective ratio set-
point value (SVe) is calculated backwards from the manipulated output value (MV), and the
obtained value is set as the initial effective ratio setpoint value (SVe). Therefore, the same ac-
tions take place when the ratio setpoint value (SV) changes, thus prevent the manipulated
output value (MV) from changing abruptly when the block mode changes.
The figure below shows an example of the ratio setpoint value ramp action.
SV
Ramp constant (RP)

Effective ratio setpoint value
Scan period
Figure 1.18-6 Example of the Ratio Setpoint Value Ramp Action
Set the ramp constant from operation and monitoring functions as a set parameter.
Ramp constant (RP): Engineering unit data within the SV scale span range.

When Yes is specified for ratio tracking, the ratio setpoint value ramp action will not be exe-
cuted even when the block mode is changed from manual (MAN) to automatic (AUT).

Because the initialization manual action causes the manipulated output value (MV) to track
the value at the connected destination, even when the initialization manual (IMAN) mode
changes to manual (MAN), the initialization manual (IMAN) mode will override the manual
(MAN) mode. Therefore, no actions in the manual (MAN) mode will take place.
ever, if try to change block mode in the initialization manual (IMAN) mode, the block changes
to that mode only when the initialization condition vanishes.

es:
AUT
Initialization manual condition establishes
IMAN (AUT)
AUT
The initialization manual condition establishes in the following situation:
When the data status at the connected destination of the manipulated output value (MV)
is conditional (CND) (i.e., the cascade connection is open).
SW-91) and the connection is switched off. (i.e., the cascade connection is open).
a failure or output open alarm has occurred in the module.

n Control Hold
The control hold action takes place when the following conditions are established during auto-
matic operation (AUT, CAS, RCAS or ROUT):
switch, etc.).
non-response state (momentary power failure).
The control is resumed when the conditions vanish.
n MAN Fallback

ation state.

AUTMAN
However, the MAN fallback condition will not be established when the block mode is re-
mote output (ROUT) excluding any of the compound modes during computer backup.

n AUT Fallback
(CAS) to automatic (AUT) when the AUT fallback condition is established, and switches the
control action to the one that uses values set by the operator.

Changes the block mode from cascade (CAS) to automatic (AUT) to continue control using
values set by the operator.
Once the AUT fallback condition establishes, the block mode remains automatic (AUT) even
when the condition vanishes.

The AUT fallback condition is used to change the function block mode from cascade (CAS) to
automatic (AUT) so that control can be continued using values set by the operator. When this
condition is established, it indicates that abnormality has been detected in the cascade set-
point value (CSV) for some reason.
The following example shows when the AUT fallback condition establishes:
CASAUT
IMAN (CAS) IMAN (AUT)
Use the Function Block Detail Builder to enable or disable the AUT fallback function.
The default is No.
The AUT fallback condition establishes when the AUT fallback is defined as Yes via the
Function Block Detail Builder and the data status of the cascade setpoint value (CSV) be-
comes invalid (BAD) or communication error (NCOM).
n Computer Fail
backup mode.

sory system computer via control bus communication.
The following actions take place while the computer fail condition exists, the block mode
change command from MAN, AUT or CAS to remote cascade (RCAS) or remote output
(ROUT) is sent:
1. When a block mode change command from MAN, AUT or CAS to RCAS or ROUT is sent
while the computer fails (BSW=ON), the function block does not switch to the computer
backup mode directly but switches to the transient state mode first.
the execution of the block mode change command (MAN, AUT, CAS and a remote mode
(RCAS, ROUT).

ROUT).

A backup switch (BSW) is provided in function blocks to define the remote cascade (RCAS) or
The following example shows when the automatic (AUT) mode has been specified for the
computer backup mode:
RCAS
Computer fails
AUT (RCAS)
Computer recovers
RCAS
AUT
ROUT command
l Setting Computer Backup Mode

Use the Function Block Detail Builder to set the computer backup mode for each function
block.
comes down.
The default is MAN.



Any block mode change command to obtain an automatic operation state (AUT, CAS,
RCAS or ROUT mode) becomes invalid.

The block mode change interlock condition is established when the switch at the connected
destination of the interlock switch input terminal (INT) is turned ON as a result of continued
automatic operation becoming impossible due to an abnormality in the plant, etc.
n Data Items - RATIO

Table 1.18-4 Data Items of Ratio Set Block (RATIO) (1/2)
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
AF ----- 0
tion
AOFS ----- 0
tion
nection destination
SV Ratio setpoint value (*4) SV engineering unit value SSL
Cascade ratio setpoint val- Value in the same engi-
CSV x SSL
ue neering unit as SV
RSV Remote ratio setpoint value (*5) SSL
neering unit as SV
RMV (*7) MSL
neering unit as MV
HH x SL to SH SH
point
LL x SL to SH SL
point
neering unit as PV

Table 1.18-5 Data Items of Ratio Set Block (RATIO) (2/2)

Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
MH x MSL to MSH MSH
limit setpoint
ML x MSL to MSH MSL
limit setpoint
BIAS Bias value x MSL to MSH MSL
RP Ramp constant x 0 to (SSH - SSL) SSH - SSL
KR Ratio gain ----- 1.000
value
neering unit as PV
neering unit as PV
SEE
ALSO For more information about valid block modes of the RATIO block, refer to:

<1.19 13-Zone Program Set Block (PG-L13)> 1-224
1.19 13-Zone Program Set Block (PG-L13)

The 13-Zone Program Set Block (PG-L13) outputs the time function signals according to the
specified line segment graph against time-axis. Using the 13-Zone Program Set Block (PG-
L13) in combination with controller blocks enables program control of processes.
n 13-Zone Program Set Block (PG-L13)

Connection
Specify the time function signal output of the 13-Zone Program Set Block (PG-L13) indicated
in a line-segment pattern. A program pattern of up to 166 hours or 166 minutes long can be
set when the time-axis setting unit is minute or second, respectively.
The figure below shows a function block diagram of 13-Zone Program Set Block (PG-L13):
INT
SV
Control computation
(program setting)
CAS
AUT Output
CALC MV OUT
processing
MAN
(Annunciator output)
SUB
Figure 1.19-1 Function Block Diagram of 13-Zone Program Set Block (PG-L13)
nals of the 13-Zone Program Set Block (PG-L13):
Table 1.19-1 Connection Methods and Connected destinations of the I/O Terminals of 13-Zone Pro-
gram Set Block (PG-L13)
Process I/O
Manipu-
OUT x x x x
lated output
Annunciator
SUB x x x x
output
Interlock
INT x x x x
SW input
n Function of 13-Zone Program Set Block (PG-L13)

The PG-L13 block performs control computation processing, output processing, and alarm
processing.
The only processing timing available for the PG-L13 block is a periodic startup. Moreover, on-
ly the basic scan period can be selected as the scan period to execute the periodic startup.

SEE
ALSO For more information about the types of output processing and alarm processing possible for the PG-L13
block, refer to:
l Control Computation Processing of 13-Zone Program Set Block (PG-L13)

The table below shows the control computation processing functions of the 13-Zone Program
Set Block (PG-L13):
Table 1.19-2 Control Computation Processing Functions of the 13-Zone Program Set Block (PG-L13)
Description
ing
Expresses a line-segment pattern of the program with line segments con-
Line-segment pattern signal gen-
necting up to 14 coordinates on a plane of time (X axis) and output (Y ax-
eration
is) including starting and end points.
Calculates output values during each base period in accordance with the
Program set action
program set pattern, to obtain a calculated output value (CALC).
Saves or changes the calculated output value (CALC) and elapsed time
Program end action
(SV) at the end of the program.
Moves along the time axis in accordance with the setting of set parame-
Movement along the time axis
ters (SV, ZONE).
Annunciator output Turns the annunciator message ON at the end of the program set action.
Converts the manipulated output change (MV) during each control peri-
Control output action od to an actual manipulated output value (MV). The available control out-
put actions are of positional type only.
Switches the manipulated output value (MV) without causing it to change
abruptly when the block mode has been changed or when the manipu-
Bumpless switching
lated output value (MV) has been switched in a downstream block in cas-
cade. The types of bumpless switching include bumpless start action.
comes satisfied.
MAN fallback
n Line-Segment Pattern Signal Generation

Total Elapsed Time, Time Unit
The 13-Zone Program Set Block (PG-L13) performs control computation based on line-seg-
ment pattern signal generation. The line-segment pattern used to set programs is expressed
by line segments that connect coordinate points of time and output including the starting and
end points.

l Line-Segment Pattern
The line-segment pattern used to set programs is expressed by line segments that connect
up to 14 coordinate points on a plane of time (X axis) and output (Y axis) including the starting
and end points (maximum 13 line segments). The specifications of program-setting line-seg-
ment patterns are shown below:
l Number of Line-Segments: 1 to 13
Arbitrary line segments can be set on a coordinate plane of time (X axis) and output (Y axis).
If 0 is set to a segment on time axis (X02 to X14), the segment before this axis will be the end
of the time axis and the end of the line segments.
l Zone Number (ZONE): 1 to 13

The space between the time-axis coordinates Xn and Xn+1 is called Zone n.
l Setting Ranges
Line-segment patterns are set from operation and monitoring functions.
Time-axis breakpoint coordinate (X01 to X14): 0 to 9999 minutes, or 0 to 9999 seconds.
Output-axis breakpoint coordinate (Y01 to Y14): Engineering unit MV data.
Use the Function Block Detail Builder to set the time unit of time-axis breakpoint coordinates
or total running time of the program.
Time Unit: Select seconds or minutes
The default is second.
Total Elapsed Time: 0 to 10000
The default is 10000.
n Program Set Action

In the automatic (AUT) or cascade (CAS) mode, the program set action calculates output val-
ues set by the program set pattern during each basic scan period (1 second), and uses the
obtained result as a calculated output value (CALC). In the cascade (CAS) mode, the current
position returns to the start of the program set pattern when its end is reached, and output is
repeated along the program set pattern.

CALC
PH
PL
2
3
Present value
MH
ML
SV
Figure 1.19-2 Program Set Pattern
Elapsed time (SV)

Calculated output value (CALC)
Intra-zone time high limit (PH) : End time of the zone number corresponding to the
current elapsed time
Intra-zone time low limit (PL) : Start time of the zone number corresponding to the
current elapsed time
Remaining intra-zone output high : Maximum output value between the current elapsed
limit (MH) time and intra-zone time high limit (PH)
Remaining intra-zone output low limit : Minimum output value between the current elapsed
(ML) time and intra-zone time low limit (PL)
In the automatic (AUT) or cascade (CAS) mode, output processing is performed to the calcu-
lated output value (CALC) and the result is output as a manipulated output value (MV).
When the automatic (AUT) or cascade (CAS) mode is changed to manual (MAN) or initializa-
tion manual (IMAN), the set action will stop. However, computation data, such as time and
calculated output values, will be stored.
If the block mode is changed back to automatic (AUT) or cascade (CAS), the program set ac-
tion resumes from the stored time.
If breakpoints are partially set in a reverse direction on the time axis (e.g., X01 > X02), the
reversed portion will be ignored. The figure below shows an example of the reversed portion
on the time axis being ignored:
Figure 1.19-3 An Instance of the Reversed Portion on the Time Axis
In this example, the original line-segment pattern is represented by a dotted line. However,
the 13-Zone Program Set Block (PG-L13) only recognizes the pattern represented by the sol-
id line.

n Program End Action

When Program Exits
The actions performed in the automatic (AUT) mode at the end of the program include the fol-
lowing two types:
In each action, the manipulated output value (MV) is caused to agree with the calculated out-
put value (CALC). Use the Function Block Detail Builder to set the program end action.
When program exits: Select Holding PV or Quick Return.
The default is Holding PV.
l Final Value Holding Type

The calculated output value (CALC) and elapsed time (SV) at the end of the program are held
and the operating mode is switched to manual.
l Quick Return Type

The current position returns to the beginning of the program pattern (time value=0), and the
operating mode is switched to manual after the calculated output value (CALC) and elapsed
time (SV) are changed to the values at the starting point.
n Movement Precedence Along the Time Axis

The 13-Zone Program Set Block (PG-L13) moves along the time axis not only as time elapses
but also when data is set from operation and monitoring functions to the SV or ZONE set pa-
rameter or when bumpless start is executed.
The three methods to force the block to move along the time axis have the following move-
ment precedence:
Movement precedence
1: Bumpless start action
2: Setting the zone number (ZONE)
3: Setting the elapsed time (SV)
l Setting the Zone Number

When a value between 1 and 13 is set for the zone number (ZONE), actions will be continued
from the beginning of the zone that has been set. The zone number (ZONE) can be set in any
block mode.
l Setting the Elapsed Time (SV)

When any of the time data between the starting point and end point is set for the elapsed time
(SV), actions will continue from the point on time axis that has been set. The elapsed time
(SV) can be set in any block mode.
SEE
ALSO For more information about the bumpless start action, refer to:
nBumpless Switching on page 1-229
n Annunciator Output
When the software annunciator message (%AN) is specified for the output destination of the
annunciator output terminal (SUB), the annunciator message function will be turned ON at the

end of the program set action. However, the program set block only turns the function ON but
does not reset it. Use a sequence control block, or etc. to reset the alarm.

The control output action converts the manipulated output change (MV) of each control peri-
od to an actual manipulated output value (MV).
The control output action applied in the 13-Zone Program Set Block (PG-L13) is of positional
type only.
The calculated output value (CALC) is set as the manipulated output value (MV).
Bumpless Start
lated output value of the downstream block in the cascade loop without causing the manipu-
lated output value (MV) to change abruptly (i.e., bumpless change).
The type of bumpless switching action varies with the control output action and block mode
status.
The type of bumpless switching performed by the 13-Zone Program Set Block (PG-L13) is
bumpless start action.
The bumpless start action prevents the value of the output destination from changing abruptly
when the program set action is started from zero elapsed time (SV) by changing the block
mode from manual (MAN) to automatic (AUT) or cascade (CAS).
When the program set action is started from zero elapsed time (SV), the position on time axis
is fast-forwarded until the calculated output value (CALC) agrees with the setpoint value of
the output destination. The range of program pattern in which this agreement point is
searched is specified by the bumpless start zone (ZSTR) and bumpless end zone (ZEND).
If no matching pattern is found in the search range, the program set action is started from the
end point of the last zone that exists inside the search range.
Use the Function Block Detail Builder to define the bumpless start action.
Bumpless Start: Select Yes or No.
The default is Yes.
The bumpless start zone (ZSTR) and bumpless end zone (ZEND) are set from operation and
monitoring functions as set parameters.
Bumpless start zone (ZSTR): Select a value between 1 and 13.
The default is 1.
Bumpless end zone (ZEND): Select a value between 1 and 13.
The default is 1.

Bumpless start zone
Present value of
output destination ZEND
ZSTR
0 Fast-forwarding
along the time axis SV
Figure 1.19-4 Bumpless Start Action
If two successive mode change commands, one to the manual (MAN) mode and the other to
the automatic (AUT) or cascade (CAS) mode, are issued from a sequence control block, etc.
within a single scan period, bumpless start is not executed. Instead, the program set action is
started from the starting point of the program pattern.
If a mode change command to the automatic (AUT) mode is issued by itself, bumpless start is
executed.

ever, if try to change the block mode in the initialization manual (IMAN) mode, the block will
switch to that mode only when the initialization condition vanishes.

manual (IMAN).
es:
AUT
IMAN (AUT)
AUT

is a communication error (NCOM) or output failure (PTPF).
When the connected destination of the manipulated output value (MV) is a switch block
(SW-33, SW-91) and the switch off the cascade connection (i.e., the cascade connection
is open).
When the connected destination of the manipulated output value (MV) is a process output
and a failure or output open alarm is detected in module.
n MAN Fallback

The MAN fallback stops the control by changing the block to manual (MAN) mode regardless
of the current operation status, and forces the function block to enter manual operation state.

Example)
AUTMAN
MAN (CAS) IMAN (MAN)
I/O points connected to the I/O module has been changed via maintenance.



tion state. The following actions take place:
Any block mode change command to obtain an automatic operation state (AUT or CAS
mode) becomes invalid.

that the loop can not run in Auto mode, or etc.
n Data Items - PG-L13

Table 1.19-3 Data Items of 13-Zone Program Set Block (PG-L13)
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
AF ----- 0
tion
AOFS ----- 0
tion
Value in seconds or mi-
SV Elapsed time x 0
nutes
neering unit as MV
PH Intra - zone time high limit 0
nutes
PL Intra - zone time low limit 0
nutes
Output high-limit for re-
MH MSL to MSH MSL
mainder of zone
Output low-limit for remain-
ML MSL to MSH MSL
der of zone
ZONE Zone number (*3) 1 to 13 1
ZSTR Bumpless start zone x 1 to 13 1
ZEND Bumpless end zone x 1 to 13 1
Time - axis breakpoint co- Value in seconds or mi-
X01 to X14 x (*4) 0
ordinate nutes
Output - axis breakpoint co-
Y01 to Y14 x MSL to MSH MSL
ordinate
OPLO Output high-limit index x MSL to MSH MSL

Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
SH Time-axis scale high limit -----
nutes
SL Time-axis scale low limit -----
nutes
MSH MV scale high limit MV engineering unit value -----
MSL MV scale low limit MV engineering unit value -----
*3: Data for ZONE can be set through an I/O connection with another function block, such as a calculation block, but not exter-
nally as from the operation and monitoring functions.
*4: X01 cannot be set because it is a time-axis origin and fixed at 0.
SEE
ALSO For more information about a list of valid block modes of the PG-L13 block, refer to:

<1.20 Totalizing Batch Set Blocks (BSETU-2, BSETU-3)> 1-234
1.20 Totalizing Batch Set Blocks (BSETU-2,

BSETU-3)
The term totalizing batch set block is a generic name for the flow-totalizing batch set block
(BSETU-2) and the weight-totalizing batch set block (BSETU-3).
This section describes the functions common to these two function blocks.
n Common Functions of Totalizing Batch Set Blocks

The following explains the functions common to the BSETU-2 and BSETU-3 blocks.
SEE
ALSO For more information about the functions specific to the BSETU-2 block, refer to:
1.21, Flow-Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSETU-2) on page 1-265
For more information about the functions specific to the BSETU-3 block, refer to:
1.22, Weight-Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSETU-3) on page 1-275
l Input Processing Common to Totalizing Batch Set Blocks

The BSETU-2 and BSETU-3 blocks perform a special integration.
l Control Computation Processing Common to Totalizing Batch Set Blocks

The control computation processing functions of the BSETU-2 and BSETU-3 blocks are the
same. The control computation processing functions possessed by these two function blocks
are as follows:
Batch operation
MAN fallback
l Output Processing Common to Totalizing Batch Set Blocks

The BSET-2 and BSETU-3 blocks perform a special output signal conversion.
l Alarm Processing Common to Totalizing Batch Set Blocks

The alarm checks commonly performed by and specific to the BSETU-2 and BSETU-3 blocks
are as follows:
Pre-batch alarm check
Batch end alarm check
Cumulative deviation high and low limit check
Leak alarm check
l Compatibility between Totalizing Batch Set Block and CENTUM V,

CENTUM-XL Totalizing Batch Set Unit: FFCS Series/KFCS2/LFCS2
The Totalizing Batch Set Blocks (BSETU-2 and BSETU-3) are provided with optional compati-
bilities with the Totalizing Batch Set Units of CENTUM V and CENTUM-XL.

1.20.1 Input Processing of Totalizing Batch Set Blocks

(BSETU-2, BSETU-3)
The BSETU-2 and BSETU-3 blocks perform a special integration.
n Integration in the Totalizing Batch Set Blocks

In the BSETU-2 and BSETU-3 blocks, the following two types of integration are available:
Integrator value (SUM):
The integration specification is the same as for other Regulatory Control Blocks, but when
batch begins the integrator value is cleared to 0.
Total integrator value (SUM1):
The total integrator value (SUM1) accumulates the integrator value (SUM) for each batch
completion.
Total integrator value (SUM1)=(Total integrator value up to the previous batch)+Integrator
value (SUM)
SEE
ALSO For more information about the integration, refer to:
3.3, Integration in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)

1.20.2 Control Algorithm of Totalizing Batch Set Blocks

(BSETU-2, BSETU-3)
The following functions are common to the control computation processing performed by the
BSETU-2 and BSETU-3 blocks.
Batch operation
MAN fallback
n Batch Operation (Analog Output)

The batch operation performed by the Totalizing Batch Set Blocks varies depending upon the
type of output (analog output, 2-position ON/OFF output or 3-position ON/OFF output). The
figure below shows an example of batch operation in the case of analog output or data setting
output to other function block:
TU TD TU TD
MV
MH
Pre-batch
flowratesetpoint TW
PRE
ML
0
NCNT STRT RSTR ERLY
Block status IBCH STUP STDY EMST EEMS STUP STDY PBCH END NCNT
ZONE 0 10 1 2 3 8 9 11 2 3 4 5 7 0
Totalized 0 <
ILST
value ILST BSET - PLST BSET - LPV
Block mode MAN AUT MAN
Pre-batch BPRE
batch end
alarm BEND
MH: High flowrate setpoint BSET: Batch setpoint

ML: Low flowrate setpoint ILST: Initial forecast value
PRE: Pre-batch flowrate setpoint PLST: Pre-batch setpoint
TU: Rise time LPV: Leakage predictive value
TD: Fall time BPRE: Pre-batch alarm (early notification)
TW: Batch end wait time BEND: Batch end alarm (end notification)
Figure 1.20.2-1 Batch Operation (Analog Output)
The operating status is indicated by the block status and control step. The operating status is
switched via the command switch (SW), emergency stop switch (EMSW) or control step
(ZONE). The commands issued by the command switch (SW) and emergency stop switch
(EMSW) are shown below:
Command switch (SW)

1: Start
2: Restart
3: Abort
4: Emergency stop
0: Changes to 0 automatically when the command (1 to 4) is acknowledged.
Emergency stop switch (EMSW)

1: Emergency stop
0: After the executes command (1), it changes to 0 automatically.
l Basic Batch Operation

Accept Batch-End during EMST
The following section explains the basic operation of the Totalizing Batch Set Blocks at each
control step (ZONE):
1. ZONE10: Batch start (Block status: STRT)
Sets data to the set parameters including batch setpoint (BSET) prior to batch start. If the
command switch is set to start (SW=1) while in the automatic (AUT) block mode, the cur-
rent control step moves to ZONE10 and the block starts batch operation after resetting
the totalized value (SUM) to 0.
Once batch starts, the control step moves to ZONE1.
2. ZONE1: Initial batch (Block status: IBCH)
After batch start, outputs the low flowrate setpoint (ML) as the manipulated output value
(MV) until the totalized value (SUM) reaches the initial forecast value (ILST). The output
velocity limiter does not operate. When the totalized value (SUM) exceeds ILST, the con-
trol step moves to ZONE2.
The low flowrate setpoint (ML) and initial forecast value (ILST) are set from the opera-
tion and monitoring functions as set parameters.
Low flowrate setpoint (ML)
Set engineering unit data within the manipulated output value (MV) scale range.
The default is the manipulated output value (MV) scales low limit.
Initial forecast value (ILST)
Set data in the same unit as the totalized value (SUM).
The default is 0.
The set value consist of 8 digits or less.
3. ZONE2: Setup (Block status: STUP)
Changes the manipulated output value (MV) to the high flowrate setpoint (MH) value dur-
ing the Ramp Up time (TU). The high flowrate setpoint (MH) is an output value in a steady
state.
When the set TU time elapses in the setup mode, the control step moves to ZONE3.
The high flowrate setpoint (MH) and Ramp Up time (TU) are set from the operation
and monitoring functions as set parameters.
High flowrate setpoint (MH)
Set engineering unit data within the manipulated output value (MV) scale range.
Ramp Up time (TU)
Set a value between 0 and 10000 seconds.

4. ZONE3: Steady (Block status: STDY)
Outputs the high flowrate setpoint (MH) as the manipulated output value (MV). When the
totalized value (SUM) reaches the value of batch setpoint (BSET) less pre-batch setpoint
(PLST), the control step moves to ZONE4.
The batch setpoint (BSET) and pre-batch setpoint (PLST) are set from the operation
and monitoring functions as set parameters.
Batch setpoint (BSET)
The default is 0.
Specify a numeric value consisting of 8 digits or less.
Pre-batch setpoint (PLST)
The default is 0.
Specify a numeric value consisting of 8 digits or less.
5. ZONE4: Early (Block status: ERLY)
In the course of Ramp Down time (TD), the manipulated output value (MV) is changed to
PRE (pre-batch flowrate setpoint) on the gradient that leads to the low-flowrate setpoint
(ML). When the manipulated output value (MV) becomes the same value as the pre-
batch flowrate setpoint (PRE), the control step moves to ZONE5.
The pre-batch flowrate setpoint (PRE) and Ramp Down time (TD) are set from the op-
eration and monitoring functions as set parameters.
Pre-batch flowrate setpoint (PRE)
Set engineering unit data within the MV scale range.
Ramp Down time (TD)
6. ZONE5: Pre-batch (Block status: PBCH)
Outputs the pre-batch flowrate setpoint (PRE) as the manipulated output value (MV).
When the totalized value (SUM) reaches the value of batch setpoint (BSET) less leakage
predictive value (LPV), the control step moves to ZONE7.
The leakage predictive value (LPV) is set from the operation and monitoring functions
as a set parameter.
Leakage predictive value (LPV)
The default is 0.
Specify a numeric value of 4 digits or less.
7. ZONE7: Batch end (Block status: END)
Batch operation ends after the manipulated output value (MV) is reset to 0. When the
batch end wait time (TW) elapses in the batch end mode, the block mode changes to
manual (MAN) and the control step moves to ZONE0. At this time, the totalized value
(SUM) is added to the cumulative totalized value (SUM1). However, this addition will not
take place in the manual (MAN) mode.
The batch end wait time (TW) is set from the operation and monitoring functions as a
set parameter.
Batch end wait time (TW)

8. ZONE0: Batch operation stop (Block status: NCNT)
In this mode, batch Control Action stops and a manually manipulated variable can be out-
put.
9. ZONE6: Reset (Block status: RSET)
When the command switch is set to Abort (SW=3) during batch operation, the control
step moves to ZONE6 and the manipulated output value (MV) is brought down to 0 % at
a speed of changing it from the high flowrate setpoint (MH) to low flowrate setpoint (ML)
over the Ramp Down time (TD).
When the manipulated output value reaches 0 %, the control step moves to ZONE7.
When the totalized value exceeds the value of batch setpoint (BSET) less leakage predic-
tive value (LPV), the status changes to batch end and generates an alarm (BEND). The
batch ends other than this way does not generate batch end alarm (BEND).
10. ZONE8: Emergency stop (Block status: EMST)
When the emergency command switch is set to emergency stop (EMSW=1), or when the
command switch is set to emergency stop (SW=4), the control step moves to ZONE8,
and the manipulated output value (MV) is brought down to 0 % at a speed of changing it
from the high flowrate setpoint (MH) to low flowrate setpoint (ML) over TD (Ramp Down
time). When the manipulated output value (MV) reaches 0 %, the control step moves to
ZONE9.
Even when the block is in Emergency Stop (EMST) status, if the totalized value (SUM)
reaches the batch setpoint (BSET) value minus the leakage predictive value (LPV), the
control step may shift to ZONE7. However, this behavior is alternative by changing the
setting of [Accept Batch-End during EMST] on the FCS properties sheet. By default, this
check box is checked.
11. ZONE9: Emergency stop complete (Block status: EEMS)
When the totalized value (SUM) reaches the value of batch setpoint (BSET) less leakage
predictive value (LPV) during emergency stop, the control step moves to ZONE7. Howev-
er, if the option of [Accept Batch-End during EMST] on the FCS properties sheet is not
checked, it will not move to ZONE7 but stays in ZONE9.
12. ZONE11: Restart (Block status: RSTR)
When the command switch is set to restart (SW=2) during the emergency stop complete
mode (ZONE9), the control stop moves to ZONE2 via ZONE11.
n Actions Triggered by Command Switch

The figure below shows the actions of batch operation triggered by the command switch
(SW):

Command switch (SW) 1 4 2 3
Action Start EM-ST Restart Reset
Block mode AUT AUT AUT AUT
MV
MH
TW
ML
0
NCNT STRT RSTR RSET
Block status IBCH STUP STDY EMST EEMS STUP STDY END NCNT
ZONE 0 10 1 2 3 8 9 11 2 3 6 7 0
Totalized 0 <
ILST
value ILST
Block mode MAN AUT MAN
Figure 1.20.2-2 Actions of Batch Operation Triggered by Command Switch
Other than by the emergency stop command (SW=4), emergency stop can also be triggered
via the emergency stop switch (EMSW=1).
n Transition of Control Step Status

The figure below shows a status transition diagram of control steps in normal operation:

(M)
(F)
(D)
6
RSET (N)
1 (B) 2 (C) 3 (D) 4 (E) 5 (F) 7
IBCH STUP STDY ERLY PBCH END
(H)
(J)
11 9 8
(L) (I) (F)
RSTR EEMS EMST
(M)
(A) 10 (K) 0 (G)
STRT NCNT
Legend
ZONE
(A) Batch start complete

(B) End of initial batch Block status
(C) End of setup
(D) Early point detection (SUM>BET-PLST)
(E) End of pre-batch processing (MV=PRE)
(F) Batch end detection (SUM>BSET-LPV)
(G) End of batch end processing
(H) Emergency stop command (EMSW=1 or SW=4)
(I) Emergency stop complete
(J) Restart complete
(K) Start command (SW=1)
(L) Restart command (SW=2)
(M) Abort (SW=3)
(N) Abort completed (MV=0 %)
Figure 1.20.2-3 Transition of Control Step Status
Status transition can also be induced by changing the control step. The control step (ZONE)
can be changed from a sequence table or calculation block, but not from the operation and
monitoring functions. Note that change commands issued by the command switch (SW) pre-
cede any operation to change the control step (ZONE).
The totalized value (SUM) is added to the cumulative totalized value (SUM1) when batch end
processing is completed.
n Manual Operation
When the block mode changes to manual (MAN), automatic control processing is suspended
and manual operation is enabled. The control step changes even during the manual (MAN)
mode. When the block mode is changed from manual (MAN) to automatic (AUT) during man-
ual operation, automatic control is started.
n Automatic Prediction
When batch end is detected during each scan period, a flowrate error equivalent to a maxi-
mum of one scan period may generate. The Totalizing Batch Set Blocks automatically pre-
dicts batch end in order to minimize this error.

When the alarm status changes to pre-batch alarm (BPRE), the totalized value during the
next scan is predicted based on the totalized value increase during the current scan period
(totalized value during the current scan-totalized value during the previous scan). If the pre-
dicted value exceeds the batch setpoint (BSET), a duration of time to keep the valve fully
open is calculated in 25 msec. units, based on the totalized value (SUM). The valve is fully
opened when the time calculated using this formula elapses.
The automatic prediction function is executed only in ZONE5. This function is also activated
for outputs via a switch instrument block.
n Beginning Point of Ramp-Up When Restart

Ramp Up from ML Upon Start/Restart
When a Restart command is applied while the block is in the status of emergency stop (Block
Status: EEMS), the block will move to the control step ZONE11 (Block Status: RSTR) first,
and then move to the setup step ZONE2 (Block Status: STUP). At this step, the output will
ramp up. However, the ramp-up begins from the low flow rate setpoint (ML) or from 0 %
needs to be defined.
This option can be defined on the Function Block Detail Builder.
Ramp Up from ML Upon Start/Restart: Choose [Yes] or [No]
If [Yes] is selected, upon the restart command, the ramp-up of the manipulated output value
(MV) will begin from the low flowrate setpoint (ML). The setup step (Block Status: STUP) will
be the same as before but the ramp-up time (TU) will be the time of the manipulated output
value (MV) ramps from the low flowrate setpoint (ML) to the high flowrate setpoint (MH).
The batch operation will act as follows if Ramp Up from ML Upon Start/Restart is applied.
TU TD TU
MV
MH
Pre-Batch
Flowrate
Setpoint Ramp Up
from ML
PRE
ML
0
NCNT STRT RSTR STUP
Block status IBCH STUP STDY EMST EEMS STDY

ZONE 0 10 1 2 3 8 9 11 2 3
Figure 1.20.2-4 Ramp Up from ML Upon Restart
If [No] is selected, upon the restart command, the ramp-up of the manipulated output value
(MV) will begin from the 0 % of flowrate. The manipulated output value (MV) ramps from the 0
% flowrate to the high flowrate setpoint (MH) at the same ramp rate specified by ramp-up time
(TU).

The batch operation will act as follows if Ramp Up from ML Upon Start/Restart is not ap-
plied.
TU TD TU
MV
MH
Pre-Batch
Flowrate
Setpoint Ramp Up
from 0 %
PRE
ML
0
NCNT STRT RSTR STUP
Block status IBCH STUP STDY EMST EEMS STDY

ZONE 0 10 1 2 3 8 9 11 2 3
Figure 1.20.2-5 Ramp Up from 0 % Upon Restart
n Start Action when Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSETU-2, BSETU-3)

and Controller Blocks (such as PID) in Cascade Loop
Ramp Up from ML Upon Start/Restart
If the initial forecast value (ILST) is 0, the ramp-up beginning point can be specified upon the
timing of the start command and the timing that the connected function block becomes a cas-
cade loop. The ramp-up begins from the low flow rate setpoint (ML) or from 0 % needs to be
defined.
This option can be defined on the Function Block Detail Builder. The setting of Ramp Up from
ML Upon Start/Restart also functions for this purpose.
Ramp Up from ML Upon Start/Restart: Choose [Yes] or [No]
If [Yes] is selected, upon the start command, the block will not move to initial batch status
(Block Status: IBCH) but directly to go to setup step (Block Status: STUP). The ramp-up of the
manipulated output value (MV) will begin from the low flowrate setpoint (ML). The ramp-up
time (TU) will be the time of the manipulated output value (MV) ramps from the low flowrate
setpoint (ML) to the high flowrate setpoint (MH).
The batch operation will act as follows if Ramp Up from ML Upon Start/Restart is applied.

TU
MV
MH
Pre-Batch
Flowrate
Setpoint Ramp Up
from ML
PRE
ML
0
STRT IBCH
Block status NCNT STUP STDY

ZONE 0 10 2 3
Figure 1.20.2-6 Ramp Up from ML Upon Start
If [No] is selected, upon the start command, the block will not move to initial batch status
(Block Status: IBCH) but directly to go to setup step (Block Status: STUP). The ramp-up of the
manipulated output value (MV) will begin from the 0 % flowrate. The manipulated output value
(MV) ramps from the 0 % flowrate to the high flowrate setpoint (MH) at the same ramp rate
specified by ramp-up time (TU).
The batch operation will act as follows if Ramp Up from ML Upon Start/Restart is not ap-
plied.
TU
MV
MH
Pre-Batch
Flowrate
Setpoint Ramp Up
from 0 %
PRE
ML
0
STRT IBCH
Block status NCNT STUP STDY

ZONE 0 10 2 3
Figure 1.20.2-7 Ramp Up from 0 % Upon Start
However, if the initial forecast value (ILST) is greater than 0 and the block moves to initial
batch status (Block Status: IBCH) before ramp-up, the manipulated output value (MV) ramps

from the low flowrate setpoint (ML) to the high flowrate setpoint (MH) regardless what is
specified for Ramp Up from ML Upon Start/Restart.
n Batch Operation (2-Position ON/OFF Output)

Simple batch control based on the two-position ON/OFF output method can be performed by
connecting the output terminal (OUT) of the Totalizing Batch Set Blocks to a contact output or
switch instrument block. Valve closure processing can also be performed via automatic pre-
diction when the block is connected to a switch instrument.
The table below shows the relationship between the manipulated output values (MV) during
manual operation and those of a contact output or switch instrument block.
Table 1.20.2-1 Relationship between Manipulated Output Values (MV) during Manual Operation and
Those of a Contact Output or Switch Instrument Block
MV value 0 % to 49.9 % 50 % to 100 %
Contact output OFF ON
Switch instrument MV=0 MV=2
IMPORTANT
When a BSETU-2 or BSETU-3 function block is applied with two-position ON/OFF output, the
parameters of the ramp up time (TU) and the ramp down time (TD) should be set to zero.
If the ramp down time (TD) is not zero, when the function block runs emergency shutdown to
force MV to 0 %, but the control calculation will ramp down the MV slowly based on the set-
ting value of TD. Since the ON/OFF output only acts in accordance with 100 % MV or 0 %
MV, thus, the output cannot become OFF if the MV is not ramping down to zero but hooked at
100 %. Consequently, the valve cannot be closed by the emergency shutdown (EMST) action.
The same phenomenon occurs when the ramp up time (TU) is not zero. In setup mode of the
function block, the MV may be hooked at 0 % and the valve cannot be opened.
l Actions when Switch Instrument is in Cascade (CAS) Mode

When the connected switch instrument is in the cascade (CAS) mode, the BSETU-2 and
BSETU-3 blocks output the manipulated output value (MV) to the sequence setpoint value
(CSV) of the switch instrument, and the switch instrument outputs the received sequence set-
point value (CSV) as its own manipulated output value (MV). In the case of emergency stop,
the manipulated output value (MV) drops to 0 % immediately.
The figure below shows an example of simple batch operation based on the 2-position
ON/OFF output method, when the switch instrument is in the cascade (CAS) mode.
In this example, the parameters are set as follows:
Output velocity limiter: 100%
Ramp Up time (TU): 0 second
Ramp Down (TD): 0 second
High flowrate setpoint (MH): 100%
Low flowrate setpoint (ML): 100%
Pre-batch flowrate setpoint (PRE): 100%

MV
100
2-position TW
ON/OFF
Block
NCNT STRT IBCH STDY EEMS RSTR STDY PBCH END NCNT
status
ZONE 0 10 1 3 9 11 3 5 7 0
Totalized 0
<ILST ILST BSET - LPV
value BSET - PLST
Block
MAN AUT MAN
mode
Pre-batch BPRE
batch end
alarm BEND
Figure 1.20.2-8 Example of Simple Batch Operation Using 2-Position ON/OFF Output Method when the
Both Switch Instruments are in Cascade (CAS) Mode
SEE
ALSO For more information about the switch instrument block, refer to:
2.4, Switch Instrument Block and Enhanced Switch Instrument Block in the Function Blocks Reference
Vol.2 (IM 33K03E23-50E)
l Actions when Switch Instrument is not in Cascade (CAS) Mode

When the connected switch instrument is not in the cascade (CAS) mode, the Flow/Weight-
Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSETU-2, BSETU-3) changes to the initialization manual (IMAN)
mode. In this mode, the MV value of the switch instrument is set as the MV of the Flow/
Weight-Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSETU-2, BSETU-3) after having been converted via the
output value tracking function.
n Batch Operation (3-Position ON/OFF Output)

Simple batch control using the 3-position ON/OFF output method can be performed by con-
necting the output terminals (OUT, OUT2) of the Flow-Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSETU-2)
to contact outputs or switch instruments.
When connecting to contact outputs, use two contact outputs with successive terminal num-
bers. Register the contact output with the smaller terminal number as I/O connection informa-
tion of the OUT terminal. The contact output with the smaller terminal number becomes out-
put contact 1. When connecting to switch instruments, the switch instrument connected to the
OUT terminal becomes switch instrument 1, and the one connected to the OUT2 terminal be-
comes switch instrument 2.
The table below shows the relationship between the manipulated output values (MV) during
manual operation and those of contact outputs or switch instruments:
Table 1.20.2-2 Relationship between Manipulated Output Values (MV) during Manual Operation and
Contact Outputs or Switch Instrument Blocks
MV value 0 % to 24.9 % 25 % to 74.9 % 75 % to 100 %
Contact output 1 OFF OFF ON
Contact output 2 OFF ON ON

MV value 0 % to 24.9 % 25 % to 74.9 % 75 % to 100 %
Switch instrument 1 MV=0 MV=0 MV=2
Switch instrument 2 MV=0 MV=2 MV=2
IMPORTANT
When a BSETU-2 or BSETU-3 function block is applied with three-position ON/OFF output,
the parameters of the ramp up time (TU) and the ramp down time (TD) should be set to zero.
ting value of TD. Since the ON/OFF output only acts in accordance with 100 % MV, 50 % MV
or 0 % MV, thus, the output cannot become OFF if the MV is not ramping down to zero but
hooked at 100 %. (or 50 %.) Consequently, the valve cannot be closed by the emergency
shutdown (EMST) action.
l Actions when Both Switch Instruments are in Cascade (CAS) Mode

When both of the connected switch instruments are in the cascade (CAS) mode, the BSE-
TU-2 or BSETU-3 blocks output two manipulated output values (MV) to the corresponding se-
quence setpoint values (CSV) of switch instruments 1 and 2, and each switch instrument out-
puts the received sequence setpoint value (CSV) as its own manipulated output value (MV).
In the case of emergency stop, the manipulated output value (MV) drops to 0 % immediately.
The figure below shows an example of simple batch operation based on the three-position
ON/OFF output method, when the switch instruments are in the cascade (CAS) mode. In this
example, the parameters are set as follows:
Output velocity limiter: 100 %
Ramp Up time (TU): 0 second
Ramp Down time (TD): 0 second
High flowrate setpoint (MH): 100 %
Low flowrate setpoint (ML): 50 %
Pre-batch flowrate setpoint (PRE): 50 %

MV
100
3-position TW
ON/OFF
Block
NCNT STRT IBCH STDY EEMS RSTR STDY PBCH END NCNT
status
ZONE 0 10 1 3 9 11 3 5 7 0
Totalized 0
<ILST ILST BSET-LPV
value BSET-PLST
Block
MAN AUT MAN
mode
Pre-batch BPRE
batch end
alarm BEND
Figure 1.20.2-9 Example of Simple Batch Operation Based on 3-Position ON/OFF Output Method when
Both Switch Instruments are in the Cascade (CAS) Mode
l Actions when Only Switch Instrument 2 is in Cascade (CAS) Mode

When only switch instrument 2 is in the cascade mode, the Flow/Weight-Totalizing Batch Set
Block (BSETU-2, BSETU-3) outputs only to switch instrument 2.
ON/OFF output method, when only switch instrument 2 is in the cascade (CAS) mode:
MV
100 %
50 %
0 %
BSETU-2/ ZONE 0 1 3 9 3 5 7
BSETU-3
Switch instrument MODE CAS Other than CAS

1 MV 0 0/2 (No output from the BSETU-2/BSETU-3)
Switch instrument MODE CAS

2 MV 0 2 0 2 0
Switch instrument 1 changes to a non-CAS mode
Figure 1.20.2-10 Example of Batch Operation when Only Switch Instrument 2 is in Cascade (CAS)
Mode
l Actions when Only Switch Instrument 1 is in Cascade Mode

In batch operation where only switch instrument 1 is in the cascade (CAS) mode, the manipu-
lated output value (MV) of switch instrument 1 becomes 0 in the initial batch (ZONE1) and

pre-batch (ZONE5) modes. Therefore, if the manipulated output value (MV) of switch instru-
ment 2 is 0, the emergency stop mode (ZONE9) becomes active.
To perform output in this state, set either of the following:
ILST (initial forecast value)=0
PLST (pre-batch setpoint)=0
This eliminates the mode of ZONE1 or 5 and sets the command switch (SW) to 2 (restart
specification). As a result, the control step changes to ZONE3 and batch operation resumes.
ON/OFF output method, when only switch instrument 1 is in the cascade (CAS) mode:
MV
100 %
50 %
0%
BSETU-2/ ZONE 0 1 9 3 9 3 7
BSETU-3
Switch instrument MODE CAS

1 MV 0 2 0 2 0
Switch instrument MODE CAS Other than CAS

2 MV 0 2 0/2 (No output from the BSETU-2/BSETU-3)
LIST=PLST=0. Set SW=2.
Switch instrument 2 changes to a non-CAS mode
Figure 1.20.2-11 Example of Batch Operation when Only Switch Instrument 1 is in Cascade (CAS)
Mode
l Actions when Neither Switch Instrument is in Cascade (CAS) Mode

When neither switch instrument is in the cascade (CAS) mode, the Flow/Weight-Totalizing
Batch Set Block (BSETU-2, BSETU-3) enters the initialization manual (IMAN) mode. In this
mode, the MV value of the switch instrument is set as the MV of the Flow/Weight-Totalizing
Batch Set Block (BSETU-2, BSETU-3) after having been converted via the output value track-
ing function.
n Emergency Stop when an Alarm Occurs

Emergency Stop when Input Open, Emergency Stop when Low-Low Alarm, Emergency Stop when
High Alarm, Emergency Stop when Low Alarm, Emergency Stop when Missing Pulse
The batch operation can be set to the emergency stop state when an alarm occurs. Emergen-
cy stop execution can be specified for the alarms indicated below:
Input open alarm (IOP, IOP-)
Input low-low limit alarm (LL)
Input high limit alarm (HI)
Input low limit alarm (LO)
Missing pulse alarm (NPLS) (*1)

The setting for whether the batch operation comes to an emergency stop or continues when
an alarm occurs is performed for each alarm using the Function Block Detail Builder. The
setting selections are Yes or No. When Yes is selected, the operation performs an emer-
gency stop when an alarm occurs. When No is selected, there is no emergency stop and
the batch operation continues. Default settings are given below:
Emergency Stop When Input Open: The default is Yes
Emergency Stop When Low-Low Alarm: The default is No.
Emergency Stop When High Alarm: The default is No.
Emergency Stop When Low Alarm: The default is No.
Emergency Stop When Missing Pulse: The default is Yes. (*2)
*1: The missing pulse alarm (NPLS) is available only for BSETU-2, but not for BSETU-3.
*2: Emergency Stop When Missing Pulse is available only for BSETU-2, but not for BSETU-3.
SEE
ALSO For more information about the input open, input low-low limit, input high limit and input low limit alarms, refer
to:
5.1, Input Open Alarm Check in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
5.3, Input High-High and Low-Low Limit Alarm Check in the Function Blocks Overview (IM
33K03E21-50E)
5.4, Input High and Low Limit Alarm Check in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
For more information about the missing pulse alarm, refer to:
nMissing Pulse Alarm Check on page 1-268

the value at the connected destination, even when the initialization manual (IMAN) mode is
changed to manual (MAN), the initialization manual (IMAN) mode will precede the manual
(MAN) mode and any operation to change to the manual (MAN) mode will become invalid.
ever, if try to change a block mode in the initialization manual (IMAN) mode, the block will
switch to that mode only when the initialization condition vanishes.

es:
AUT

IMAN (AUT)
AUT
(SW-33, SW-91) and the switches off the cascade connection.
and a failure or output open alarm is detected in the process output.
n MAN Fallback
tion is established. In the Flow-Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSETU-2), the emergency stop ac-
tion triggered by an input open alarm will override the MAN fallback action only when input
open emergency stop is defined Yes in the function block builder. When an input open alarm
occurs, the emergency stop (EMST) mode becomes active and the manipulated output value
(MV) drops to the manipulated output scale low limit (MSL).
Once the emergency stop action is completed, the MAN fallback action is executed and the
block mode changes to manual (MAN) mode.
l Characteristics of MAN Fallback


AUTMAN
The MAN fallback condition is established in the following situations:


The block mode change interlock function stops the control computation processing of func-
tion blocks that are operating automatically, while disabling the currently stopped function
blocks from changing to an automatic operation state. This action takes place when the block
mode change interlock condition is established.

Any block mode change command to obtain an automatic operation state (AUT mode)
becomes invalid.


1.20.3 Output Processing of Totalizing Batch Set Blocks

(BSETU-2, BSETU-3)
The BSETU-2 and BSETU-3 blocks perform a special output signal conversion.
This section describes the output signal conversion, using the BSETU-2 block as an example.
n Output Signal Conversion of the Flow/Weight-Totalizing Batch Set

Block (BSETU-2 and BSETU-3)
The types of output signal processing available in the BSETU-2 and BSETU-3 blocks are an-
alog output, data set output for other function block, subsystem output, and 2-position/3-posi-
tion ON/OFF output. Pulse width output is not available.
Not only the process I/O contact output but also Switch Instrument blocks can be used as the
destination of 2-position/3-position ON/OFF output.
The following list shows the Switch Instrument block that may be connected to BSETU-2 and
BSETU-3. Switch Instrument block with two status output can not be connected.
SIO-11, SIO-11E
SIO-21, SIO-21E
SO-1, SO-1E
IMPORTANT
When a BSETU-2 or BSETU-3 function block is applied with two-position ON/OFF output or
three-position ON/OFF output, the parameters of the ramp up time (TU) and the ramp down
time (TD) should be set to zero.
ting value of TD. Since the ON/OFF output only acts in accordance with 100 % MV, 50 % MV
or 0 % MV, thus, the output cannot become OFF if the MV is not ramping down to zero but
hooked at 100 %. (or 50 %.) Consequently, the valve cannot be closed by the emergency
shutdown (EMST) action.
l Connecting a 2-Position ON/OFF Output to a Contact Output

The following figure illustrates the connection of an I/O contact output to the output terminal
(OUT) of the BSETU-2 block:
IN BSETU-2 OUT
Figure 1.20.3-1 An Example of 2-Position ON/OFF Output

The following table shows the relationship between the manipulated output value (MV) in the
manual operating mode and the contact output status:
Table 1.20.3-1 Relationship between the MV and the Contact Output Status in Manual Mode
MV value 0 to 49.9 % 50 to 100 %
Contact output OFF ON
MV
100
2-position
ON/OFF
Figure 1.20.3-2 Simplified Batch Operation of the 2-Position ON/OFF Output System
l Connecting a 3-Position ON/OFF Output to Contact Outputs

The following figure illustrates the connection of the I/O contact outputs to the output termi-
nals (OUT and OUT2) of the BSETU-2 block:
IN BSETU-2 OUT
OUT2
manual operating mode and the contact outputs status:
Table 1.20.3-2 Relationship between the MV and the Contact Output Status in Manual Mode
MV value 0 to 24.9 % 25 to 74.9 % 75 to 100 %
Contact output 1 OFF OFF ON
Contact output 2 OFF ON ON
MV
100
3-position
ON/OFF
Figure 1.20.3-4 3-Position ON/OFF Output
l 2-Position ON/OFF Output Connected to a Switch Instrument in Cascade

The following figure illustrates the connection of a 2-position ON/OFF output to a switch in-
strument in cascade. In this example, the switch instrument CSV is connected to the output
terminal (OUT) of the Flow-Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSETU-2) in cascade.

IN OUT
BSETU-2
IN CSV OUT
SIO-11
manual operating mode and the switch instrument status:
Table 1.20.3-3 Relationship between the MV of 2-Position ON/OFF Block and the MV of the Switch In-
strument Block
MV value 0 to 49.9 % 50 to 100 %
Switching instrument MV=0 MV=2
When the connected switch instrument is in the cascade (CAS) mode, the BSETU-2 block
outputs a manipulated output value (MV) to the sequence setpoint value (CSV) of the switch
instrument, and the instrument will output the sequence setpoint value (CSV) as its own ma-
nipulated output value (MV). If the switch instrument is not in the cascade (CAS) mode, the
BSETU-2 block will be in the initialization manual mode (IMAN). Then, the switch instrument
manipulated output value (MV) converted to the manipulated output value (MV) data of the
BSETU-2 block will be set as the manipulated output value (MV) of the BSETU-2 by the out-
put tracking function. Even when connected to a switch instrument block, the automatic pre-
diction is still functioning to close the valve.
l 3-Position ON/OFF Output Connected to a Switch instrument in Cascade

The following figure illustrates the connection of the 3-position ON/OFF output to a switch in-
strument in cascade. In this example, the switch instrument CSV is connected to the output
terminals (OUT or OUT2) of the Flow-Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSETU-2) in cascade. In the
case of 3-position ON/OFF output, Switch Instrument Block with 1 Output (SO-1) and Switch
Instrument Block with 1 Output (SO-1) are connected to the OUT and OUT2 terminals, re-
spectively.
OUT
IN
BSETU-2 OUT2
CSV OUT CSV OUT

SO-1 SO-1
manual operating mode and the switch instrument status:

Table 1.20.3-4 Relationship between the MV of 3-Position ON/OFF Block and the MV of the Switch In-
strument Block
MV value 0 to 24.9 % 25 to 74.9 % 75 to 100 %
Switching instrument 1 MV=0 MV=0 MV=2
Switching instrument 2 MV=0 MV=2 MV=2
When both of the connected switch instruments are in the cascade (CAS) mode, the BSE-
TU-2 block outputs two manipulated output values (MV) to the sequence setpoint values
(CSV) of the switch instrument 1 and 2, respectively, and the individual instruments will output
their sequence setpoint value (CSV)s as their own manipulated output value (MV)s, respec-
tively. If neither of the switch instruments is in the cascade (CAS) mode, the BSETU-2 block
will be in the initialization manual mode (IMAN). Then, the switch instrument manipulated out-
put value (MV) converted to the manipulated output value (MV) data of the BSETU-2 block
will be set as the manipulated output value (MV) of the BSETU-2 by the output tracking func-
tion.

1.20.4 Alarm Processing of Totalizing Batch Set Blocks

(BSETU-2, BSETU-3)
The alarm checks commonly performed by and specific to the BSETU-2 and BSETU-3 blocks
are as follows:
Pre-batch alarm check
Batch end alarm check
Cumulative deviation high and low limit check
Leak alarm check
IMPORTANT
The pre-batch alarm and the batch end alarm will be initiated only under the conditions descri-
bed later in this section.
When checking the BSETU-2 or BSETU-3 running state with sequence table or other blocks,
it is recommended not using the alarm status but using the block status or the zone number.
n Pre-Batch Alarm Check

Pre-Batch Alarm
The pre-batch alarm check is a function that determines if the integral value (SUM) has
reached a value (BSET-PLST) obtained by subtracting the pre-batch setpoint value (PLST)
from the batch setpoint value (BSET).
If it is determined that the integral value (SUM) has reached a value (BSET-PLST) obtained
by subtracting the pre-batch setpoint value (PLST) from the batch setpoint value (BSET), a
pre-batch alarm (BPRE) is activated.
To enable the pre-batch alarm function, set the alarm detect as enabled in the Function
Block Detail Builder.
The pre-batch alarm can be set with the Function Block Detail Builder.
Pre-batch alarm: Choose [Yes] or [No].
Default is [No].
n Batch End Alarm Check

Batch End Alarm
The batch end alarm check is a function that determines if the integral value (SUM) has
reached a value (BSET-LPV) obtained by subtracting the leakage predictive value (LPV) from
the batch setpoint value (BSET).
If it is determined that the integral value (SUM) has reached a value (BSET-LPV) obtained by
subtracting the leakage predictive value (LPV) from the batch setpoint value (BSET), a batch
end alarm (BEND) is generated.
To enable the batch end alarm check, set the alarm detect as enabled in the Function Block
Detail Builder.
The batch end alarm can be set with the Function Block Detail Builder.
Batch End Alarm: Choose [Yes] or [No].
Default is [No].

n Cumulative Deviation High and Low Limit Check

Accumulated Deviation High/Low Limit Alarm
The cumulative deviation high and low limit check is a function that determines whether the
deviation (SUM-BSET) between the integral value (SUM) and batch setpoint value (BSET)
falls outside the range of the absolute value of the cumulative deviation alarm setpoint value
(DL).
If it is determined that the deviation exceeds the cumulative deviation alarm setpoint value
(DL) in the positive direction, a cumulative deviation high limit alarm (BDV+) occurs. Similarly,
if it exceeds the DL in the negative direction, a cumulative deviation low limit alarm (BDV-) oc-
curs. These alarms are checked upon batch completion (transits from ZONE7 to ZONE0) and
are maintained as long as the control step is ZONE0 (batch stopped status). However, when
a reset (SW=3) is done, the alarm check is not performed.
To activate the cumulative deviation high and low limit alarm check, set the type of cumulative
deviation high and low limit alarm check and the cumulative deviation high and low limit alarm
check setpoint value (DL).
l Cumulative Deviation High and Low Limit Alarm Check Type

The type of cumulative deviation high and low limit alarm is set by the cumulative deviation
high and low limit alarm item in the Function Block Detail Builder. The types of cumulative
deviation high and low limit alarms are given below. The default is high and low limit alarm.
High and low limit alarm
Monitors the deviation for both the high and low limits
High limit only
Monitors the deviation for the high limit only
Low limit only
Monitors the deviation for the low limit only
No alarm
No detection is performed
When single direction is specified for the cumulative deviation high and low limit alarm type,
only the cumulative deviation high limit alarm is monitored when the cumulative deviation
alarm setpoint (DL) has a plus sign, and only the low limit alarm is monitored when the set-
point has a minus sign.
l Cumulative Deviation Alarm Setpoint (DL)

The cumulative deviation alarm setpoint (DL) is set by the operation and monitoring function.
The cumulative deviation alarm setpoint (DL) can changed as setting parameters.
Cumulative deviation alarm setpoint (DL): Same unit data as SUM
Number of digits for the setting: Maximum 4 digits
Default is 1000.
n Leak Alarm Check

Leak Check
The leak alarm check is a function that compares the integral value and the previous integral
value at the time of batch completion (saved when batch is completed) and determines
whether the difference exceeds the leak setpoint value (LK).
If it is determined that the difference exceeds the leak setpoint value (LK), a leak alarm
(LEAK) occurs. Flowrate accumulation is being performed from the time the batch is comple-
ted until the next batch starts.

Flow-Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSETU-2)
For the BSETU-2 block, the leak alarm check is performed only for an increase (the differ-
ence is a positive number).
Weight-Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSETU-3)
For the BSETU-3 block, the leak alarm check is performed for both an increase (the dif-
ference is a positive number) and decrease (the difference is a minus number). However,
the alarm status will be leak alarm (LEAK) whether the leak is an increase or a decrease.
To activate the leak alarm check, set whether the leak alarm check is enabled or disabled and
the leak setpoint value (LEAK).
l Leak Alarm Enabled/Disabled

The leak alarm can be set with the Function Block Detail Builder.
Leak alarm: Select from enabled and disabled
Default is disabled.
l Leak Setpoint (LK)

The leak setpoint is set by the operation and monitoring function.
Leak setpoint (LK): Same unit data as SUM
Maximum 4 digits
Default is 100.

1.20.5 Compatibility between Totalizing Batch Set Block

and CENTUM V, CENTUM-XL Totalizing Batch Set
Unit
The Totalizing Batch Set Blocks (BSETU-2 and BSETU-3) are provided with optional compati-
bilities with the Totalizing Batch Set Units of CENTUM V and CENTUM-XL. The optional com-
patibilities are as follows:
Start/Restart upon ACT.ON command
Accept restart command when emergently stopped
Inhibit Pre-Batch alarm when emergently stopped
Initiate Batch-End alarm when batch ended
Release Pre-Batch alarm when batch ended
Actions of manipulated output value (MV) when changing from MAN to AUT mode
These features are available only for FFCS series, KFCS2, and LFCS2.
n Start/Restart upon ACT.ON Command: FFCS Series/KFCS2/LFCS2

When this optional compatibility is selected, the ACT.ON action command in a sequence table
can also initiate the BSETU-2 or BSETU-3 blocks Batch Start action according to the block
status, and the Batch Restart action during emergency stop status.
Upon the ACT.ON, the BSETU-2 and BSETU-3 block will behave as follows:
When the batch operation is stopped (Block Status: NCNT) and the block is manual
(MAN) mode, upon the ACT.ON command, as if starting batch operation using the Com-
mand Switch to start (SW=1) while the block is in automatic (AUT) mode.
When the batch is running emergency stop (Block Status: EMST) or when the batch is
emergently stopped (Block Status: EEMS), upon the ACT.ON command, as if restarting
batch operation using the Command Switch to restart (SW=2) while the block is in auto-
matic (AUT) mode.
When the batch is running emergency stop (Block Status: EMST) or when the batch is
emergently stopped (Block Status: EEMS), upon the ACT.ON and ZONE.0 commands,
the block will start the batch operation from the beginning instead of restart. However, in
the sequence table, the ACT.ON and ZONE.0 must be scripted in the same scan time.
When the batch is at a status other than the above described status such as batch stop
(NCNT), emergency stop (EMST) or emergency stop complete (EEMS) and the block is
at automatic (AUT) mode, upon the ACT.ON command, no action will be initiated. Howev-
er, if the block is at manual (MAN) mode, upon the ACT.ON command, the block will shift
to automatic (AUT) mode.
Table 1.20.5-1 Scripts in Sequence Table When Migrating CENTUM V 7BS or CENTUM-XL BSETU
Action 7BS/BSETU BSETU-2 Remarks
Same as starting batch
using Command Switch
Start LOOP=AUT, SV=0 ACT.ON (*1); ZONE.0 to start (SW=1) while the
block is in automatic
(AUT) mode.
Emergency Stop LOOP=CAS SW.4 or EMSW.1
Same as restarting batch
using Command Switch
Restart LOOP=AUT ACT.ON (*1) to restart (SW=2) while
the block is in automatic
(AUT) mode.

Action 7BS/BSETU BSETU-2 Remarks
The output (MV) may
Reset LOOP=MAN SW.3 vary upon SW.3 and
MODE.MAN.
*1: For Start, use ACT.ON instead of LOOP=AUT and ZONE.0 instead of SV=0. For Restart, use ACT.ON instead of LOOP=AUT.
Moreover, the control step (ZONE) cannot be changed from HIS, but can be changed from sequence table.
Moreover, from HIS, ACT.ON command cannot be entered. To start a batch from HIS, the op-
erator can change the block into automatic (AUT) mode and use the Command Switch
(SW=1). However, if the optional compatibility is not enabled, the ACT.ON command in the
sequence table cannot change the block and ZONE.
n Accept Restart Command when Emergently Stopped: FFCS Series/

KFCS2/LFCS2
Normally, when the BSETU-2 or BSETU-3 block is undergoing the ramp-down (ZONE8) trig-
gered by emergency stop (Block Status: EMST), the restart command SW=2 will not be ac-
cepted.
However, if the optional compatibility is enabled, the restart command SW=2 and ACT.ON
from the sequence table will be accepted.
n Inhibit Pre-Batch when Emergently Stopped: FFCS Series/KFCS2/

LFCS2
Normally, when the BSETU-2 or BSETU-3 block is undergoing an emergency stop (Block Sta-
tus: EMST) while the totalized flow (SUM) becomes equal to Batch Setpoint (BSET) minus
Pre-Batch Setpoint (PLST), the pre-batch alarm (BPRE) will be initiated.
If the optional compatibility is enabled, the pre-batch alarm (BPRE) will be inhibited when
emergently stopped.
n Initiate Batch-End Alarm when Batch Ended: FFCS Series/KFCS2/

LFCS2
Normally, when automatic prediction is applied while the totalized flow (SUM) becomes equal
to Batch Setpoint (BSET) minus Leakage Predictive Value (LPV) i.e., SUM = BSET - LPV, the
block shifts to batch end (Block Status: END) but the Batch-End alarm will not be initiated.
If the optional compatibility is enabled, the batch-end alarm (BEND) will be initiated when the
block shifts to batch end status. The actions are as follows:
The batch-end (BEND) alarm will be definitely imitated when the block shifts to batch end
status.
If the batch end wait time (TW) is set to 0, the control step will be shifted from ZONE7 of
batch-end (Block Status: END) to ZONE0 of batch-stop (Block Status: NCNT) immediate-
ly and the batch-end (BEND) alarm will be initiated.
However, this option is valid only when the setting of [Batch End Alarm] is set to [Yes] on the
Function Block Detail Builder.
SEE
ALSO For more information about automatic prediction, refer to:
nAutomatic Prediction on page 1-241
For more information about checking the batch-end alarm, refer to:
nBatch End Alarm Check on page 1-257

n Release Pre-Batch Alarm When Batch Ended: FFCS Series/KFCS2/

LFCS2
Normally, the pre-batch alarm (BPRE) is released together with the batch-end alarm (BEND)
at the time that the next batch is started. The pre-batch alarm (BPRE) cannot be released at
batch end status (Block Status: END).
If the optional compatibility is enabled, the pre-batch alarm (BPRE) will be released when the
block shifts to batch end status (Block Status: END).
However, this option is valid only when the setting of [Batch End Alarm] is set to [Yes] on the
SEE
ALSO For more information about checking the pre-batch alarm, refer to:
nPre-Batch Alarm Check on page 1-257
n Actions of Manipulated Output Value (MV) when Changing from

MAN to AUT Mode: FFCS Series/KFCS2/LFCS2
If the optional compatibility is enabled, the actions of manipulated output value (MV) when
changing from manual (MAN) to automatic (AUT) mode are as follows:
When batch is stopped (Block Status: NCNT), if the block is changed to automatic (AUT)
mode, the manipulated output value (MV) will become 0.
However, if the optional compatibility is not enabled, the manipulated output value (MV)
will hold the current value.
When batch is running and in a status other than batch stopped (Block Status: NCNT), if
the block is changed from automatic (AUT) to manual (MAN) mode, and then changed to
automatic (AUT) mode again, the manipulated output value (MV) will ramp up to high
flowrate setpoint (MH) with the specified ramp-up rate for setup step (Block Status:
STUP). When the batch reaches Early status (Block Status: ERLY), the manipulated out-
put value (MV) will ramp down to pre-batch flowrate setpoint (PRE) with the specified
ramp-down rate.
However, if the optional compatibility is not enabled, the manipulated output value (MV)
will change to a value according to its control step (ZONE) while the block is changed
from automatic (AUT) to manual (MAN) mode.
When the block is changed from automatic (AUT) to manual (MAN) mode, the manipulated
output value (MV) will act as follows:
Table 1.20.5-2 Actions of Manipulated Output Value (MV) when Changed from AUT to MAN Mode:
FFCS Series/KFCS2/LFCS2
Optional Compatibility
ZONE Block Status Optional Compatibility Enabled (*1)
Disabled (*1)
MV: Holds (or tracks the
0 NCNT MV=0
connected value)
1 IBCH MV=ML MV=ML
2 STUP MV: Ramps Up MV: Ramps Up
If MV < MH, MV ramps up with the rate
3 STDY MV=MH
for STUP(*2).
4 ERLY MV: Ramps Down MV: Ramps Down
If MV > PRE, MV ramps down with the
5 PBCH MV=PRE
rate for ERLY.
7 END MV=0 (*3) MV=0 (*3)
8 EMST MV: Ramps Down MV: Ramps Down

Optional Compatibility
ZONE Block Status Optional Compatibility Enabled (*1)
Disabled (*1)
9 EEMS MV=0 MV=0
*1: MH: Manipulated variable high-limit setpoint
ML: Manipulated variable low-limit setpoint
PRE: Pre-batch flowrate set point
*2: In manual (MAN) mode, if MV is manipulated to a value smaller than MH, the block will not shift to ZONE2 when changed to
automatic (AUT) mode. When MV ramps up to MH, the low alarm (LO) and the low-low alarm (LL) will be masked so as to
prevent them to trigger the emergency stop.
*3: The batch end wait time (TW) also elapses in manual (MAN) mode. When the batch end wait time (TW) is elapsed after batch
end, the control step (ZONE) will shift to ZONE0.
n Enable/Disable Optional Compatibilities: FFCS Series/KFCS2/LFCS2

CENTUM V/CENTUM-XL Compatible
The table below shows the settings for compatibilities of totalizing batch set block.
Table 1.20.5-3 Settings for Compatibilities of Totalizing Batch Set Block: FFCS Series/KFCS2/LFCS2
Totalizing Batch Set Block Setting
Compatibilities between 7BS of CENTUM V, BSETU
[Compatible with 7BS, BSETU].
of CENTUM-XL and BSETU-2 /BSETU-3
Compatibilities between BSETU-2 of CENTUM-XL
and BSETU-2
[CENTUM-XL Compatible].
Compatibilities between BSETU-3 of CENTUM-XL
and BSETU-3
The settings can be performed on the FCS Properties sheet.

CENTUM V/CENTUM-XL Compatible
Choose from [No], [Compatible with 7BS, BSETU] and [CENTUM-XL Compatible].
When [Compatible with 7BS, BSETU] is selected, the following compatibilities will be ap-
plied:
Start/Restart upon ACT.ON command
Release Pre-Batch alarm when batch ended
Ramp Up from ML Upon Start/Restart (*1)
When [CENTUM-XL Compatible] is selected, the following compatibilities will be applied:
Inhibit Pre-Batch alarm when emergently stopped
Ramp Up from ML Upon Start/Restart (*1)
*1: When the option of [Compatible with 7BS, BSETU] or [CENTUM-XL Compatible] is checked, the compatibility is also applied
to the function block when the option of [Ramp Up from ML Upon Start/Restart] is checked on the Function Block Detail build-
er.

SEE
ALSO For more information about [Ramp Up from ML Upon Start/Restart] option, refer to:
nBeginning Point of Ramp-Up When Restart on page 1-242
nStart Action when Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSETU-2, BSETU-3) and Controller Blocks (such
as PID) in Cascade Loop on page 1-243

<1.21 Flow-Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSETU-2)> 1-265
1.21 Flow-Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSETU-2)

The Flow-Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSETU-2) totalizes flowrate signals and outputs the ma-
nipulated output value in accordance with the totalized value. This block is used for batch
control, such as batch shipment control of products and batch charge control of raw materials.
n Flow-Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSETU-2)

Connection
The Flow-Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSETU-2) totalizes flowrate signals and outputs the ma-
nipulated output value (MV) in accordance with the totalized value.
The Flow-Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSETU-2) changes the output to 0 % when the totalized
value reaches the batch setpoint.
The Flow-Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSETU-2) enables batch control, such as batch ship-
ment control of products and batch charge control of raw materials.
The figure below shows a function block diagram of Flow-Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSE-
TU-2):
ZONE SW EMSW
Input AUT Output

IN PV Batch MV OUT
set pattern
MAN OUT2
SUM
INT
Figure 1.21-1 Function Block Diagram of Flow-Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSETU-2)
The figure below shows an example of simple batch shipment control:
IN BSETU-2 OUT
Figure 1.21-2 Example of Simple Batch Shipment Control
The figure below shows an example of batch shipment control where flow velocity is PID con-
trolled in combination with other function blocks:

IN BSETU-2 OUT
SET
IN PID OUT
Figure 1.21-3 Example of Batch Shipment Control
The figure below shows an example of batch blend control:

J01 FOUT BSETU-2
SET OUT IN
J02
IN RATIO OUT IN RATIO OUT
SET SET
IN PI-BLEND OUT IN PI-BLEND OUT
Figure 1.21-4 Example of Batch Blend Control
nals of the Flow-Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSETU-2):
Table 1.21-1 Connection Methods and Connected destinations of the I/O Terminals of Flow-Totalizing
Batch Set Block (BSETU-2)
Process I/O
Measure-
IN x x x
ment input
Manipu-
OUT x x x x x
lated output
Manipu-
OUT2 lated output x x
(*2)
Interlock
INT x x x x
SW output
*2: The OUT2 terminal is used when connecting a 3-position ON/OFF output to switch instruments 1 and 2, for connection to
switch instrument 2.
l OUT Terminal Manipulated Output

The OUT terminal outputs the manipulated output signals indicated below:
Analog output

Output to other function blocks
Contact outputs for 2-position ON/OFF output and 3-position ON/OFF output
Data setting to the 2-position ON/OFF output switch instrument
Data setting to switch instrument 1 when the 3-position ON/OFF output is connected to
switch instruments 1 and 2.
l OUT2 Terminal Manipulated Output

The OUT2 terminal outputs the data set to switch instrument 2 when the 3-position ON/OFF
output is connected to switch instruments 1 and 2.
n Function of Flow-Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSETU-2)

The BSETU-2 block performs input processing, control computation processing, output pro-
The only processing timing available for the BSETU-2 block is a periodic startup. Selections
SEE
ALSO For more information about the functions common to the BSETU-2 and BSETU-3 blocks, refer to:
1.20, Totalizing Batch Set Blocks (BSETU-2, BSETU-3) on page 1-234
For more information about the types of input processing, output processing, and alarm processing possible
for the BSETU-2 block, refer to:
l Control Computation Processing of Flow-Totalizing Batch Set Block

(BSETU-2)
The table below shows the control computation processing functions of the Flow-Totalizing
Batch Set Block (BSETU-2).
Table 1.21-2 Control Computation Processing Functions of Flow-Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSETU-2)
Description
ing
Performs batch operation in accordance with the type of output (analog
Batch operation
output, twoposition ON/OFF output or three-position ON/OFF output).
comes satisfied.
MAN fallback
However, the emergency stop action precedes when an input open alarm
has occurred.

Description
ing
SEE
ALSO For more information about the control computation processing of the BSETU-2 block, refer to:
1.20.2, Control Algorithm of Totalizing Batch Set Blocks (BSETU-2, BSETU-3) on page 1-236
l Alarm Processing Specific to Flow-Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSETU-2)

The missing pulse alarm check and flowrate alarm check, which are two of the alarm
checks performed by the BSETU-2 block, are specific to this function block.
In addition, the BSETU-2 block uses a unique alarm display priority order, which is different
from that of other function blocks.
n Missing Pulse Alarm Check

Missing Pulse
The missing pulse alarm check is a function that determines whether a pulse input for a set
duration is detected during pulse input detection.
If it is determined that when a pulse input is not detected for the set duration during pulse in-
put detection, a missing pulse alarm (NPLS) is generated. This check is performed during
each missing pulse check time (t3) after the missing pulse check mask interval (t2) has
elapsed and only when the control step is 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5.
The figure below illustrates the timing of the BSETU-2 block alarm check.

MV
MH
PRE
ML
Block
NCNT IBCH STUP STDY EMST EEMS STUP STDY ERLY PBCH END
status
ZONE 0 1 2 3 8 9 2 3 4 5 7
LO t1 t1
HI/LL t1 t1
NPLS t2 t2
t3
: Alarm check period LO : Low limit alarm

t1 : Flowrate check mask interval HI : High limit alarm
t2 : Missing pulse check mask interval LL : Low-low limit alarm
t3 : Missing pulse check time NPLS : Missing pulse warning
: Missing pulse check timing
Figure 1.21-5 Alarm Check Timing
To activate the missing pulse alarm, set whether the missing pulse alarm check is enabled or
disabled, the missing pulse check mask interval, and the missing pulse check time.
l Missing Pulse Alarm Check Enabled/Disabled

The missing pulse alarm can be set with the Function Block Detail Builder.
Missing pulse alarm: Select from enabled and disabled.
Default is enabled.
l Missing Pulse Check Mask Interval

The missing pulse check mask interval can be set with the Function Block Detail Builder.
Missing pulse check mask interval: 0 to 10000
Unit is the scan period.
Default is 5.
l Missing Pulse Check Time

The missing pulse check time can be set with the Function Block Detail Builder.

Missing pulse check time: 0 to 10000
Default is 1.
IMPORTANT
For FFCS/FFCS-L/KFCS2/KFCS, if a pulse input signal is sent from an ER bus node, missing
pulse alarm may occur due to the delay of data refresh. Thus, when setting the missing pulse
check time, the data refresh delay from ER bus node should be put into consideration.
Moreover, if the ER bus interface master modules (EB401) of FFCS/FFCS-L/KFCS2/KFCS, or
RIO bus interface modules (RB301) of LFCS2/LFCS are dual-redundantly configured, when
switching from one module to another, the data refresh of pulse input may halt for a few sec-
onds. The missing pulse check time can be set with the following consideration:
For RB301 (half time: 1 or 2 seconds)
Missing pulse check time should be greater than 2 divided by scan period. (i.e., Missing
pulse check time > 2 if scan period is 1 second; Missing pulse check time > 4 if scan peri-
od is 500 ms; Missing pulse check time > 10 if scan period is 200 ms)
For EB401 (half time: 2 or 3 seconds)
Missing pulse check time should be greater than 4 divided by scan period. (i.e., Missing
pulse check time > 4 if scan period is 1 second; Missing pulse check time > 8 if scan peri-
od is 500 ms; Missing pulse check time > 20 if scan period is 200 ms)
SEE
ALSO For more information about the data refresh cycle between the remote node of FFCS/FFCS-L/KFCS2/KFCS
and EB401, refer to:
Data Flow in Process I/O in 7.1.3, Timing of Process I/O in the Function Blocks Overview (IM
33K03E21-50E)
n Flowrate Alarm Check

Flow Check Mask Interval, Input Low-Low Limit Alarm, PV High/Low Limit Alarm
The flowrate checks take place upon expiration of the flowrate check masking interval (t1), as
shown in Figure below. Specify the masking interval with the Function Block Detail Builder.
Flowrate check masking interval: 0 to 10000
The default is 10.
The flowrate alarm check processing timing of BSETU-2 block is shown below.

MV
MH
PRE
ML
Block
status
ZONE 0 1 2 3 8 9 2 3 4 5 7
LO t1 t1
HI/LL t1 t1
: Alarm check period LO : Low-limit alarm

t1 : Flowrate check masking interval HI : High-limit alarm
LL : Low-low limit alarm
Figure 1.21-6 Flowrate Check Processing Timing
The flowrate alarm check in the BSETU-2 block consists of the low-low limit check and the
high-low limit check.
l Low-Low Limit Alarm

A low-low limit alarm (LL) is generated if the flowrate (PV) falls below the low-low limit alarm
setpoint (LL). This check operates in control steps 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5.
l Low-Limit Alarm
A low-limit alarm (LO) is generated if the flowrate (PV) falls below the low-limit alarm setpoint
(PL). This check operates only in control step 3.
l High-Limit Alarm
A high-limit alarm (HI) is generated if the flowrate (PV) exceeds the high-limit alarm setpoint
(PH). This check operates in control steps 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5.
n Alarm Display Priority of the Flow-Totalizing Batch Set Block

(BSETU-2)
The following is the order for the alarm display priority specific to the BSETU-2 block:
OOP>IOP>IOP->NPLS>LL>HI>LO>LEAK>BDV+>BDV->BEND>BPRE>CNF
When there are absolutely no alarms generated, the alarm status is NR.

Table 1.21-3 Alarm Check for the Control Steps (ZONE) of the Flow-Totalizing Batch Set Block
ZONE(*1)
Alarm
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
IOP x x x x x x x x x x x x
IOP- x x x x x x x x x x x x
OOP x x x x x x x x x x x x
CNF x x x x x x x x x x x x
LL - x x x x x - - - - - -
HI - x x x x x - - - - - -
LO - - - x - - - - - - - -
BDV + - - - - - - - - - - -
BDV- - - - - - - - - - - -
LEAK x - - - - - - - - - - -
NPLS - x x x x x - - - - - -
BPRE x x x x x x x x x x x
BEND x x x x x x x x x x x
*1: x:Alarm check is executed for the ZONE.
:Alarm check is executed only once when ZONE=7 changes to ZONE=0.
-:Alarm check is not executed for the ZONE.
The alarm is set to normal state (NR).
:Alarm check is not executed and the status prior to ZONE=0 is retained.
SEE
ALSO For more information about operation of the control steps for the BSETU-2 block, refer to:
nBatch Operation (Analog Output) on page 1-236
n Data Items - BSETU-2

Table 1.21-4 Data Items of Flow-Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSETU-2) (1/2)
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
BSTS Block status ----- NCNT
AF ----- 0
tion
AOFS ----- 0
tion
PV Flowrate process variable (*3) PV engineering unit value SL
nection destination
SUM Totalizer value x SUM engineering unit value 0
SUM1 Cumulative totalized value x 0
neering unit as SUM
SW Command switch x 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 0
LL x SL to SH SL
point

Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
Cumulative deviation alarm Value in the same engi-
DL x 1000
setpoint neering unit as SUM
Table 1.21-5 Data Items of Flow-Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSETU-2) (2/2)
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
MH High flowrate setpoint x MSL to MSH MSH
ML Low flowrate setpoint x MSL to MSH MSL
PRE Pre-batch flowrate setpoint x MSL to MSH MSL
LPV Leakage predictive value x 0
neering unit as SUM
ILST Initial forecast value x 0
neering unit as SUM
PLST Pre-batch setpoint x 0
neering unit as SUM
BSET Batch setpoint x 0
neering unit as SUM
LK Leak setpoint x 100
neering unit as SUM
TU Up time x 0 to 10,000 seconds 0 second
TD Down time x 0 to 10,000 seconds 0 second
TW Batch end wait time x 0 to 10,000 seconds 0 second
ZONE Control step 0 to 11 0
EMSW Emergency stop switch x 0, 1 0
neering unit as PV
neering unit as PV
*2: SUM: Totalizer value
SEE
ALSO For more information about valid block modes of the BSETU-2 block, refer to:

n Block Status of Flow-Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSETU-2)

Table 1.21-6 Block Status of Flow-Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSETU-2)
Block Status
Level
Symbol Name
STRT Batch Start
IBCH Batch Initialization
STUP Batch Setup
STDY Ready
ERLY Early
PBCH Pre-Batch
1
END Batch End
NCNT Batch Stopped
RSET Reset
EMST Emergency Shutdown
EEMS Emergency Shutdown Completed
RSTR Restart

<1.22 Weight-Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSETU-3)> 1-275
1.22 Weight-Totalizing Batch Set Block

(BSETU-3)
The Weight-Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSETU-3) calculates a totalized value of changes in
weight signals sent from a scale, and outputs the manipulated output value in accordance
with the totalized value. This block is used for batch control, such as batch shipment control of
products and batch charge control of raw materials.
n Weight-Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSETU-3)

Connection
The Weight-Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSETU-3) calculates a totalized value of changes in
weight signals sent from the scale, and outputs the specified manipulated output value in ac-
cordance with the totalized value.
The Weight-Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSETU-3) changes the output to 0 % when the total-
ized value reaches the batch setpoint.
The Weight-Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSETU-3) enables batch control, such as batch ship-
ment control of products and batch charge control of raw materials.
The figure below shows a function block diagram of Weight-Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSE-
TU-3):
ZONE SW EMSW
IN
IN2 AUT
Input Output
PV Batch MV OUT
IN3 set pattern
MAN OUT2
IN4
SUM0
SUM
INT
Figure 1.22-1 Function Block Diagram of Weight-Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSETU-3)
nals of the Weight-Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSETU-3):
Table 1.22-1 Connection Methods and Connected destinations of the I/O Terminals of Weight-Totaliz-
ing Batch Set Block (BSETU-3)
Process I/O
Analog in-
IN x x x
put
IN2 Digital input x x x
Sign bit in-
IN3 x x x
put
Ready bit
IN4 x x x
input
Manipu-
OUT x x x x
lated output

Process I/O
Manipu-
OUT2 lated output x x
(*2)
Interlock
INT x x x x
SW input
*2: The OUT2 terminal is used when connecting a 3-position ON/OFF output to switch instruments 1 and 2, for connection to
switch instrument 2.
l IN Terminal Analog Input

If the weight signal from a scale is a analog signal, connect the weight signal to the IN termi-
nal via an analog process I/O module of process I/O. When reading weight data from other
function blocks, also connect the weight signal to the IN terminal.
l IN2 Terminal Digital Input

If the weight signal from the scale is a digital datum that satisfy the following conditions, con-
nect it to the IN2 terminal via a contact module of process I/O.
Also use the IN2 terminal when inputting digital data of weight signals that satisfy the above
condition, from a software I/O.
Number of bits: 32 bits or less
Code: Binary or BCD
l IN3 Terminal Sign Bit Input

Connect the sign bit of weight signal digital data to the IN3 terminal.
The sign bit indicates the sign of data. The length of this bit is 1 bit. 0 and 1 indicate posi-
tive and negative, respectively.
l IN4 Terminal Ready Bit Input

The ready bit transmits the timing of when the weight signals sent as digital data can be read.
The length of this bit is 1 bit.
Connect the ready bit to the IN4 terminal.
Use the Function Block Detail Builder to define the control action direction of the ready bit.
Ready-bit Action Direction: Select Direct or Reverse.
The default is Direct.
The table below shows actions of the IN4 terminal ready bit input:
Table 1.22-2 IN4 Terminal Ready Bit Input

Action specification Ready bit Status
0 Preparing data
Direct action
1 Read ready
0 Read ready
Reverse action
1 Preparing data

l OUT Terminal Manipulated Output

The OUT terminal outputs the following manipulated output signals:
Analog output
Output to other function blocks
Contact output of a 2-position or 3-position ON/OFF output
Data setting of a 2-position ON/OFF output to the switch instrument
Data setting to switch instrument 1, when a 3-position ON/OFF output is connected to
switch instruments 1 and 2.
l OUT2 Terminal Manipulated Output

The OUT2 terminal transmits data setting output to switch instrument 2, when a 3-position
ON/OFF output is connected to switch instruments 1 and 2.
n Function of Weight-Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSETU-3)

The BSETU-3 block performs input processing, control computation processing, output pro-
The only processing timing available for the BSETU-3 block is a periodic startup. Selections
SEE
ALSO For more information about the functions common to the BSETU-2 and BSETU-3 blocks, refer to:
1.20, Totalizing Batch Set Blocks (BSETU-2, BSETU-3) on page 1-234
for the BSETU-3 block, refer to:
l Input Processing Specific to Weight-Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSETU-3)

The BSETU-3 block performs special input signal conversions.
l Control Computation Processing of Weight-Totalizing Batch Set Block

(BSETU-3)
The table below shows the control computation processing functions of the Weight-Totalizing
Batch Set Block (BSETU-3).

Table 1.22-3 Control Computation Processing of Weight-Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSETU-3)
Description
ing
Performs batch operation in accordance with the type of output (analog
Batch operation
output, twoposition ON/OFF output or three-position ON/OFF output).
comes satisfied.
MAN fallback
However, the emergency stop action precedes when an input open alarm
has occurred.
SEE
ALSO For more information about the control computation processing of the weight-totalizing batch set block (BSE-
TU-3), refer to:
1.20.2, Control Algorithm of Totalizing Batch Set Blocks (BSETU-2, BSETU-3) on page 1-236
l Alarm Processing Specific to Weight-Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSETU-3)

The flowrate alarm check, which is one of the alarm checks performed by the BSETU-3
block, is specific to this function block.
n Data Items - BSETU-3

Table 1.22-4 Data Items of Weight-Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSETU-3) (1/2)
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
BSTS Block status ----- NCNT
AF ----- 0
ton
AOFS ----- 0
tion
PV Flowrate process variable PV engineering unit value SL
nection destination
SUM Totalizer value x SUM engineering unit value 0
SUM0 Absolute totalized value 0
neering unit as SUM
SUM1 Cumulative totalized value x 0
neering unit as SUM
SW Command switch x 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 0

Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
LL x SL to SH SL
point
Cumulative deviation alarm Value in the same engi-
DL x 1000
setpoint neering unit as SUM
Table 1.22-5 Data Items of Weight-Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSETU-3) (2/2)
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
MH High flowrate setpoint x MSL to MSH MSH
ML Low flowrate setpoint x MSL to MSH MSL
PRE Pre-batch flowrate setpoint x MSL to MSH MSL
LPV Leakage predictive value x 0
neering unit as SUM
ILST Initial forecast value x 0
neering unit as SUM
PLST Pre-batch setpoint x 0
neering unit as SUM
BSET Batch setpoint x 0
neering unit as SUM
LK Leak setpoint x 100
neering unit as SUM
TU Up time x 0 to 10,000 seconds 0 second
TD Down time x 0 to 10,000 seconds 0 second
TW Batch end wait time x 0 to 10,000 seconds 0 second
ZONE Control step 0 to 11 0
EMSW Emergency stop switch x 0, 1 0
neering unit as PV
neering unit as PV
*2: SUM: Totalizer value
SEE
ALSO For more information about valid block modes of the BSETU-3 block, refer to:

n Block Status of Weight-Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSETU-3)

Table 1.22-6 Block Status of Weight-Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSETU-3)
Block Status
Level
Symbol Name
STRT Batch Start
IBCH Batch Initialization
STUP Batch Setup
STDY Ready
ERLY Early
PBCH Pre-Batch
1
END Batch End
NCNT Batch Stopped
RSET Reset
EMST Emergency Shutdown
EEMS Emergency Shutdown Completed
RSTR Restart

1.22.1 Input Signal Conversion of Weight-Totalizing Batch

Set Block (BSETU-3)
Input Signal Conversion
The input signal conversion specific to the Weight-Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSETU-3) in-
cludes three types of methods: Weight Measurement Conversion, SUM Conversion and
SUM Conversion.
n Input Signal Conversion of Weight-Totalizing Batch Set Block

(BSETU-3)
Shown below is the block chart for the input signal conversion of the Weight-Totalizing Batch
Set Block (BSETU-3).
Weight SUM conversion

IN measurement Measurement in the
CAL conversion CAL incremental direction SUM
SUM = conversion
IN2 Digital
SUM0= SUM0 SUM0 - (zero point) SUM SUM PV
filter
volume unit calculation
IN3 conversion factor Measurement in the
decremental direction
x input data SUM = SUM1
IN4 (zero point) - SUM0
SUM0: absolute integrator value SUM: integrator value SUM1: cumulative integrator value
Figure 1.22.1-1 Block Chart for Input Signal Conversion of Weight-Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSE-
TU-3)
As shown in above figure, the combination of input signal conversion includes the following
three types:
Weight Measurement Conversion
SUM Conversion
SUM Conversion
n Weight-Totalizing Conversion
Weight-Totalizing Conversion refers to the processing in which the weight input data read
from a weighing machine are converted into the data in the same unit as the integrator value
(SUM) to obtain the absolute integrator value (SUM0).
The following is the computational expression for the absolute integrator value (SUM0):
SUM0 = quantity unit scale factor input data
l Quantity Unit Scale Factor

The quantity unit scale factor is the factor used to convert the input data into the data in the
same unit as integrator value (SUM). For example, if the unit of input data is g and that of
integrator value (SUM) is kg, the quantity unit scale factor is 0.001.
The setup for quantity unit scale factor can be executed with the Function Block Detail Build-
er.
Quantity unit scale factor: Within the range between 0.001 to 100000
The default setting is 1.
In the weight measurement conversion, the input data differs by the type of weight signal.

If the weight signal is an analog signal, the input data is the 0 to 100 % data read from the
connection destination.
If the weight signal is data read from the communication input, the input data is the data
after communication input conversion.
If the weight signal is a digital signal, the input data can be obtained as follows:
When the ready bit is Ready to Read, the digital data and its sign bit are read for each
scan period and converted into the same format (double-precision floating-point) as the
absolute integrator value (SUM0) to obtain the input data.
If the ready bit is Not Ready to Read, the data setting for absolute integrator value
(SUM0) is bypassed while the previous value is latched.
SEE
ALSO For more information about communication input conversion of the weight-totalizing signals, refer to:
Communication Input Conversion in 3.1.1, Input Signal Conversions Common to Regulatory Control
Blocks and Calculation Blocks in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
l Code Conversion
Code conversion is a function that converts the weight signal digital data read from IN termi-
nal 2 to binary code data. The weight signal digital data that can be read by the BSETU-3
block includes binary codes and binary coded decimal (BCD) codes. Specify No when the
weight signal is a binary code and BCD in the case of BCD code using the Function Block
Detail Builder, together with the number of code contacts.
Number of Code Contacts
Set by the unit of one bit within the range between 1 to 32 bits.
The default setting is 16 bits.
Code Conversion
Set BCD if the input signal is a binary-coded decimal code (BCD) or No if it is a binary.
The default setting is No conversion.
l Weight-Totalizing Conversion Bypass

Under the following circumstances, the weight-totalizing conversion is bypassed.
The input signal is digital type and the ready bit is in the status of Not Ready to Read.
The data status of the absolute integrator value (SUM0) is not good (BAD or IOP).
When the weight-totalizing conversion is bypassed, the absolute integrator value (SUM0) is
not to be updated, the previous good value is kept.
n SUM Conversion
Input Change Protrusion Bypass
SUM conversion refers to the processing in which the integrator value (SUM) is obtained by
totalizing the increment or decrement of the absolute integrator value (SUM0) from the batch
start.
The following is the totalization formula for measurement in the incremental or decremental
direction:
Measurement in the incremental direction: SUM=SUM0-zero point
Measurement in the decremental direction: SUM=zero point-SUM0
The zero point refers to the absolute integrator value (SUM0) when the control step is 10 (ini-
tialization processing at batch start).

If the input change exceeds the input velocity limit setting value, it is considered as an abnor-
mal input signal so that the integrator value data setting is not executed and the previous val-
ue is held. The data status, however, is not invalid in this case. The input velocity alarm by-
pass setting is a value indicated by the process variable change in one scan period. The ba-
sic scan period is 1 scan per 1 second.
The weight measurement direction specification, input velocity alarm bypass specification,
and the setting value for input velocity limit can be defined on the Function Block Detail Build-
er.
Weighing Direction
Select Increase or Decrease.
The default setting is Increase.
Input Velocity Alarm Bypass
Select Yes or No.
The default setting is No.
Setting value
Set the value between 0 and 1000 in the same unit as SUM.
The cumulative integrator value (SUM1) is the accumulation of integrator values at the end of
batch. The cumulative integrator value (SUM1) is obtained at the end of each batch as fol-
lows:
SUM1=SUM1 (cumulative integrator value kept at the end of the previous batch) +SUM
Under the following circumstances, the SUM conversion is bypassed.
When the SUM conversion is bypassed, the integrator value (SUM) is not to be updated, the
previous good value is kept.
n SUM Conversion
Flow Time Unit
SUM conversion refers to the function in which the integrator value variation in the specified
time unit is passed to the digital filter. The value variation after digital filter processing is the
flow rate (PV). The following is the computational expression for the SUM.
(PV time unit)
SUM = (process variable change of SUM in one scan period)
(scan period)
The PV time unit and scan period in the above formula are in the unit of second.
The flow measurement time unit can be defined on the Function Block Detail Builder.
Flow Time Unit: Select Second, Minute, Hour or Day.
The default setting is Second.
e.g. Select Hour for ton/h and Minute for kg/min.
Under the following circumstances, the input signal processing is bypassed.
In these cases, the flow rate value (PV) is not to be updated, the previous good value is kept.

1.22.2 Alarm Processing of Weight-Totalizing Batch Set

Block (BSETU-3)
This section describes the flowrate alarm check, which is one of the alarm checks performed
by the BSETU-3 block and is specific to this function block.
n Flowrate Alarm Check

Flow Check Mask Interval, Flow Check Time Interval, Input Low-Low Limit Alarm, PV High/Low Limit
Alarm
Low-low limit and high and low-limit checks are made upon expiration of a specified period of
time, as shown in Figure below. The specified period of time is called the flowrate check
masking interval. The checks are made by comparing the SUM change (SUM) for the flow-
rate check time interval with an alarm setpoint.
Specify the flowrate check masking interval and the flowrate check time interval with the
Flowrate check masking interval
0 to 10000
10 is assumed by default.
Flowrate check time interval
0 to 10000
1 is assumed by default.
The flowrate alarm check processing timing of BSETU-3 block is shown below.

MV
MH
PRE
ML
Block
status
ZONE 0 1 2 3 8 9 2 3 4 5 7
LO t1 t1
HI/LL t1 t1
t2
: Alarm check period LO : Low-limit alarm

t1 : Flowrate check masking interval HI : High-limit alarm
t2 : Flowrate check time interval LL : Low-low limit alarm
: Check timing
Figure 1.22.2-1 Flowrate Check Processing Timing
The flowrate alarm check in the BSETU-3 block consists of the low-low limit check and the
high-low limit check.
l Low-Low Limit Check

A low-low limit check (LL) is generated if the value of SUM in the flow check masking inter-
val converted to a flow measurement falls below the low-low limit alarm setpoint (LL). This
check is operable in control steps 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5.
SUM x (PV time unit)
< LL LL alarm
(Flowrate check time interval) x (Scan period)
l Low-Limit Check
A low-limit alarm (LO) is generated if the value of SUM in the flow check masking interval
converted to a flow measurement falls below the low-limit alarm setpoint (PL). This check is
operable only in control step 3.
< PL LO alarm

l High-Limit Check
A high-limit alarm (HI) is generated if the value of SUM in the flow check masking interval
converted to a flow measurement exceeds the high-limit alarm setpoint (PH). This check is
operable in control steps 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5.
> PH HI alarm
n Alarm Display Priority Specific to Weight-Totalizing Batch Set Block

(BSETU-3)
The following is the order for the alarm display priority specific to the BSETU-3 block:
OOP>IOP>IOP-> LL>HI>LO>LEAK>BDV+>BDV->BEND>BPRE>CNF
When there are absolutely no alarms generated, the alarm status is NR.
Table 1.22.2-1 Alarm Check for the Control Steps (ZONE) of the Weight-Totalizing Batch Set Block
ZONE(*1)
Alarm
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
IOP x x x x x x x x x x x x
IOP- x x x x x x x x x x x x
OOP x x x x x x x x x x x x
CNF x x x x x x x x x x x x
LL - x x x x x - - - - - -
HI - x x x x x - - - - - -
LO - - - x - - - - - - - -
BDV + - - - - - - - - - - -
BDV- - - - - - - - - - - -
LEAK x - - - - - - - - - - -
BPRE x x x x x x x x x x x
BEND x x x x x x x x x x x
*1: x :Alarm check is executed for the ZONE.
:Alarm check is executed only once when ZONE=7 changes to ZONE=0.
-:Alarm check is not executed for the ZONE.
The alarm is set to normal state (NR).
:Alarm check is not executed and the status prior to ZONE=0 is retained.
SEE
ALSO For more information about the operation of each control step in the BSETU-3 block, refer to:
nBatch Operation (Analog Output) on page 1-236

<1.23 Velocity Limiter Block (VELLIM)> 1-287
1.23 Velocity Limiter Block (VELLIM)

The Velocity Limiter Block (VELLIM) outputs a change per unit time by limiting it within the ve-
locity limits. The Velocity Limiter Block may be applied to the control process that the abrupt
change need to be avoided.
n Velocity Limiter Block (VELLIM)

Connection
The Velocity Limiter Block (VELLIM) performs control computation processing to the setpoint
signals from other function blocks or setpoint values set by the operator, and outputs a
change per unit time by limiting it within the velocity limits. The velocity limiting processing is
executed in the cascade (CAS) or automatic (AUT) mode.
The Velocity Limiter Block (VELLIM) reads the abruptly changing manipulated output value
(MV) of other function blocks as a cascade setpoint signal, and outputs its change per scan
period as a manipulated output value (MV) by limiting it within the velocity limits. In the auto-
matic (AUT) mode, the block outputs a change per scan period in the setpoint value (SV) re-
ceived from outside, such as operation and monitoring functions, as a manipulated output val-
ue (MV) by limiting it within the velocity limits. Separate velocity limits may be set for upward
and downward directions.
The figure below shows the function block diagram of Velocity Limiter Block (VELLIM):
SET INT
CAS
CSV
AUT
SV
MAN
RSV
RCAS
MAN
Velocity limiting AUT/CAS Output

BPSW MV OUT
computation processing
ROUT
(MV, MV) RMV
SUB
Figure 1.23-1 Function Block Diagram of Velocity Limiter Block (VELLIM)
nals of the Velocity Limiter Block (VELLIM):
Table 1.23-1 Connection Methods and Connected Destinations of I/O Terminals of Velocity Limiter
Block (VELLIM):
Process I/O
Setting in-
SET x x
put
Manipu-
OUT x x x x
lated output
Auxiliary
SUB x x x
output
Interlock
INT x x x x
SW input

n Function of Velocity Limiter Block (VELLIM)

The VELLIM block performs control computation processing, output processing, and alarm
processing.
The only processing timing available for the VELLIM block is a periodic startup. Selections
SEE
ALSO For more information about the types of output processing and alarm processing possible for the VELLIM
block, refer to:
l Control Computation Processing of Velocity Limiter Block (VELLIM)

The table below shows the control computation processing functions of the Velocity Limiter
Block (VELLIM):
Table 1.23-2 Control Computation Processing Functions of Velocity Limiter Block (VELLIM)
Performs velocity limiting to the setpoint value (SV) and ob-
Velocity limiting computation
tains a manipulated output value (MV).
control period to an actual manipulated output value (MV). The
control output actions available with this function block are of
positional type only.
Limits the setpoint value (SV) within the setpoint high/low lim-
its (SVH, SVL).
Switches the manipulated output value (MV) without causing it
to change abruptly when the block mode has been changed or
Bumpless switching
when the manipulated output value (MV) has been switched in
a downstream block in cascade.
Performs range conversion to the manipulated output value
(MV) based on the setpoint value range, and obtains a new
Bumpless switching Output pushback
setpoint value. This prevents the manipulated output value
from changing abruptly.
Changes the block mode to IMAN to temporarily suspend the
Initialization manual control action. This action takes place when the initialization
manual condition becomes satisfied.

operating in the CAS or PRD mode, so that the control action
AUT fallback is continued using values set by the operator. This action
takes place when the AUT fallback condition becomes satis-
fied.
computer backup mode when an error has been detected at a
Computer failure supervisory computer while the function block is operating in
the RCAS or ROUT mode. This action takes place when the
computer failure condition becomes satisfied.
Stops the control action of function blocks currently operating
Block mode change interlock automatically, while disabling the stopped function blocks from
changing to the automatic operating mode.
l Alarm Processing Specific to Velocity Limiter Block (VELLIM)

The deviation alarm check, which is one of the alarm checks performed by the VELLIM
block, is specific to this function block.
n Velocity Limiting Computation

This function executes velocity limiting computation to the setpoint value when the block
mode is automatic (AUT), cascade (CAS) or remote cascade (RCAS), and uses the computed
result as a manipulated output value (MV).
The velocity limiting computation action varies depending upon whether the rate of SV
change is below or on/over the velocity limits.
The figure below shows an action example of velocity limiting computation:
SV Converted upward velocity limit value (Dmp)

SV
MV
Converted downward velocity limit value (Dmm)

MV
Scan period Scan period Time
Figure 1.23-2 Action Example of Velocity Limiting Computation

SV Range
Use the Function Block Detail Builder to set the setpoint value (SV) range:
SV Range High Limit Value
digit each.
SV Range Low Limit Value
digit each.
The default is 0.0.

l When the Rate of Setpoint Value Change Is BELOW the Velocity Limits
If the rate of SV change is below the velocity limits, the SV value receives velocity limiting pro-
cessing and is converted to an MV-range value to be used as an MV.
The computational expression of this velocity limiting computation is shown below:
MSH-MSL
MVc= (SV-SSL)+MSL
SSH-SSL
MVn = MVc
MVc : Manipulated output computed value

MVn : Manipulated output current value
l When the Rate of Setpoint Value Change Is ON or OVER the Velocity Limits
If the rate of SV change is on or over the velocity limits, the SV value receives velocity limiting
processing and is converted to an MV-range value to be used as a manipulated output value.
The computational expressions of this velocity limiting computation are shown below:
MVn = MVn-1 + Dmp (When MVDmp)
MVn = MVn-1 - Dmm (When MV-Dmm)
MV = MVc - MVn-1
Dmp
A per-scan rate-of-change value in the MV range, converted from the upward velocity lim-
it value (DMVP).
Dmm
A per-scan rate-of-change value in the MV range, converted from the downward velocity
limit value (DMVM).
l Set Parameters of Velocity Limiting Computation

The parameters of velocity limiting computation:
When 1 is set for the velocity limiting bypass switch (BPSW), the velocity limiting bypass func-
tion is enabled. If 0 is set for the BPSW, the velocity limiting bypass function is disabled.
Upward velocity limit value (DMVP)
Set engineering unit data between 0 and the SV scale span range limit.
Downward velocity limit value (DMVM)
Set engineering unit data between 0 and the SV scale span range limit.
Velocity limiting time unit (TU)
Select 0 (1 second) or 1 (1 minute).
Bypass switch (BPSW)
Select 0 (limited) or 1 (not limited).
The default is 0.


The control output action of Velocity limiter block is positional type. The result of velocity lim-
iting computation is output as the current manipulated output value (MV).

setpoint high limit (SVH) and setpoint low limit (SVL), and recognizes setpoint values (SV)
within this range as a valid one.
SEE

RSV CSV
AUT/MAN
RCAS CAS
SV
Setpoint value
Control
computation
Figure 1.23-3 Relationship Among Setpoint Values (SV, CSV and RSV)
function block.




Output Pushback
The bumpless switching function switches the function block mode or switches the cascade
connected downstream blocks manipulated output value (MV) without causing its own manip-
ulated output value (MV) to change abruptly (i.e., bumpless switch).
status.
The type of bumpless switching performed by the Velocity Limiter Block (VELLIM) is output
pushback.
In the manual (MAN) or initialization manual (IMAN) mode, the output pushback function sets
as a setpoint value (SV), a SV-range value converted from the manipulated output value
(MV). Also, when the block mode is not remote output (ROUT) or off-service (O/S), the re-
mote manipulated output value (RMV) is caused to track the manipulated output value (MV).
The figure below shows the action of output pushback:
Output pushback
CAS
CSV
AUT
SV
MAN
RSV
RCAS
MAN
Velocity AUT/CAS Output

BPSW MV OUT
limiting processing
ROUT
RMV
Figure 1.23-4 Output Pushback
Use the Function Block Detail Builder to set the output pushback.
Output pushback: Select Yes or No.
The default is Yes.
Using the output pushback function enables a balanceless bumpless switching of block
modes from manual (MAN) to automatic (AUT).
The following figure shows an example of bumpless cascade closing in a control loop:

PV MV
PID MAN
Output pushback
Output tracking
SV
MV
CAS
VELLIM AUT/MAN
Output tracking
SV
PV MV
PID
Figure 1.23-5 Output Pushback and Output Tracking When Cascade Is Open
1. When cascade connection is open, the output tracking function causes the manipulated
output value (MV) to track data of the output destination.
2. When cascade connection is closed, the output pushback function performs range con-
version to the manipulated output value (MV) and sets the result as the setpoint value
(SV).
3. The output value tracking function of the upstream block causes the output value of the
upstream function block to track the setpoint value (SV).
In this control loop, when cascade is closed the input value from the upstream function block
will agree with the data value at the output destination of the Velocity limiter block. Therefore,
output will not bump when cascade connection is closed.

changed to manual (MAN), the initialization manual (IMAN) mode will override the manual
(MAN) mode. In other words, any operation to change to the manual (MAN) mode becomes
invalid.
The block returns to the original mode as soon as the initialization manual condition vanishes.
However, if try to change block mode in the initialization manual (IMAN) mode, the block only


es:
AUT
IMAN (AUT)
AUT
(SW-33, SW-91) and cascade connection is switched is off (i.e., the cascade connection
is open).
n MAN Fallback


The following example shows when the MAN fallback condition is established and vanished:
AUTMAN

n AUT Fallback


cade (CAS) to automatic (AUT) so that control can be continued using values set by the oper-
ator. When this condition is established, it indicates that abnormality has been detected in the
cascade setpoint value for some reason.
es:
CASAUT
Use the Function Block Detail Builder to set whether or not to use the AUT fallback.
The default is No.
The AUT fallback condition is established when the AUT fallback is set as Yes via the Func-
tion Block Detail Builder and the data status of the cascade setpoint value (CSV) has become
invalid (BAD) or communication error (NCOM).
n Computer Fail
backup mode.

sory system computer via control bus communication.
The following actions take place while the computer fail condition exists, the block mode
change command from MAN, AUT or CAS to RCAS or ROUT is sent:
1. When a block mode change command from MAN, AUT or PRD to RCAS or ROUT is sent
while the computer fails (BSW=ON), the function block does not switch to the computer
backup mode directly but switches to the transient state mode first.
the execution of the block mode change command (MAN, AUT, CAS) and a remote mode
(RCAS, ROUT).

ROUT).

A backup switch (BSW) is provided in function blocks to define the remote cascade (RCAS) or
RCAS
Computer fails
AUT (RCAS)
Computer recovers
RCAS
AUT
ROUT command

block.
comes down.
The default is MAN.



Any block mode change command to obtain an automatic operation state (AUT, CAS,
RCAS or ROUT mode) becomes invalid.

n Deviation Alarm Check

Deviation Alarm
The deviation alarm check in the VELLIM block is applicable to the deviation (DV) between
the manipulated output value (MV) converted to a value in the setpoint (SV) range and the
setpoint value (SV).
When the absolute value of the deviation (DV) exceeds the absolute value of the deviation
alarm setpoint (DL), either a positive direction deviation alarm (DV+) or a negative direction
deviation alarm (DV-) is generated. When an alarm has occurred, if the deviation (DV) abso-
lute value drops lower than the absolute value of the deviation alarm setpoint (DL) minus the
hysteresis value (HYS), the alarm is returned to normal state.
There is no deviation check filter function in the VELLIM block deviation alarm check.
The deviation (DV) that is subject to the deviation alarm check of the VELLIM block is ex-
pressed in the following format.
DV=MVs-SV
SSHSSL
MVS = (MVMSL)+SSL
MSHMSL
MVs : Manipulated output value (MV) after conversion to the SV range

When the deviation (DV) absolute value exceeds the absolute value of the deviation alarm
setpoint (DL) and the deviation is for the positive direction, a positive direction deviation alarm
(DV+) occurs. If the deviation is for the minus direction, a negative direction deviation alarm
(DV-) occurs. When an alarm has occurred, if the deviation (DV) absolute value drops lower
than the absolute value of the deviation alarm setpoint (DL) minus the hysteresis value (HYS),
there is a recovery from the alarm.
Further, when the same value as for the SV scale span (positive value) is set in the deviation
alarm setpoint (DL), neither a positive direction nor negative direction deviation alarm occurs
regardless of the deviation alarm check.

DV
+DL
HYS
Conditions causing an alarm
DV>+DL
DV<DL
Time
Conditions causing recovery from alarm
0
DV+DLHYS
DVDL+HYS
HYS
DL
DV+
DV-
Figure 1.23-6 Actions of Deviation Alarm Check in the Velocity Limiter Block (VELLIM)
l Deviation Alarm Check Settings

The type of deviation alarm check, deviation alarm setpoint (DL), and alarm hysteresis value
can be set.
The type of deviation alarm check is defined by the deviation alarm check item in the Func-
tion Block Detail Builder. The types of deviation alarm checks are given below. The default is
detection of both directions.
Monitors the deviation of both the positive and negative directions
Monitors the deviation of either the positive or negative direction only
No alarm
No detection is performed
When single direction is selected for the deviation alarm check type, only the deviation in the
positive direction is monitored when the deviation alarm setpoint (DL) has a plus sign, and on-
ly the deviation in the negative direction is monitored when the deviation alarm setpoint has a
minus sign.
Setting of the deviation alarm check type can be performed in the sequence control block or
CALCU, CALCU-C blocks in addition to the Function Block Detail Builder.
The deviation alarm setpoint (DL) is set by the operation and monitoring function.
Deviation alarm setpoint (DL): Engineering unit data within the SV scale span range
Default is SV scale span.
When single direction is selected for the deviation alarm check type, add the sign (+ or -) for
the direction to be detected to the deviation alarm setpoint (DL) engineering unit data.
Setting for the alarm hysteresis value is done by the Function Block Detail Builder for each
regulatory control block.
Hysteresis: Engineering unit data within the range of 0 to SV scale span, or percent-
age data for the SV scale span
The default is 1.0 %.

n Data Items - VELLIM

Table 1.23-3 Data Items of Velocity Limiter Block (VELLIM)
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
AFLS Alarm flashing status ----- -----
AF ----- -----
tion
AOFS ----- -----
tion
SV Setpoint value (*3) SV engineering unit value -----
CSV Cascade setpoint value x -----
neering unit as SV
RSV Remote setpoint value (*4) -----
neering unit as SV
DV Deviation -----
neering unit as SV
MV Manipulated output value (*5) MV engineering unit value -----
RMV (*6) -----
DL Deviaton alarm setpoint x (SSH - SSL) SSH-SSL
MH x MSL to MSH MSH
limit setpoint
ML x MSL to MSH MSL
limit setpoint
SVH Setpoint high limit x SSL to SSH SSH
SVL Setpoint low limit x SSL to SSH SSL
DMVP Upward velocity limit value x 0 to (SSH - SSL) SSH-SSL
Downward velocity limit val-
DMVM x 0 to (SSH - SSL) SSH-SSL
ue
value
TU Velocity limit timer unit x 0 (second) or 1 (minute) 0
BPSW Velocity limit bypass switch x 0, 1 0

SEE
ALSO For more information about valid block modes of the VELLIM block, refer to:

<1.24 Signal Selector Blocks (SS-H/M/L)> 1-301
1.24 Signal Selector Blocks (SS-H/M/L)

The Signal Selector Blocks (SS-H/M/L) compares the value of the signals from multiple in-
puts, then selects 1 signal (PV) as output. This block may be applied to the signal selection
loop.
n Signal Selector Blocks (SS-H/M/L)

Connection, Constant Input
The Signal Selector Blocks (SS-H/M/L) compare the signals from 2-position input or 3-position
input, then selects the maximum, minimum or medium value signal (PV) as output. The selec-
tion may be operated manually.
The figure below shows the function block diagram of Signal Selector Blocks (SS-H/M/L):
0
1
2
IN1 RV1 PV OUT
3
Automatic 4
IN2 RV2 signal
selection
SW SEL
IN3 RV3
Selected
number
Figure 1.24-1 Function Block Diagram of Signal Selector Blocks (SS-H/M/L)
The Signal Selector Blocks (SS-H/M/L) are classified into three types according to the auto-
matic selection rule used:
Table 1.24-1 Types of Signal Selector Blocks (SS-H/M/L)

Code Automatic selection rule
SS-H Selects the maximum value (high selector)
SS-M Selects the medium value
SS-L Selects the minimum value (low selector)
nals of the Signal Selector Blocks (SS-H/M/L):
Table 1.24-2 Connection Methods and Connected destinations of the I/O Terminals of Signal Selector
Blocks (SS-H/M/L)
Process I/O
Input signal
IN1 x x x
1
Input signal
IN2 x x x
2
Input signal
IN3 x x x
3
Manipu-
OUT x x x
lated output

The methods used by the Signal Selector Blocks (SS-H/M/L) to obtain input signals (RV1 to
RV3) include two connection input types and one constant input type.
The terminal connection input methods include:
Data reference to other function block via data reference connection from the input con-
nection terminals.
Data setting from other function block via terminal connection to the input connection ter-
minals.
The constant input method does not involve connection to the input connection terminals. In-
stead, the signal input value (RVn) set from operation and monitoring functions is used as a
constant.
Use the Function Block Detail Builder to define whether connection input or constant input
is used for each input signal. The input signal for which connection input is specified but no
connection has been made, will not be regarded as signal selection targets of the Signal se-
lector blocks.
Input Signal (IN1 to IN3): Select Constant Input or Connection Input.
The default is Connection Input.
n Functions of Signal Selector Blocks (SS-H/M/L)

The SS-H/M/L blocks perform control computation processing, output processing, and alarm
processing.
The only processing timing available for the SS-H/M/L blocks is a periodic startup. Selec-
tions available for the scan period used to execute a periodic startup include the basic scan
period, the medium-speed scan period (*1), and the high-speed scan period.
SEE
ALSO For more information about the types of output processing and alarm processing possible for the SS-H/M/L
blocks, refer to:
l Control Computation Processing of Signal Selector Blocks (SS-H/M/L)

The table below shows the control computation processing functions of the Signal selector
blocks (SS-H/M/L):
Table 1.24-3 Control Computation Processing Functions of Signal Selector Blocks (SS-H/M/L)
Compares the sizes of three input signal values
Signal selection (RV1, RV2, RV3) and selects the one that satisfies
the condition set by the signal selection switch.
Causes the non-selected input signal values to agree
PV pushback
with the selected signal value (PV).

n Signal Selection
The signal selection function selects one signal from multiple input signals. The signal to be
selected varies depending upon the type of the Signal Selector Blocks (SS-H/M/L) and value
of the signal selection switch (SW).
l Function of the Signal Selection Switch (SW)

The table below shows the signal selection switch positions and corresponding actions:
Table 1.24-4 Signal Selection Switch Positions and Corresponding Actions

Switch position (SW) Action
0 Holds the selected signal value (PV).
1 Selects input signal 1
Selects the result of signal-size comparison (auto-
4
matic selection).
When the signal selection switch (SW) is set to automatic selection (SW=4)
The values of input signals (RV1 to RV3) are compared. The SS-H, SS-L and SS-M
blocks select the maximum, minimum or medium value, respectively as a selected signal
value (PV).
When the SW is set to 1 to 3
The input signal (RV [SV]) that corresponds to each SW value is selected unconditionally.
When the SW is set to 0
Signal selection is not performed, but the previously selected signal value (PV) is held
and output.
The automatic selection rule to be used is determined by the code of the function block.
If automatic selection is performed and one of the input signals has an invalid (BAD) data sta-
tus, the maximum or minimum value will be selected from the data excluding the invalid sig-
nal. If two input signals are invalid (BAD), the remaining non-invalid input signal (RVn) is se-
lected.
The table below shows invalid input signals and corresponding actions when selecting the
medium value:
Table 1.24-5 Invalid Input Signals and Corresponding Actions When Selecting the Medium Value
Input signal with BAD data status Action
RV1 RV2 is selected.
Any two signals RVn that is not BAD is selected.
The previously selected value is stored and the SW
All signals BAD
is set to 0.
The rules of determining the data status of the selected signal value (PV) are shown below:
When SW=0
The status of the previous value is stored.
When SW=1 to 3

The status of the selected signal value (PV) is determined based on the status of the cur-
rently selected input signal.
When SW=4
rently selected input signal. If all input signals have invalid (BAD) data status, the data
status of the previous value is stored.
l Display of Selected Number (SEL)

Whether it is performed automatically or manually, the signal selection action displays the
number of the currently selected input signal (1, 2 or 3) as a selected number (SEL). If the
signal selection switch position is 0 and no signal is selected, SEL becomes 0.
l Change in Selected Signal Value (PV)

When the signal selection switch position is 0, the selected signal value (PV) can be set from
operation and monitoring functions or other function block.
l Set Parameters of Signal Selection

The parameters of signal selection:
If the signal selection switch position is set above the switch high limit setpoint (SWH) or be-
low the switch low limit setpoint (SWL) via operation from operation and monitoring functions,
an acknowledgment dialog box appears to prompt for the operators confirmation. When con-
firms, the switch position can be set outside the high/low limit setpoint range.
Switch high limit setpoint (SWH)
Select 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4.
The default is 4.
Switch low limit setpoint (SWL)
Select 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4.
The default is 0.
n PV Pushback
The PV pushback function causes the non-selected input signal values (RV1 to RV3) to agree
with the selected signal value (PV).
The PV pushback action targets the input signal values that are obtained via terminal connec-
tion to the input terminals. The PV pushback action is not performed to the input signal values
which are received via data reference or for which constant input is specified.
The figure below shows the action of PV pushback:
0
1
2
IN1 RV1 PV OUT
3
Automatic 4
IN2 RV2 signal
selection
SW SEL
IN3 RV3
Selected
number
PV pushback
Figure 1.24-2 PV Pushback

An abrupt change in the selected signal value (PV) upon switching of the selection switch,
may have a negative impact on the process. Preventing this abrupt change in the selected
signal value (PV) is called, bumpless switching.
Combining the PV pushback function with the output tracking function of the input connected
destination function block enables the signal selection switch position to be changed bump-
lessly. The following example shows a control loop where the signal selection switch position
is changed bumplessly.
Output tracking
PV MV PV pushback
RATIO
PV
SS-H
Figure 1.24-3 PV Pushback and Output Tracking
1. The PV pushback function sets the selected signal value (PV) to the non-selected input
signals (RV1 to RV3).
2. The output value tracking functions of the upstream function blocks connected to the IN1
to IN3 terminals cause the output values of the upstream function blocks to track the val-
ues of input signals (RV1 to RV3).
n Data Items - SS-H/M/L

The table below shows the Data Items of Signal Selector Blocks (SS-H/M/L):
Table 1.24-6 Data Items of Signal Selector Blocks (SS-H/M/L)

Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
MODE Block mode x ----- O/S(AUT)
AF ----- 0
tion
AOFS ----- 0
tion
PV Selected signal value (*3) PV engineering unit value SL
SW Signal selection switch x 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 0
SEL Selected number 0, 1, 2, 3 0
RV1 Input signal value 1 (*4) SL
neering unit as PV
neering unit as PV
neering unit as PV
SWH Switch high limit setpoint x 0 to 4 4
SWL Switch low limit setpoint x 0 to 4 0

Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
neering unit as PV
neering unit as PV
*4: Entry is permitted if Constant input is specified
SEE
ALSO For more information about valid block modes of the SS-H/M/L blocks, refer to:

<1.25 Auto-Selector Blocks (AS-H/M/L)> 1-307
1.25 Auto-Selector Blocks (AS-H/M/L)

The Auto-Selector Blocks (AS-H/M/L) compare signals from 2-position or 3-position input from
2 or 3 controller blocks and automatically select one signal as manipulated output value (MV).
Auto-selector blocks may be applied to the override control loops for signal selection.
n Auto-Selector Blocks (AS-H/M/L)

Connection, Constant Input
The Signal Selector Blocks (SS-H/M/L) compare the signals from 2-position input or 3-position
input, then selects the maximum, minimum or medium value signal (PV) as output. The selec-
tion may be operated manually.
The figure below shows the function block diagram of Signal Selector Blocks (SS-H/M/L):
An auto-selector control system can be configured by combining an Auto-Selector Blocks
(AS-H/M/L) and 2 to 3 controller blocks. In other words, final control elements of a single loop
can be controlled in such a way that 2 to 3 variables are monitored and maintained on the
safe side of their presetpoint values using a signal selector unit; whereas, in a normal case
the final elements are controlled based on a single variable.
The figure below shows a function block diagram of the Auto-Selector Blocks (AS-H/M/L):
INT
0
1
2 AUT Output
IN1 RV1 PV MV OUT
processing
3
Automatic 4 MAN
IN2 RV2 signal
selection
SW SEL
IN3 RV3
Selected
number
Figure 1.25-1 Function Block Diagram of Auto-Selector Blocks (AS-H/M/L)
The Auto-Selector Blocks (AS-H/M/L) are classified into three types according to the automat-
ic selection rule used:
Table 1.25-1 Types of Auto-Selector Blocks (AS-H/M/L)

Code Automatic selection rule
AS-H Selects the maximum value (high selector)
AS-M Selects the medium value
AS-L Selects the minimum value (low selector)
nals of the Auto-Selector Blocks (AS-H/M/L):
Table 1.25-2 Connection Methods and Connected destinations of the I/O Terminals of Auto-Selector
Blocks (AS-H/M/L)
Process I/O
Input signal
IN1 x x x
1

Process I/O
Input sig-
IN2 x x x
nal2
Input signal
IN3 x x x
3
Manipu-
OUT x x x x
lated output
Interlock
INT x x x x
SW input
: Connection allowed only when connecting to a switch block (SW-33, SW-91) or an inter-station data link block (ADL).
The methods used by the Auto-Selector Blocks (AS-H/M/L) to obtain input signals 1 to 3 (RV1
to RV3) include two connection input types and one constant input type.
The connection input methods include the following:
Data reference to other function block via data reference connection from the input con-
nection terminals
Data setting from other function block via terminal connection to the input connection ter-
minals
The constant input method does not involve connection to the input connection terminals. In-
stead, the signal input value (RVn) set from operation and monitoring functions is used as a
constant.
Use the Function Block Detail Builder to define whether connection input or constant input
is used for each input signal. The input signal for which connection input is specified but no
connection has been made, will not be regarded as signal selection targets of the Auto-selec-
tor blocks.
Input Signal (IN1 to IN3): Select Constant Input or Connection Input.
The default is Connection Input.
IMPORTANT
When a controller block is terminal connected to the INx terminal of an Auto-selector blocks
(AS-H/M/L), be sure to specify positional type for the control output action of the controller
block.
n Functions of Auto-Selector Blocks (AS-H/M/L)

The AS-H/M/L blocks perform control computation processing, output processing, and alarm
processing.
The only processing timing available for the AS-H/M/L blocks is a periodic startup. Selec-
tions available for the scan period used to execute a periodic startup include the basic scan
period, the medium-speed scan period (*1), and the high-speed scan period.

SEE
ALSO For more information about the types of output processing and alarm processing possible for the AS-H/M/L
blocks, refer to:
For more information about the alarm processin, refer to:
l Control Computation Processing of Auto-Selector Blocks (AS-H/M/L)

The table below shows the control computation processing functions of the Auto-Selector
blocks (AS-H/M/L):
Table 1.25-3 Control Computation Processing Functions of Auto-Selector Blocks (AS-H/M/L)

Compares the sizes of three input signal values (RV1, RV2,
Signal selection RV3) and selects one input signal that satisfies the condition
set by the signal selection switch.
Performs range conversion to the selected signal value (PV) to
Automatic control output computation
obtain a manipulate output value (MV).
control period to an actual manipulated output value (MV). The
control output actions available with this function block are of
positional type only.
Bumpless switching
Causes the input signal values (RV1, RV2, RV3) to agree with
Bumpless switching Output pushback the manipulated output value (MV) to prevent the manipulated
output value (MV) from changing abruptly.
n Signal Selection
The signal selection function selects one signal from multiple input signals. The signal to be
selected varies depending upon the type of the Auto-Selector Blocks (AS-H/M/L) and value of
the signal selection switch (SW).
The Auto-Selector Blocks (AS-H/M/L) do not output the selected signal value (PV) if the block
mode is manual (MAN) or initialization manual (IMAN). However, as the signal selection func-
tion remains active, the selected number (SEL) and selected signal value (PV) are updated
constantly.
l Function of the Signal Selection Switch (SW)


0 Holds the selected signal value (PV).
Selects the result of signal-size comparison (auto-
4
matic selection).
When the signal selection switch (SW) is set to automatic selection (SW=4)
The values of input signals (RV1 to RV3) are compared. The SS-H, SS-L and SS-M
blocks select the maximum, minimum or medium values, respectively as the selected sig-
nal value (PV).
When the SW is set to 1 to 3
The input signal (RV [SV]) that corresponds to each SW value is selected unconditionally.
When the SW is set to 0
Signal selection is not performed, but the previously selected signal value (PV) is held
and output.
The automatic selection rule to be used is determined by the code of the function block.
If automatic selection is performed and one of the input signals has an invalid (BAD) data sta-
tus, the maximum or minimum value will be selected from the data excluding the invalid sig-
nal. If two input signals have invalid (BAD) data value, the remaining non-invalid input signal
(RVn) is selected.
The table below shows invalid input signals and corresponding actions when selecting the
medium value:
Table 1.25-5 Invalid Input Signals and Corresponding Actions When Selecting the Medium Value
Input signal with BAD data status Action
Any two signals RVn that is not BAD is selected.
The previously selected value is stored and the SW
All signals BAD
is set to 0.
The rules of determining the data status of the selected signal value (PV) are shown below:
When SW=0
The previous status is stored.
When SW=1 to 3
rently selected input signal.
When SW=4
rently selected input signal. If all input signals are invalid (BAD), the data status of the
previous value is stored.
l Display of Selected Number (SEL)

Whether it is performed automatically or manually, the signal selection action displays the
number of the currently selected input signal (1, 2 or 3) as a selected number (SEL). If the
signal selection switch position is 0 and no signal is selected, SEL becomes 0.

l Set Parameters of Signal Selection

The parameters of signal selection.
If the signal selection switch position is set above the switch high limit setpoint (SWH) or be-
low the switch low limit setpoint (SWL) from operation and monitoring functions, an acknowl-
edgment dialog box appears to prompt for the operators confirmation. When confirms, the
switch position can be set outside the high/low limit setpoint range.
Switch high limit setpoint (SWH)
Select 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4.
The default is 4.
Switch low limit setpoint (SWL)
Select 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4.
The default is 0.
n Automatic Control Output Computation

The automatic control output computation function determines the manipulated output value
(MV) by performing range conversion to the selected signal value (PV). This action takes
place in the automatic (AUT) mode. The computational expression of range conversion:
MV= MSH-MSL (PV-SL)+MSL

SH-SL


od to an actual manipulated output value (MV). The action that converts the manipulated out-
put change to an actual manipulated output value (MV) is called, control/calculation output
action.
The control action applied in the Auto-Selector Blocks (AS-H/M/L) are of positional type only.
The result of automatic control output computation is output as a manipulated output value
(MV).
lated output value of the downstream block in cascade loop without causing the manipulated
output value (MV) to change abruptly (i.e., bumpless change).
The action during bumpless switching varies in accordance with the control output action and
block mode status.
The type of bumpless switching performed by the Auto-Selector Blocks (AS-H/M/L) is output
pushback.
The output pushback function causes the input signal values (RV1 to RV3) to agree with the

INT
0
1
2 AUT Output
IN1 RV1 PV MV OUT
processing
3
Automatic 4 MAN
IN2 RV2 signal
selection
SW SEL
IN3 RV3
Selected
number
Figure 1.25-2 Output Pushback
In any block mode, the output pushback function of the Auto-Selector Blocks (AS-H/M/L) sets
as the input signal values (RV1 to RV3), the range-converted values based on MV.
SH-SL
RVn= (MV-MSL)+SL
MSH-MSL
Output pushback operates in coordination with the output tracking function of the output pro-
cessing targets, and causes the input signal values (RV1 to RV3) to agree with the values at
the output destination blocks cascade connected downstream.
By using the output pushback function in a cascade control loop built around an Auto-Selector
Blocks (AS-H/M/L), the cascade status can be switched without causing an output bump.
Output pushback is performed only to the input signal values received from the input termi-
nals used for cascade connection. Output pushback is not performed to the input signal val-
ues that are extracted via data reference or used as constants during constant input.
The following example shows a control loop where the signal selection switch position is
changed bumplessly.
Output tracking
PV MV PV pushback
PID
PV
SS-H
Figure 1.25-3 PV Pushback and Output Tracking
1. The output tracking function causes the selected signal value (PV) to track data at the
output destination.
2. The output pushback function sets the tracked data as input signals (RV1 to RV3).
3. The output value tracking functions of the upstream function blocks connected to the IN1
to IN3 terminals cause the output values of the upstream function blocks to track the val-
ues of input signals (RV1 to RV3).


(MAN) mode. Therefore, no actions in the manual (MAN) mode take place.

es:
AUT
IMAN (AUT)
AUT
When the data status at the connected destination of manipulated output value (MV) is
conditional (CND) (i.e., the cascade connection is open).
When the data status at the connected destination of manipulated output value (MV) is a
communication error (NCOM) or output failure (PTPF) (i.e., the cascade connection is
open).
When the connected destination of manipulated output value (MV) is a switch block
(SW-33, SW-91) and the cascade connection is switched off.
When the connected destination of manipulated output value (MV) is a process output
n MAN Fallback



AUTMAN


becomes invalid.

n Data Items - AS-H/M/L

Table 1.25-6 Data Items of Auto-Selector Blocks (AS-H/M/L)
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
AF ----- 0
tion

Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
AOFS ----- 0
tion
SW Signal selection switch x 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 0
SEL Selected number 0, 1, 2, 3 0
neering unit as PV
RV2 Input signal value 2 (*5) -----
neering unit as PV
RV3 Input signal value 3 (*5) -----
neering unit as PV
SWH Switch high limit setpoint x 0 to 4 4
SWL Switch low limit setpoint x 0 to 4 0
MH x MSL to MSH MSH
limit setpoint
ML x MSL to MSH MSL
limit setpoint
value
neering unit as PV
neering unit as PV
*5: Entry is permitted if Constant input is specified
SEE
ALSO For more information about valid block modes of the AS-H/M/L blocks, refer to:

<1.26 Dual-Redundant Signal Selector Block (SS-DUAL)> 1-316
1.26 Dual-Redundant Signal Selector Block

(SS-DUAL)
Dual-Redundant Signal Selector Block (SS-DUAL) may be applied in a redundant configura-
tion to automatically select one of the two input signals from the same process signal source
but received separately via two signal paths.
n Dual-Redundant Signal Selector Block (SS-DUAL)

Connection
The Dual-Redundant Signal Selector Block (SS-DUAL) automatically selects one of the two
input signals. The selected signal is output as process variable (PV).
With the Dual-Redundant Signal Selector Block (SS-DUAL), the redundant configuration be-
come possible. Similar to the dual-redundant transmitter configuration, the dual-redundant an-
alog I/O modules are provided in the process input and output configuration.
The figure below shows the function block diagram of Dual-Redundant Signal Selector Block
(SS-DUAL):
Deviation
check
1
IN1 RV1
Automatic
2 Input
signal PV OUT
selection processing
3
IN2 RV2
SW SEL
Selected
number
Figure 1.26-1 Function Block Diagram of Dual-Redundant Signal Selector Block (SS-DUAL)
nals of the Dual-Redundant Signal Selector Block (SS-DUAL):
Table 1.26-1 Connection Methods and Connected Destinations of I/O Terminals of Dual-Redundant
Signal Selector Block (SS-DUAL):
Process I/O
Input signal
IN1 x x x
1
Input signal
IN2 x x x
2
Manipu-
OUT x x x
lated output

n Function of Dual-Redundant Signal Selector Block (SS-DUAL)

The SS-DUAL block performs input processing, control computation processing, output pro-
The only processing timing available for the SS-DUAL block is a periodic startup. Selections
SEE
for the SS-DUAL block, refer to:
l Control Computation Processing of Dual-Redundant Signal Selector Block

(SS-DUAL)
The table below shows the control computation processing functions of the Dual-Redundant
Signal Selector Block (SS-DUAL):
Table 1.26-2 Control Computation Processings of Dual-Redundant Signal Selector Block (SS-DUAL)
Description
ing
Tests the data status of two input signal values (RV1, RV2) and selects
Signal selection
the one that satisfies the condition set by the signal selection switch.
Changes the data status of the selected signal (PV) to BAD when two in-
Selected signal error put signals have an invalid (BAD) data status or when a deviation alarm
is present.
l Alarm Processing Specific to Dual-Redundant Signal Selector Block (SS-

DUAL)
The SS-DUAL block performs a special operation triggered by the presence of a deviation
alarm in its alarm processing.
n Signal Selection
The signal selection function selects one of multiple input signals.
l Signal Selection Switch (SW)


1 Selects input signal 1.

2 Selects input signal 2.
Selects input signal 1 or 2, whichever is in normal
3
state.
If the signal selection switch is set to 3 (automatic selection), the data statuses of input sig-
nals RV1 and RV2 are tested, and the signal whose data status is other than invalid (BAD) is
selected as the selected signal value (PV). If both input signals are normal or abnormal, the
previously selected input signal remains selected. If the signal selection switch is set to 1 or
2, the specified input signal is selected unconditionally.
l Selected Number (SEL)

The currently selected input signal number (1 or 2) is stored as the selected number (SEL)
and displayed.
l Non-Selected Signal Value (SV)

The input signal value of the signal not selected is stored as the non-selected signal value
(SV) and displayed.
n Selected Signal Error

The selected signal error function changes the data status to invalid (BAD) when the selected
signal error conditions are satisfied.
Table 1.26-4 Selected Signal Error Conditions

Switch position (SW) Error condition
1 Input signal 1 is BAD.
2 Input signal 2 is BAD.
Both input signals 1 and 2 are BAD, or a deviation
3
alarm is present.
In a control loop where the selected signal value (PV) that received this selected signal error
processing is input as a process variable, the block mode changes to manual (MAN).
n Operations during Deviation Alarm

Deviation Alarm, SS-DUAL PV Update during Deviation Alarm
If the signal selection switch is set to 3, when the difference between the selected signal value
(PV) and non-selected signal value (SV) exceeds the deviation alarm settings value (DL), a
deviation alarm will be generated and the PV data status will become invalid (BAD). While the
deviation alarm is being generated, the PV data value immediately prior to the alarm genera-
tion is maintained. However, if SS-DUAL PV Update during Deviation Alarm is selected on
the property sheet of the FCS, the data value will be updated to the selected input value even
if the PV data status is BAD due to a deviation alarm.
The table below shows the difference in operations between when SS-DUAL PV Update dur-
ing Deviation Alarm is selected and when Maintain PV value is selected.
Table 1.26-5 Operations during Deviation Alarm Generation when SW=3

Item Maintain PV Value (Default) Update PV Value
PV data status BAD (Data value invalid) BAD (Data value invalid)
Maintains value immediately prior
PV data value Updates value
to deviation alarm generation
Digital filter No operation Operates

Item Maintain PV Value (Default) Update PV Value
Totalizer No operation No operation
High-limit, low-limit alarm
Performs check Performs check
High-high limit, low-low limit alarm
Velocity alarm Does not perform check Does not perform check
Output from OUT terminal Maintained value is output Updated value is output
Performs MAN fallback since the Performs MAN fallback since the
Operation of connected function
PV data status is BAD. The desti- PV data status is BAD. The desti-
block
nation data value is not updated. nation data value is not updated.
n Specifying Operation during Deviation Alarm

The operation during deviation alarm generation is specified for each FCS station using the
FCS Properties. The operation cannot be specified for individual SS-DUAL blocks. The speci-
fication can only be changed off-line.
Update PV Value during SS-DUAL Deviation Alarm Generation:
Select this specification by placing a check in the check box. By default, the PV value im-
mediately prior to the generation of a deviation alarm is maintained during the alarm gen-
eration (the check box is left blank)
n Data Items - SS-DUAL

Table 1.26-6 Data Items of Dual-Redundant Signal Selector Block (SS-DUAL)
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
MODE Block mode x ----- O/S(AUT)
AF ----- 0
tion
AOFS ----- 0
tion
SV Non-selected signal value SL
neering unit as PV
DV Deviation 0
neering unit as PV
RV1 Input signal value 1 SL
neering unit as PV
RV2 Input signal value 2 SL
neering unit as PV
SW Signal selection switch x 1, 2, 3 3
SEL Selected number 1, 2 1
HH x SL to SH SH
point
LL x SL to SH SL
point

Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
neering unit as PV
neering unit as PV
SEE
ALSO For more information about valid block modes of the SS-DUAL block, refer to:

<1.27 Cascade Signal Distributor Block (FOUT)> 1-321
1.27 Cascade Signal Distributor Block (FOUT)

The Cascade Signal Distributor Block (FOUT) distributes cascade setpoint signals input from
controller blocks to multiple down-stream controller blocks. This block may be applied in a
cascade control loop with multiple function blocks in parallel downstream connected.
n Cascade Signal Distributor Block (FOUT)

Connection
The Cascade Signal Distributor Block (FOUT) can distribute cascade signals to as many as 8
function blocks.
Using the Cascade Signal Distributor Block (FOUT) enables the creation of a cascade control
loop where multiple controller blocks are connected in parallel downstream. The system does
not support to simply link the downstream controller blocks in a chain connection.
The Cascade Signal Distributor Block transmits the cascade open or clamp status of the
downstream controller blocks to the upstream controller block.
The figure below shows the function block diagram of the Cascade Signal Distributor Block
(FOUT):
MV1 J01
MV2 J02
SET CSV SV Output
computation
MV8 J08
Figure 1.27-1 Function Block Diagram of Cascade Signal Distributor Block
The setpoint value (SV) of the Cascade Signal Distributor Block (FOUT) can be used for data
reference but not for data setting.
The figure below shows an application example of the Cascade Signal Distributor Block
(FOUT):
IN OUT
PV MV
PID
SET
SV MV1
J01
MV2
J02
FOUT
SET SET
IN SV OUT IN SV OUT
PV MV PV MV
PID PID
Figure 1.27-2 Application Example of Cascade Signal Distributor Block (FOUT)
Considering the range of each output destination, the cascade setpoint signals to be distrib-
uted undergo range matching. Assume that the SV range of the Cascade Signal Distributor
Block (FOUT) is 0 to 100 %, while the PV ranges of the two downstream controller blocks are
0 to 20.00 KG/H and 0 to 10.00 KG/H, respectively. If the manipulated output of the upstream
controller block is 50 %, the output values of the Cascade Signal Distributor Block (FOUT) be-
come 10.00 KG/H and 5.00 KG/H, respectively.

The function blocks that can be used upstream of the Cascade Signal Distributor Block are
limited to those that satisfy the following conditions:
A regulatory control block with a manipulated output value (MV), capable of forming cas-
cade connection
An analog calculation block capable of forming cascade connection
When Cascade Signal Distributor Block (FOUT) are connected in cascade in multiple levels,
the maximum number of Cascade Signal Distributor Block (FOUT) that can be connected se-
rially between the top block and bottom block is 6. Switch blocks (SW-33, SW-91) inserted in
between are not counted. If FOUT blocks used exceed the limit, the manipulated output value
(MV) of the top function block becomes output failure (PTPF).
nals of the Cascade Signal Distributor Block (FOUT):
Table 1.27-1 Connection Methods and Connected Destinations of I/O Terminals of Cascade Signal Dis-
tributor Block (FPIT):
Process I/O
Setting in-
SET x x
put
Manipu-
J01 lated output x x
1
Manipu-
2
Manipu-
3
Manipu-
4
Manipu-
5
Manipu-
6
Manipu-
7
Manipu-
8
SET terminal can not be connected to the terminals of other stations function block.
n Function of Cascade Signal Distributor Block (FOUT)

The FOUT block performs control computation processing and output processing.
The only processing timing available for the FOUT block is a periodic startup. Selections

SEE
ALSO For more information about the types of output processing possible for the FOUT block, see the following:,
refer to:
l Control Computation Processing of Cascade Signal Distributor Block

(FOUT)
The table below shows the control computation processing functions of the Cascade Signal
Distributor Block (FOUT):
Table 1.27-2 Control Computation Processing Functions of Cascade Signal Distributor Block (FOUT)
Performs range matching to the cascade setpoint value
(CSV) based on the range of the output destination, and uses
Range conversion output distribution
the result as a manipulated output value (MV). Range match-
ing is performed for each output destination.
it to change abruptly when the block mode has been changed
Bumpless switching
or when the manipulated output value (MV) has been switch-
ed in a downstream block in cascade.
Obtains a cascade setpoint value (CSV) from the Cascade
Signal Distributor Blocks (FOUT) manipulated output value
Bumpless switching Output pushback
(MVn) via range conversion. Prevents abrupt changes in the
manipulated output by utilizing output tracking.
l Output Processing Specific to Cascade Signal Distributor Block (FOUT)

As part of its output processing, the FOUT block employs a special output clamp.
n Range Conversion Output Distribution

The control algorithm used by the Cascade Signal Distributor Block (FOUT) is based on range
conversion output distribution.
The range conversion output distribution function performs range matching to the cascade
setpoint value (CSV) set from the upstream function block, for each connected destination
based on the destination range. During range conversion output distribution, range matching
is performed using output range tracking.
Range matching is based on the following expression:
MSHn-MSLn
MVn= (SV-SSL)+MSLn
SSH-SSL
MVn : nth manipulated output value (MV1 to MV8)

SLS : SV scale low limit
MSHn : MVn scale high limit
MSLn : MVn scale low limit

MSHn and MSLn are caused to automatically agree with the scale high limit and low limit of
the output destination via the output range tracking function.

SV Range
digit each.
digit each.
The default is 0.0.
block mode status.
The type of bumpless switching performed by the Cascade Signal Distributor Block (FOUT) is
output pushback.
The output pushback function sets as the setpoint value (SV) and cascade setpoint value
(CSV), the SV-range values converted from the manipulated output value (MVn) via range
conversion.
Combining the output pushback and output tracking functions enables the creation of a con-
trol loop where a balanceless bumpless transfer can be performed.
The computational expression of range conversion:
SV= SSH-SSL (MVn-MSLn)+SSL

MSHn-MSLn
CSV=SV
Output pushback is executed when the following occur:

When the cascade status of one output destination of the Cascade Signal Distributor
Block (FOUT) has changed to close, while the cascade statuses of all other output desti-
nations remain open.
In a configuration where a selector switch exists between the Cascade Signal Distributor
Block (FOUT) and the upstream function block in cascade connected to the FOUT, the
switch status has changed from open to close.
When cascade is open and tracking is enabled at the J01 terminal.
1. When cascade is open, the output tracking function causes the manipulated output value
(MVn) to track data at the output destination.
2. When cascade is closed, the manipulated output value (MVn) is pushed back to the level
of SV. However, this occurs only when one of the above output pushback execution con-
ditions is satisfied.
3. The output value tracking function of the upstream function block causes the output value
of the upstream function block to track the setpoint value (SV).

In a control loop where these actions take place, the output value of the upstream function
block agrees with data at the output destination of the Cascade Signal Distributor Block
(FOUT) when the cascade status is switched to close. Therefore, no output bump occurs as a
result of the cascade status switching to close.
Output pushback can handle only one input signal (RVn) at one time. In other words, balance-
less bumpless transfer of a cascade loop is possible only in the first loop.
Bumpless switching based on the output pushback function will not be executed to the sec-
ond and subsequent output destinations to close cascade. However, abrupt changes in output
as a result of changes in the setpoint value can be prevented if the downstream controller
blocks are PID type controller blocks (PID), as they bypass control computation during the
first control period after the cascade connection establishes.
If the upstream function block is a calculation block, neither output pushback action nor output
tracking action take place.
n Output Clamp
The output clamp is a function that limits the manipulated output value (MV) in such a way
that it cannot be changed to a value greater than or less than the current output value. The
status where the manipulated output value (MV) is limited in this way is called the output
clamp status.
In the FOUT block, if the output value at each output destination is subject to a limitation, the
output clamp status is indicated by the MVn data status high limit clamp (CLP+) or low limit
clamp (CLP-).
The cascade setpoint value (CSV) data status will be data status (CLP+ or CLP-) if the data
statuses for all output points that are in the cascade close status are CLP+ or CLP-, respec-
tively.
SEE
ALSO For more information about the output clamp, refer to:
4.3, Output Clamp in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
n Data Items - FOUT

Table 1.27-3 Data Items of Cascade Signal Distributor Block (FOUT)
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
SV Setpoint value SV engineering unit value SSL
neering unit as SV
Value in the same unit as
MV1 Manipulated output value 1 MSL1
connection destination JO1

Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
*2: SSL: SV scale low limit
MSLn: MVn scale low limit

<1.28 Feedforward Signal Summing Block (FFSUM)> 1-327
1.28 Feedforward Signal Summing Block

(FFSUM)
Feedforward Signal Summing Block (FFSUM) adds the feedforward signal to the feedback
control signal then outputs the result. This block may be applied to the control loop that per-
forms feedforward compensation control or base load control.
n Feedforward Signal Summing Block (FFSUM)

Connection
Feedforward Signal Summing Block (FFSUM) adds up the feedback signal (manipulated out-
put value) input to the IN terminal from an up-stream controller block via cascade connection
and the feedforward signal input to the SET terminal via cascade connection, and outputs the
result.
The figure below shows the function block diagram of Feedforward Signal Summing Block
(FFSUM):
SET BIN TIN TSI INT
CAS (VN) (TSW)

CSV
AUT
SV
MAN
Signal CAS/AUT Output

IN PV MV OUT
addition processing
MAN
FSW
(PV, PV, MV, MV)
SUB
Figure 1.28-1 Function Block Diagram of Feedforward Signal Summing Block (FFSUM)
nals of the Feedforward Signal Summing Block (FFSUM):
Table 1.28-1 Connection Methods and Connected Destinations of I/O Terminals of Feedforward Signal
Summing Block (FFSUM)
Process I/O
FB signal
IN x x
input
FF setting
SET x x
input
Manipu-
OUT x x x x
lated output
Auxiliary
SUB x x x
output
Compensa-
BIN x x x
tion input
Tracking
TIN x x x
signal input

Process I/O
Tracking
TSI x x x x
SW input
Interlock
INT x x x x
SW input
: Connection allowed only when connecting to a switch block (SW-33, SW-91) or an inter-station data link block (ADL).
n Function of Feedforward Signal Summing Block (FFSUM)

The FFSUM block performs control computation processing, output processing, and alarm
processing.
The only processing timing available for the FFSUM block is a periodic startup. Selections
SEE
ALSO For more information about the types of output processing and alarm processing possible for the FFSUM
block, refer to:
l Control Computation Processing of Feedforward Signal Summing Block

(FFSUM)
The table below shows the control computation processing functions of the Feedforward Sig-
nal Summing Block (FFSUM):
Table 1.28-2 Control Computation Processings of Feedforward Signal Summing Block (FFSUM)
Obtains a manipulated output value (MV) by adding to the
Feedforward control signal addition feedforward setpoint value (SV) the feedback input value (PV)
corrected by the input corrected value (VN).
The control output actions available with this function block
are of positional type only.
Adds the I/O compensated value (VN) received from outside
to the input signal or control output signal of PID computation
I/O compensation
when the controller block is operating automatically. Only in-
put compensation is available.
Adds the I/O compensated value (VN) received from the out-
I/O compensation Input compensation
side to the input signal of the PID control computation.
its.

Bumpless switching
Forcibly sets as the feedback input value, the PV value calcu-
lated back from the MV output destination readback value
Output pushback (MVrb). This prevents the manipulated output value (MV) from
Bumpless switching changing abruptly.
Balance action (MV) by initializing the balance term in the manipulated output
computational expression.
Temporarily suspends the control action while maintaining the
Control hold current block mode. During control hold, the output action is
performed normally.
operating in the CAS mode, so that the control action is con-
AUT fallback
tinued using values set by the operator. This action takes
place when the AUT fallback condition becomes satisfied.
n Feedforward Signal Summing

The feedforward signal summing function adds the feedforward setpoint value (SV) to the
feedback input value (PV), after correcting the latter by the input compensated value (VN), to
obtain a manipulated output value (MV) when the block mode is automatic (AUT) or cascade
(CAS).
Input
VN compensation
AUT/MAN CAS
CSV
+
+
CB
CK SV FSW
+
CV Signal MV
PV
+ addition
Figure 1.28-2 Feedforward Signal Summing Action
l Signal Addition
The following computational expressions are used to add up the PV value (CV) after input
compensation and feedforward setpoint value (SV) via range conversion to obtain a manipu-
lated output value (MV).
MV=CVm+SVm+BLn

MSH-MSL
CVm= (CV-SL)+MSL
SH-SL
MSH-MSL
SVm= (SV-SSL)+MSL
SSH-SSL
MV : Manipulated output value

SV : Feedforward setpoint value
SVm : SV after range conversion
CV : PV after input compensation
CVm : CV after range conversion
BLn : Balance term
l Feedforward Signal Cut

Depending upon the operating condition of the plant, it is sometimes desirable that Feedfor-
ward Signal Summing be disabled completely. When the feedforward control signal cut switch
(FSW) is turned ON, the feedback input value after input compensation directly receives
range conversion and is output as a manipulated output value (MV) in the automatic (AUT) or
cascade (CAS) mode.
MV=CVm+BLn
During the automatic (AUT) or cascade (CAS) mode, the following balance operation is per-
formed to prevent an output bump as a result of switching the feedforward control signal cut
switch.
When the feedforward signal cut switch (FSW) is turned ON, BLn changes to the value shown
below:
BLn=MVrb-CVm
MVrb : MV output destination readback value
When the feedforward switch (FSW) is turned OFF, the following computation is performed to
determine the BLn value.
BLn=MVrb-SVm-CVm

SV Range
digit each

digit each
The default is 0.0.
n I/O Compensation
The I/O compensation function adds the I/O compensated value (VN) received from outside
to the input signal or output signal of PID control computation, while the controller block is op-
erating automatically in the automatic (AUT) or cascade (CAS) mode.
Only input compensation is available with the Feedforward Signal Summing Block (FFSUM).
l Characteristics of Input Compensation

The following is a computational expression of input compensation:
CVn=PVn+CK (VN+CB)
CVn : Control variable (PV after input compensation)

PVn : Process variable
The figure below shows a processing flow of input compensation:
VN
+
+
CB
CK
+
PVn CVn PID control MV
PV
+ computation
Figure 1.28-3 Processing Flow of Input Compensation
When creating a base load control system, set the median value of feedforward signals in a
normal operating state as the input compensated value (VN). Also, preset CK and CV to -1.0
and 0.0, respectively. As a result, the feedback control signal (PV) is compensated by its devi-
ation from the median value of feedforward signals (SV) and obtained as a final manipulated
output value (MV).
l Set Parameters of Input Compensation

The parameters of input compensation:
Compensation gain (CK): -10.000 to 10.000
Compensation bias (CB): Arbitrary engineering unit data
The default is 0.
The input compensated value (VN) can not only be set from other function block via data set-
ting, but also be entered via data reference from the compensation input terminal (BIN).


The control output actions available with the Feedforward Signal Summing Block (FFSUM)
are of positional type only. The result of signal summing computation is output as a manipu-
lated output value (MV).

setpoint high limit (SVH) and setpoint low limit (SVL), and recognizes the setpoint values (SV)
only within this range as valid.
SEE
lActions in the Automatic or Manual Mode on page 1-39
lSet Parameters of the Setpoint Value Limiter on page 1-40

The setpoint value pushback function sets the same value for the two types of setpoint values
(SV, CSV). The figure below explains the relationship between the setpoint value (SV) and
cascade setpoint value (CSV):
Input from the SET terminal
CSV
AUT/MAN
CAS
SV
Setpoint value
Control
computation
Figure 1.28-4 Relationship between Setpoint Values (SV and CSV)
function block.
l Action in Automatic (AUT) or Manual (MAN) Mode

Causes the cascade setpoint value (CSV) to agree with the setpoint value (SV). Even when a
data value is set to the setpoint value (SV) from outside the function block, the same value is
automatically set to the cascade setpoint value.
l Action in Cascade (CAS) Mode

Causes the setpoint value (SV) to agree with the cascade setpoint value (CSV).

block mode status.
The bumpless switching functions available with the Feedforward Signal Summing Block
(FFSUM) include:
Output pushback
Balance action
l Output Pushback
The output pushback function sets as the feedback input value (PV), the value calculated
back from the MV output destination readback value (MVrb).
The following computational expressions are used to calculate PV back from MVrb:
PV=CV-CK (VN+CB)
SH-SL
CV= (CVm-MSL)+SL
MSH-MSL
CVm=MVrb-SVm-BLn
MSH-MSL
SVm= (SV-SSL)+MSL
SSH-SSL
BLn: Balance term

In the manual (MAN) or initialization manual (IMAN) mode
BLn=0.0
When output is clamped in the automatic (AUT) or cascade (CAS) mode
BLn=BLn-1
If no input compensation is performed, the feedback input value (PV) in the above computa-
tional expression is the same as CV.
If the calculated value exceeds the feedback input value (PV) range, it is limited to the SH or
SL value.
An abrupt change in the manipulated output value (MV) upon changing of block modes from
manual (MAN) to automatic (MAN), may have a negative impact on the process. Preventing
this abrupt change in the manipulated output value (MV) is called, bumpless switching.
Using the output pushback function in combination with the output tracking function enables
balanceless bumpless transfer of a cascade loop.

AUT/MAN
SV
PV MV PV MV
PID FFSUM
CAS AUT/MAN
Output tracking
Output tracking SV
Output pushback PV MV
PID
Figure 1.28-5 Output Pushback and Output Tracking when Cascade is Open
1. When cascade is open, the output tracking function causes MVrb to track data at the out-
put destination.
2. When cascade is closed, the output pushback function calculates the feedback input val-
ue (PV) from MVrb, and sets the obtained value as PV.
3. The output value tracking function of the upstream block in cascade causes the output
value of the upstream function block to track the feedback input value (PV).
l Balance Action
The balance action function adjusts the balance term value when the feedback input value
(PV) changes abruptly during automatic operation in the auto (AUT) or cascade (CAS) mode,
in order to prevent the manipulated output value (MV) from changing abruptly.
An abrupt change in the manipulated output value (MV) during automatic operation may have
a negative impact on the process. Preventing this abrupt change in the manipulated output
value (MV) is called, bumpless switching.
The balance action prevents the manipulated output value from changing abruptly when the
feedback input value undergoes an abrupt change.
The balance term is adjusted based on the following computational expressions:
BLn=MVrb-CVm-SVm
MSH-MSL
CVm= (CV-SL)+MSL
SH-SL
MSH-MSL
SVm= (SV-SSL)+MSL
SSH-SSL
CV=PV+CK (VN+CB)
If no input compensation is performed, CV in the above computational expressions is the
same as PV.
The Feedforward Signal Summing Block (FFSUM) executes this balance action when the
feedback control function block connected upstream in cascade issues a warning that the set-
point value will be bumped.
The execution conditions of the balance action:
When a Cascade Signal Distributor Block (FOUT) is connected upstream and the condi-
tional (CND) status of the upstream output value is canceled.
A calculation block that does not provide a balance function is connected upstream.
The initialization manual (MAN) mode is canceled while the output pushback value is be-
ing limited to the MSH or MSL value.
When the balance action is executed, BLn is moved toward 0 by the ramp constant (RP) dur-
ing each of the subsequent scan periods, until it finally reaches 0.
Ramp constant (RP): Engineering unit data between 0 and the MV scale span range limit

The setting can be changed from operation and monitoring func-
tions during operation.
l Characteristics of Initialization Manual

changed to manual (MAN), the initialization manual (IMAN) mode will precede the manual
invalid.
change to that mode when initialization condition vanishes.

es:
AUT
IMAN (AUT)
AUT
(SW-33, SW-91) and the switch is disconnected (i.e., the cascade connection is open).
and a failure or output open alarm has occurred in the process output.
The output signal is not a pulse-width output and the data status of the input signal at the
TIN or TSI terminal has become invalid (BAD) during the tracking (TRK) mode.

n Control Hold
The control hold action takes place when the following conditions are establishes during auto-
matic operation (AUT, CAS):
switch, etc.)
non-response state (momentary power failure)
The control is resumed when the conditions become unsatisfied.
n MAN Fallback
l Characteristics of Man Fallback


AUTMAN
When the data status of the process variable (PV) is invalid (BAD).
When the block mode change interlock condition establishes.

n AUT Fallback
l Characteristics of AUT Fallback


cascade setpoint value (CSV) for some reason.
The following examples shows when the AUT fallback condition is established:
CASAUT
Use the Function Block Detail Builder to define whether or not to use the AUT fallback.
The default is No.

l Characteristics of Block Mode Change Interlock

Any block mode change command to obtain an automatic operation state (AUT or CAS
mode) becomes invalid.


n Data Items - FFSUM

Table 1.28-3 Data Items of Feedforward Signal Summing Block (FFSUM)
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
AF ----- 0
tion
AOFS ----- 0
tion
Feedback input signal val-
PV PV engineering unit value SL
ue
SV Feedforward setpoint value x SV engineering unit value SSL
Feedforward control signal Value in the same engi-
CSV x SSL
cascade setpoint neering unit as PV
MH x MSL to MSH MSH
limit setpoint
ML x MSL to MSH MSL
limit setpoint
VN Input compensation value x ----- 0.0
RP Ramp constant x 0 to (MSH - MSL) MSH - MSL
RMV x MSL
Feedforward control signal
FSW x 0, 1 0
cut switch
neering unit as PV
neering unit as PV
SSH: SV scale high limit

SEE
ALSO For more information about valid block modes of the FFSUM block, refer to:

<1.29 Non-Interference Control Output Block (XCPL)> 1-340
1.29 Non-Interference Control Output Block

(XCPL)
Non-Interference Control Output Block (XCPL) adds output compensation signals to the feed-
back control signal the outputs the result. This block may be applied to add non-interference
compensation signals to two mutually non-interference control loops.
n Non-Interference Control Output Block (XCPL)

Connection
Non-Interference Control Output Block (XCPL) adds output compensation signals to the feed-
back control signal (manipulated output value) that are received by the IN terminal from an
upstream control loop via cascade connection.
The figure below shows the function block diagram of Non-Interference Control Output Block
(XCPL):
BIN TIN TSI INT
(TSW)
VN
Signal AUT Output

IN PV MV OUT
addition processing
MAN
(MV, MV)
SUB
Figure 1.29-1 Function Block Diagram of Non-Interference Control Output Block (XCPL)
The figure below shows an example of mutually non-interacting control using Non-interfer-
ence Control Output Blocks (XCPL):
PID XCPL A
MV MV
VN
CALC
CALC
PID VN B
MP MV
XCPL
Figure 1.29-2 Example of Mutually Non-Interference Control Using Non-Interference Control Output
Block (XCPL):
nals of the Non-Interference Control Output Block (XCPL):

Table 1.29-1 Connection Methods and Connected destinations of the I/O Terminals of Non-Interfer-
ence Control Output Block (XCPL):
Process I/O
FB signal
IN x x
input
Manipu-
OUT x x x x
lated output
Auxiliary
SUB x x x
output
Compensa-
BIN x x x
tion input
Tracking
TIN x x x
signal input
Tracking
TSI x x x x
SW input
Interlock
INT x x x x
SW input
n Function of Non-Interference Control Output Block (XCPL)

The XCPL block performs control computation processing, output processing, and alarm
processing.
The only processing timing available for the XCPL block is a periodic startup. Selections
SEE
ALSO For more information about the types of output processing and alarm processing possible for the XCPL block,
refer to:
l Control Computation Processing of Non-Interference Control Output Block

(XCPL)
The table below shows the control computation processing functions of the Non-Interference
Control Output Block (XCPL):
Table 1.29-2 Control Computation Processings of Non-Interference Control Output Block (XCPL)
Adjusts the noninteracting compensated value (VN) using the
Non-interference compensation signal addi- compensation gain (CK) and compensation bias (CB). The
tion adjusted value is added to the feedback input signal value
(PV) to obtain a manipulated output value (MV).

Switches the increasing/decreasing direction of the manipu-
lated output value (MV) in accordance with the increase or
decrease in the feedback input signal (PB). The control action
direction of this function block is always direct.
it to change abruptly when the block mode has been changed
Bumpless switching
Forcibly sets as the feedback input value (PV) the value cal-
culated back from the manipulated output value (MV). This
Output pushback
prevents the manipulated output value (MV) from change
Bumpless switching abruptly.
Balance action (MV) by initializing the balance term in the manipulated output
Block mode change interlock automatically, while disabling the stopped function blocks
from changing to the automatic operating mode.
n Non-Interference Compensation Signal Addition

The non-interference compensation signal addition function adds the non-interference com-
pensated value (VN) to the feedback input signal value (PV) to obtain a manipulated output
value (MV) during the automatic (AUT) mode.
VN
+
+
CB
CK
+
MV
PV
+
Figure 1.29-3 Non-Interference Compensation Signal Addition Action
The following expression is used to add the non-interference compensated value (VN) to the
feedback input signal value (PV):
MV=PV+CK (VN+CB)+BLn
MV : Manipulated output value

PV : Feedback input signal value
VN : Non-interacting compensated value

CK : Compensation gain
CB : Compensation bias
BLn : Balance term
Input compensation gain (CK)

-10.000 to +10.000
The setting can be changed during operation.
Input compensation bias (CB)
Arbitrary engineering unit data
The default is 0.
The setting can be changed during operation.
The non-interference compensation value (VN) can be set from other function block via data
setting and also can be input via data reference from the compensation input terminal BIN. If
the compensation input terminal (BIN) is not connected, this value is considered to the han-
dled via data setting.
For the Non-Interference Control Output Block (XCPL), only the MV scale may be defined.
The process variable (PV) uses the same scale as the manipulated output value (MV).

od to an actual manipulated output value (MV). The control output action applied in the Non-
Interference Control Output Block (CPL) is positional type only. The computed result of
non-interacting compensation signal addition is output as a manipulated output value (MV).

The control action direction function switches the increasing/decreasing direction of the ma-
nipulated output value (MV) in accordance with the increase or decrease in the feedback in-
put signal value (PV).
The manipulated output value (MV) changes in the same direction as the change in the proc-
ess variable (PV) in direct action, while the manipulated output value (MV) changes in the
opposite direction to the change in the process variable (PV) in reversed action.
The control output action of the Non-Interference Control Output Block (XCPL) is always di-
rect action.
block mode status.
The bumpless switching functions available with the Non-Interference Control Output Block
(XCPL) include:
Output pushback
Balance action

l Output Pushback
The output pushback function sets as the feedback input value (PV), the value calculated
back from the manipulated output value (MV).
The following computational expression is used to calculate the manipulated output value
(MV):
PV=MVrb-CK (VN+CB)-BLn
MVrb : MV output destination readback value

BLn : Balance term
In the manual (MAN) or initialization manual (IMAN) mode
BLn=0.0
When output is clamped in the automatic (AUT)
BLn=BLn-1
Output pushback is executed in the following conditions:

In the manual (MAN) mode
When the mode status is initialization manual (IMAN)
When output is clamped in the automatic (AUT) mode
If the calculated value exceeds the PV range, it is limited to the MSH or MSL value.
Using the output pushback function in combination with the output tracking function enables
balanceless bumpless transfer of cascade loop.
1. When cascade is open, the output tracking function causes the manipulated output value
(MV) to track data at the output destination.
2. When cascade is closed, the output pushback function back calculates the manipulated
output value (MV), and sets the obtained value as the feedback input value (PV).
3. The output value tracking function of the upstream block in cascade causes the output
value of the upstream function block to track the feedback input value (PV).
l Balance Action
The balance action function adjusts the balance term value when the feedback input value
(PV) changes abruptly during automatic operation in the auto (AUT) or cascade (CAS) mode,
in order to prevent the manipulated output value (MV) from changing abruptly.
The BLn is adjusted by the following computational expression. Using the balance action pre-
vents the manipulated output value from changing abruptly when the feedback input value un-
dergoes an abrupt change.
BLn=MVrb-PV-CK (VN+CB)
The Non-Interference Control Output Block (XCPL) executes this balance action when the
feedback control function block connected upstream in cascade issues a warning that the set-
point value will be bumped.
The following are execution conditions of the balance action:
When a Cascade Signal Distributor Block (FOUT) is connected upstream and the condi-
tional (CND) status of the upstream output value is canceled
A calculation block that does not provide a balance function is connected upstream
The initialization manual (MAN) mode is canceled while the output pushback value is be-
ing limited to the MSH or MSL value

When the balance action is executed, BLn is moved toward 0 by the ramp constant (RP)
during each of the subsequent scan periods, until it finally reaches 0.
Ramp constant (RP): Engineering unit data between 0 and the MV scale span range limit.
IMPORTANT
Observe the following rules when creating a control system that includes a Non-Interference
Control Output Block (XCPL):
Always specify velocity type for the control output action of the upstream controller
blocks in cascade.
Specify output limiters or output velocity limiters for the upstream controller blocks in
cascade in such a way that no limiting action will actually take place.
Specify No for the output compensation specification of the upstream controller blocks
in cascade.
To manually control the loop, change the block mode of the Non-Interference Control Out-
put Block (XCPL) to manual (MAN).
l Characteristics of Initialization Manual

invalid.

es:
AUT
IMAN (AUT)

AUT
is communication error (NCOM) or output failure (PTPF).
(SW-33, SW-91) and the connection is switched off (i.e., the cascade connection is
open).
The output signal is not a pulse-width output and the data status of the input signal at the
TIN or TSI terminal has become invalid (BAD) during the tracking (TRK) mode.
n MAN Fallback
l Characteristics of Man Fallback


AUTMAN
When the data status of the feedback input signal (PV) is invalid (BAD).


l Characteristics of Block Mode Change Interlock

tion state. The following actions take place:
becomes invalid.

n Data Items - XCPL

Table 1.29-3 Data Items of Non-Interference Control Output Block (XCPL)
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
AF ----- 0
tion
AOFS ----- 0
tion
Feedback input signal val- Value in the same engi-
PV MSL
ue neering unit as MV
MH x MSL to MSH MSH
limit setpoint
ML x MSL to MSH MSL
limit setpoint
VN Input compensation value x ----- 0.0
RP Ramp constant x 0 to (MSH - MSL) MSH - MSL
value

SEE
ALSO For more information about valid block modes of the XCPL block, refer to:

<1.30 Control Signal Splitter Block (SPLIT)> 1-349
1.30 Control Signal Splitter Block (SPLIT)

Control Signal Splitter Block (SPLIT) is capable of distributing the manipulated output signals
from the upstream control loop to two output destinations via a signal distribution switch. This
block may be applied to the loops when split the upstream signal to multiple downstream con-
trol loops with different operation ranges.
n Control Signal Splitter Block (SPLIT)

Connection
Control Signal Splitter Blocks (SPLIT) may be applied to the multiple downstream control
loops with different operation ranges.
The figure below shows the function block diagram of Control Signal Splitter Block (SPLIT):
0
1
Range
MV1 OUT1
CAS conversion
SET CSV
3
AUT SV
RSV
RCAS 2 Range
SW MV2 OUT2
conversion
Signal distribution switch
Figure 1.30-1 Function Block Diagram of Control Signal Splitter Block (SPLIT)
Data setting cannot be performed to the manipulated output values (MV1, MV2) of the Control
Signal Splitter Block (SPLIT).
nals of the Control Signal Splitter Block (SPLIT):
Table 1.30-1 Connection Methods and Connected Destinations of I/O Terminals of Control Signal Split-
ter Block (SPLIT)
Process I/O
Setting in-
SET x x
put
Manipu-
OUT1 lated output x x x x
1
Manipu-
OUT2 lated output x x x x
2
n Function of Control Signal Splitter Block (SPLIT)

The SPLIT block performs control computation processing, output processing, and alarm
processing.

The only processing timing available for the SPLIT block is a periodic startup. Selections
SEE
ALSO For more information about the types of output processing and alarm processing possible for the SPLIT
block, refer to:
l Control Computation Processing of Control Signal Splitter Block (SPLIT)

The table below shows the control computation processing functions of the Control Signal
Splitter Block (SPLIT):
Table 1.30-2 Control Computation Processing Functions of Control Signal Splitter Block (SPLIT)
Signal distribution with output destination Obtains two manipulated output values (MV1, MV2) based on
switching the process variable (PV).
Switches the increasing/decreasing direction of the manipu-
lated output value (MVn) in accordance with the increase or
MV output action direction
decrease in the setpoint value (SV). The control action direc-
tion of this function block is set for each output destination.
its (SVH, SVL).
to change abruptly when the block mode has been changed
Bumpless switching
Bumpless switching Balance action (MV) by initializing the balance term in the manipulated output
operating in the CAS mode, so that the control action is con-
AUT fallback
tinued using values set by the operator. This action takes
place when the AUT fallback condition becomes satisfied.
computer backup mode when an error has been detected at a
Computer failure supervisory computer while the function block is operating in
the RCAS mode. This action takes place when the computer
failure condition becomes satisfied.

l Output Processing Specific to Control Signal Splitter Block (SPLIT)

As part of its output processing, the SPLIT block employs a special output clamp.
n Signal Distribution with Output Destination Switching

The figure below shows the control signal splitter action:
0
1 Range conversion
(manipulated output MV1
value computation)
3
SV
Range conversion
Signal 2 (manipulated output MV2
distribution value computation)
switch
SW
Figure 1.30-2 Control Signal Splitter Action

SV Range
SV Range high Limit Value
digit each.
digit each.
The default is 0.0.
l Manipulated Output Value Computation

MVn Operation Range
The Control Signal Splitter Block (SPLIT) gives two manipulated output values (MV1, MV2)
calculated from the process variable (SV). The computational expressions are shown in the
later paragraphs.
In the Function Block Detail Builder, user can preset the SV-based action range for two ma-
nipulated outputs (SRH1, SRL1, SRH2, SRL2), the values defined should be within the SV
range. The figure below shows an example of action ranges:

MV1 MV2
MSH1 MSH2
MSL1 MSL2
SSL SV SSH
SRL1 SRL2 SRH1 SRH2
Figure 1.30-3 Control Signal Splitter
Use the Function Block Detail Builder to define the manipulated output value computation:
MVn Operation Range:
Specify SRH1, SRL1, SRH2 and SRL2 values within the SV range.
The default for SRH1 and SRH2 is the SV scale high limit (SSH).
The default for SRL1 and SRL2 is the SV scale low limit (SSL).
The two manipulated output values (MV1, MV2) can be obtained by the following expressions
when the SV is meaningful:
MVi=CALCi+BLi (n)
When the MV output action direction is direct
MSHi-MSLi
CALCi=MSLi+ (SV-SRLi)
SRHi-SRLi
When the MV output action direction is reverse

MSHi-MSLi
CALCi=MSHi- (SV-SRLi)
SRHi-SRLi
MVi : Manipulated output (i=1 or 2)

CALCi : Manipulated output computed value
BLi (n) : Balance term
SV : Setpoint value
MSHi : MVi scale high limit
MSLi : MVi scale low limit
SRHi : MVi action range high limit
SRLi : MVi action range low limit
l Signal Distribution Switch

The normal actions of the Control Signal Splitter Block (SPLIT) consist of computing a manip-
ulated output value for each output point based on the setpoint value and distributing signals
to both output destinations. However, the signal distribution action can be limited to a specific
output point by operating the signal distribution switch (SW).
The table below shows the signal distribution switch positions and corresponding actions:

Table 1.30-3 Signal Distribution Switch Positions and Corresponding Actions:
0 Stops signal distribution.
1 Distributes signals to MV1 only.
2 Distributes signals to MV2 only.
3 Distributes signals to both output points.
The value at the manipulated output point that has not been selected by the signal distribution
switch is always caused to agree with the value at the output destination via output tracking.

od to an actual manipulated output value (MV). The action to convert a change of the manipu-
lated output to an actual manipulated output value (MV) is called control output action. The
control output actions available with Control Signal Splitter Block (SPLIT) are of positional
type. The result of manipulated output computation corresponding to the signal distribution
switch position, is output as the manipulated output value (MV).

MVn Output Direction
The control action direction function switches the increasing/decreasing direction of a manipu-
lated output value (MVn) corresponding to the increase or decrease in the setpoint value (SV).
The manipulated output value (MV) changes in the same direction as the change of the set-
point variable (SV) is called direct action, while the MV value changing to the reverse direc-
tion to the change of SV is called reverse action.
Use the Function Block Detail Builder as define the control action direction:
MV1 Output Direction/MV2 Output Direction: Select Direct or Reverse
The default is Direct.

setpoint high limit (SVH) and setpoint low limit (SVL), and recognizes the setpoint values (SV)
only within this range as valid.
SEE


RSV CSV
AUT
RCAS CAS
SV
Setpoint value
Control
computation
function block.
l Action in Automatic (AUT) Mode

l Action in Cascade (CAS) Mode

l Action in Remote Cascade (RCAS) Mode

status.
The type of bumpless switching performed by the Control Signal Splitter Block (SPLIT) is bal-
ance action.
The balance action adjusts the balance term value when the feedback input value (PV)
changes abruptly during automatic operation in the auto (AUT) or cascade (CAS) mode, in or-
der to prevent the manipulated output value (MV) from changing abruptly.
Using the balance action enables bumpless switching of block modes from automatic (AUT)
to cascade (CAS).
The balance action prevents the manipulated output value from changing abruptly when the
operating condition of the plant has changed. The following computational expression is used
to adjust BLi:
BLi (n)=MVRBi-CALCi
BLi (n) : Balance term (i=1 or 2)

MVRBi : Manipulated output readback value
CALCi : Manipulated output computed value
The execution conditions of the balance action (switching of operating conditions):

When signal distribution is started after the setting of the signal distribution switch (SW)
has been changed
When the initialization manual condition is canceled during signal distribution
When an initialization request is issued from an upstream block in cascade during signal
distribution
When an initialization request is issued from an output destination function block during
signal distribution
When the balance action is executed, BLi is moved toward 0 by the specified value of ramp
constant (RP) during each of the subsequent scan periods, until it finally reaches 0.
MV1 ramp constant (RP1)
Set engineering unit data between 0 and the MV1 scale span range limit.
The default is the MV1 scale span.
MV2 ramp constant (RP1)
Set engineering unit data between 0 and the MV2 scale span range limit.
The default is the MV2 scale span.
TIP Initialization requests from upstream blocks are issued automatically.


es:
AUT
IMAN (AUT)

AUT
The initialization manual condition for the Control Signal Splitter Block (SPLIT) is satisfied in
the following cases:
When SW=1 and the initialization manual condition is established at the connected desti-
nation of the OUT1 terminal.
When SW=2 and the initialization manual condition is established at the connected desti-
nation of the OUT2 terminal.
When SW=3 and the initialization manual condition (same as above) is satisfied at the
connected destinations of the OUT1 and OUT2 terminals.
(SW-33, SW-91) and the cascade connection is switched off (i.e., the cascade connection
is open).
n AUT Fallback

Once the AUT fallback condition establishes, the block mode will remain automatic (AUT)
even after the condition later vanishes.

cascade setpoint value (CSV) for some reason.
The following example shows when the AUT fallback condition is established:
CASAUT
Use the Function Block Detail Builder to define whether or not to use the AUT fallback.
The default is No.

n Computer Fail
cade (RCAS) mode temporarily and switches to the computer backup mode.

When the function block mode is remote cascade (RCAS), the function block receives the set-
point value (SV) or manipulated output value (MV) from a supervisory system computer via
control bus communication.
When the computer fails, the block changes mode to the preset computer backup mode (AUT
or CAS) which indicates that an abnormality has been detected in the supervisory computer.
When the computer recovers, the block returns to the mode before the change.
The following actions take place when the computer failure condition exist and a block mode
change command from AUT or CAS to RCAS is sent:
1. When a block mode change command from AUT or CAS to RCAS is sent while the com-
puter fails (BSW=ON), the function block does not switch to the computer backup mode
directly but switches to the transient state mode first.
the execution of the block mode change command (AUT, CAS) and a remote mode
(RCAS).
set via the Function Block Detail Builder (AUT, CAS) and a remote mode (RCAS).
block mode changes to remote cascade (RCAS).

the remote cascade (RCAS) mode and switches the mode to the computer backup mode.
A backup switch (BSW) is provided in function blocks to define the remote cascade (RCAS)
mode. The status of this switch determines whether the computer has failed or recovered.
The value of the backup switch (BSW) can be set from a sequence table or other function
blocks.
block mode other than remote cascade (RCAS)
RCAS
Computer fails
AUT (RCAS)
Computer recovers
RCAS


block.
Select AUT or CAS as the mode to be switched to when the computer becomes down.
The default is AUT.
n Output Clamp
The output clamp is a function that limits the manipulated output value (MV) in such a way
that it cannot be changed to a value greater than or less than the current output value. The
status where the manipulated output value (MV) is limited in this way is called the output
clamp status.
In the SPLIT block, the output clamp statuses for manipulated output values MV1 and MV2
respectively are indicated as data status high limit clamp (CLP+) and low limit clamp (CLP-).
The clamp status of the cascade setpoint value (CSV) is as follows:
When SW=0
There is no clamp data status.
When SW=1
When the MV1 output operation is direct, the clamp status is the same as for MV1. For
reverse operation, if MV1 is CLP+ status, then the status is CLP-, if MV1 is CLP- status,
then the status is CLP+.
When SW=2
When the MV2 output operation is direct, the clamp status is the same as for MV2. For
reverse operation, if MV2 is CLP+ status, then the status is CLP-, if MV2 is CLP- status,
then the status is CLP+.
When SW=3
If output operation is direct and both MV1 and MV2 are CLP+ status, or if output opera-
tion is reverse and MV1, MV2 are CLP- status, then the status becomes CLP+. Or, if the
output operation is direct and both MV1 and MV2 are CLP- status, or if the output opera-
tion is reverse and MV1, MV2 are CLP+, then the status becomes CLP-.
SEE
ALSO For more information about the output clamp, refer to:
4.3, Output Clamp in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
n Data Items - SPLIT

Table 1.30-4 Data Items of Control Signal Splitter Block (SPLIT)
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
AFLS Alarm flashing status ----- -----
AF ----- -----
tion
AOFS ----- -----
tion
SV Setpoint value x SV engineering unit value SSL

Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
neering unit as SV
RSV Remote setpoint value (*3) SSL
neering unit as SV
MV1 Manipulated output value 1 MV1 engineering unit value MSL1
MV2 Manipulated output value 2 MV2 engineering unit value MSL2
MSH1 -
RP1 MV1 ramp constant x 0 to (MSH1 - MSL1)
MSL1
MSH2 -
RP2 MV2 ramp constant x 0 to (MSH2 - MSL2)
MSL2
SW Signal distributor switch x 0, 1, 2, 3 0
MSHn: MVn scale high limit
MSLn: MVn scale low limit
SEE
ALSO For more information about valid block modes of the SPLIT block, refer to:

<1.31 Representative Alarm Block (ALM-R)> 1-360
1.31 Representative Alarm Block (ALM-R)

Representative Alarm Block (ALM-R) manages the alarms initiated from up to 16 function
blocks. This block may be applied to inhibit the unnecessary alarm notifications from the func-
tion blocks.
n Representative Alarm Block (ALM-R)

Representative Alarm
The Representative Alarm Block (ALM-R) controls alarms initiated from up to 16 function
blocks. The block has function to activate or inhibit the alarms sent from other function blocks.
The figure below shows the function block diagram of Representative Alarm Block (ALM-R):
Representative alarm
ALRM Alarm
priority SW
masking
Input masking SV
Q01 Q02 Q16
Function Function Function

block 1 block 2 block 16
Alarm masking command
Figure 1.31-1 Function Block Diagram of Representative Alarm Block (ALM-R)
nals of the Representative Alarm Block (ALM-R):
Table 1.31-1 Connection Methods and Connected destinations of the I/O Terminals of Representative
Alarm Block (ALM-R):
Process I/O
Q01 to Q16 Alarm input x x (*2) x
*2: Connection allowed to any input terminal only when specifying an annunciator message to a software I/O.
n Function of Representative Alarm Block (ALM-R)

The ALM-R block performs only alarm processing.
The only processing timing available for the ALM-R block is a periodic startup. Selections

SEE
ALSO For more information about the types of alarm processing possible for the ALM-R block, refer to:
nAlarm Processing Possible for Each Regulatory Control on page 1-15
n Alarm Input Specification

The targets of a maximum of 16 alarm inputs that can be controlled by a Representative
Alarm Block (ALM-R):
Alarm status of function blocks
Annunciator messages
To specify an alarm input controlled by the representative alarm, use the Function Block De-
tail Builder to specify a tag name for the corresponding function block or annunciator mes-
sage.
Each function block has a number of alarm items. The alarm processing range, i.e., whether
all alarm items of a function block are regarded as input targets or only some of them are re-
garded, can be specified for each input terminal. The alarm processing range specification is
determined by the priority level of the alarm.
Specify one of the following four types of alarm processing ranges for each input terminal:
Table 1.31-2 Alarms under different handling categories

Range setting Target alarms
Full alarm All alarms
Medium-priority alarm or lower Alarms excluding high-priority alarms
Low-priority alarm or lower Alarms excluding high- and medium-priority alarms
Alarms excluding high-, medium- and low-priority
Logging alarm or lower
alarms
Those alarms excluded from the alarm processing range cannot be controlled collectively by
the Representative Alarm Block (ALM-R). Individual alarms of the annunciator messages or
function blocks that are specified as input targets of the Representative Alarm Block (ALM-R)
are notified via the block. Alarm notifications issued directly to operation and monitoring func-
tions are masked. However, the target of this alarm masking is limited by priority masking
n Representative Alarm Processing

The Representative Alarm Block (ALM-R) checks the status of all alarm inputs and deter-
mines its own alarm status (representative alarm) based on the alarm of the highest priority.
The table below shows the alarm statuses of the Representative Alarm Block (ALM-R):
Table 1.31-3 Table of Alarm Statuses of Representative Alarm Block (ALM-R)

Alarm status Name
NR Normal
HALM High-priority alarm present
MALM Medium-priority alarm present
LALM Low-priority alarm present
RALM Logging alarm present
CNF Connection failure alarm

For example, if the most important alarm among all alarms present is a medium-priority alarm,
the alarm status becomes medium-priority alarm present (MALM).
When the status of this representative alarm changes, a process alarm message is initiated
for output.
The alarm masking function is also effective on representative alarms. For example, if a Rep-
resentative Alarm Block (ALM-R) is specified as an input source of another Representative
Alarm Block (ALM-R), the representative alarm of the input source can be masked. Using this
method, a nested alarm filtering system can be configured.
The alarm detection specification of the Representative Alarm Block (ALM-R) is always fixed
to detection Yes for all alarms shown in the Table of Alarms of Representative Alarm Block
(ALM-R) except connection failure alarms.
By the input masking function explained in the following page, certain alarm inputs of the Rep-
resentative Alarm Block (ALM-R) may be excluded from the targets of above representative
alarm processing.
n Input Masking
The input masking function specifies by the setpoint value (SV), which input points are and
are not regarded as a target of representative alarm processing among the 16 alarm input
points connected to the input terminals.
Input masking is performed by setting as setpoint value (SV), an input masking pattern repre-
sented by a numeric value between 0 and 15. The setpoint value (SV) can be changed via
setting from operation and monitoring functions or other function block.
The table below shows the setpoint values (input masking patterns) and corresponding tar-
gets of representative alarm processing:
Table 1.31-4 Setpoint Values and Corresponding Targets of Representative Alarm Processing
SV Target of representative alarm processing
0 No input is regarded as a target of representative alarm processing
1 All inputs are regarded as targets of representative alarm processing
2 to 15 Defined by the user
When the setpoint value (SV) is 2 through 15, the targets of representative alarm processing
can be defined using the Function Block Detail Builder. Define the targets for each of the Rep-
resentative alarm blocks (ALM-R) used, by the following methods:
Table 1.31-5 Table of Input Masking Patterns

Input SV
point 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
1 . Y
2 . Y
3 . Y Defined by the user
4 . Y Y or N or .

16 . Y
Specify Y, N or . for each entry column in the table of input masking patterns, where the X
axis and Y axis represent the setpoint value (SV) and input point, respectively. Y, N and .
have the following meanings:
Y
Regarded as a target of representative alarm processing.

N
Not regarded as a target of representative alarm processing.
Alarm of the input source are unmasked.
.
Not regarded as a target of representative alarm processing.
The alarm masking status of alarms at the input source is not manipulated at all.
When releasing all the alarm inputs from masking, a pattern of SV defined with Ns for all
alarm inputs should be used.
However, for the alarms that beyond the ALM-R handling scope, the alarm masking cannot be
released by the SV pattern with all Ns.
For an example, the pattern when SV=2 is defined with all Ns. If the ALM-R handling scope
is defined with Medium-priority alarm, when releasing alarm mask, only the input alarms un-
der the Medium-priority are released, the masked High-priority alarms cannot be released.
Note that when the specification changes from Y to . following a change in the setpoint val-
ue (SV), the current alarm masking status is held as is.
After the specification of an input point is changed from Y to ., alarm notifications will no
longer be transmitted from the function block corresponding to the input point or from the
Representative Alarm Block (ALM-R).
When the alarm masking status at the connected destination of an input terminal is changed
from unmasked to masked, the first alarm that occurs at this connected destination after the
change will not be masked. Therefore, caution should be exercised when changing the input
masking pattern from N to Y, from N to ., or from . to Y.
n Priority Masking
The priority masking function specifies the range of alarm masking via the priority masking
switch (SW) for each alarm of the annunciator message and function block that is connected
to a terminal of the Representative Alarm Block (ALM-R).
Priority masking targets the alarms included in the alarm processing range.
l Specification of Priority Masking

Priority masking is specified by setting a numeric value between 0 and 5 for the priority mask-
ing switch. The table below shows the priority masking switch (SW) values and corresponding
alarm masking actions:
Table 1.31-6 Priority Masking Switch Values and Alarm Masking Actions
SW Name Action
0 No masking Does not manipulate the alarm masking status at all.
1 Full alarm masking Performs alarm masking (AOF) to all alarms at once.
Masks medium-priority alarms and alarms of lower
2 Medium-priority alarm masking priorities.
Only high-priority alarms are not masked.
Masks low-priority alarms and alarms of lower priori-
3 Low-priority alarm masking ties.
High- and medium-priority alarms are not masked.
Masks logging alarms and alarms of lower priorities.
4 Logging alarm masking High-, medium- and low-priority alarms are not
masked.

SW Name Action
Masks the alarms whose priority is lower than that of
the highest-priority alarm currently occurred in the
5 Dynamic masking connected function block.
Only the alarm of the highest priority at the moment
is not masked.
Among all alarms at the alarm inputs of the Representative Alarm Block (ALM-R), those of the
priority (priority level) specified by the value of the priority masking switch (SW) or lower will
be masked. In case of priority mask, all the alarms of the connected function block with lower
level than the alarm of the highest priority level occurred so far will be masked.
The priority masking switch (SW) can be changed by the operator or via setting operation
from other function block.
When the setting of the priority masking switch (SW) is changed, any changes in the alarm
masking status will be limited by the priorities that are included in the alarm processing range
specified by the builder. The table below shows alarm masking ranges for different combina-
tions of the alarm processing range specification and SW setting:
Table 1.31-7 Alarm Masking Ranges

Alarm processing range specification by the builder
SW Medium-priority Low-priority alarm Logging alarm or
Full alarm
alarm or lower or lower lower
0 Alarm masking status is not manipulated at all.
1 Full alarm
Medium-priority
Medium-priority alarm or lower
2 Low-priority alarm
alarm or lower
or lower Logging alarm or
Low-priority alarm Low-priority alarm lower
3
or lower or lower
Logging alarm or Logging alarm or Logging alarm or
4
lower lower lower
5 (*1) (*2) (*3) (*4)
*1: The alarm masking range covers those alarms occurred in the connected function block whose priority is lower than that of
the most important alarm currently present.
the most important alarm currently present among medium-priority alarms and alarms of lower priorities.
the most important alarm currently present among low-priority alarms and alarms of lower priorities.
the most important alarm currently present among logging alarms and alarms of lower priorities.
l Action Example of Priority Masking

The figure below shows an example of how the alarm masking status changes during priority
masking when dynamic masking (SW=5) is specified:
HH (high-priority alarm)
HI (medium-priority alarm)
DEV (low-priority alarm)

Legend
Alarm masking status
Figure 1.31-2 Action of Dynamic Masking (SW=5)

In this example, the builder-specified alarm range is assumed to be All alarms. The figure is
based on a scenario in which a high-priority alarm, medium-priority alarm and low-priority
alarm have occurred simultaneously at a function block controlled by the Representative
Alarm Block (ALM-R), to depict how the alarm masking status changes, or how the alarm sta-
tus is recovered in the order of higher to lower priority alarms.
Among all alarms present, only the alarm of the highest priority is not subject to masking.
Dynamic masking checks the priority level of alarms in each function block. For an example, if
a function block is sending an alarm with high priority level, the new alarms with lower levels
will be masked. While if another function block connected in the same ALM-R is in normal sta-
tus, an new alarm with medium level sent from this block will not be masked.
So that it is useful to used dynamic masking for handling alarms with multiple priority levels.
l Inhibiting Alarm of Connected Function Block

The alarms of a function block that connected to ALM-R can be inhibited by changing the
state of the priority level switch (SW) on ALM-R block.
No masking (SW=0)
The current alarm masking status of the input source is held.
This also applies to the action of specifying N by switching the setpoint value (SV). Al-
though the alarms for which N is specified are normally unmasked, they are not un-
masked if the SW value is 0.
Dynamic masking (SW=5)
The alarm masking status of the input source is set every period in accordance with the
alarm occurrence status.
Other masking (SW=1, 2, 3, 4)
The alarm masking status of the input source is set only when the setting of the priority
masking switch (SW) or SV has been changed.
In some cases the alarm masking status of a function block controlled by the Representative
Alarm Block (ALM-R) may not be changed directly from operation and monitoring functions or
via other means.
IMPORTANT
During on-line maintenance, merely changing the alarm processing level of the tag assigned
to a connected destination of the Representative Alarm Block (ALM-R) does not make the
Representative Alarm Block (ALM-R) a target of on-line loading. In this case, discrepancies
may occur between the Representative Alarm Block (ALM-R) and the connected destination
block, causing actions to become unstable. Specify the representative alarm itself as a target
of on-line loading, as well.
n Data Items - ALM-R

Table 1.31-8 Data Items of Representative Alarm Block (ALM-R)
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
AF ----- 0
tion
AOFS ----- 0
tion

Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
SV Setpoint value x 0 to 15 1
SW Priority masking switch x 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 0
SEE
ALSO For more information about valid block modes of the ALM-R block, refer to:

<1.32 Pulse Count Input Block (PTC)> 1-367
1.32 Pulse Count Input Block (PTC)

Pulse Count Input Block (PTC) counts process values that are products of pulse signals multi-
plied by the pulse conversion coefficient. This block may be applied to count process values
obtained by multiplying the input pulse signals by pulse conversion coefficient.
n Pulse Count Input Block (PTC)

Connection
Pulse Count Input Block (PTC) counts process values that are products of pulse signals multi-
plied by the pulse conversion coefficient. In addition, the Pulse Count Input Block (PTC) has a
preset counter function.
Counting operations of the counter, such as issuing of reset and hold commands, are per-
formed from a sequence control block, calculation block or other function blocks. The block
status that indicates the action status can be referenced from other function blocks.
The figure below shows the function block diagram of Pulse Count Input Block (PTC):
CTUP
PH
DL - PALM
Input Count
IN PV OUT
RMV HSW
Figure 1.32-1 Function Block Diagram of Pulse Count Input Block (PTC)
nals of the Pulse Count Input Block (PTC):
Table 1.32-1 Connection Methods and Connected Destinations of I/O Terminals of Pulse Count Input
Block (PTC):
I/O terminal Condi- Status Terminal
Data ref- Data set- Process Software Function
tion test- manipu- connec-
erence ting I/O I/O block
ing lation tion
Meas-
IN urement x x
input
Manipu-
OUT lated x x x x
output
n Function of Pulse Count Input Block (PTC)

The PTC block performs input processing, control computation processing (count process-
ing), output processing, and alarm processing.

The only processing timing available for the PTC block is a periodic startup. Selections avail-
SEE
for the PTC block, refer to:
l Input Processing Specific to Pulse Count Block (PTC)

The PTC block performs special input signal conversions.
l Control Computation Processing of Pulse Count Block (PTC)

The PTC block performs count processing as its control computation processing. The count
processing contains the following functions.
Counter update operation
Preset counter function
Pause operation
Restart operation
l Output Processing Specific to Pulse Count Block (PTC)

The PTC block performs special output signal conversions.
n Input Signal Conversion of Pulse Count Input Block (PTC)

Pulse Conversion Factor
The input signal conversion for the Pulse Count Input Block (PTC) counts the increments of
integrated pulse count values (P) read from the input connection terminal then multiply it by
the pulse conversion factor to convert it into count value (PV).
The following is the computational expression for the count value (PV):
PVn = Pfactor (Pn - Pn-1)+PVn-1
P : Integrated pulse count value

Pfactor : Pulse conversion factor
PV : Count value, decimal-point notation is valid, the value returns to 0 when exceeding
8 digits.
The subscripts n and n-1 indicate the number of sampling scan periods.
The setup for the pulse conversion factor can be executed on the Function Block Detail Build-
er.

Pulse Conversion Factor: Within the range between 0.001 to 1000
n Counter Updating Operation

When a counter reset command is received, counting is started after the counter value (PV) is
reset to 0. Counter reset command is issued by setting the reset command switch (data
item: RST) to 1 from operation and monitoring functions or a sequence control block. The
reset command switch (RST) automatically returns to 0 when the reset command is execu-
ted.
When a counter reset command is received, the block status changes to normal (NR). When
counting, PV is updated every scan period.
PV
PH
DL
Block
NR PALM NR PALM CTUP
status
Reset Reset
command command
Figure 1.32-2 Basic Pulse Counting Action
n Preset Counter Function

The preset counter function notifies when the count value (PV) has reached the preset num-
ber.
Besides this count-up completed notification function based on the presetpoint (PH), the
Pulse Count Input Block (PTC) also has the pre-alarm function by which a warning is issued
before the presetpoint is reached.
When the block mode is automatic (AUT), the block status changes to pre-alarm (PALM) or
count-up completed (CTUP) when the following conditions are satisfied:
Pre-alarm (PALM) status
0DVDL
DV=PH-PV
DV : Remaining count value
DL : Pre-alarm setpoint (8 digits)
PH : Presetpoint (8 digits)

PV : Count value
Count-up completed (CTUP) status

PH-PV0
PH : Presetpoint (8 digits)
PV : Count value
The pre-alarm (PALM) status and count-up completed (CTUP) status are mutually exclusive.
When DV=0, the pre-alarm (PALM) status is canceled and changes to count-up completed
(CTUP).
When the setting is DL=0, the status will never become pre-alarm (PALM).
The setting of PH and DL can be changed during operation as set parameters.
The count value continues to be updated even after the count-up completed (CTUP) status is
obtained. When the count value exceeds 8 digits, PV changes to 0 and the block status re-
turns to normal (NR) before counting is continued.
n Pause Operation
A pause command is issued by setting the hold command switch (data item: HSW) to 1 from
operation and monitoring functions or via other function blocks such as a sequence control
block or calculation block. When a pause command is received, the counter action stops tem-
porarily. The counter value and other data are held during the pause. The current block status
of normal (NR), pre-alarm (PAL) or count-up completed is held, while a new pause (PAUS)
status is added. The block status display on the operation and monitoring functions shows on-
ly the pause (PAUS) status that has a higher priority.
When a counter reset command is received in a pause (PAUS) state, the count value is reset
to 0 and the currently held block status (NR, PALM or CTUP) is changed to NR.
The figure below shows an example of pause/restart actions of the pulse-count block:
PH
DL
DV
PV
Block status NR PALM CTUP NR

PAUS PAUS
Operation command Pause Pause Pause Reset Pause

command canceled command command canceled
Figure 1.32-3 Example of Pause/Restart Actions of the Pulse-Count Block
n Restart Operation
The pause command is canceled by setting 0 for the hold command switch (data item: HSW).
When the pause command is canceled, the count action currently in pause (PAUS) is re-
sumed. The pause (PAUS) status is removed from the block status, and the original status
that has been saved is recovered. Updating of the count value resumes from the value that
has been held.

n Output Signal Conversion of the Pulse Count Input Block (PTC)

In the Pulse Count Input Block (PTC), a processing specific to the PTC Block takes place
when it is connected in sequence connection.
If the output terminal is defined to the manipulation of sequence connection status, then its
status can be manipulated according to the block status of the PTC Block.
Table 1.32-2 Description of Manipulation for Each Block Status

Block status Description of manipulation
CTUP plus NOT PAUS Status manipulation for the logical value true is executed.
(NR or PALM) plus NOT PAUS Status manipulation for the logical value false is executed.
PAUS Not valid
n Data Items - PTC

Table 1.32-3 Data Items of Pulse Count Input Block (PTC)
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
BSTS Block status ----- NR
AF ----- 0
tion
AOFS ----- 0
tion
PV Count value ----- SL
PH Presetpoint x ----- SH
DV Remaining count value ----- -----
DL Pre-alarm setpoint x ----- 0
PL PV initial value 0 0
RST Reset command switch x 0, 1 0
HSW Hold command switch x 0, 1 0
neering unit as PV
neering unit as PV
SEE
ALSO For more information about valid block modes of the PTC block, refer to:

n Block Status of Pulse Count Input Block (PTC)

Table 1.32-4 Table Block Status of Pulse Count Input Block (PTC)
Block Status
Level Description
Symbol Name
2 PAUS Pause Pauses pulse counter
CTP Count Up Counter reaches a preset value
1 PALM Pre-Alarm Counter reaches Pre Count Up.
NR Normal Counting or CTUP, PALM not active.

<1.33 Control Operations of YS Blocks> 1-373
1.33 Control Operations of YS Blocks

The YS80/YS100 communication blocks (hereinafter referred to as YS blocks) are function
blocks designated to act as gateways for displaying the faceplate of the YS100 SERIES/
YEWSERIES 80/YEWSERIES BCS electronic control systems (hereinafter referred to as YS
instruments) via the operation and monitoring function of the HIS. The YS instruments are
connected via the ALR121 modules of the FFCS Series/KFCS2/KFCS, via the ACM12 mod-
ules of the LFCS2/LFCS/SFCS/PFCS (RS-422/RS-485 communication modules) or the LCS
(loop communication card) of the migrated FCS (RFCS5, RFCS2). Function block models,
such as SLCD and SLPC, are available for respective YS instruments.
n YS Block Functions
The YS block offers the following functions:
Operation and monitoring of YS instruments from the HIS
Operates and monitors YS instruments via the YS block.
Cascade control of YS instruments and FCS function blocks
By using the SET terminal of the YS block, a cascade loop can be created for the FCS of
the function block and the YS instruments, which are used as a slave loop.
Similar to the faceplate block, the YS block has no special control algorithm. This function
block simply sends and receives data to/from the YS instruments connected to it.
The YS block is used to operate and monitor YS instruments from the HIS, or to control them
from an FCS or supervisory computer.
n Correspondence between Function Block Models and YS

Instruments
See the table below to select the applicable YS block according to the YS instrument to be
connected.
Table 1.33-1 YS Block Model List

Corresponding YS Instrument
Function Block Corresponding Corresponding YS
Model YS80 Instrument BCS Instrument Connected via SI- Connected to
CU ALR121
YS150,
YS170 User-select-
SLCD SLCD
able multifunction
mode
YS170 User-pro-
SLPC SLPC YS170, YS150
grammable mode
SLMC SLMC
SMST-111 SMST-111 YS135 YS135
SMST-121 SMST-121 YS136 YS136
SMRT SMRT
SBSD SBSD
SLBC SLBC
SLCC SLCC
STLD STLD

1.33.1 Applying YS Blocks

The YS block is a function block operating on the FCS. YS instruments can be operated and
monitored from the HIS via the YS block on the FCS.
n Positioning of the YS Block within the System

Similarly to other function blocks, the YS block is generated with a tag name via the Engineer-
ing function and is executed periodically on the FCS. It can also be connected with other func-
tion blocks. The HIS displays the YS blocks process data or parameters, such as PV, SV, and
MV. This allows for indirect operation and monitoring of YS instruments via the YS block.
The figure below shows the positioning of the YS block within the system.
MODE = AUT ALRM = NR HIS Operation and Monitoring Window

PV : 55.0 PH = 100.0
SV = 60.0 PL = 0.0
MV = 59.0
FCS
YS instrument OUT
PID
SET
IN
YS block
Figure 1.33.1-1 YS Block Positioning
IMPORTANT
The YS block and YS instruments are connected via the ALR121/ACM12 on the FFCS series/
KFCS2/KFCS/LFCS2/LFCS/SFCS/PFCS. In such cases, do not use the YS block in ROUT
mode or RCAS mode since high-speed communications cannot be achieved. If the YS block
and YS instruments are connected via the LCS in the migrated FCS (RFCS5, RFCS2), to use
the YS block in ROUT mode and send a manipulated output value from a controller block
(such as PID) to a YS instrument via the YS block, select execute YS block before controller
block.
SEE
ALSO For more information about communication time, refer to:
7, YS Instrument Communication in the Communication with Subsystems Using RIO (IM
33K03L10-50E)
6, YS Instrument Communication (ALR121) in the Communication with Subsystems Using FIO
(IM 33K03L20-50E)

1.33.2 Common Specification of YS Blocks

The YS block provides the following common specification of function block models.
Block Mode Tracking Function
Data Tracking Function
Input Processing
Fully-open/Tightly-shut
Alarm Processing
Others
Processing Timing
n Overview of Common Specification of YS Blocks

The following describes common specifications of YS block. Some YS block models may not
have block modes or data items that correspond to the functions described below.
l Block Mode Tracking Function

This function synchronizes the YS block mode and the operation mode of the YS instrument.
It notifies the YS instruments of a change made from the HIS or Sequence Control functions
to the YS block mode as an operation change. This function also detects changes in the oper-
ation mode of the YS instruments and changes the YS block mode accordingly.
l Data Tracking Function

This function synchronizes process data and various control parameters between the YS
block and YS instruments.
l Input Processing
Among process data of the YS block, PVs are processed via the standard input signal pro-
cessing function.
l Fully-Open/Tightly-Shut
When the YS block is in either MAN or ROUT mode and attempts to set an MV to the YS
instruments, the Fully-open or Tightly-shut function will be executed according to the setting
corresponding to that particular value. When the Fully-open/Tightly-shut function is executed,
the manipulated value of the YS instrument will be -6.3 % or +106.3 %.
l Alarm Processing
The YS block performs the following two types of alarm processing:
The YS block references the alarm function of the YS block and sends a message as a
process alarm.
The YS block independently checks an alarm and sends a message as a process alarm.
n Block Mode Tracking Function

This function synchronizes the YS block mode and the operation mode of the YS instrument.
It notifies the YS instruments of a change made from the HIS or Sequence Control functions
to the YS block mode as an operation change. This function also detects changes in the oper-
ation mode of the YS instruments and changes the YS block mode accordingly.
The operation of a YS instrument, while in cascade mode, is either Analog CAS or Communi-
cation CAS.

Analog CAS
Acquires an SV from the analog cascade setting input terminal of the YS instrument.
Communication CAS
Sets an SV from the FCS (when the SPC/DDC flag of the YS instrument is SPC), or sets
an MV from the FCS (when the SPC/DDC flag of the YS instrument is DDC).
The setting made on the YS instrument determines whether Analog CAS or Communication
CAS is used.
The block mode change operation will differ between Analog CAS and Communication CAS.
IMPORTANT
In Communication CAS, do not use the YS block in RCAS or ROUT mode for the FFCS ser-
ies/KFCS2/KFCS/LFCS2/LFCS/SFCS/PFCS that communicate with YS instruments via the
ALR121/ACM12, since high-speed communications cannot be achieved. The YS block can
be used in CAS mode.
l Mode Changes for Analog CAS

In Analog CAS, set points are entered from other YS instruments.
FCS
YS block
IN
CIN
IN IN MV
MV
Figure 1.33.2-1 Connection Example for Analog CAS
When using the YS instrument in Analog CAS, the mode changes will be as shown below.
Circles
CAS Upper row: YS Block Mode
CAS Lower row: YS Instrument Operation Mode
Arrows
C: Mode change to CAS on DCS or YS
A: Mode change to AUT on DCS or YS
M: Mode change to MAN on DCS or YS
A M
C
A
AUT MAN
AUT MAN
M
Figure 1.33.2-2 Mode Changes for Analog CAS

In Analog CAS, the YS instruments mode changes are handled in the same way as the YS
blocks mode changes made from the HIS or sequence table. When in MAN mode, neither YS
block mode nor YS instruments operation mode can be switched to CAS mode.
In Analog CAS, the cascade setting input value on the YS instrument will be used as an SV in
CAS mode. The YS block matches its SV value to the SV value on the YS instrument side. If
the SET terminal of the YS block is connected, the IMAN status of the master loop will not be
changed even when the mode is switched to CAS. In RCAS or ROUT mode, no controls can
be performed from the supervisory computer.
l Mode Changes when Using the Set Terminal in Communication CAS

In Communication CAS, the mode changes differ depending on whether the SET terminal of
the YS block is used.
If the SET terminal of the YS block is used in Communication CAS, a value entered from the
SET terminal is set in the YS instrument in CAS mode. RCAS and ROUT modes are not avail-
able.
FCS
OUT
PID
SET
YS block
IN
PV MV
Figure 1.33.2-3 Connection when Using the Set Terminal in Communication CAS
When using the SET terminal in Communication CAS, the mode changes will be as shown
below.
******
BUAorBUM
FCS
Fail FCS Circles
Recover Upper row: YS Block Mode
Lower row: YS Instrument Operation Mode
CAS BU: AUT or MAN
SPC
Arrows
M C: Mode change to CAS on either DCS or YS
A: Mode change to AUT on either DCS or YS
A M: Mode change to MAN on either DCS or YS
C
A
AUT MAN
AUT MAN
M
Figure 1.33.2-4 Mode Changes when Using the SET Terminal in Communication CAS

When mode is changed from AUT to CAS, the YS block will enter CAS mode and the YS in-
strument will enter SPC mode.
When changing from MAN mode to CAS mode, it is necessary to change from MAN to AUT
first, then to CAS.
A YS instrument will enter the backup mode when the FCS fails while its YS block is in CAS
mode. A setting on the YS instrument can be set to determine whether the backup mode will
be MAN or AUT.
l Mode Changes when the SET Terminal is not Used in Communication CAS
IMPORTANT
Do not use the FFCS series/KFCS2/KFCS/LFCS2/LFCS/SFCS/PFCS, which communicate
with YS instruments via the ALR121/ACM12, by setting the YS instrument to Communication
CAS but without using the SET terminal of the YS block.
If the SET terminal is not used in Communication CAS, the YS block will not enter CAS mode.
Any attempt on the YS instrument to set the mode to CAS will switch the mode to RCAS or
ROUT.
To control the YS instruments through DDC via PID block and use them as a backup of the
FCS, connect the PID and YS block as shown below. The PID output is enabled when the YS
block is in ROUT mode. In other modes, the PID enters IMAN mode and tracks the MV of the
YS block.
FCS
IN OUT
PID
YS block
PV RMV
PV MV
Figure 1.33.2-5 Connection Example when the SET Terminal is not Used in Communication CAS

Circles
Upper row: YS Block Mode
Lower row: YS Instrument Operation Mode
****** ******
BUAorBUM BUAorBUM Arrows
C: Mode change to CAS
A: Mode change to AUT
M: Mode change to MAN
FCS FCS FCS FCS RCAS: Mode change to RCAS
Recover Fail Recover Fail ROUT: Mode change to ROUT
: Mode change on the DCS
: Mode change on the YS instrument
Other symbols indicate mode changes
RCAS ROUT
from one or the other.
SPC DDC
A M
C RCAS ROUT C
A
AUT MAN
AUT MAN
M
Figure 1.33.2-6 Mode Changes when the SET Terminal is not Used in Communication CAS
During MAN mode, if an attempt is made on the YS instrument to change the mode to CAS,
that operation will be disabled if the SPC/DDC flag of the YS Instrument Internal Status is
SPC. If the SPC/DDC flag is DDC, the YS instrument enters DDC mode, and the YS block
enters ROUT mode. The SPC/DDC flag status is determined by the previous remote mode.
Only AUT mode can be changed to RCAS mode, while only MAN mode can be changed to
ROUT mode.
l Mode Changes Specific to the SMST Block
IMPORTANT
In Communication CAS, do not use the YS block in RCAS or ROUT mode for the FFCS ser-
ies/KFCS2/KFCS/LFCS2/LFCS/SFCS/PFCS that communicate with YS instruments via the
ALR121/ACM12, since high-speed communications cannot be achieved. The YS block can
be used in CAS mode.
The figure below shows the mode changes of the SMST-111 and SMST-121 blocks.

Set terminal is connected Set terminal is not connected
Analog CAS for Communication CAS for Communication CAS
FCS FCS
CAS CAS Fail Fail RCAS
CAS DDC DDC
FCS FCS
Recover Recover C
C C
M M RCAS M
******
MAN MAN BUM MAN
MAN MAN MAN
FCS
SMST-111 FCS Fail
SMST-121 Recover
Analog CAS Communication CAS Circles

Upper row: YS Block Mode
CAS ROUT Lower row: YS Instrument Operation Mode
CAS DDC
Arrows
C: Mode change to CAS
C A: Mode change to AUT
C
M: Mode change to MAN
M ROUT M RCAS: Mode change to RCAS
ROUT: Mode change to ROUT
: Mode change on the DCS
MAN MAN : Mode change on the YS instrument
MAN MAN Other symbols indicate mode changes
from one or the other.
Figure 1.33.2-7 Mode Changes of the SMST Blocks
When Analog CAS is applied in the SMST-111 block, the mode will either be MAN or CAS.
When Communication CAS is connected to set terminal of SMST-111 block, the mode will be
MAN, CAS, otherwise the mode will be RCAS. (When the mode is CAS or RCAS, the YS in-
strument will perform DDC operation.)
If Analog CAS is applied in the SMST-121 block, the mode will either be MAN or CAS. While,
if communication CAS is applied in the SMST-121 block, the mode will be either MAN or
ROUT.
l Mode Changes Specific to the SBSD and STLD Blocks

The SBSD and STLD instruments can only operate in AUT mode. AUT or CAS can be selec-
ted for the display, depending on the YS instrument setting. From the YS block side, the mode
can be changed to out of service (O/S), and from O/S to AUT or CAS. The mode may change
from O/S to something other than specified in the YS instrument. This is because the mode
first changes to the one specified in the YS block before switching to the mode specified in
the YS instrument.
l Fixing to MAN Mode using the Mode Change Interlock Function

The mode can be fixed to MAN via the value of the connection destination of the YS blocks
INT terminal. When the mode change is interlocked, sending a command to the YS block to
change the mode to other than MAN will generate an error. Any attempt to change the mode
on the YS instrument side will be canceled since the mode is forcibly fixed to MAN from the
YS block.
l Mode Changes in the Event of a Communication Error

When an error occurs in communication with the YS instrument, the YS block enters IMAN
mode (combined mode with the previous modes).

If communication between the YS instrument and FCS is interrupted during the CAS opera-
tion (Communication CAS), the YS instrument enters the backup mode automatically. If the
YS instrument is still in the backup mode after communication has resumed, the YS block is-
sues a command to the YS instrument to cancel the backup mode.
n Data Tracking Function

The Data Tracking Function synchronizes process data and various control parameters be-
tween the YS block and YS instruments.
This function collects control parameters and process data such as PV, SV, and MV from the
YS instruments and sets them as YS block data. If any data is set for the YS block from the
HIS, that data will also be set in the YS instruments via this function.
Each YS instrument model has different process data and control parameters. Accordingly,
each YS block has different process data and control parameters, depending on the corre-
sponding YS instrument. Some data only exists in the YS block but not in the YS instrument.
Process data and parameters of the YS block can be handled in one of the following man-
ners:
Only tracks YS instrument data but cannot be changed from the YS block side
Example: PV
Exchanges data between the YS instrument and YS block
Examples: SV, MV, MH, ML, P, I, D
Maintains value in the YS block, independent of the YS instrument
Examples: SUM, PH, PL
In certain types of YS instruments, parameters cannot be changed via communication. Such
data can only reference the YS instrument data.
Data relating to the Input Processing and Alarm Processing, such as SUM, PH, and PL, which
will be discussed later, are handled independently from the YS instrument.
Details on which data relates to which function will be explained with the functions of respec-
tive function block models.
IMPORTANT
Be sure to set batch setpoints (BSET) to the SBSD and SLBC from the HIS prior to a batch
start. Changing a BSET after a batch start may result in an immediate batch end.
n Input Processing
The YS block can perform the following Common Input Processing.
Digital Filter and Calibration functions are not available.
l Input Signal Conversion

IOP Detection Value
There are two options for YS block input signal conversions: non-conversion and square root
conversion. Square root conversion can be selected when the connected YS instrument uses
the square-law scale. The YS blocks other than SLCD have only one option that is non-con-
version.
An YS block can have its own PV input open high limit and low limit for IOP+/IOP- detection.
When a PV is greater than the value for IOP+ detection limit, the data will be in IOP+ status,
vice versa, when the PV is smaller than the IOP- detection limit, the data will be in IOP- sta-
tus. IOP detection value can be specified on Function Block Detail Builder.

IOP Detection Value
IOP+ Detection Set Value
Can be set between 100 % to 125 %.
IOP- Detection Set Value
Can be set between -25 % to 0 %.
The default setting is -5.50.
l Totalizer
In the YS80 Block (SLCD, SLPC, SLMC, SMST-111, SMST-121, SMRT), the PVs are total-
ized and the SUM is created.
The YS BCS Block (SBSD, SLBC, SLCC, STLD) displays the YS instrument SUM without any
changes. To display the correct totalized value, set the SH and SL according to the decimal
places on the YS instruments.
IMPORTANT
The decimal point positions of PV and SUM can be set independently of the YS instruments.
On the other hand, the YS BCS block sets the same decimal point positions for SUM and PV.
Therefore, when the decimal point positions are different between PV and SUM on the YS in-
strument, the decimal point position of SUM displayed on the YS BCS block differs from that
of the YS instrument.
l PV Overshoot
PV is set to an SH value when the IOP+ is detected via the Alarm Processing function. PV is
also set to an SL value when IOP- is detected or when there is an error in communication with
the YS instruments.
n Output Signal Processing

When the MV is set to 0 % or 100 % from the YS block, the YS instrument outputs Fully-open/
Tightly-shut values. When the Operation Low Limit Setpoint (ML) and the Manipulated Varia-
ble High Limit Setpoint (MH) are set to 0 % and 100 %, respectively, from the YS block, the
ML and MH on the YS instrument will be -6.3 % and +106.3 %, respectively.
l Tight-Shut and Full-Open

An YS instrument can continuously output an MV ranging from -6.3 % and +106.3 %. In MAN
mode, an YS instrument can output an MV less than 0 % and greater than 100 %, as long as
the value is within the above range.
A YS block can output an MV ranging from 0 % to 100 %. When the YS block passes a 0 %
MV or a 100 % MV to YS instrument, the YS instrument will output a -6.3 % MV or a 106.3 %
MV as Tight-Shut or Full-Open signals of the YS instrument. When the YS block passes an
output signal to YS instrument between the value of 0 % and 100 %, the YS instrument will
output the same output without change. If a YS blocks ML is set as 0 % and MH is set as 100
%, the ML and MH in the corresponding YS instrument will be -6.3 % for ML and 106.3 % for
MH respectively. This is caused by the Tight-Shut and Full-Open functionality of the YS instru-
ment. So that if the ML or the MH needs to be set as 0 % and 100 %, the setting should be
performed on YS instrument but not on YS block. A YS instrument MV can be manipulated on
YS block when the YS instrument is in MAN mode and the YS block is in ROUT mode.
When a YS block is in ROUT mode, it always tracks the values in YS instrument unless the
YS block is being manipulated for passing an MV to the YS instrument. When the MV in the

YS instrument is less than 0 %, the YS block will take it as a 0 % value, while if the MV in the
YS instrument is greater than 100 %, the YS block will take it as a 100 % value.
l Manipulated Variable High Limit Setpoint (MH) / Manipulated Variable Low

Limit Setpoint (ML)
The Manipulated Variable High Limit Setpoint (MH) and the Manipulated Variable Low Limit
Setpoint (ML) are specified within the range between -6.3 % and +106.3 % when set from the
YS instrument, and between 0 % and 100 % when set from the YS block. However, if the ML
is set to 0 % from the YS block, the ML on the YS instrument will be -6.3 %. Similarly, if the
MH is set to 100 % from the YS block, the ML on the YS instrument will be +106.3 %. If you
wish to set the ML to 0 % or MH to 100 %, set these values on the YS instrument.
n Alarm Processing
Leak Check, Pre-Batch Alarm, Batch End Alarm, Integral Deviation Alarm Level-One, Integral Devia-
tion Alarm Level-Two
The YS block handles alarms generated on the YS block and some alarms generated on the
YS instruments.
l Processing of Alarms Detected by YS Instrument

The YS instrument checks for OOP, IOP, HI, LO, DV+, and DV-. The YS block only acquires
the OOP and reflects it in the alarm status.
The SBSD and SLBC blocks not only acquire the OOP but also the END (Batch End), PRE
(Pre-batch), LEAK (Leak) alarms from the YS instrument and reflects them in the alarm sta-
tus. The SLCC block not only acquires the OOP but also DV+ (Level-1 Totalization Deviation
Alarm) and HDV (Level-2 Totalization Deviation Alarm) alarms from the YS instrument and re-
flects them in the alarm status.
Enable or disable the END, PRE, LEAK alarm statuses on SBSD, SLBC blocks, enable or
disable the DV+, HDV alarm statuses on SLCC blocks can be set on Function Block Detail
Builder.
Leak Check : Choose [Yes] or [No].
The default setting is [No].
Pre-Batch Alarm : Choose [Yes] or [No].
Batch End Alarm: Choose [Yes] or [No].
Integral Deviation Alarm Level-One: Choose [Yes] or [No].
Integral Deviation Alarm Level-Two: Choose [Yes] or [No].
l Processing of Alarms Detected by YS Block

All YS blocks detect IOP/IOP- independently of the YS instrument. When the PV exceeds the
IOP+ detection set value, it is considered an IOP. When the PV falls below the IOP- detection
set value, it is considered an IOP-. The detection of IOP or IOP- will not change the block
mode.
The YS80 blocks independently check HI, LO, DV+, and DV- as part of the Input Signal Con-
version functions. Alarm setpoints such as PH, PL, and DL are set independently from the YS
instrument parameters.

All YS blocks will generate both an OOP and IOP in the event of an error in communication
with the YS instrument. Thus, the OOP and IOP each contains two meanings, one being the
alarm detected by the YS instruments mentioned previously.
An invalid terminal definition will cause all YS blocks to generate a CNF. Causes of invalid
definitions include when the terminal is not connected to the applicable YS instrument model
and when it is not connected via an ACM12 or an LCS.
SEE
ALSO For more information about YS blocks alarm checks, refer to:
n Others
The YS block has the following functions according to the standard PID blocks.
l Setpoint Push-Back
This function equalizes SV, CSV, and RSV according to the mode of the function block.
Table 1.33.2-1 Block Modes and Equalization

Block Mode Equalization Operation
AUT, MAN, ROUT, CAS (analog CAS) SV CSV, RSV
CAS (Communication CAS) CSV SV, RSV
RCAS RSV SV, CSV
l Setpoint Limiter
This function regulates data set to the RSV from the supervisory computer within the setpoint
high and low limits while in RCAS mode (SPC mode).
SEE
ALSO For more information about Setpoint Push-back and Setpoint Limiter, refer to:
nSetpoint Value Pushback on page 1-40
n Processing Timing
The only processing timing available for the YS blocks is a periodic startup. Moreover, only
the basic scan period can be selected as the scan period to execute the periodic startup. It is
not possible to specify the medium-speed scan period (*1) or the high-speed scan period.

<1.34 YS Controller Block (SLCD)> 1-385
1.34 YS Controller Block (SLCD)

By connecting the SLCD block to the SLCD Indicating Controller, the SLCD Indicating Con-
troller can be operated and monitored from the HIS.
n YS Controller Block (SLCD)

Connection
The connection of the SLCD block and the SLCD Indicating Controller allows the HIS to oper-
ate and monitor the controller.
The figure below shows the function block diagram of the SLCD block.
SET INT
CAS RCAS
CSV RSV
AUT/MAN
SV
SLCD IN SLCD instrument image
PV MV
Figure 1.34-1 Function Block Diagram of the YS Controller Block (SLCD)
The table below shows the connection methods and the connection destinations of SLCD
block I/O terminals.
Table 1.34-1 I/O Terminal Connection Methods and Connection Destinations of YS Controller Block
(SLCD)
Connection Method(*1) Connection Destination(*1)
I/O Terminal Data Refer- Data Set- Terminal Function
Process I/O Soft I/O
ence ting Connection Block
YS Instru-
IN x - - x (*2) - -
ment
Set Value
SET - - x - - x
Input
Interlock
INT Switch In- x - x x x
put
*1: x: Connection is possible
-: Connection is not possible
: Connection is possible only when integrating with a Switch Block (SW-33, SW-91) or Inter-Station Connection Block (ADL)
*2: Connection is possible only when integrating with YS instruments
n Function of YS Controller Block (SLCD)

The SLCD block performs input processing, control computation processing, output process-
The only processing timing available for the SLCD block is a periodic startup. Moreover, only

SEE
ALSO For more information about the common functions of the YS blocks, refer to:
1.33, Control Operations of YS Blocks on page 1-373
for the SLCD block, refer to:
n Control Computation Processing of the YS Controller Block (SLCD)

l Setpoint Push-Back Function
This function equalizes the setpoints (SV), cascade setpoints (CSV), and remote setpoints
(RSV) in respect to the YS block mode.
SEE
ALSO For more information about the setpoint pushback function, refer to:
lSetpoint Push-Back on page 1-384
l Setpoint Limiter Function

high and low limits when the YS block is in RCAS mode (SPC mode).
SEE
ALSO For more information about the setpoint limiter function, refer to:
lSetpoint Limiter on page 1-384
l Mode Change Interlock Function

This function locks the YS block mode to MAN depending on the connection destination of the
YS blocks INT terminal.
SEE
ALSO For more information about the mode change interlock function, refer to:
lFixing to MAN Mode using the Mode Change Interlock Function on page 1-380
n Data Items of YS Controller Block (SLCD)

Table 1.34-2 Data Items of YS Controller Block (SLCD)
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
MODE Block mode xx - O/S (MAN)
ALRM Alarm status - - NR

Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
AFLS Alarm flashing status - - 0
AF - - 0
tion
AOFS - - 0
tion
PV Process variable - PV engineering unit value SL
SV Setpoint xx SL
neering unit as PV
CSV Cascade setpoint - SL
neering unit as PV
RSV Remote setpoint - SL
neering unit as PV
DV Control deviation value - 0
neering unit as PV
MV Manipulated output value xx 0.0 to 100.0 % 0
RMV - 0.0 to 100.0 % 0
value
PH High-limit alarm setpoint SL to SH SH
PL Low-limit alarm setpoint SL to SH SL
DL Deviation alarm setpoint (SH-SL) 0
Manipulated variable high
MH xx (*2) 0.0 to 100.0 % 100
setpoint
Manipulated variable low
ML xx (*2) 0.0 to 100.0 % 0
setpoint
SVH Set high setpoint x SL to SH SH
SVL Set low setpoint x SL to SH SL
P Proportional band xx (*2) 6.3 to 999.9 % 100
I Integral time xx (*2) 1 to 9999 sec 20
D Derivative time xx (*2) 0 to 9999 sec 0
OPHI Output high-limit index x 0.0 to 100.0 % 100
OPLO Output low-limit index x 0.0 to 100.0 % 0
UAID User application ID x - 0
SH PV scale high limit - -
neering unit as PV
SL PV scale low limit - -
neering unit as PV
MSH MV scale high limit - Fixed to 100 % 100 %
MSL MV scale low limit - Fixed to 0 % 0%
RAW Raw input data - 4096 to 20480 (*3) -
*1: xx: Entry is permitted from both the YS instrument and HIS
x: Entry is permitted from the HIS only
: Data for the YS block can be entered from the HIS, the data for the YS instrument can be entered from the YS instrument
-: Entry is not permitted
*2: MH, ML, P, I, D parameters can be entered from the HIS with SLCD Style E only.
*3: The range of 4096 (0x1000) to 20480 (0x5000) corresponds to the range of 0.0 % to 100.0 %.

SEE
ALSO For more information about valid block modes of the SLCD block, refer to:

<1.35 YS Programmable Controller Block (SLPC)> 1-389
1.35 YS Programmable Controller Block (SLPC)

By connecting the SLPC block to the SLPC programmable indicating controller, the SLPC
programmable indicating controller can be operated and monitored from the HIS.
n YS Programmable Controller Block (SLPC)

Connection
The connection of the SLPC block and the SLPC programmable indicating controller allows
the HIS to operate and monitor the controller.
The figure below shows the function block diagram of the SLPC block.
SET INT
CAS RCAS
CSV RSV
AUT/MAN
SV
SLPC IN SLPC instrument image
PV MV
Figure 1.35-1 Function Block Diagram of the YS Programmable Controller Block (SLPC)
The table below shows the connection methods and the connection destinations of SLPC
Table 1.35-1 I/O Terminal Connection Methods and Connection Destinations of YS Programmable
Controller Block (SLPC)
I/O Terminal Data Refer- Data Set- Terminal Software Function
Process I/O
ence ting Connection I/O Block
YS Instru-
IN x - - x (*2) - -
ment
Set Value
SET - - x - - x
Input
Interlock
put
n Function of YS Programmable Controller Block (SLPC)

The SLPC block performs input processing, control computation processing, output process-
The only processing timing available for the SLPC block is a periodic startup. Moreover, only

SEE
for the SLPC block, refer to:
n Control Computation Processing of the YS Programmable

Controller Block (SLPC)
SEE

SEE

SEE
n Data Items of YS Programmable Controller Block (SLPC)

Table 1.35-2 Data Items of YS Programmable Controller Block (SLPC)
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)

Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
AF - - 0
tion
AOFS - - 0
tion
SV Setpoint xx SL
neering unit as PV
neering unit as PV
neering unit as PV
neering unit as PV
RMV - 0.0 to 100.0 % 0
value
MH xx 0.0 to 100.0 % 100
setpoint
ML xx 0.0 to 100.0 % 0
setpoint
I Integral time xx 1 to 9999 sec 20
D Derivative time xx 0 to 9999 sec 0
BS (*3) Computation parameter 1 xx -8.000 to 8.000 0.0
CS (*3) Computation parameter 2 xx -8.000 to 8.000 1.000
AUX1 (*3) Auxiliary input 1 - 0.0 to 100.0 % -
neering unit as PV
neering unit as PV

Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
*2: If the parameter is entered on HIS, the parameter may not be properly transmitted to SLPC instrument so that it is necessary
to set the parameter on SLPC instrument.
*3: BS and CS correspond to P01 and P02 of the SLPC instrument. AUX1 to AUX3 correspond to analog output registers Y4 to
Y6 of the SLPC instrument.
SEE
ALSO For more information about valid block modes of the SLPC block, refer to:

<1.36 YS Programmable Controller Block with Pulse Width Output (SLMC)> 1-393
1.36 YS Programmable Controller Block with

Pulse Width Output (SLMC)
By connecting the SLMC block to the SLMC Programmable Indicating Controller with Pulse
Width Output, the SLMC Programmable Indicating Controller with Pulse Width Output can be
operated and monitored from the HIS.
n YS Programmable Controller Block with Pulse Width Output (SLMC)

Connection
The connection of the SLMC block and the SLMC Programmable Indicating Controller Block
with Pulse Width Output allows the HIS to operate and monitor the controller.
The figure below shows the function block diagram of the SLMC block.
SET INT
CAS RCAS
CSV RSV
AUT/MAN
SV
SLMC IN SLMC instrument image
PV MV
Figure 1.36-1 Function Block Diagram of the YS Programmable Controller Block with Pulse Width Out-
put (SLMC)
The table below shows the connection methods and the connection destinations of SLMC
Table 1.36-1 I/O Terminal Connection Methods and Connection Destinations of YS Programmable
Controller Block with Pulse Width Output (SLMC)
Process I/O
YS Instru-
IN x - - x (*2) - -
ment
Set Value
SET - - x - - x
Input
Interlock
put

n Function of YS Programmable Controller Block with Pulse Width

Output (SLMC)
The SLMC block performs input processing, control computation processing, output process-
The only processing timing available for the SLMC block is a periodic startup. Moreover, only
SEE
for the SLMC block, refer to:
n Control Computation Processing of the YS Programmable

Controller Block with Pulse Width Output (SLMC)
SEE

SEE


SEE
n Data Items of YS Programmable Controller Block with Pulse Width

Output (SLMC)
Table 1.36-2 Data Items of YS Programmable Controller Block with Pulse Width Output (SLMC)
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
AF - - 0
tion
AOFS - - 0
tion
SV Setpoint xx SL
neering unit as PV
neering unit as PV
neering unit as PV
neering unit as PV
RMV - 0.0 to 100.0 % 0
value
MH xx 0.0 to 100.0 % 100
setpoint
ML xx 0.0 to 100.0 % 0
setpoint
I Integral time xx 1 to 9999 sec 20
BS (*3) Computation parameter 1 xx -8.000 to 8.000 0.0
CS (*3) Computation parameter 2 xx -8.000 to 8.000 1.000

Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
neering unit as PV
neering unit as PV
*2: If the parameter is entered on HIS, the parameter may not be properly transmitted to SLMC instrument so that it is necessary
to set the parameter on SLMC instrument.
*3: BS and CS correspond to P01 and P02 of the SLMC instrument. AUX1 to AUX3 correspond to analog output registers Y4 to
Y6 of the SLMC instrument.
SEE
ALSO For more information about valid block modes of the SLMC block, refer to:

<1.37 YS Manual Station Block with SV Output (SMST-111)> 1-397
1.37 YS Manual Station Block with SV Output

(SMST-111)
By connecting the SMST-111 block to the SMST-111 AUTO/MANUAL Station for SV Setting,
the SMST-111 AUTO/MANUAL Station for SV Setting can be operated and monitored from
the HIS.
n YS Manual Station Block with SV Output (SMST-111)

Connection
The connection of the SMST-111 block and the SMST-111 AUTO/MANUAL Station for SV
Setting allows the HIS to operate and monitor the station.
The figure below shows the function block diagram of the SMST-111 block.
SET INT
CAS RCAS
CSV RSV
AUT/MAN
SV
SMST-111 IN SMST-111 instrument image
PV
Figure 1.37-1 Function Block Diagram of the YS Manual Station Block with SV Output (SMST-111)
The table below shows the connection methods and the connection destinations of the
SMST-111 block I/O terminals.
Table 1.37-1 I/O Terminal Connection Methods and Connection Destinations of YS Manual Station
Block with SV Output (SMST-111)
Process I/O
YS Instru-
IN x - - x (*2) - -
ment
Set Value
SET - - x - - x
Input
Interlock
put

n Function of YS Manual Station Block with SV Output (SMST-111)

The SMST-111 block performs input processing, control computation processing, and alarm
processing.
The only processing timing available for the SMST-111 block is a periodic startup. Moreover,
only the basic scan period can be selected as the scan period to execute the periodic startup.
SEE
For more information about the types of input processing and alarm processing possible for the SMST-111
block, refer to:
n Control Computation Processing of the YS Manual Station Block

with SV Output (SMST-111)
SEE

SEE

SEE

n Data Items of YS Manual Station Block with SV Output (SMST-111)

Table 1.37-2 Data Items of YS Manual Station Block with SV Output (SMST-111)
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
AF - - 0
tion
AOFS - - 0
tion
SV Setpoint xx SL
neering unit as PV
neering unit as PV
neering unit as PV
neering unit as PV
neering unit as PV
SEE
ALSO For more information about valid block modes of the SMST-111 block, refer to:

<1.38 YS Manual Station Block with MV Output Lever (SMST-121)> 1-400
1.38 YS Manual Station Block with MV Output

Lever (SMST-121)
By connecting the SMST-121 block to the SMST-121 AUTO/MANUAL Station for MV Setting,
the SMST-121 AUTO/MANUAL Station for MV Setting can be operated and monitored from
the HIS.
n YS Manual Station Block with MV Output Lever (SMST-121)

Connection
The connection of the SMST-121 block and the SMST-121 AUTO/MANUAL Station for MV
Setting allows the HIS to operate and monitor the station.
The figure below shows the function block diagram of the SMST-121 block.
INT
SMST-121 IN SMST-121 instrument image
PV MV
Figure 1.38-1 Function Block Diagram of the YS Manual Station Block with MV Output Lever
(SMST-121)
The table below shows the connection methods and the connection destinations of the
SMST-121 block I/O terminals.
Table 1.38-1 I/O Terminal Connection Methods and Connection Destinations of YS Manual Station
Block with MV Output Lever (SMST-121)
Process I/O
YS Instru-
IN x - - x (*2) - -
ment
Interlock
put
n Function of YS Manual Station Block with MV Output (SMST-121)

The SMST-121 block performs input processing, control computation processing, output pro-

The only processing timing available for the SMST-121 block is a periodic startup. Moreover,
only the basic scan period can be selected as the scan period to execute the periodic startup.
SEE
for the SMST-121 block, refer to:
n Control Computation Processing of the YS Manual Station Block

with MV Output Lever (SMST-121)
SEE
n Data Items of YS Manual Station Block with MV Output Lever

(SMST-121)
Table 1.38-2 Data Items of YS Manual Station Block with MV Output Lever (SMST-121)
Entry Permitted or
Not(*1)
Alarm flashing sta-
AFLS - - 0
tus
Alarm detection
AF - - 0
specification
Alarm masking
AOFS - - 0
specification
PV engineering unit
PV Process variable - SL
value
Engineering unit
SUM Totalizer value x 0
value
Manipulated output
MV xx 0.0 to 100.0 % 0
value
Remote manipu-
RMV - 0.0 to 100.0 % 0
lated output value

Entry Permitted or
Not(*1)
High-limit alarm set-
PH SL to SH SH
point
Low-limit alarm set-
PL SL to SH SL
point
Manipulated varia-
MH xx 0.0 to 100.0 % 100
ble high setpoint
Manipulated varia-
ML xx 0.0 to 100.0 % 0
ble low setpoint
Output high-limit in-
OPHI x 0.0 to 100.0 % 100
dex
Output low-limit in-
OPLO x 0.0 to 100.0 % 0
dex
Value in the same
SH PV scale high limit - engineering unit as -
PV
Value in the same
SL PV scale low limit - engineering unit as -
PV
SEE
ALSO For more information about valid block modes of the SMST-121 block, refer to:

<1.39 YS Ratio Set Station Block (SMRT)> 1-403
1.39 YS Ratio Set Station Block (SMRT)

By connecting the SMRT block to the Ratio Set Station (SMRT), the SMRT Ratio Set Station
can be operated and monitored from the HIS.
n YS Ratio Set Station Block (SMRT)

Connection
The connection of the SMRT block and the SMRT Ratio Set Station allows the HIS to operate
and monitor the station.
The figure below shows the function block diagram of the SMRT block.
SET INT
CAS RCAS
CSV RSV
AUT/MAN
SV
SMRT IN SMRT instrument image
PV MV
Figure 1.39-1 Function Block Diagram of the YS Ratio Set Station Block (SMRT)
The table below shows the connection methods and the connection destinations of SMRT
Table 1.39-1 I/O Terminal Connection Methods and Connection Destinations of YS Ratio Set Station
Block (SMRT)
Process I/O
YS Instru-
IN x - - x (*2) - -
ment
Set Value
SET - - x - - x
Input
Interlock
put
n Function of YS Ratio Set Station Block (SMRT)

The SMRT block performs input processing, control computation processing, output process-
The only processing timing available for the SMRT block is a periodic startup. Moreover, only

SEE
for the SMRT block, refer to:
n Control Computation Processing of the YS Ratio Set Station Block

(SMRT)
SEE

SEE

SV Range, Internally Computed Ratio Range
SMRT Ratio Set Instrument converts the ratio setpoint value (SV), based on the engineering
unit, into an internal ratio value (SVn) for internal computation.
The communication between the SMRT Ratio Set Instrument and the SMRT function block
only conveys the internal ratio value (SVn), the setpoint value based on the engineering unit
(SV) is not conveyed.
In order to make the setpoint value (SV) on the SMRT function block equal to the setpoint val-
ue (SV) on SMRT Ratio Set Instrument, when the SMRT function block receives or sends the
internal ratio value, the conversion based on the scale settings is performed with the following
formulae:
When SMRT function block converts the received internal ratio svn into its SV:

svn svnLo
SV = X (SSH SSL) + SSL
svnHi svnLo
When SMRT function block sends it SV to SMRT Ratio Set Instrument, it converts the SV into
the internal ratio svn:
SV SSL
svn = X (svnHi svnLo) + svnLo
SSH SSL
SV : Ratio Setpoint value

svn : Internal ratio value communicated between the SMRT Ratio Set Instrument and the
SMRT function block
svnHi : Upper limit of Internal ratio value
svnLo : Lower limit of Internal ratio value
SVH : Upper limit of SV
SVL : Lower limit of SV
If both the upper limit and lower limit of the internal ratio value are set with 0.0, the scale con-
version cannot be performed. Under this circumstance, the internal ratio value in SMRT Ratio
Set Instrument will become the setpoint value of SMRT function block.
The ranges of the SMRT function block ratio setpoint value (SV) and the internal ratio value
(svn) can be defined on the function block details builder.
The upper limit of (SSH) and the lower limit (SSL) of the SMRT function block SV range
should be the same as the upper limit of (SEH) and the lower limit (SEL) of SMRT Ratio Set
Instrument SV range respectively. The upper limit (svnHi) and the lower limit (svnLo) of the
SMRT function block svn range should be the same as the upper limit of the range (SRH) and
the lower limit (SRL) of SMRT Ratio Set Instrument SVn range respectively.
Upper Limit of SV Range
Up to 7 digits including sign and decimal point
Default 8.000
Lower Limit of SV Range
Up to 7 digits including sign and decimal point
Default 0.000
Upper Limit of svn Range
A value between 0.000 and 8.000
Default 8.000
Lower Limit of svn Range
A value between 0.000 and 8.000
Default 0.000

SEE

n Data Items of YS Ratio Set Station Block (SMRT)

Table 1.39-2 Data Items of YS Ratio Set Station Block (SMRT)
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
AF - - 0
tion
AOFS - - 0
tion
SV (*2) Ratio setpoint xx SSL to SSH SL
CSV Cascade ratio setpoint - SSL to SSH SL
RSV Remote ratio setpoint - SSL to SSH SL
RMV - 0.0 to 100.0 % 0
value
DL Lamp constant xx (SSH-SSL) 100.0
MH xx 0.0 to 100.0 % 100
setpoint
ML xx 0.0 to 100.0 % 0
setpoint
SVH Ratio setting high setpoint x SSL to SSH SSH
SVL Ratio setting low setpoint x SSL to SSH SSL
EB External bias - 0.0 to 100.0 % 0
P1 Computation parameter 1 xx -800.0 to 800.0 0
CALC Computed value - 0.0 to 100.0 % 0.0 %
neering unit as PV
neering unit as PV
SSH (*3) SV scale high limit - Fixed to 8.000 8.000
SSL (*3) SV scale low limit - Fixed to 0.000 0.000

Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
*2: The setpoint value (SV) of SMRT function block should be the same as the setpoint value (SV) based on the engineering unit
in SMRT Ratio Set Instrument.
*3: The upper limit of (SSH) and the lower limit (SSL) of the setpoint value (SV) in SMRT function block SV should be the same
as the upper limit of (SEH) and the lower limit (SEL) of the setpoint value (SV) in SMRT Ratio Set Instrument respectively.
SEE
ALSO For more information about valid block modes of the SMRT block, refer to:

<1.40 YS Batch Set Station Block (SBSD)> 1-408
1.40 YS Batch Set Station Block (SBSD)

By connecting the SBSD block to the Batch Set Station (SBSD), the SBSD Batch Set Station
can be operated and monitored from the HIS.
n YS Batch Set Station Block (SBSD)

Connection
The connection of the SBSD block and the SBSD Batch Set Station allows the HIS to operate
and monitor the station.
The figure below shows the function block diagram of the SBSD block.
RCAS
RSV
AUT
SV
SBSD IN SBSD instrument image
PV MV
Figure 1.40-1 Function Block Diagram of the YS Batch Set Station Block (SBSD)
IMPORTANT
Be sure to set batch setpoints (BSET) to the YS Batch Set Station Block (SBSD) from the HIS
prior to a batch start. Changing a BSET after a batch start may result in an immediate batch
end.
The table below shows the connection methods and the connection destinations of SBSD
Table 1.40-1 I/O Terminal Connection Methods and Connection Destinations of YS Batch Set Station
Block (SBSD)
Process I/O
YS Instru-
IN x - - x (*2) - -
ment
n Function of YS Batch Set Station Block (SBSD)

The SBSD block performs input processing and alarm processing.

The only processing timing available for the SBSD block is a periodic startup. Moreover, only
SEE
For more information about the types of input processing and alarm processing possible for the SBSD block,
refer to:
n Control Computation Processing of YS Batch Set Station Block

(SBSD)
There are no items subject to the SBSD blocks control computation processing.
n Data Items of YS Batch Set Station Block (SBSD)

Table 1.40-2 Data Items of YS Batch Set Station Block (SBSD)
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
MODE Block mode xx - O/S (AUT)
AF - - 0
tion
AOFS - - 0
tion
PV Instantaneous flow - PV engineering unit value SL
SV Command switch xx 0 to 8 0
RSV Remote command switch - 0 to 8 0
MV Demand output value xx 0.0 to 100.0 % 0
PH High-limit flow setpoint xx SL to SH SH
PL Initial flow setpoint xx SL to SH SL
Initial flow totalizer limit val-
VL xx SL to SH SL
ue
BSET Batch setpoint xx Engineering unit value 0
Instrumental error compen-
CC1 xx -1.0000 to 1.0000 0.0000
sation coefficient a (*2)
First-order compensation
CC2 xx -1.0000 to 1.0000 0.0000
coefficient b (*3) (*2)
Second-order compensa-
CC3 xx -1.0000 to 1.0000 0.0000
tion coefficient g (*3) (*2)
CC4 Density r (*4) xx 0.5000 to 1.2000 1.0000

Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
neering unit as PV
neering unit as PV
*2: The decimal point position for the coefficient can be specified on the YS instrument, while that is fixed to 4 decimal places on
the YS BCS block. Therefore, the decimal point position of the YS BCS block will not match that of the YS instrument unless
the coefficient on the YS instrument also has 4 decimal places. For example, if the YS BCS block shows the coefficient to 3
decimal places, e.g. 1.000, the YS BCS block will display 0.1000.
*3: Valid only when the general secondary expression is selected for the correction computation. Setting a new value for CC2 will
change the CC4 data.
*4: Valid only when the ASTM method is selected for the correction computation. Setting a new value for CC4 will change the
CC2 data.
SEE
ALSO For more information about valid block modes of the SBSD block, refer to:

<1.41 YS Batch Controller Block (SLBC)> 1-411
1.41 YS Batch Controller Block (SLBC)

By connecting the SLBC block to the Batch Controller (SLBC), the SLBC Batch Controller can
be operated and monitored from the HIS.
n YS Batch Controller Block (SLBC)

Connection
The connection of the SLBC block and the SLBC Batch Controller allows the HIS to operate
and monitor the controller.
The figure below shows the function block diagram of the SLBC block.
INT
RCAS
RSV
AUT/MAN
SV
SLBC IN SLBC instrument image
PV MV
Figure 1.41-1 Function Block Diagram of the YS Batch Controller Block (SLBC)
IMPORTANT
Be sure to set batch setpoints (BSET) to the SLBC from the HIS prior to a batch start. Chang-
ing a BSET after a batch start may result in an immediate batch end.
The table below shows the connection methods and the connection destinations of SLBC
Table 1.41-1 I/O Terminal Connection Methods and Connection Destinations of YS Batch Controller
Block (SLBC)
Process I/O
YS Instru-
IN x - - x (*2) - -
ment
Interlock
put

n Function of YS Batch Controller Block (SLBC)

The SLBC block performs input processing, control computation processing, output process-
The only processing timing available for the SLBC block is a periodic startup. Moreover, only
SEE
for the SLBC block, refer to:
n Control Computation Processing of the YS Batch Controller Block

(SLBC)
SEE
n Data Items of YS Batch Controller Block (SLBC)

Table 1.41-2 Data Items of YS Batch Controller Block (SLBC)
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
AF - - 0
tion
AOFS - - 0
tion
SV Command switch xx 0 to 8 0
RSV Remote command switch - 0 to 8 0

Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
RMV - 0.0 to 100.0 % 0
value
PH High-limit flow setpoint xx SL to SH SH
PL Initial flow setpoint xx SL to SH SL
Initial flow totalizer limit val-
VL xx SL to SH SL
ue
BSET Batch setpoint xx Engineering unit value 0
CC1 xx -1.0000 to 1.0000 0.0000
sation coefficient (*2)
CC2 xx -1.0000 to 1.0000 0.0000
coefficient (*3) (*2)
CC3 xx -1.0000 to 1.0000 0.0000
tion coefficient (*3) (*2)
CC4 Density (*4) xx 0.5000 to 1.2000 1.0000
neering unit as PV
neering unit as PV
CC2 data.
SEE
ALSO For more information about valid block modes of the SLBC block, refer to:

<1.42 YS Blending Controller Block (SLCC)> 1-414
1.42 YS Blending Controller Block (SLCC)

By connecting the SLCC block to the SLCC Blending Controller, the SLCC Blending Control-
ler can be operated and monitored from the HIS.
n YS Blending Controller Block (SLCC)

Connection
The connection of the SLCC block and SLCC Blending Controller allows the HIS to operate
and monitor the controller.
The figure below shows the function block diagram of the SLCC block.
INT
RCAS
RSV
AUT
SV
SLCC IN SLCC instrument image
PV MV
Figure 1.42-1 Function Block Diagram of the YS Blending Controller Block (SLCC)
The table below shows the connection methods and the connection destinations of SLCC
Table 1.42-1 I/O Terminal Connection Methods and Connection Destinations of YS Blending Controller
Block (SLCC)
Process I/O
YS Instru-
IN x - - x (*2) - -
ment
Interlock
put
n Function of YS Blending Controller Block (SLCC)

The SLCC block performs input processing, control computation processing, output process-
The only processing timing available for the SLCC block is a periodic startup. Moreover, only

SEE
for the SLCC block, refer to:
n Control Computation Processing of the YS Blending Controller

Block (SLCC)
SEE
n SV Range Display Format of YS Blending Controller Block (SLCC)

SV Range Display Format
This sets the SV Range Display Format so the decimal point of the ratio setting value (SV) of
the SLCC block will match that of the SLCC Blending Controller Block.
l Setting the SV Range Display Format

The SV Range Display Format is setting using the Function Block Detail Builder.
SV Range Display Format: Select one from [0] to [4].
[0]: 10000
[1]: 1000.0
[2]: 100.00
[3]: 10.000
[4]: 1.0000
Default is [2].
n Data Items of YS Blending Controller Block (SLCC)

Table 1.42-2 Data Items of YS Blending Controller Block (SLCC)
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)

Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
AF - - 0
tion
AOFS - - 0
tion
SV Ratio setpoint xx SSL to SSH 0
RSV Remote ratio setpoint - SSL to SSH 0
RMV - 0.0 to 100.0 % 0
value
DV Totalized deviation value - Engineering unit value 0
CC1 xx -1.0000 to 1.0000 0.0000
CC2 xx -1.0000 to 1.0000 0.0000
CC3 xx -1.0000 to 1.0000 0.0000
CC4 Density (*4) xx 0.5000 to 1.2000 1.0000
neering unit as PV
neering unit as PV
10000, 1000.0, 100.00,
SSH SV scale high limit - 100.00 %
10.000, or 1.0000 % (*5)
0, 0.0, 0.00, 0.000, or
SSL SV scale low limit - 0.000
0.0000 % (*5)
CC2 data.
*5: The High and low limit of SV scale varies with the setting in [SV Range Display Format] on the builder. For an YS instrument
(SLCC), the SV range can be set between 0 to 299.99, but for a SLCC block, the setting will be limited to 0 to 99.99 % when
the option 2 is selected for the setting of [SV Range Display Format]. When changing this setting, the decimal point position
will be changed accordingly.

SEE
ALSO For more information about valid block modes of the SLCC block, refer to:

<1.43 YS Totalizer Block (STLD)> 1-418
1.43 YS Totalizer Block (STLD)

By connecting the STLD block to the Totalizer (STLD), the STLD Totalizer can be operated
and monitored from the HIS.
n YS Totalizer Block (STLD)

Connection
The connection of the STLD block and the STLD Totalizer allows the HIS to operate and mon-
itor the totalizer.
The figure below shows the function block diagram of the STLD block.
STLD IN STLD instrument image
PV
Figure 1.43-1 Function Block Diagram of the YS Totalizer Block (STLD)
The table below shows the connection methods and the connection destinations of STLD
Table 1.43-1 I/O Terminal Connection Methods and Connection Destinations of YS Totalizer Block
(STLD)
Process I/O
YS Instru-
IN x - - x (*2) - -
ment
n Function of YS Totalizer Block (STLD)

The STLD block performs input processing and alarm processing.
The only processing timing available for the STLD block is a periodic startup. Moreover, only

SEE
For more information about the types of input processing and alarm processing possible for the STLD block,
refer to:
n Control Computation Processing of YS Totalizer Block (STLD)

There are no items subject to the STLD blocks control computation processing.
n Data Items of YS Totalizer Block (STLD)

Table 1.43-2 Data Items of YS Totalizer Block (STLD)
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
MODE Block mode xx - O/S (AUT)
AF - - 0
tion
AOFS - - 0
tion
CC1 xx -1.0000 to 1.0000 0.0000
CC2 xx -1.0000 to 1.0000 0.0000
CC3 xx -1.0000 to 1.0000 0.0000
CC4 Density (*4) xx 0.5000 to 1.2000 1.0000
neering unit as PV
neering unit as PV

CC2 data.
SEE
ALSO For more information about valid block modes of the STLD block, refer to:

Ind-1
Function Blocks Reference Vol.1
IM 33K03E22-50E 5th Edition
INDEX
Control Signal Splitter Block.................... 1-349
Symbols Signal Distribution with Output Destination
Switch............................................... 1-351
13-Zone Program Set Block
Controller Blocks.........................................1-4,1-26
13-Zone Program Set Block.................... 1-224
Line-Segment Pattern Signal Generation 1-225 D
Program End Action.................................1-228
Deadband Action.............................................. 1-35
Program Set Action..................................1-226
Dual-Redundant Signal Selector Block
A Deviation Alarm....................................... 1-318
Dual-Redundant Signal Selector Block....1-316
Alarm Block.........................................................1-6
Signal Selection....................................... 1-317
ALM-R.............................................................1-360
AS-H/M/L........................................................ 1-307 E
AUT Fallback.................................................... 1-44
Enhanced Three-Position ON/OFF Controller Block
Auto-Selector Blocks.......................................1-307
...................................................................1-83
B Enhanced Two-Position ON/OFF Controller Block .
...................................................................1-76
Basic Type PID Control.....................................1-54
Blending PI Controller Block F
Blending PI Controller Block ................... 1-106 Feedforward Signal Summing Block...............1-327
Bumpless Switching ................................1-110 FFSUM............................................................1-327
Control Error Alarm ................................. 1-112 Flow-Totalizing Batch Set Block
Cumulative Deviation Alarm .................... 1-111 Flow-Totalizing Batch Set Block...............1-265
PI Control Based on Cumulative Deviation ...... Flowrate Alarm.........................................1-270
..........................................................1-108
Missing Pulse Alarm................................ 1-268
Block Mode Change Interlock........................... 1-46
FOUT.............................................................. 1-321
BSETU-2.........................................................1-265
BSETU-3.........................................................1-275 G
Bumpless Switching..........................................1-41 Gap Action........................................................ 1-28
C I
Cascade Signal Distributor Block....................1-321 I-PD...................................................................1-54
Computer Fail................................................... 1-45 Initialization Manual.......................................... 1-42
Control Action Bypass.......................................1-56 Input Compensation..........................................1-36
Control Action Direction.................................... 1-31 Input Indicator Block......................................... 1-20
Control Computation Processing...................... 1-26 Input Indicator Block with Deviation Alarm
Control Hold...................................................... 1-43 Deviation Alarm......................................... 1-24
Control Output Action........................................1-30 Input Indicator Block with Deviation Alarm 1-23
Control Signal Splitter Block Setpoint Value Limiter................................1-24
Control Action Direction........................... 1-353 Input Indicator Blocks..........................................1-4
Control Output Action.............................. 1-353

Ind-2
Input or Output Compensation..........................1-36 Motor Control Blocks .............................. 1-169
MV Action on Setting CSV ......................1-199
M Off-Service ..............................................1-205
MAN Fallback....................................................1-44 Operating Time ....................................... 1-187
Manual Loader Block ..................................... 1-154 Output Tracking ...................................... 1-205
Manual Loader Block with Auto/Man SW Remote/Local Input .................................1-200
Automatic Control Output Computation .. 1-161 Serial Start .............................................. 1-186
Block Mode Change Interlock .................1-166 Simulation Function ................................ 1-188
Bumpless Switching ................................1-162 Start Count ..............................................1-187
Control Output Action ............................. 1-162 Status Change Message ........................ 1-187
Initialization Manual................................. 1-165 Thermal Trip Alarm ................................. 1-208
MAN Fallback ......................................... 1-166
Manual Loader Block with Auto/Man SW ......... N
..........................................................1-159 Non-Interference Control Output Block...........1-340
Setpoint Value Pushback ........................1-162 Non-Linear Gain................................................1-27
Manual Loader Block with Input Indicator ...... 1-156
Manual Loader Blocks........................................ 1-5 O
MC-2 .............................................................. 1-169 ONOFF ............................................................ 1-76
MC-2E ............................................................1-169 ONOFF-E .........................................................1-76
MC-3 .............................................................. 1-169 ONOFF-G ........................................................ 1-83
MC-3E ............................................................1-169 ONOFF-GE ...................................................... 1-83
Measurement Tracking..................................... 1-38 Output Compensation....................................... 1-37
MLD ............................................................... 1-154
MLD-PVI......................................................... 1-156 P
MLD-SW ........................................................ 1-159 PD Controller Block with Manual Reset
Motor Control Blocks Bumpless Switching ................................1-103
2-Position Pulsive Output ....................... 1-195 PD Control with Manual Reset ................1-101
2-Position Status Output .........................1-193 PD Controller Block with Manual Reset ....1-99
3-Position Pulsive Output ....................... 1-195 PD-MR.............................................................. 1-99
3-Position Status Output .........................1-194 PG-L13............................................................1-224
Answer Back Error Alarm ....................... 1-209 PI-BLEND ...................................................... 1-106
Answer-Back Inconsistency Alarm ......... 1-209 PI-D...................................................................1-55
Answerback Check ................................. 1-181 PI-HLD.............................................................. 1-59
Answerback Input Signal ........................ 1-177 PI-HLD Action after Hold...................................1-64
Answerback Tracking ..............................1-201 PID.................................................................... 1-49
Block Mode Change Interlock .................1-186 PID Controller Block..........................................1-49
Bypass Command Switch .......................1-189 PID Controller Block with Batch Switch
Computer Fail ......................................... 1-185 PID Control Computation with Two-Level Out-
Fallback .................................................. 1-201 put Switching ..................................... 1-70
Feedback Input High Limit/Low Limit Alarm ..... PID Controller Block with Batch Switch .... 1-68
..........................................................1-207 PID-BSW...........................................................1-68
Feedback Input Signal ............................ 1-177 PID-STC .........................................................1-116
Inching Output ........................................ 1-196 PID-TP.............................................................. 1-91
Initialization Manual ................................ 1-183 PRD.................................................................. 1-47
Input Signal Conversion of Answerback Input . Primary Direct................................................... 1-47
..........................................................1-178 Process Variable Tracking................................ 1-38
Input Signal Conversion of Feedback Input ..... PTC.................................................................1-367
..........................................................1-177
Pulse Count Input Block........................... 1-6,1-367
Interlock Alarm ........................................1-208
PV Derivative Type PID Control........................1-55
Interlock Check ....................................... 1-203
PV Proportional and Derivative Type PID Control...
MAN Fallback ......................................... 1-184 ...................................................................1-54

Ind-3
PVI.................................................................... 1-20 Self-Tuning PID Controller Block ............ 1-116
PVI-DV.............................................................. 1-23 STC .........................................................1-139
STC Operating Mode ..............................1-125
R TM............................................................1-144
RATIO............................................................. 1-210 TR ........................................................... 1-139
Ratio Set Block Setpoint Value Limiter....................................... 1-39
AUT Fallback .......................................... 1-220 Setpoint Value Pushback.................................. 1-40
Block Mode Change Interlock .................1-221 Signal Distributor Blocks..................................... 1-6
Bumpless Switching.................................1-216 Signal Limiter Block............................................ 1-6
Computer Fail.......................................... 1-220 Signal Selector Blocks.............................. 1-6,1-301
Control Hold.............................................1-219 Signal Setter Blocks............................................1-5
Control Output Action.............................. 1-215 SLBC...............................................................1-411
Initialization Manual................................. 1-218 SLCC.............................................................. 1-414
MAN Fallback.......................................... 1-219 SLCD.............................................................. 1-385
Ratio Computation................................... 1-213 SLMC.............................................................. 1-393
Ratio Set Block........................................ 1-210 SLPC...............................................................1-389
Setpoint Value Limiter..............................1-215 SMRT..............................................................1-403
Setpoint Value Pushback.........................1-215 SMST-111....................................................... 1-397
Regulatory Control.............................................. 1-1 SMST-121....................................................... 1-400
Regulatory Control Blocks.................................. 1-2 SPLIT.............................................................. 1-349
Representative Alarm Block............................1-360 Squared Deviation Action................................. 1-29
Reset Limit Function......................................... 1-31 SS-DUAL........................................................ 1-316
SS-H/M/L........................................................ 1-301
S STLD...............................................................1-418
Sampling PI Controller Block
PI Control Computation with Hold..............1-62 T
Sampling PI Controller Block..................... 1-59 Three-Position ON/OFF Controller Block
SBSD.............................................................. 1-408 ON/OFF Three-Position Control Computation .
Self-Tuning PID Controller Block ............................................................1-86
CR............................................................1-144 Three-Position ON/OFF Controller Block . 1-83
DA............................................................1-144 Three-Position Status Output ................... 1-88
DMAX ..................................................... 1-142 Time-Proportioning ON/OFF Controller Block . 1-91
Execution of Auto-Startup .......................1-131 Time-Proportioning ON/OFF Output ................ 1-95
Execution of Initializer Start .................... 1-130 Time-Proportioning ON/OFF Period ................ 1-95
Execution of On-Demand Tuning ........... 1-135 Totalizing Batch Set Blocks (BSETU-2, BSETU-3)
GM........................................................... 1-144 2-Position ON/OFF Output...................... 1-253
IA............................................................. 1-144 3-Position ON/OFF Output...................... 1-254
IMAX ....................................................... 1-142 Batch End Alarm......................................1-257
IMIN ........................................................ 1-142 Batch Operation (2-Position ON/OFF Output)..
..........................................................1-245
IP............................................................. 1-144
Batch Operation (3-Position ON/OFF Output)..
LM............................................................1-144
..........................................................1-246
MI ............................................................1-141
Batch Operation (Analog Output)............ 1-236
NB ...........................................................1-140
Compatibility between Totalizing Batch Set
OS ...........................................................1-140 Block and CENTUM V, CENTUM-XL To-
PA............................................................ 1-144 talizing Batch Set Unit...................... 1-260
PIDC........................................................ 1-143 Cumulative Deviation High and Low Limit
PMAX ......................................................1-142 Alarm................................................ 1-258
PMIN .......................................................1-142 Integration................................................1-235
Self-Tuning Function ...............................1-123 Leak Alarm...............................................1-258
Self-Tuning Operating Modes and Block Sta- Pre-Batch Alarm...................................... 1-257
tus ....................................................1-125

Ind-4
Totalizing Batch Set Blocks......................1-234 SUM Conversion................................... 1-283
Two-Position ON/OFF Controller Block
ON/OFF Two-Position Control Computation .... X
............................................................1-79 XCPL...............................................................1-340
Two-Position ON/OFF Controller Block .... 1-76
Two-Position Status Output....................... 1-80 Y
YS Batch Controller Block...............................1-411
V YS Batch Set Station Block.............................1-408
VELLIM........................................................... 1-287 YS Blending Controller Block..........................1-414
Velocity Limiter Block YS Blocks................................................. 1-7,1-373
Deviation Alarm....................................... 1-297 YS Controller Block.........................................1-385
Velocity Limiter Block...............................1-287 YS Manual Station Block with MV Output Lever......
Velocity Limiting Computation..................1-289 .................................................................1-400
YS Manual Station Block with SV Output....... 1-397
W YS Programmable Controller Block................ 1-389
Weight-Totalizing Batch Set Block YS Programmable Controller Block with Pulse
Flowrate Alarm.........................................1-284 Width........................................................1-393
SUM Conversion......................................1-282 YS Ratio Set Station Block............................. 1-403
Weight-Totalizing Batch Set Block........... 1-275 YS Totalizer Block........................................... 1-418
Weight-Totalizing Conversion.................. 1-281

Rev-1
Revision Information
Title : Function Blocks Reference Vol.1
Manual No. : IM 33K03E22-50E
Aug. 2014/5th Edition/R5.04 or later*
* : Denotes the release number of the Software Product corresponding to the contents of this Manual.
The revised contents are valid until the next edition is issued.
Preface Descriptions of grounding are modified.
Apr. 2014/4th Edition/R5.03.20 or later
Preface Description of the caution symbol is modified.
Postface The " For Questions and More Information" is changed.
The " Printed by" is deleted.
Jun. 2013/3rd Edition/R5.03 or later
Preface The preface text is modified.
1.3 Descriptions on " Setpoint Value Limiter" are modified.
1.4 Descriptions on " Actions in the Automatic or Manual Mode" are added.
1.4 Descriptions on "Output Limiter in PRD Mode: FFCS Series/KFCS2/LFCS2" are added.
1.18 Descriptions on " Setpoint Value Limiter" are modified.
1.23 Descriptions on " Setpoint Value Limiter " are modified.
Dec. 2011/2nd Edition/R5.01.10 or later
1.4 Corrected of errors in Table Relationship between the Non-linear Gain Coefficient and
Effective Proportional Gain.
Sep. 2011/1st Edition/R5.01 or later
Newly published.
n For Questions and More Information

Online Query: A query form is available from the following URL.
http://www.yokogawa.com/dcs/
n Written by Yokogawa Electric Corporation
n Published by Yokogawa Electric Corporation
2-9-32 Nakacho, Musashino-shi, Tokyo 180-8750, JAPAN

Blank Page

CENTUM - VP Function Blocks Reference Vol1 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

CENTUM - VP Function Blocks Reference Vol1 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Function Blocks

CENTUM VP Document Map

Field Control Stations Function Blocks Function Blocks Function Blocks

Function Blocks Human Interface Human Interface Engineering

SEBOL Communication with Communication with Communication

Optional Functions Communication with Compliance with Generic Subsystem

System Integration Unified Gateway Engineering Test

Engineering CENTUM FOUNDATION fieldbus

Operation and Monitoring

HIS Operation Operating Messages

Communication Devices Migrated-FCS(FIO)

IM 33K03E22-50E 5th Edition : Aug.08,2014-00

Safety Precautions for Use

Indicates the OFF position of a power on/off switch.

n Notes on Handling User's Manuals

IM 33K03E22-50E 5th Edition : Aug.08,2014-00

n Warning and Disclaimer

IM 33K03E22-50E 5th Edition : Aug.08,2014-00

Identifies instructions that must be observed to prevent dam-

Identifies additional information.

Identifies referenced content.

l Commonly Used Conventions throughout the User's Manuals

IM 33K03E22-50E 5th Edition : Aug.08,2014-00

l Conventions Used to Show Key or Button Operations

l Conventions Used in Command Syntax or Program Statements

IM 33K03E22-50E 5th Edition : Aug.08,2014-00

Copyright and Trademark Notices

IM 33K03E22-50E 5th Edition : Aug.08,2014-00

Function Blocks Reference Vol.1

IM 33K03E22-50E 5th Edition

IM 33K03E22-50E 5th Edition : Aug.08,2014-00

IM 33K03E22-50E 5th Edition : Aug.08,2014-00

IM 33K03E22-50E 5th Edition : Aug.08,2014-00

n Regulatory Control Positioning

Basic control Software I/O

Regulatory control blocks Internal switch

Calculation blocks Annunciator message

Sequence control blocks Sequence message

Unit instrument blocks

Options System (*2)

Valve pattern monitoring (*1) System function blocks

Off-site blocks (*1)

FCS I/O Interfaces

*1: The option can be used in FCSs except PFCS.

IM 33K03E22-50E 5th Edition : Aug.08,2014-00

1.1 Regulatory Control Blocks

n Structure of Regulatory Control Blocks

(VN) (RLV1) (RLV2) (TSW)

(PV, PV, MV, MV) RMV

Figure 1.1-1 Function Block Diagram of the Regulatory Control Block

IN: Input terminal

IM 33K03E22-50E 5th Edition : Aug.08,2014-00

n Functions of the Regulatory Control Blocks

l Control Computation Processing

IM 33K03E22-50E 5th Edition : Aug.08,2014-00

1.1.1 Types of the Regulatory Control Blocks

n Input Indicator Blocks

Table 1.1.1-1 Input Indicator Blocks

IM 33K03E22-50E 5th Edition : Aug.08,2014-00

n Manual Loader Blocks

Table 1.1.1-3 Manual Loader Blocks

n Signal Setter Blocks

IM 33K03E22-50E 5th Edition : Aug.08,2014-00